A 3224c

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B220
SERVICE MANUAL
002350MIU
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SERVICE MANUAL
B156/B220
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B220
SERVICE MANUAL
002350MIU
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
It is the reader's responsibility when discussing the information contained

within this document to maintain a level of confidentiality that is in the best
interest of Ricoh Corporation and its member companies.
NO PART OF THIS DOCUMENT MAY BE REPRODUCED IN ANY

FASHION AND DISTRIBUTED WITHOUT THE PRIOR
PERMISSION OF RICOH CORPORATION.
All product names, domain names or product illustrations, including

desktop images, used in this document are trademarks, registered
trademarks or the property of their respective companies.
They are used throughout this book in an informational or editorial fashion
only and for the benefit of such companies. No such use, or the use of
any trade name, or web site is intended to convey endorsement or other
affiliation with Ricoh products.
2005 RICOH Corporation. All rights reserved.
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
WARNING
The Service Manual contains information
regarding service techniques, procedures,
processes and spare parts of office equipment
distributed by Ricoh Corporation. Users of this
manual should be either service trained or
certified by successfully completing a Ricoh
Technical Training Program.
Untrained and uncertified users utilizing

information contained in this service manual to
repair or modify Ricoh equipment risk personal
injury, damage to property or loss of warranty
protection.
Ricoh Corporation
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
LEGEND
PRODUCT CODE COMPANY
GESTETNER LANIER RICOH SAVIN
B156 DSc424 LD124c Aficio 3224C C2410
B220 DSc432 LD132c Aficio 3232C C3210e
DOCUMENTATION HISTORY
REV. NO. DATE COMMENTS
* 05/2005 Original Printing
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Trademarks
Microsoft, Windows, and MS-DOS are registered trademarks of Microsoft
Corporation in the United States and /or other countries.
PostScript is a registered trademark of Adobe Systems, Incorporated.
PCL is a registered trademark of Hewlett-Packard Company.
Ethernet is a registered trademark of Xerox Corporation.
PowerPC is a registered trademark of International Business Machines
Corporation.
Other product names used herein are for identification purposes only and may be
trademarks of their respective companies. We disclaim any and all rights involved
with those marks.
Symbols and Abbreviations

This manual uses several symbols.
Symbol What it means

Refer to section number
See Core Tech Manual for details
Screw
Connector
E-ring
Clip ring
Short Edge Feed (SEF) Long Edge Feed (LEF)
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B156/B220
TABLE OF CONTENTS
INSTALLATION
1. INSTALLATION............................................................................ 1-1
1.1 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS ...........................................................1-1
1.1.1 ENVIRONMENT ...............................................................................1-1
1.1.2 MACHINE LEVEL .............................................................................1-1
1.1.3 POWER REQUIREMENTS ..............................................................1-2
1.1.4 SPACE REQUIREMENTS................................................................1-2
1.2 COPIER (B156/B220)................................................................................1-3
1.2.1 POWER SOCKETS FOR PERIPHERALS .......................................1-3
1.2.2 INSTALLATION FLOW CHART .......................................................1-4
1.2.3 ACCESSORY CHECK......................................................................1-5
1.2.4 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE ........................................................1-6
1.3 PAPER TRAY UNIT (B456).....................................................................1-13
1.3.1 ACCESSORY CHECK....................................................................1-13
1.3.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE ......................................................1-13
1.4 LCT (B457) ..............................................................................................1-17
1.4.1 ACCESSORY CHECK....................................................................1-17
1.5 AUTO REVERSE DOCUMENT FEEDER (B810)....................................1-21
1.5.1 ACCESSORY CHECK....................................................................1-21
1.6 INTERCHANGE UNIT (B481) .................................................................1-24
1.6.1 ACCESSORY CHECK....................................................................1-24
1.7 1 BIN TRAY UNIT (B480) ........................................................................1-26
1.7.1 ACCESSORY CHECK....................................................................1-26
1.8 SHIFT TRAY (B510)................................................................................1-30
1.8.1 ACCESSORY CHECK....................................................................1-30
1.9 BY-PASS FEED UNIT (B490) .................................................................1-33
1.9.1 ACCESSORY CHECK....................................................................1-33
1.10 DUPLEX UNIT (B509) ...........................................................................1-35
1.10.1 ACCESSORY CHECK..................................................................1-35
1.10.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE ....................................................1-36
1.11 BRIDGE UNIT (B482)............................................................................1-38
1.11.1 ACCESSORY CHECK..................................................................1-38
1.12 1000-SHEET FINISHER (B408) ............................................................1-42
1.12.1 ACCESSORY CHECK..................................................................1-42
SM i B156/B220
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Rev. 06/2006

1.13 500-SHEET FINISHER (B458) ..............................................................1-46
1.13.1 ACCESSORY CHECK..................................................................1-46
1.14 PLATEN COVER INSTALLATION ........................................................1-49
1.15 PRINTER OPTIONS..............................................................................1-50
1.15.1 POSTSCRIPT 3 (B769) ................................................................1-50
1.15.2 FILE FORMAT CONVERTER (B609)...........................................1-51
1.15.3 IEEE1394 INTERFACE (B581) ....................................................1-52
UP Mode Settings for IEEE 1394........................................................1-53
SP Mode Settings for IEEE 1394 ........................................................1-53
1.15.4 IEEE 1284 (B679).........................................................................1-54
Installation Procedure .........................................................................1-54
1.15.5 IEEE802.11B (G813) ....................................................................1-55
UP Mode Settings for Wireless LAN ...................................................1-57
SP Mode Settings for IEEE 802.11b Wireless LAN ............................1-58
1.15.6 BLUETOOTH (B736) ....................................................................1-59
1.15.7 CHECKING THE CONNECTIONS ...............................................1-59
1.16 DATA OVERWRITE SECURITY UNIT (B735) ......................................1-60
Accessory Check ................................................................................1-60
1.16.1 SEAL CHECK AND REMOVAL ....................................................1-61
1.17 KEY COUNTER INSTALLATION ..........................................................1-64
1.18 ANTI-CONDENSATION HEATER.........................................................1-66
1.19 TRAY HEATER .....................................................................................1-68
1.20 TRAY HEATER (OPTIONAL PAPER TRAY UNIT) ...............................1-70
1.21 TRAY HEATER (OPTIONAL LCT) ........................................................1-72
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
2. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE.................................................... 2-1
2.1 MAIN UNIT ................................................................................................2-1
2.1.1 OVERVIEW ......................................................................................2-1
2.1.2 WASTE TONER BOTTLES ..............................................................2-2
2.1.3 PM TABLE........................................................................................2-3
2.2 OPTIONAL UNIT PM TABLE ....................................................................2-6
REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT
3. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT ........................................ 3-1

3.1 SPECIAL TOOLS ......................................................................................3-1
3.2 FILTERS....................................................................................................3-1
3.3 SCANNER UNIT........................................................................................3-2
3.3.1 EXPOSURE GLASS.........................................................................3-2
3.3.2 APS SENSORS ................................................................................3-2
3.3.3 LENS BLOCK ASSEMBLY...............................................................3-3
3.3.4 EXPOSURE LAMP STABILIZER .....................................................3-5
B156/B220 ii SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
3.3.5 SCANNER LAMP .............................................................................3-5

3.3.6 SCANNER I/O BOARD.....................................................................3-8
3.3.7 SCANNER MOTOR..........................................................................3-8
3.3.8 FRONT SCANNER WIRE ................................................................3-8
3.3.9 REAR SCANNER WIRE.................................................................3-11
3.4 LASER UNIT ...........................................................................................3-13
3.4.1 CAUTION DECAL LOCATION .......................................................3-13
3.4.2 LASER UNIT ..................................................................................3-14
Adjusting for Image Skew ...................................................................3-16
D-Phase Adjustment ...........................................................................3-17
Laser Beam Pitch Adjustment.............................................................3-18
3.4.3 POLYGONAL MIRROR MOTOR AND LSD ...................................3-19
3.5 DEVELOPMENT UNIT ............................................................................3-20
3.6 PHOTOCONDUCTOR UNIT (PCU) ........................................................3-21
3.6.1 PCU ASSEMBLY............................................................................3-21
3.6.2 WASTE TONER BOTTLES ............................................................3-24
3.6.3 CHARGE CORONA UNIT, GRID, WIRE, AND CLEANER.............3-25
3.6.4 CHARGE CORONA WIRE CLEANER MOTOR .............................3-27
3.6.5 OPC BELT CLEANING UNIT .........................................................3-27
3.6.6 IMAGE TRANSFER BELT CLEANING UNIT .................................3-27
3.7 PAPER TRANSFER UNIT.......................................................................3-28
3.7.1 VERTICAL TRANSPORT UNIT......................................................3-28
3.7.2 TRANSFER ROLLER .....................................................................3-28
3.8 FUSING/PAPER EXIT.............................................................................3-29
3.8.1 FUSING UNIT.................................................................................3-29
3.8.2 OIL SUPPLY UNIT .........................................................................3-29
3.8.3 OIL SUPPLY PAD ..........................................................................3-30
3.8.4 CLEANING ROLLER AND FUSING SPONGE ROLLER ...............3-30
3.8.5 OILING ROLLER AND OIL SUPPLY ROLLER ..............................3-31
3.8.6 FUSING LAMPS .............................................................................3-32
When installing the fusing lamps ........................................................3-32
3.8.7 FUSING INNER UNIT.....................................................................3-33
3.8.8 PRESSURE ROLLER THERMOFUSE...........................................3-33
3.8.9 HOT ROLLER STRIPPERS ...........................................................3-34
3.8.10 FUSING BELT UNIT AND PRESSURE ROLLER UNIT ...............3-34
3.8.11 PRESSURE ROLLER, PRESSURE ROLLER GEAR,
AND CLEANING ROLLER ..........................................................3-35
3.8.12 PRESSURE ROLLER THERMISTOR ..........................................3-36
3.8.13 OIL ABSORBERS.........................................................................3-37
3.8.14 FUSING ENTRANCE AND TRANSFER BELT SENSORS ..........3-38
3.8.15 PAPER EXIT/OVERFLOW SENSORS.........................................3-39
3.9 PAPER FEED AND TRANSPORT ..........................................................3-41
3.9.1 FEED ROLLER AND FRICTION PAD ............................................3-41
3.9.2 REGISTRATION SENSOR.............................................................3-42
3.9.3 PAPER FEED SENSOR 1..............................................................3-45
3.9.4 PAPER NEAR-END SENSORS .....................................................3-45
3.9.5 PAPER FEED SENSOR 2..............................................................3-46
3.9.6 PAPER END SENSOR 1................................................................3-47
3.9.7 PAPER END SENSOR 2................................................................3-47
SM iii B156/B220
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
3.10 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS..............................................................3-48

3.10.1 EXHAUST FAN AND I/O BOARD.................................................3-48
3.10.2 BICU BOARD AND CONTROLLER BOARD................................3-49
3.10.3 HDD..............................................................................................3-50
3.10.4 HIGH VOLTAGE SUPPLY BOARD ..............................................3-51
3.10.5 POWER SUPPLY UNIT................................................................3-52
3.11 DRIVE UNITS........................................................................................3-53
3.11.1 DEVELOPMENT CLUTCHES ......................................................3-53
K Development Units ..........................................................................3-53
C, Y and M Development Units...........................................................3-53
3.11.2 DEVELOPMENT MOTORS..........................................................3-54
3.11.3 MAIN MOTOR ..............................................................................3-54
3.11.4 PCU GEAR BOX ..........................................................................3-55
3.11.5 FUSING UNIT MOTOR ................................................................3-55
3.11.6 PAPER FEED CLUTCH 1 ............................................................3-56
3.11.7 PAPER FEED MOTOR.................................................................3-56
3.11.8 PAPER FEED CLUTCH 2 ............................................................3-57
3.11.9 REGISTRATION CLUTCH ...........................................................3-57
3.11.10 OIL PUMP ..................................................................................3-58
3.12 COPY ADJUSTMENT ...........................................................................3-59
3.12.1 PRINTING ....................................................................................3-59
Registration - Leading Edge/Side-to-Side...........................................3-59
Blank Margin.......................................................................................3-60
Main Scan Magnification.....................................................................3-60
3.12.2 SCANNING...................................................................................3-61
Scanner Sub-Scan Magnification........................................................3-61
Scanner Leading Edge and Side-to-Side Registration........................3-61
Main Scan Dot Position Correction .....................................................3-62
3.12.3 ARDF IMAGE ADJUSTMENT ......................................................3-63
ARDF Side-to-Side and Leading Edge Registration ...........................3-63
ARDF Skew Adjustment .....................................................................3-64
3.13 COLOR ADJUSTMENT.........................................................................3-65
3.13.1 AUTO COLOR CALIBRATION (ACC) ..........................................3-65
3.13.2 PRINTER GAMMA CORRECTION ..............................................3-66
Copy Mode .........................................................................................3-66
Printer Mode .......................................................................................3-70
3.14 SCANNER WHITE LEVEL ADJUSTMENT ...........................................3-72
White Level Check ..............................................................................3-72
White Level Adjustment ......................................................................3-72
3.15 TOUCH SCREEN CALIBRATION .........................................................3-75
3.16 CHECKING THE BREAKER SWITCH ..................................................3-76
3.16.1 BREAKER ....................................................................................3-76
TROUBLESHOOTING
4. TROUBLESHOOTING ................................................................. 4-1

4.1 SERVICE CALL.........................................................................................4-1
4.1.1 SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS ........................................................4-1
B156/B220 iv SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Rev. 05/2006
4.1.2 SC TABLE ........................................................................................4-2

4.2 SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE ....................................................................4-21
4.2.1 OVERVIEW ....................................................................................4-21
4.2.2 DETAILED SELF-DIAGNOSTICS ..................................................4-22
4.3 IMAGE TEST MODE ...............................................................................4-22
4.3.1 OVERVIEW ....................................................................................4-22
4.3.2 VPU TEST ......................................................................................4-22
SP4-907-1: VPU Test Pattern: R ........................................................4-22
SP4-907-2: VPU Test Pattern: G ........................................................4-22
SP4-907-3: VPU Test Pattern: B ........................................................4-22
4.3.3 IPU TEST .......................................................................................4-22
4.3.4 GAVD TEST ...................................................................................4-22
4.4 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DEFECTS ................................................4-23
4.4.1 SENSORS ......................................................................................4-23
4.4.2 SWITCHES.....................................................................................4-25
4.4.3 BLOWN FUSE CONDITIONS ........................................................4-25
4.5 CHECK POINTS FOR IMAGE PROBLEMS AT REGULAR INTERVALS ..4-26
4.6 SKEWED, TRAPEZOID, AND PARALLELOGRAM IMAGES..................4-27
4.6.1 SKEWED IMAGES .........................................................................4-27
4.6.2 TRAPEZOID IMAGES ....................................................................4-27
4.6.3 PARALLELOGRAM IMAGES .........................................................4-28
4.6.4 CHECKING THE IMAGE WITH THE TRIMMING PATTERN .........4-29
4.6.5 CORRECTING THE IMAGES ........................................................4-30
Flowchart ............................................................................................4-30
Action..................................................................................................4-31
SERVICE TABLES
5. SERVICE TABLES....................................................................... 5-1
5.1 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE....................................................................5-1
5.1.1 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE OPERATION.....................................5-1
Starting the SP mode............................................................................5-1
Quitting the SP mode............................................................................5-1
SP Mode Touch Screen........................................................................5-2
Copy Window for Test Printing .............................................................5-3
Working on SP Mode Menus ................................................................5-3
Service Mode Lock/Unlock ...................................................................5-4
5.1.2 SP MODE TABLE.............................................................................5-5
SP1-XXX: (Feed) ..................................................................................5-5
SP2-XXX: (Drum)..................................................................................5-9
SP3-XXX: (Process) ...........................................................................5-17
SP4-XXX: (Scanner) ...........................................................................5-20
SP5-XXX: (Mode) ...............................................................................5-28
SP6-XXX: (Peripherals) ......................................................................5-53
SP7-XXX: (Data Log)..........................................................................5-56
SP8-XXX: (Data Log2)........................................................................5-66
5.1.3 TEST PATTERN PRINTING (SP5-955-1) ....................................5-100
5.1.4 INPUT CHECK .............................................................................5-101
SM v B156/B220
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Main Machine Input Check (SP5-803) ..............................................5-101

Table 1: Tray 1 and 2 Paper Size .....................................................5-104
Table 2: By-pass Tray Paper Size ....................................................5-104
Table 3: Optional Paper Tray Unit Paper Size ..................................5-104
Table 4: Optional Paper Tray Unit Paper Near End ..........................5-104
ARDF Input Check (SP6-007)...........................................................5-105
Finisher Input Check (SP6-117)........................................................5-106
5.1.5 OUTPUT CHECK .........................................................................5-107
Main Machine Output Check (SP5-804) ...........................................5-107
ARDF Output Check (SP6-008) ........................................................5-110
Finisher Output Check (SP6-118) .....................................................5-110
5.1.6 SMC DATA LISTS (SP5-990).......................................................5-111
5.1.7 ORIGINAL JAM HISTORY DISPLAY ...........................................5-111
Total Count .......................................................................................5-111
Details on the Most Recent Jams .....................................................5-111
5.1.8 COPY JAM HISTORY DISPLAY ..................................................5-112
Total Count .......................................................................................5-112
Details on the Most Recent Jams .....................................................5-112
5.1.9 MEMORY ALL CLEAR (SP5-801) ................................................5-113
Using an SD card..............................................................................5-113
Without Using a Flash Memory Card ................................................5-114
5.2 PRINTER SERVICE MODE ..................................................................5-115
5.2.1 SERVICE MODE TABLE..............................................................5-115
Service Table Key.............................................................................5-115
5.2.2 SP MODES RELATED TO THE PRINTER CONTROLLER .........5-117
5.3 SCANNER SERVICE MODE.................................................................5-118
5.3.1 SCANNER PROGRAM MODE TABLE.........................................5-118
SP1-XXX (System and Others).........................................................5-118
SP2-XXX (Scanning-image quality) ..................................................5-118
5.3.2 APS OUTPUT DISPLAY (SP4-301) .............................................5-119
5.4 PROGRAM DOWNLOAD ......................................................................5-120
5.4.1 FIRMWARE ..................................................................................5-120
5.4.2 NVRAM DATA UPLOAD/DOWNLOAD ........................................5-122
Uploading NVRAM Data (SP5-824) ..................................................5-122
Downloading NVRAM Data (SP5-825) .............................................5-123
5.5 SOFTWARE RESET .............................................................................5-124
5.6 SYSTEM SETTINGS AND COPY SETTING RESET............................5-124
5.6.1 SYSTEM SETTING RESET .........................................................5-124
5.6.2 COPIER SETTING RESET ..........................................................5-125
5.7 USER TOOLS .......................................................................................5-126
5.7.1 HOW TO ENTER USER TOOLS..................................................5-126
UP Mode Initial Screen: User Tools/Counter Display........................5-126
System Settings ................................................................................5-126
Copier/Document Server Features ...................................................5-126
Printer, Facsimile, Scanner Settings .................................................5-126
Inquiry ...............................................................................................5-126
Counter .............................................................................................5-127
5.8 DIP SWITCHES.....................................................................................5-127
5.9 SD CARD APPLICATION MOVE ..........................................................5-128
B156/B220 vi SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Overview...........................................................................................5-129
Move Exec ........................................................................................5-129
Undo Exec ........................................................................................5-129
5.10 USING THE DEBUG LOG...................................................................5-130
5.10.1 SWITCHING ON AND SETTING UP SAVE DEBUG LOG .........5-130
5.10.2 RETRIEVING THE DEBUG LOG FROM THE HDD ...................5-133
5.10.3 RECORDING ERRORS MANUALLY .........................................5-134
5.10.4 NEW DEBUG LOG CODES .......................................................5-135
SP5857-015 Copy SD Card-to-SD Card: Any Desired Key .............5-135
SP5857-016 Create a File on HDD to Store a Log ..........................5-135
SP5857-017 Create a File on SD Card to Store a Log ....................5-135
DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS
6. DETAILED SECTION DESCRIPTIONS ....................................... 6-1
6.1 OVERVIEW ...............................................................................................6-1
6.1.1 MECHANICAL COMPONENTS........................................................6-1
6.1.2 PAPER PATH ...................................................................................6-2
6.1.3 DRIVE COMPONENTS ....................................................................6-3
Layout ...................................................................................................6-3
Drive Power Path ..................................................................................6-4
6.1.4 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS .........................................................6-5
Scanner Unit .........................................................................................6-5
Image Transfer .....................................................................................6-6
Paper Path............................................................................................6-7
Development Units................................................................................6-8
Boards ..................................................................................................6-9
6.2 BOARD STRUCTURE.............................................................................6-10
6.2.1 BLOCK DIAGRAM..........................................................................6-10
6.2.2 CONTROLLER ...............................................................................6-12
6.3 COPY PROCESS....................................................................................6-14
6.4 PROCESS CONTROL ............................................................................6-16
6.4.1 OVERVIEW ....................................................................................6-16
6.4.2 PROCESS CONTROL STEPS .......................................................6-16
Six Steps.............................................................................................6-16
When is Process Control Done? .........................................................6-16
Supplementary Information on Process Control .................................6-17
6.5 SCANNING..............................................................................................6-19
6.5.1 OVERVIEW ....................................................................................6-19
6.5.2 SCANNER DRIVE ..........................................................................6-20
Book Mode..........................................................................................6-20
ARDF Mode ........................................................................................6-20
6.5.3 ORIGINAL SIZE DETECTION........................................................6-21
6.6 IMAGE PROCESSING ............................................................................6-23
6.6.1 OVERVIEW ....................................................................................6-23
6.6.2 SBU BLOCK DIAGRAM .................................................................6-24
Signal Processing ...............................................................................6-24
A/D Conversion...................................................................................6-24
SM vii B156/B220
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
White Level Correction........................................................................6-24

Others .................................................................................................6-24
Black Level Correction ........................................................................6-25
VPU Test Mode ..................................................................................6-25
6.6.3 IMAGE PROCESSING ...................................................................6-26
Shading Correction .............................................................................6-26
Picture Element (Dot Position) Correction ..........................................6-26
Scan Line Correction ..........................................................................6-26
Scanner Gamma Correction (RGB Gamma Correction) .....................6-27
Filtering ...............................................................................................6-27
ADS (Auto Image Density Selection) ..................................................6-27
Image Separation................................................................................6-28
ACS (Auto Color Selection) ................................................................6-28
Color Conversion ................................................................................6-29
Main Scan Magnification.....................................................................6-29
Printer Gamma Correction ..................................................................6-30
Error Diffusion .....................................................................................6-32
6.7 PHOTOCONDUCTOR UNIT (PCU) ........................................................6-33
6.7.1 OVERVIEW ....................................................................................6-33
6.7.2 CHARGE CORONA UNIT ..............................................................6-34
Power Supply......................................................................................6-34
Grid and Wire Cleaning.......................................................................6-34
Quenching ..........................................................................................6-35
6.7.3 OPC BELT DRIVE ..........................................................................6-36
6.7.4 OPC BELT CLEANING UNIT .........................................................6-36
Bottle Detection ..................................................................................6-36
Waste Toner Collection.......................................................................6-37
Drive ...................................................................................................6-37
6.7.5 IMAGE TRANSFER BELT UNIT ....................................................6-38
Drive ...................................................................................................6-38
Belt Mark Detection.............................................................................6-38
Transfer Roller ....................................................................................6-39
6.7.6 IMAGE TRANSFER BELT CLEANING UNIT .................................6-40
Image Transfer Belt Cleaning .............................................................6-40
Waste Toner Collection.......................................................................6-40
Set Switch and Full Sensor.................................................................6-40
Contact Mechanism ............................................................................6-41
Power Supply......................................................................................6-42
Drive ...................................................................................................6-42
6.8 LASER EXPOSURE................................................................................6-43
6.8.1 OVERVIEW ....................................................................................6-43
6.8.2 POLYGON MIRROR MOTOR UNIT...............................................6-44
Speed .................................................................................................6-44
6.8.3 SYNCHRONIZATION DETECTOR ................................................6-44
6.8.4 LD UNIT..........................................................................................6-44
6.8.5 LD SAFETY SWITCH .....................................................................6-45
Front Door...........................................................................................6-45
Circuit..................................................................................................6-45
Operation Panel Display and Switch Mechanism ...............................6-46
B156/B220 viii SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
6.9 DEVELOPMENT .....................................................................................6-47

6.9.1 OVERVIEW ....................................................................................6-47
6.9.2 DEVELOPMENT UNIT ...................................................................6-48
Replacing Units...................................................................................6-48
Distinguishing the development unit with the one for the B051 series ....6-48
Memory chip .......................................................................................6-48
6.9.3 TONER SUPPLY MECHANISM .....................................................6-49
Drive ...................................................................................................6-49
Rollers and Agitators...........................................................................6-50
Shutter ................................................................................................6-50
6.9.4 TONER END DETECTION.............................................................6-51
Mechanism .........................................................................................6-51
Toner Near-End Detection ..................................................................6-51
Toner End Detection ...........................................................................6-52
Toner End Recovery ...........................................................................6-52
6.9.5 DEVELOPMENT UNIT CONTACT MECHANISM ..........................6-54
Mechanism .........................................................................................6-54
Reverse Rotation ................................................................................6-55
6.9.6 POWER SOURCE..........................................................................6-56
Development, Toner Supply, and Doctor Rollers ................................6-56
Doctor Roller.......................................................................................6-56
6.10 PAPER FEED........................................................................................6-57
6.10.1 OVERVIEW ..................................................................................6-57
Transport Speed .................................................................................6-58
Friction Pad.........................................................................................6-58
6.10.2 DRIVE MECHANISM....................................................................6-58
Feed and Vertical Transport ...............................................................6-58
Registration.........................................................................................6-58
6.10.3 PAPER LIFT .................................................................................6-59
Lift Mechanism....................................................................................6-59
Paper End/Near-End Detection ..........................................................6-59
6.10.4 PAPER SIZE DETECTION...........................................................6-60
Mechanism .........................................................................................6-60
Switch Pattern.....................................................................................6-60
6.11 PAPER TRANSFER AND SEPARATION..............................................6-61
6.11.1 OVERVIEW ..................................................................................6-61
Jammed Paper Release .....................................................................6-61
Image Transfer and Paper Separation................................................6-61
6.11.2 CONTACT/SEPARATION MECHANISM .....................................6-62
Timing .................................................................................................6-62
Mechanism .........................................................................................6-62
6.11.3 POWER SUPPLY .........................................................................6-63
Circuit..................................................................................................6-63
Paper Transfer Roller Bias..................................................................6-63
Discharge Plate ..................................................................................6-63
Temperature/Humidity Control............................................................6-63
Roller Cleaning ...................................................................................6-64
6.12 IMAGE FUSING AND PAPER EXIT......................................................6-65
6.12.1 OVERVIEW ..................................................................................6-65
SM ix B156/B220
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
6.12.2 DRIVE...........................................................................................6-66
6.12.3 FUSING UNIT COMPONENTS ....................................................6-67
Fusing Belt..........................................................................................6-67
Heating Roller Lamp and Pressure Roller Lamp.................................6-67
Fusing Bias .........................................................................................6-68
Fusing Unit SCs ..................................................................................6-68
6.12.4 OIL SUPPLY.................................................................................6-69
Oil Supply ...........................................................................................6-69
Oil Supply ...........................................................................................6-70
Oil End Detection and Recovery .........................................................6-71
6.12.5 TEMPERATURE CONTROL ........................................................6-72
6.12.6 ENERGY SAVER MODES ...........................................................6-73
Overview.............................................................................................6-73
Panel Off Mode ...................................................................................6-74
Low Power Mode ................................................................................6-75
Auto Off Mode.....................................................................................6-76
6.12.7 PAPER EXIT ................................................................................6-77
Drive ...................................................................................................6-77
Paper Jam Detection ..........................................................................6-77
6.12.8 PAPER OVERFLOW DETECTION ..............................................6-77
6.13 PRINT DATA PROCESSING ................................................................6-78
6.13.1 RPCS DRIVER .............................................................................6-78
6.13.2 PCL5C DRIVER............................................................................6-78
6.13.3 PS3 DRIVER ................................................................................6-79
CMS (Color Management System) .....................................................6-79
Gray Correction ..................................................................................6-79
BG/UCR (Black Generation/Under Color Removal)............................6-79
Gamma Correction..............................................................................6-79
Toner Limitation ..................................................................................6-80
Dither Processing and ROP/RIP .........................................................6-80
6.14 FILE FORMAT CONVERTER (MLB).....................................................6-81
6.15 DATA OVERWRITE SECURITY UNIT (B735) ......................................6-82
6.15.1 AUTO ERASE MEMORY .............................................................6-82
Types of Data Overwritten and Not Overwritten .................................6-82
Overwrite timing ..................................................................................6-82
SPECIFICATIONS
SPECIFICATIONS
1. GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS (MAIN UNIT) ...............................................7-1
2.1 SYSTEM COMPONENTS ...................................................................7-3
2.2 OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT ....................................................................7-6
ARDF ....................................................................................................7-6
Bridge Unit ............................................................................................7-6
By-pass Tray Unit .................................................................................7-7
Duplex Unit ...........................................................................................7-7
Interchange Unit ...................................................................................7-7
B156/B220 x SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
LCT .......................................................................................................7-8
Paper Tray Unit.....................................................................................7-8
Shift Tray Unit .......................................................................................7-8
1-Bin Tray Unit ......................................................................................7-9
500-Sheet Finisher................................................................................7-9
1000-sheet Finisher ............................................................................7-10
Upper Tray..........................................................................................7-10
Lower Tray..........................................................................................7-10
1000-SHEET FINISHER B408

SEE SECTION B408 FOR DETAILED TABLE OF CONTENTS
PAPER TRAY UNIT B456

LARGE CAPACITY TRAY B457


1-BIN TRAY UNIT B480

INTERCHANGE UNIT B481

BRIDGE UNIT B482

BY-PASS TRAY UNIT B490

DUPLEX UNIT B509

SM xi B156/B220
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SHIFT TRAY UNIT B510

FAX OPTION B750

SEE SECTION FAX OPTION B750 FOR DETAILED TABLE OF CONTENTS
AUTO REVERSE DOCUMENT FEEDER B810

SEE SECTION AUTO REVERSE DOCUMENT FEEDER B810 FOR DETAILED
TABLE OF CONTENTS
B156/B220 xii SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
INSTALLATION
POSITION 1
TAB
AUTO REVERSE DOCUMENT FEEDER B810
B750 FAX OPTION TYPE 3232
POSITION 2
TAB
POSITION 3
TAB
TROUBLESHOOTING
POSITION 4
TAB
SERVICE TABLES
POSITION 5
TAB
DUPLEX UNIT B509
POSITION 6
TAB
BYPASS TRAY UNIT B490
SPECIFICATIONS
POSITION 7
TAB

POSITION 8
TAB
BRIDGE UNIT B482

CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
INSTALLATION
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
1. INSTALLATION
Installation
1.1 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
1.1.1 ENVIRONMENT
1. Temperature Range: 10C to 32C (50F to 89.6F) (humidity to be 54% at

32C, 89.6F)
2. Humidity Range: 15% to 80% Rh (temperature to be 27C, 80.6F at
80%)
3. Ambient Illumination: 2000 lux or less (keep the machine out of direct
sunlight.)
4. Ventilation: Air turnover of more than 30 m3/hr/person or more
5. Ambient Dust: Less than 0.10 mg/m3 (2.7 x 10 6 oz/yd3)
6. Avoid exposing the machine to sudden temperature changes, which include:
1) Direct cool air from an air conditioner
2) Direct heat from a heater
7. Avoid installing the machine in areas that may be exposed to corrosive gas.
8. Install the machine at a location lower than 2,000 m (6,500 ft.) above sea level.
9. Install the machine on a strong, level base.
10. Avoid installing the machine in areas that may be subjected to strong vibration.
1.1.2 MACHINE LEVEL

Front to back: Within 5 mm (0.2") of level
Right to left: Within 5 mm (0.2") of level
SM 1-1 B156/B220
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
1.1.3 POWER REQUIREMENTS
CAUTION
1. Insert the plug firmly in the outlet.
2. Avoid using an outlet extension plug or cord.
3. Ground the machine.
1. Input voltage level: 120 V, 60 Hz, More than 12 A

220 240 V, 50/60 Hz, More than 8 A
110 V, 50/60 Hz, More than 13A
2. Permissible voltage fluctuation: 10%
3. Do not put or place anything on the power cord.
1.1.4 SPACE REQUIREMENTS
A: Over 100 mm (4")

B: Over 100 mm (4")
A C
C: Over 550 mm (22")
D: Over 750 mm (29.6")
B156I501.WMF
B156/B220 1-2 SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
COPIER (B156/B220)
1.2 COPIER (B156/B220)
Installation
1.2.1 POWER SOCKETS FOR PERIPHERALS
CAUTION
Rating voltage for peripherals.
Make sure to plug the cables into the correct sockets.
1. ADF 2. Finisher
1. Rating voltage output connector 1. Rating voltage output connector
for accessory Max. DC24 V for accessory Max. DC24 V
4. Duplex Unit
1. Rating voltage output connector
for accessory Max. DC24 V
B156I502.WMF
3. By-pass Tray
1. Rating voltage output connector
for accessory Max. DC24 V
SM 1-3 B156/B220
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
COPIER (B156/B220)
1.2.2 INSTALLATION FLOW CHART

The following flow chart shows how to install the optional units more efficiently.
Unpack the copier
Does the user require the Paper Tray Unit or LCT?

Yes No
Place the copier on the Paper Tray Unit or LCT
Install the Paper Tray Unit or LCT Install the copier
Install the copier
Yes
Does the user require the By-pass Tray?
Yes No
Install the By-pass Tray
Does the user require the Finisher?

Yes No
Install the Bridge Unit
Install the Finisher
Does the user require the Shift Tray?

Yes No
Install the Shift Tray
Does the user require the Duplex Unit and/or 1-bin Tray Unit ?
Yes No
Install the Interchange Unit
Install the Duplex Unit and/or 1-bin Tray Unit
Install the ARDF or Platen Cover (if required)
B156/B220 1-4 SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
COPIER (B156/B220)
1.2.3 ACCESSORY CHECK
Installation
Check the quantity and condition of the accessories in the box against the following
list:
No. Description Qty

1 Paper Tray Decal 1
2 Model Name Decal 1
3 NECR 1
4 Factory Data Sheet 1
5 Filter Duct 3
6 Filter 3
7 Caution Decal Power/Paper 1
8 Decal Copy prohibition 1
9 Manual Holder 1
10 Operating Instructions System Setting 1
11 Operating Instructions Copy Reference 1
12 Operating Instructions Printer 2
13 Operating Instructions Security 1
14 Instruction Procedure Sheet 1
15 Sheet Notes for User 1
16 Screw for Manual Holder 2
17 Stamp 1
18 Cloth (ADF Standard version only) 1
19 Cloth Holder (ADF Standard version only) 1
SM 1-5 B156/B220
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
COPIER (B156/B220)
1.2.4 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE
B156I504.WMF
B156I505.WMF
[B]
[A]
B156I506.WMF
CAUTION
Unplug the machine power cord before starting the following procedure.
If the optional paper tray or the optional LCT will be installed at the same time,
place the copier on the paper tray unit or the LCT first, then install the copier and
the other options.
NOTE: Keep the shipping retainers after installing the machine. They will be
reused when the machine is moved to another location in the future.
1. Remove the tapes.
2. Open the front cover [A] and remove the shipping retainer [B].
B156/B220 1-6 SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
COPIER (B156/B220)
Installation
[B]
[D]
[D]
[B]
[A] [C]
B156I507.WMF B156I508.WMF
[E]
B156I509.WMF
3. Open the right cover [A], and remove the red tags [B].
4. Open the left cover [C] ( x 2), and remove the red tags [D].
5. Pull out all development units [E] ( x 1 each).
SM 1-7 B156/B220
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
COPIER (B156/B220)
B156I511.WMF
6. Keep the development unit level and shake the development unit about 10
times from side to side.
NOTE: 1) Do not touch the development roller or the development roller gear.
2) Use caution not to drop the cartridge or to damage it.
3) If the cartridge has not been shaken well, the machine takes a
longer time to initialize the development unit, or an error message or
SC350 is displayed. When either of them is displayed, turn the main
switch off and on.
B156/B220 1-8 SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
COPIER (B156/B220)
Installation
[B]
[A]
B156I513.WMF
7. Reinstall the development units, and close the left cover.

NOTE: A white line or band may appear on one end of the paper if a
development unit is incorrectly installed. To correct this, pull out the
development unit partially (about 30 mm) and slowly reinstall it.
8. Remove the oil tank cover [A] (1 clip), and fill the oil tank to the maximum line.
NOTE: Do not fill the oil tank past the arrow [B].
SM 1-9 B156/B220
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
COPIER (B156/B220)
[A]
[A]
[B]
[A]
B156I514.WMF
[F]
[J]
B156I515.WMF
[E]
[D]
[C]
B156I516.WMF
9. Install the filters [A] and ducts [B] as shown.

10. Attach the appropriate model name decal [C] with cover [D] to the front cover.
11. Attach the caution decal [E] to the tray. Attach the copy prohibition decal [F] to
the top.
12. Pull the paper tray out, and adjust the side guides and end guide to match the
paper size.
NOTE: To move the side guides, first pull out the tray fully, then push down the
green lock at the rear inside the tray.
13. Attach the appropriate paper tray number decals [J] to the paper trays.
NOTE: Paper tray number decals are also used for the optional paper tray or
the optional LCT. Keep any remaining decals for use with these
optional units.
B156/B220 1-10 SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
COPIER (B156/B220)
Installation
[A]
B156I517.WMF
14. If the optional bridge unit will not be installed: Swing the sensor feeler [A]
out.
15. Install the optional ARDF (EU model only) or the optional platen cover (see
ARDF Installation or Platen Cover Installation).
[C]
[E]
[B]
B810I504.WMF
[D]
B502I006.WMF
16. Install the stamp cartridge [B] if the ARDF [C] was installed.
17. Attach the cloth holder [D] to the left side of the scanner as shown. Then put
the cloth [E] in the cloth holder if the ARDF was installed.
SM 1-11 B156/B220
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
COPIER (B156/B220)
18. Plug in the machine and turn the main power switch on. The machine
automatically performs the initialization procedure. After this has finished, the
Start button LED turns green.
19. Make copies of image samples (text, photo, and text/photo modes).
20. Perform Automatic Color Calibration (ACC).
NOTE: Since this machine has been subject to color adjustment using
Automatic Color Calibration (ACC) at the factory, there is no need to
make automatic color calibration again if the customer is satisfied with
the image sample. If the customer is not satisfied, do the following.
1) Print the ACC test pattern (UP mode Maintenance ACC Start).
2) Place the printout on the exposure glass.
3) Place 10 sheets of white paper on top of the test chart. Then, close
the ADF or platen cover.
4) Press Start Scanning on the LCD panel. The machine performs the
ACC.
21. If you want to enable the Ethernet NIB function, set SP5-985-001 to 1: enable.
If you want to enable the USB function, set SP5-985-002 to 1: enable.
NOTE: The defaults are 0: disabled.
22. Make sure that the sample image has been copied normally.
23. Remove the double-sided tape from
the manual holder. Then attach it [A]
to the left side of the copier ( x 2).
NOTE: When you install the 1,000-Sheet
Finisher (B408), attach the
manual holder a different location.
[A] B156I532.WMF
B156/B220 1-12 SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PAPER TRAY UNIT (B456)
1.3 PAPER TRAY UNIT (B456)
Installation
Check the quantity and condition of the accessories against the following list.
No. Description Qty

1 Right Stand Bracket 1
2 Left Stand Bracket 1
3 Securing Bracket 2
4 Front Stand 1
5 Rear Stand 1
6 Screw M4x10 4
7 Knob Screw 2
8 Stepped Screw 2
1 2 3 6 7 8
4 5
B456I001.WMF
B456I002.WMF
CAUTION
1. Remove the strips of tape.
SM 1-13 B156/B220
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
[A]
B456I103.WMF [B]
[D]
[C]
[D]
B456I104.WMF
2. Remove the paper trays [A] from the paper tray unit and remove the shipping
retainers.
3. Install the front stand [B] ( x2).
4. Install the rear stand [C].
5. Attach the two stand brackets [D] ( x1 each).
B156/B220 1-14 SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Installation
[C]
[D]
[B] B456I215.WMF
[A]
B456I212.WMF [E]
[E]
B456I106.WMF
6. Attach the cardboard guides [A] to each side of the paper tray unit [B].
7. Set the copier [C] on the paper tray unit [B]. Use the cardboard guides.
8. Remove the cardboard guides from the paper tray unit.
9. Remove the paper trays [D] from the copier and secure the paper tray unit
( x2).
10. Attach a securing bracket [E] to each side of the paper tray unit, as shown
( x1 each).
SM 1-15 B156/B220
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
[A]
B456I004.WMF
11. Reinstall the paper trays and attach the appropriate paper tray number decal
[A] to the paper tray.
NOTE: The paper tray number decal is in the accessory box for the main
copier.
12. Load paper into the paper trays.
13. Turn on the main switch.
14. Check the machines operation and copy quality.
B156/B220 1-16 SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
LCT (B457)
1.4 LCT (B457)
Installation
No. Description Qty

1 Right Stand Bracket 1
2 Left Stand Bracket 1
3 Securing Bracket 2
4 Front Stand 1
5 Rear Stand 1
6 Screw M4x10 4
7 Knob Screw 2
8 Stepped Screw 2
1 2 3 6 7 8
5
4
B457I007.WMF
B457I001.WMF
CAUTION
SM 1-17 B156/B220
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
LCT (B457)
[A]
[B]
[C]
B457I003.WMF
[E]
[D]
[E]
B457I104.WMF
2. While pressing the stopper [A] attached to the guide rail, pull out the large
capacity tray [B].
3. Install the front stand [C] ( x2).
4. Install the rear stand [D].
5. Attach the two stand brackets [E] ( x1 each).
B156/B220 1-18 SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
LCT (B457)
Installation
[C]
[D]
[B]
B456I215.WMF
[A]
B457I152.WMF
[E]
[E]
B457I156.WMF
6. Attach the cardboard guides [A] to each side of the LCT [B].
7. Set the copier [C] on the LCT [B]. Use the cardboard guides.
8. Remove the cardboard guides from the LCT.
9. Remove the paper trays [D] from the copier and secure the LCT ( x2).
10. Attach a securing bracket [E] to each side of the LCT, as shown ( x1 each).
SM 1-19 B156/B220
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
LCT (B457)
[A]
B457I005.WMF
11. Reinstall the paper trays and attach the appropriate paper tray number decal
[A] to the LCT.
NOTE: The paper tray number decal is in the accessory box for the main
copier.
12. Load paper into the LCT.
14. Check the machines operation and copy quality.
B156/B220 1-20 SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
AUTO REVERSE DOCUMENT FEEDER (B810)
1.5 AUTO REVERSE DOCUMENT FEEDER (B810)
Installation
No. Description Qty

1 Scale Guide 1
2 DF Exposure Glass 1
3 Stud Screw 2
4 Knob Screw 2
5 Original Size Decal 2
6 Screwdriver Tool 1
7 Cloth 1
8 Holder 1
4 3 6 1
2
5
7
8
B386I500.WMF
B386I101.WMF
CAUTION
Unplug the copier power cord before starting the following procedure.
SM 1-21 B156/B220
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
[F] [C]
[E] [G]
[D] [A]
[G]
[B]
B386I107.WMF [H]
[H]
[I]
B386I108.WMF
2. Remove the left scale [A] ( x 2).

3. Peel off the backing [B] of the double-sided tape attached to the glass holder.
4. Place the DF exposure glass [C] on the glass holder.
NOTE: When installing the DF exposure glass, make sure that the white point
[D] is on the lower front side of the glass, as shown.
5. Peel off the backing [E] of the double-sided tape attached to the rear side of the
scale guide [F], then install the scale guide [F] ( x 2 removed in step 2).
6. Install two stud screws [G].
7. Mount the DF on the copier, then slide the DF to the front as shown.
8. Secure the DF unit with two screws [H].
9. Connect the cable [I] to the copier.
B156/B220 1-22 SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Installation
[B]
[A]
B386I110.WMF B386I111.WMF
[C]
B386I501.WMF
10. Peel off the platen sheet [A] and place it on the exposure glass.
11. Line up the rear left corner of the platen sheet flush against corner [B] on the
exposure glass.
12. Close the ARDF.
13. Attach the appropriate scale decal [C] as shown.
14. Turn the main power switch on. Then check if the document feeder works
properly.
15. Make a full size copy. Check that the registrations (side-to-side and leading
edge) and image skew are correct. If they are not, adjust the registrations and
image skew (refer to Replacements and Adjustments Copy Adjustments).
SM 1-23 B156/B220
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
INTERCHANGE UNIT (B481)
1.6 INTERCHANGE UNIT (B481)

Check the quantity and condition of the components against the following list.
No. Description Qty

1 Interchange Unit 1
B481I101.WMF
B156/B220 1-24 SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Rev. 06/2005 INTERCHANGE UNIT (B481)
Installation
[C]
[B]
[G]
[A] B481I102.WMF
IMPORTANT: When installing the [F]

Interchange Unit (Step 6), make
sure to insert both sides of the
interchange unit together, so that
the unit is parallel to the machine. If
you attach one side at a time, [E] [D]
duplex jams or noise from the
interchange unit can occur. [F]
B481I103.WMF
CAUTION
1. Remove all tapes.
2. Open the right cover [A] of the copier.
3. Open cover [B] and remove it.
4. Remove the connector cover [C] ( x1).
5. Open the cover [D] of the interchange unit.
6. Install the interchange unit [E] ( x1).
NOTE: Take care not to pinch the harness at the front side.
7. Secure the interchange unit with the knob screws [F].
8. Reinstall the connector cover [G] which was removed in step 4 ( x 1).
SM 1-25 B156/B220
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
1 BIN TRAY UNIT (B480)
1.7 1 BIN TRAY UNIT (B480)

No. Description Qty

1 1-Bin Tray Unit 1
2 Tray 1
3 Sub-Tray 1
4 Tray Guide 1
5 Shield Mylar 1
6 Sub Paper Guide 1
7 Paper Guide 1
8 Tapping Screw M3x8 2
8
7
1
6
5
2
3
4 B480I101.WMF
B156/B220 1-26 SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Installation
[A]
B480I107.WMF
CAUTION
NOTE: Before installing this 1-bin tray unit, the optional interchange unit
(B481) must be installed.
2. If the optional bridge unit has been installed, open the right jam removal cover
[A] of the bridge unit.
If the optional bridge unit is not installed, skip this step.
SM 1-27 B156/B220
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
[A]
[B]
B480I108.WMF
[E]
[C]
B480I102.WMF
[F]
[D]
B480I103.WMF
3. Peel off the backing of the double-sided tape attached to the shield mylar [A].
Then attach the shield mylar to the 1-bin unit, as shown.
4. If the front right cover [B] is installed, remove it ( x1).
5. Remove the cover [C].
6. Install the 1-bin tray unit [D] ( x1).
7. Disconnect the connector [E] and remove the LED board [F].
B156/B220 1-28 SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Installation
[A]
[B]
[C]
B480I104.WMF
[D]
B480I109.WMF
[E]
[G]
[F]
B480I106.WMF
8. Install the LED board [A] on the front right cover ( x1).
9. Reinstall the front right cover [B] ( x2, x1).
10. Peel off the backing of the double-sided tape attached to the paper guide [C].
Then attach the paper guide to the underside of the scanner unit as shown.
11. Peel off the backing of the double-sided tape attached to the sub paper guide
[D]. Then attach the sub paper guide to the underside of the scanner unit as
shown.
12. Install the tray guide [E].
13. Install the tray [F].
14. Install the sub-tray [G].
15. Turn on the main power switch and check the 1-bin tray unit operation.
SM 1-29 B156/B220
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SHIFT TRAY (B510)
1.8 SHIFT TRAY (B510)

No. Description Qty

1 Shift Tray Unit 1
2 Paper Guide - Large 1
3 Paper Guide - Small 2
4 Stepped Screw 1
5 Core 1
2 3
4 5
B510I111.WMF
[A]
[D]
[B]
[E]
[C]
[E]
B510I102.WMF
CAUTION
1. Remove all tapes (see the diagram at the top of the page).
2. Remove the cover [A] ( x1).
3. Replace screw [B] with a stepped screw [C].
4. Install the large paper guide [D] and two small paper guides [E], as shown.
B156/B220 1-30 SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SHIFT TRAY (B510)
Installation
[B]
[F]
[A] [D] [C]
B510I211.WMF
[E]
B510I103.WMF
5. Remove the connector cover [A] ( x 1).

6. Remove the rear cover [B] ( x2).
7. Pass the harnesses [C] through the opening [D], and install the shift tray unit
[E], as shown.
NOTE: 1) Set the shift tray on the stepped screw.

2) The shift tray must be installed under the paper guides [F] installed
in step 4.
SM 1-31 B156/B220
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SHIFT TRAY (B510)
[A]
B510I202.WMF
[C]
B510I201.WMF
[A] [B]
8. Remove the screws [A]. ( x 6)

9. Remove the SD-card slot cover [B]. ( x 1)
10. Open the controller box [C].
[D] [F]
[E]
B510I203.WMF
11. Connect the harness [D], as shown.

12. Attach the harnesses with clamps [E]. Then attach the core [F].
NOTE: Make sure that the core [F] does not cause damage to the harnesses.
13. Assemble the machine.
14. Turn on the main power switch.
15. Check the shift tray operation.
B156/B220 1-32 SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
BY-PASS FEED UNIT (B490)
1.9 BY-PASS FEED UNIT (B490)
Installation
No. Description Qty

1 By-pass Tray Unit 1
2 Tapping Screw 3
3 Decal 1
2
3
B490I001.WMF
[A]
B490I113.WMF
CAUTION
1. Remove all tapes (see the diagram at the top of the page).
2. Remove the entrance cover [A] (x 2).
SM 1-33 B156/B220
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
BY-PASS FEED UNIT (B490)
[A]
[B]
B490I114.WMF
B490I002.WMF
3. Install the by-pass tray unit [A] ( x3, x1).

4. Attach the decal [B] as shown.
5. Turn the main power switch on and check the by-pass tray function.
6. Go into the SP mode. Change these SP settings.
Default By-pass tray
SP1003
(No By-pass tray) installed
001 0 2
002 2 0
003 2 0
004 0 2
Make a copy from the by-pass tray. Then check the registration.
B156/B220 1-34 SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
DUPLEX UNIT (B509)
1.10 DUPLEX UNIT (B509)
Installation
No. Description Qty

1 Duplex Unit 1
2 Upper Bracket 1
3 Rear Holder Bracket 1
4 Front Holder Bracket 1
5 Clip 2
2 3 4 5 6
7
B509I101.WMF
SM 1-35 B156/B220
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
DUPLEX UNIT (B509)
[A]
[A]
[B]
[A]
B509I102.WMF
[B]
B509I103.WMF
CAUTION
NOTE: Before installing the duplex unit, the optional interchange unit (B481)
must be installed.
1. Remove all tapes (see the previous page).
2. Remove five covers [A] ( x1).
3. Install three brackets [B] ( x1 each M4x6).
B156/B220 1-36 SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
DUPLEX UNIT (B509)
Installation
[D]
[B]
[B]
[C]
[A] B509I104.WMF
[G]
[F]
B509I105.WMF
[E]
4. Set the duplex unit [A] on the brackets [B] (1 clip).

5. Attach the link [C] to the shaft [D] and secure it with the clip.
6. Remove the connector cover [E] ( x1).
7. Connect the cable [F] and secure the grounding wire [G] ( x1).
8. Install the connector cover.
9. Turn on the main power switch and check the duplex unit function.
SM 1-37 B156/B220
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
BRIDGE UNIT (B482)
1.11 BRIDGE UNIT (B482)

No. Description Qty

1 Bridge Unit 1
2 Rear Joint Bracket 1
3 Front Joint Bracket 1
4 Knob Screw 1
5 Screw M3x6 1
6 Screw M4x14 4
7 Core 1
2 3 5 6
7
4
1
B482I151.WMF
[A]
B482I500.WMF
CAUTION
2. If the sensor feeler [A] is out, fold it away into the machine.
B156/B220 1-38 SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
BRIDGE UNIT (B482)
Installation
[A]
[B] B482I102.WMF
[B]
[F]
[D]
[C] B482I209.WMF
[E]
[G]
B482I103.WMF
3. Remove the front right cover [A] ( x1).

4. Remove two covers [B] ( x1 each).
5. Remove the connector cover [C] ( x 1).
6. Remove the rear cover [D] ( x2).
7. Pass the harnesses [E] through the opening [F], and install the bridge unit [G]
( x2).
8. Reinstall the front right cover.
SM 1-39 B156/B220
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
BRIDGE UNIT (B482)
[A]
[A] B482I207.WMF
[B]
[C] B482I208.WMF
9. Remove the screws [A] ( x 6).

10. Remove the SD-card slot cover [B] ( x 1).
11. Open the controller box [C].
B156/B220 1-40 SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
BRIDGE UNIT (B482)
Installation
[C]
[A]
[B]
B482I206.WMF
12. Connect the harnesses [A], as shown.

13. Attach the harnesses with clamps [B].
14. Attach the core [C].
NOTE: Make sure that the core does not cause damage to the harnesses.
15. Reinstall the rear cover.
16. When the finisher (Machine code:
B408) will be installed, attach the
front joint bracket [D] and rear joint
bracket [E] ( x2 each).
17. Install the optional finisher (refer to the
finisher installation procedure). [E]
B482I105.WMF
[D]
SM 1-41 B156/B220
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
1000-SHEET FINISHER (B408)
1.12 1000-SHEET FINISHER (B408)

2
6
1 7 8
5
10
3 9
B408I502.WMF
For For For

No. Description Qty B022/B027/B031/ B051/B052/ B079/B082/
B089/B093/B097 B156/B220 B135/B138
1 Front Joint Bracket 1 ---
2 Rear Joint Bracket 1 --- ---
3 Rear Joint Bracket 1 --- ---
4 Grounding Plate 1 ---
5 Copy Tray 1
6 Staple Position Decal 1
7 Screw - M4 x 14 4 (Use 3) --- (Use 4)
8 Knob Screw - M4 x 10 1
9 Screw - M3 x 8 1 ---
10 Knob Screw - M3 x 8 1
= Necessary, --- = Not necessary
B156/B220 1-42 SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Installation
[A]
B408I102.WMF
B408I103.WMF
CAUTION
Unplug the main machine power cord before starting the following
procedure.
NOTE: The following options must be installed before installing this finisher.
- Bridge Unit (B482)
- Paper Tray Unit (B456) or LCT (B457)
Also, the optional adjustment table (B488) is required.
1. Unpack the finisher and remove the tapes.
SM 1-43 B156/B220
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
[A]
[E]
[D]
[H]
[B]
[C] B408I152.WMF
[G]
[I]
[F] B408I114.WMF
2. Unpack the adjustment table (B488).

3. Set the finisher [A] on the adjustment table [B] and secure the finisher
( x 1).
4. Install the grounding plate [C] which is in the accessory box for the adjustment
table ( x 2).
5. Install the front joint bracket [D] ( x 2 - M4 x 14) and rear joint bracket [E] ( x
2 M4 x 14).
6. Open the front door [F], then pull the locking lever [G].
7. Align the finisher on the joint brackets, and lock it in place by pushing the
locking lever.
8. Secure the locking lever (1 knob screw - M3 x 8) and close the front door.
9. Install the copy tray [I] (1 knob screw - M4 x 10).
10. Connect the finisher cable [H] to the main machine.
B156/B220 1-44 SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
[A]
Installation
B408I501.WMF
11. Attach the staple position decal [A] to the ARDF as shown.
12. Turn on the main power switch and check the finisher operation.
SM 1-45 B156/B220
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
1.13 500-SHEET FINISHER (B458)

No. Description Qty

1 Unit Holder 1
2 Entrance Guide 1
3 Shift Tray 1
4 Snap Ring 2
5 Knob Screw 2
5
4 1
B458I102.WMF
B156/B220 1-46 SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Installation
[A]
B458I101.WMF
[C]
B458I103.WMF
[B]
CAUTION
procedure.
NOTE: Before installing the 500-sheet finisher, the optional bridge unit (B482)
must be installed.
1. Unpack the finisher and remove the tapes.
2. Install the entrance guide [A].
3. Remove the holder cover [B]. Then install the unit holder [C] (2 screws).
4. Re-install the holder cover [B].
SM 1-47 B156/B220
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
[A]
B458I104.WMF
[B]
B458I105.WMF
5. Install the 500-sheet finisher [A] ( x1).

6. Install the output tray [B] as shown (2 snap rings).
7. Turn on the main power switch and check the finisher operation.
B156/B220 1-48 SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PLATEN COVER INSTALLATION
1.14 PLATEN COVER INSTALLATION
Installation
[A]
B156I518.WMF
[C]
[B]
B156I519.WMF
1. Install the platen cover [A] ( x 2).

2. Peel off the platen sheet [B] and place it on the exposure glass.
3. Line up the rear left corner of the platen sheet flush against corner [C] on the
exposure glass.
4. Gently close the platen cover.
SM 1-49 B156/B220
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PRINTER OPTIONS
1.15 PRINTER OPTIONS

1.15.1 POSTSCRIPT 3 (B769)
CAUTION
Unplug the main machines power cord before starting the following
procedure.
[Slot 1]
[Slot 2]
[B]
[Slot 3]
[A]
B769I001.WMF
1. Remove the SD-card cover [A] from the machine ( x 1).

2. Make sure that the printed face [B] of the SD card points to the rear of the
machine. Then push it slowly into SD-card slot 2 (middle slot) until you hear a
click.
3. Attach the slot cover ( x 1).
4. Attach the Adobe PostScript 3 decal to the front cover.
B156/B220 1-50 SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PRINTER OPTIONS
1.15.2 FILE FORMAT CONVERTER (B609)
Installation
CAUTION
Disconnect the main machines power cord before you start this procedure.
[A]
[B]
B609I001.WMF
1. Remove the slot cover [A] from I/F Card Slot A ( x 2).
2. Install the file-format-converter board [B] (Knob-screw x 2).
NOTE: Use a screwdriver when you tighten the knob-screws. Do not tighten
them manually. It can cause this board to disconnect from the machine.
SM 1-51 B156/B220
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PRINTER OPTIONS
1.15.3 IEEE1394 INTERFACE (B581)
CAUTION
procedure.
NOTE: You can only install one of these network interfaces at the same time: IEEE
802.11b (Wireless LAN), IEEE1284 (Parallel/Centronics), IEEE1394
(FireWire), or Bluetooth.
[A]
[B]
B581I001.WMF
1. Remove the slot cover [A] from I/F Card Slot B ( x 2).
2. Install the FireWire board [B] (Knob-screw x 2).
B156/B220 1-52 SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PRINTER OPTIONS
UP Mode Settings for IEEE 1394
Installation
Enter the UP mode. Then do the procedure below to perform the initial interface
settings for IEEE 1394. These settings take effect every time the machine is
powered on.
1. Press the User Tools/Counterkey.
2. On the touch panel, press System Settings.
3. Press Interface Settings.
4. Press IEEE1394.
5. Press the following soft keys on the touch panel. Then select the following
settings:
IP Address
Select the AUTO-Obtain (DHCP) or Specify. When you select Specify,
you can set the IP Address and Subnet Mask manually.
IP over 1394
Enable or disable this setting as required. This setting enables IP over 1394
as the default setting for the printing method.
SCSI Print
Enable or disable this setting as required. This setting enables SCSI Print as
the default setting for the printing method.
Bi-directional SCSI Print
Switch bi-directional printing on or off for SCSI print.
SP Mode Settings for IEEE 1394

The following SP commands can be set for IEEE 1394.
SP No. Name Function

5839 004 Host Name Sets the name of the device used on the network.
Example: RNPXXXXXXXXXX
5839 007 Cycle Master Enables or disables cycle master function of the IEEE
1394 standard bus.
5839 008 BCR Mode Sets the BCR (Broadcast Channel Register) setting for
the Auto Node operation for the standard IEEE1394 bus
for when IRM is not in use. The following three settings
are available: Standard, IRM Color Copy, and
Always Effective.
5839 009 IRM 1394a Determines whether an IRM check for IEEE 1394a is
Check conducted for the Auto Node when IRM is not used.
5839 010 Unique ID Enables the Node_Unique_Id setting for enumeration
on the standard IEEE 1394 bus.
5839 011 Logout Determines how successive initiator login requests are
handled during login in for SBP-2.
5839 012 Login Enables or disables exclusive login for SBP-2.
5839 013 Login MAX Sets the limit for the number of logins for SBP-2. Range:
1 ~ 62.
SM 1-53 B156/B220
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PRINTER OPTIONS
1.15.4 IEEE 1284 (B679)

Installation Procedure
CAUTION
(FireWire), Bluetooth.
[A]
[B]
B679I001.WMF
2. Install the interface board [B] (Knob-screw x 2).
B156/B220 1-54 SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PRINTER OPTIONS
1.15.5 IEEE802.11B (G813)
Installation
CAUTION
procedure.
NOTE: You can only install one of the following network interfaces at the same
time: IEEE 802.11b (Wireless LAN), IEEE1284 (Parallel/Centronics),
IEEE1394 (FireWire), Bluetooth.
[A]
[B]
[C]
[D]
G813I001.WMF
2. Attach the wireless LAN board [B] to the controller board (Knob-screw x 2).
3. Install the wireless LAN card [C]. The printed side must point to the front of the
machine.
4. Attach the antenna cap [D].
SM 1-55 B156/B220
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PRINTER OPTIONS
[C]
[B]
[A]
B529I008.WMF
If wireless LAN reception is not very good, install the extended antenna.
5. Remove the wireless LAN card [A] from the machine.
6. Remove the standard antenna [B] from the wireless LAN card.
7. Install the extended antenna [C] on the LAN card, as shown.
NOTE: The antenna jack must be at the bottom end.
8. Twine the extended-antenna wires seven or eight times.
9. Peel off the backing of the double-sided tape attached to the antennas, and
stick the antennas on the machine.
B156/B220 1-56 SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PRINTER OPTIONS
UP Mode Settings for Wireless LAN
Installation
Enter the UP mode. Then do the procedure below to perform the initial interface
settings for IEEE 802.11b. These settings take effect every time the machine is
powered on.
NOTE: You cannot use the wireless LAN if you use Ethernet.
1. Press the User Tools/Counter key.
2. On the touch panel, press System Settings.
NOTE: The Network I/F (default: Ethernet) must be set for either Ethernet or
wireless LAN.
3. Select Interface Settings Network (tab) Network I/F Setting
4. Press IEEE 802.11b. Only the wireless LAN options show.
5. Communication Mode. Select either 802.11 Ad hoc, Ad hoc or
Infrastructure.
6. SSID Setting. Enter the SSID setting. (The setting is case sensitive.)
7. Channel. You need this setting when Ad Hoc Mode is selected.
Range: 1 ~ 14 (default: 11)
NOTE: The allowed range for the channel settings may vary for different
countries.
8. WEP (Encryption) Setting. The WEP (Wired Equivalent Privacy) setting is
designed to protect wireless data transmission. The same WEP key is required
on the receiving side in order to unlock encoded data. There are 64 bit and 128
bit WEP keys.
WEP:
Selects Active or Inactive. (Inactive is default.)
Range of Allowed Settings:
64 bit 10 characters
128 bit 26 characters
9. Transmission Speed. Press the Next button to show more settings. Then
select the transmission speed for the mode: Auto, 11 Mbps, 5.5 Mbps, 2 Mbps,
1 Mbps (default: Auto). This setting should match the distance between the
closest machine or access point. This depends on which mode is selected.
NOTE: For the Ad Hoc Mode, this is the distance between the machine and
the closest PC in the network. For the Infrastructure Mode, this is the
distance between the machine and the closest access point.
11 Mbps 140 m (153 yd.)
5.5 Mbps 200 m (219 yd.)
2 Mbps 270 m (295 yd.)
1 Mbps 400 m (437 yd.)
SM 1-57 B156/B220
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PRINTER OPTIONS
10. Press Return to Default to initialize the wireless LAN settings.

Press Yes to initialize the following settings:
Transmission mode
Channel
Transmission Speed
WEP
SSID
WEP Key
SP Mode Settings for IEEE 802.11b Wireless LAN

The following SP commands and UP modes can be set for IEEE 802.11b
SP No. Name Function

5840 006 Channel MAX Sets the maximum range of the channel settings for the
country.
5840 007 Channel MIN Sets the minimum range of the channels settings
allowed for your country.
5840 011 WEP Key Select Used to select the WEP key (Default: 00).
UP mode Name Function
SSID Used to confirm the current SSID setting.
WEP Key Used to confirm the current WEP key setting.
WEP Mode Used to show the maximum length of the string that can
be used for the WEP Key entry.
B156/B220 1-58 SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Rev. 06/2006 PRINTER OPTIONS
1.15.6 BLUETOOTH (B736)
Installation
CAUTION
(FireWire), Bluetooth.
1. Remove the slot cover [A] from I/F

Card Slot B ( x 2).
2. Install the Bluetooth board [B]
(Knob-screw x 2). [A]
NOTE: Use a screwdriver when
you tighten the knob-
screws. Do not tighten
them manually. It can
cause this board to
disconnect from the [B]
machine.
3. Install the Bluetooth card [C] in the
slot of the Bluetooth board. [C]
[D]
4. Attach the antenna cap [D].
B736I001.WMF
1.15.7 CHECKING THE CONNECTIONS
1. Plug in the power cord and turn on the main switch.

2. Enter the printer user mode and print the configuration page.
(User Tools/ Printer Settings/ List Test Print/ Config. Page)
The same data can also be printed using the printer service mode.
(Print Summary 5.2.1)
All installed options are listed in the System Reference column.
SM 1-59 B156/B220
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA Rev. 06/2006
DATA OVERWRITE SECURITY UNIT (B735)
1.16 DATA OVERWRITE SECURITY UNIT (B735)

BEFORE YOU BEGIN THE PROCEDURE
1. Make sure that the following settings are not at their factory default values:
z Supervisor login password
z Administrator login name
z Administrator login password
If any of these settings is at a factory default value, tell the customer these settings
must be changed before you do the installation procedure.
IMPORTANT NOTE
If the Customer forgets the Supervisor login password after changing it
from the default setting, a service call is required and the NVRAM must be
replaced to reset the Supervisor login and password.
2. Make sure that Admin. Authentication Machine Management is ON.

[System Settings] [Administrator Tools] [Administrator Authentication
Management] - [Machine Management]
If this setting is OFF, tell the customer this setting must be ON before you do the
installation procedure.
3. Make sure that under Machine Management Administrator Tools is enabled

(selected).
[System Settings] [Administrator Tools] [Administrator Authentication
Management] [Machine Management] - [Available Settings]
If this setting is disabled (not selected), tell the customer this setting must be
enabled (selected) before you do the installation procedure.
ACCESSORY CHECK
The B156/B220 uses a Type D Data Overwrite Security Unit. Check the
accessories and their quantities against this list:
Description Qty
1. SD Card ............................................................................... 1
B156/B220 1-60 SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Rev. 06/2006 DATA OVERWRITE SECURITY UNIT (B735)
Installation
1.16.1 SEAL CHECK AND REMOVAL
[A] B735I901.WMF
[B] B735I903.WMF
1. Ensure a customer witness is present when opening the DOSS option.

2. Make sure that:
1) The box has two pieces of tape [A] attached to the corners in the photo,
AND
2) These two tapes are blank.
If you can see VOID on the surface of the tape, DO NOT install the
components in the box. Stop this procedure and contact the Technical Hotline
via the e-Lert form on the TSC Website. Retain the box and its contents. Any
tampering of the DOSS option will need to be investigated.
3. If the results of Step 1 are OK, remove the two pieces of tape from the box.
Note: After you remove the tapes, you will see VOID written on the box under
the tape [B]. This is normal.
4. The procedures outline in this bulletin needs to be followed if the DOSS option
is replaced due to a failure.
CAUTION
Before you begin any procedure, always turn OFF the machine main power
switch and unplug the power cord.
SM 1-61 B156/B220
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
DATA OVERWRITE SECURITY UNIT (B735) Rev. 06/2006
1.16.2 INSTALLATION
NOTE: You must install the data overwrite protection unit in SD Card slot 2. But,
the postscript option for this machine is also installed in SD Card slot 2.
Because of this, you must do the SD Card Appli move procedure first (
5.9) if the postscript option is installed and you want to install the Data
Overwrite Security unit. Move the Data Overwrite Security application (slot
3) to the SD Card that contains the Printer/Scanner application (slot 1).
1. If the machine is ON, turn the

operation switch and the main
power switch OFF.
2. If the NIB is installed, disconnect
the network cable.
3. Remove the SD card slot cover [A]
(x1).
4. With the printed side of the SD
card [B] facing the rear of the
machine, install the DOS SD card
in SD card slot C2.
[A]
5. If the NIB is installed, reconnect
the network cable.
6. Turn the main power switch ON. [B]
B735I001.WMF
7. Do SP5878 (Option Setup).
8. Exit SP mode.
9. Turn the operation switch OFF, and then turn the main power switch OFF.
10. Turn the main power switch ON.
11. Do SP5990-005 (SP print mode Diagnostic Report).
12. Make sure the ROM number and firmware version on the diagnostic report are
the same as those in the chart below .
z [A]: ROM Number/Firmware Version HDD Format Option
z [B]: Loading Program GW1a_zoffy (Data Overwrite Security Unit Type C)
Loading Program GW2a_zoffy (Data Overwrite Security Unit Type D)
Diagnostic Report: ROM No. / Firmware Loading Program [B]
Version [A]
Data Overwrite Security HDD Format Option: GW1a_zoffy:
Unit Type C B7355050 / 0.04 B7355050 / 0.04
Data Overwrite Security HDD Format Option: GW2a_zoffy:
Unit Type D
B7355060 / 0.03 B7355060 / 0.03
B156/B220 1-62 SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Rev. 06/2006 DATA OVERWRITE SECURITY UNIT (B735)
Important: The ROM number and firmware version number change when the
Installation
firmware is upgraded.
If the ROM numbers are not the same, or the version numbers are not the same,
this means the unit was not installed correctly.
If this happens:
Make sure the MFP model and unit type match (Type C or D).
The B156/B220 uses a Data Overwrite Security Unit Type D.
If they do not match:
1) Do the installation procedure again, from Step 1.
2) Replace the Data Overwrite Security Unit (SD card) with the correct
type. Redo installation procedure.
3) Replace the NV-RAM. Redo installation procedure.
13. Turn Auto Erase Memory Setting ON:

User Tools >> System Settings >> Administrator Tools >> Auto Erase Memory
Setting >> ON
If the customer has enabled Administrator Authentication Management -
Machine Management they will have to log in to change this User Tool
setting.
14. Exit User Tools.
15. Power the machine OFF/ON.
[A]
[B] [C]
09/09/2003 14:13
Origi. Total Copies
0 1 0
16. Make sure the overwrite erase icon [A] is displayed on the operation panel.
If it is not displayed, do Step 7 again.
17. Make a sample copy.
18. Make sure the overwrite icon changes as follows:
The bottom of the icon (white part) becomes thicker [B].
Next Copy is displayed for a short time under the icon.
The icon returns to its usual shape [C].
SM 1-63 B156/B220
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
KEY COUNTER INSTALLATION
1.17 KEY COUNTER INSTALLATION
[B]
[C]
[A]
B156I520.WMF [E]
[D]
B156I524.WMF
[G]
[F]
B156I552.WMF
CAUTION
procedure.

2. Remove the rear cover [B] ( x 2).
3. Remove the upper right cover [C] ( x 2).
4. Remove the cap [D].
5. Install the bracket [E] ( x 2).
6. Connect the cable [F] to the I/O board and route it as shown.
NOTE: If the cable is installed correctly, the length [G] is about 140 mm.
B156/B220 1-64 SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
KEY COUNTER INSTALLATION
[A]
Installation
[B]
[D]
[C]
B156I526.WMF
[F]
[E]
[G] B156I527.WMF
7. Hold the key counter plate nuts [A] on the inside of the key counter bracket [B]
and insert the key counter holder [C].
8. Secure the key counter holder to the bracket ( x 2).
9. Install the key counter cover [D] ( x 2).
10. Install the stepped screw [E].
11. Connect the cable [F].
12. Hook the key counter holder assembly [G] onto the stepped screw and secure
it ( x 1).
13. The restricted access control for the key counter is enabled by the Copier UP
mode.
SM 1-65 B156/B220
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
ANTI-CONDENSATION HEATER
1.18 ANTI-CONDENSATION HEATER
[G]
[B]
[F]
[C]
[D]
[A] B156I620.WMF
[E]
[H]
B156I531.WMF
CAUTION
procedure.

3. Remove the lower rear cover [C] ( x 2).
4. Remove the oil tank [D].
NOTE: Hang the left oil pipe [E] in the notch [F] in the controller box. Then, oil
does not fall from the pipe to the floor.
5. Connect the two connectors [G].
6. Install the oil tank at its initial position.
NOTE: When you install the oil tank, make sure that the position of the mark
[H] on the oil pipe is as shown in the diagram above. If you do not do
this, the oil is not correctly supplied to the fusing unit.
B156/B220 1-66 SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
ANTI-CONDENSATION HEATER
[D]
Installation
[E]
[B]
[A]
[C]
B156I529.WMF
B156I528.WMF
7. Remove the rear scale [A] ( x 3), left scale [B] ( x 2), and exposure glass
[C].
NOTE: When installing the exposure glass, make sure that the mark [D] is
positioned at the rear left corner, as shown.
8. Install the anti-condensation heater [E] ( x 2, x 1).
9. Reinstall the exposure glass and the scales.
SM 1-67 B156/B220
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
TRAY HEATER
1.19 TRAY HEATER
[B]
[F]
[C]
[D]
[A] B156I620.WMF B156I530.WMF
[E]
CAUTION
procedure.

4. Slide out the 1st and 2nd paper trays.
5. Pass the connector [D] through the opening [E].
6. Install the tray heater assembly [F]( x 1).
B156/B220 1-68 SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
TRAY HEATER
Installation
[D]
[C]
[A]
[E]
B156I531.WMF
[B]
B156I551.WMF
[F]
7. Remove the oil tank [A].
NOTE: Hang the left oil pipe [B] in the notch [C] in the controller box. Then, oil
8. Connect the two connectors [D].
9. Install the oil tank at its initial position.
[E] on the oil pipe is as shown in the diagram above. If you do not do
10. Connect the heater cable to the ac cable [F].
11. Reassemble the machine.
SM 1-69 B156/B220
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
TRAY HEATER (OPTIONAL PAPER TRAY UNIT)
1.20 TRAY HEATER (OPTIONAL PAPER TRAY UNIT)
[B]
[D]
[C] [E]
B456I502.WMF
[A] [D]
B456I620.WMF
CAUTION
procedure.

2. Remove the rear cover for the main machine [B] ( x 2).
4. Remove the joint brackets [D] ( x 1 each).
5. Remove the rear cover for the optional paper tray unit [E] ( x 2).
6. Slide out the paper trays from the optional paper tray unit.
B156/B220 1-70 SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
TRAY HEATER (OPTIONAL PAPER TRAY UNIT)
Installation
[A]
[C]
[B]
[J]
B456I201.WMF
[H]
[K]
[G]
[F] [I]
[L]
[D] [E] B456I292.WMF
7. Pass the connector [A] through the opening [B].

8. Install the tray heater [C] ( x 1).
9. Connect the heater connector [D] to the cable [E].
10. Remove the oil tank [F].
NOTE: Hang the left oil pipe [G] in the notch [H] in the controller box. Then, oil
11. Install the clamp [I].
NOTE: Make sure that the ac cable [J] from the main machine goes behind the
bracket [K].
12. Connect the cable to the ac cable [J]. Then attach the cable with the clamp.
13. Install the oil tank and the rear covers.
[L] on the oil pipe is as shown in the diagram above. If you do not do
SM 1-71 B156/B220
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
TRAY HEATER (OPTIONAL LCT)
1.21 TRAY HEATER (OPTIONAL LCT)
[B]
[D]
[E]
[D] B457I502.WMF
[C]
[A] B457I620.WMF
[F]
[G]
B457I501.WMF
CAUTION
procedure.

2. Remove the rear cover for the main machine [B] ( x 2).
4. Remove the joint brackets [D] ( x 1 each).
5. Remove the rear cover for the optional LCT [E] ( x 2).
6. Slide out the paper tray [F] from the optional LCT.
7. Push stopper [G] on the right slide rail and remove the paper tray.
B156/B220 1-72 SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
TRAY HEATER (OPTIONAL LCT)
Installation
[A] [B]
[C]
[L]
B457I251.WMF
[K]
[H]
[J]
[F] [I]
[E]
[D] B457I291.WMF
[G]
8. Pass the connector [A] through the opening [B].

9. Install the tray heater [C] ( x 1).
10. Connect the heater connector [D] to the cable [E].
11. Remove the oil tank [F].
NOTE: Hang the left oil pipe [G] in the notch [H] in the controller box. Then, oil
12. Install the clamp [I].
NOTE: Make sure that the ac cable [J] from the main machine goes behind the
oil bracket [K].
13. Connect the cable to the ac cable [J]. Then attach the cable with the clamp.
14. Install the oil tank and the rear covers.
[L] on the oil pipe is as shown in the diagram above. If you do not do
SM 1-73 B156/B220
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
MAIN UNIT
2. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
2.1 MAIN UNIT
2.1.1 OVERVIEW
Maintenance
Preventive
Oil supply unit
Fusing subunit
PCU
Charge corona unit
B156P501.WMF
SM 2-1 B156/B220
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
MAIN UNIT
2.1.2 WASTE TONER BOTTLES

IMPORTANT: You must remove toner from the waste toner bottles during each service
call.
B156P502.BMP B156P503.BMP
T/B waste
toner bottle
O/B waste
toner bottle
T/B: Transfer Belt
O/B: OPC Belt
B156/B220 2-2 SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
MAIN UNIT
PM Table
After replacing a part, reset the PM counter for that part (SP 7-804).
Abbreviations: Clean, Inspect, Oil replenishment, Replace, Emergency Maintenance
Optical System
Prints Developments
Maintenance
EM Remarks
Preventive
70K 80K 120K 70K 120K 240K
White plate C Optical cloth
1st mirror C Optical cloth
2nd mirror C Optical cloth
3rd mirror C Optical cloth
Front/rear rails C Damp/dry cloth
Exposure glass C C Glass cleaner
Dust shield glass Optical cloth and dry
C C
(laser optics unit) cloth
APS sensors C Dry cloth
Around the PCU

Prints Developments
EM Remarks
70K 80K 120K 50K 120K 240K
Charge corona unit Replace as whole units
R or individual parts
(listed below).
PCU R
T/B waste toner bottle R C Empty the bottle
ID sensor C Blower brush
O/B waste toner bottle C R C Empty the bottle
Components Parts of the Charge Corona Unit

Prints Developments
EM Remarks
70K 80K 120K 50K 120K 240K
Charge Corona Wire R
Charge Corona Grid R
Charge Corona Cleaner R
Development Unit
Prints Developments
EM Remarks
70K 80K 120K 60K 120K 240K
Development unit-C R Refer to the PM
Development unit-M R counter for each unit.
Development unit-Y R Do SP 3-929 after you
Development unit-K replace a development
unit (see section 3.5
R for details).
(Not reclaimed at the
reclamation center)
SM 2-3 B156/B220
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
MAIN UNIT
Paper Feed System

Prints Developments
EM Remarks
70K 80K 120K 75K 120K 240K
Idle roller (registration) C Damp/dry cloth
Registration sensor C Damp/dry cloth
Transport guide C Damp/dry cloth
Feed roller (main unit) R
Vertical transport roller C Damp/dry cloth
Friction pad (main unit) R
Fusing Unit
Prints Developments
EM Remarks
60K 80K 120K 75K 120K 240K
Fusing subunit R Replace as whole units
Oil supply unit or individual parts
R
(listed below).
Thermistor I
Fusing oil O
.Components Parts of the Fusing Sub Unit and Oil Supply Unit
Prints Developments
EM Remarks
60K 80K 120K 75K 120K 240K
Oil supply pad R I, C See Note 1
Sponge roller R I, C See Note 1
Fusing cleaning roller R
Rear oil absorber R
Front oil absorber R
Front oil tank absorber R
Long oil tank absorber R
Rear oil tank absorber R
Fusing cover absorber R
Oil supply roller R I, C See Note 1
Oiling roller R I, C See Note 1
Pressure cleaning roller R
Fusing belt unit R I, C See Note 1
Pressure roller R
Pressure roller strippers R
Idle gear 28Z/35Z R
Gear 47Z R
Front spring plate R
Rear spring plate R
Note 1: Carefully remove paper dust and toner (for example, with a dry cloth).
B156/B220 2-4 SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
MAIN UNIT
Filters
Prints Developments
EM Remarks
70K 80K 120K 75K 120K 240K
Exhaust filters R
Ozone filter R
Maintenance
Preventive
Others
Prints Developments
EM Remarks
70K 80K 120K 75K 120K 240K
Breaker Check the function
once a year. See
section 3.16.
By-pass Tray Unit

Prints Developments
EM Remarks
70K 80K 120K 75K 120K 240K
Feed roller R
Pickup roller R
Separation roller R
Friction pad C Damp cloth
SM 2-5 B156/B220
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
OPTIONAL UNIT PM TABLE
2.2 OPTIONAL UNIT PM TABLE

Abbreviations: Clean, Inspect, Oil replenishment, Replace, Emergency Maintenance
Duplex Unit
Prints Developments
EM Remarks
70K 80K 120K 75K 120K 240K
Idle roller (inverter) C Damp/dry cloth
Idle roller Damp/dry cloth
C
(vertical transport)
Auto-reverse Document Feeder

Prints Developments
EM Remarks
70K 80K 120K 75K 120K 240K
Pickup roller R
Feed belt R
Separation roller R
Stamp I
ADF exposure glass C C Damp/dry cloth
Platen cover C C Damp/dry cloth
Paper Tray Unit

Prints Developments
EM Remarks
70K 80K 120K 75K 120K 240K
Pickup roller R
Feed roller R
Separation roller R
Large Capacity Tray

Prints Developments
EM Remarks
70K 80K 120K 75K 120K 240K
Pickup roller R
Feed roller R
Separation roller R
B156/B220 2-6 SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SPECIAL TOOLS
3. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT
CAUTION
Turn off the main power switch and unplug the machine before beginning
any of the procedures in this section.
NOTE: This manual uses the following symbols.

: See or Refer to : Screws : Connector : Clip ring
: E-ring
Replacement
Adjustment
3.1 SPECIAL TOOLS
and
Part Number Description Qty
A0069104 Scanner Positioning Pin (4 pcs/set) 1
B6456700 SD Card 1
B6456800 USB SD Card Adapter 1
A0929503 C4 Color Test Chart (3 pcs/set) 1
C4019503 20X Magnification Scope 1
3.2 FILTERS [A] [B] [C]
1. Filter covers [B, D, and E]

[D]
2. Exhaust filters [A, C, G, and I]
3. Filter holder [F]
4. Ozone filter [H]
[E]
[I]
[F]
B156R819.WMF
[H] [G]
SM 3-1 B156/B220
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SCANNER UNIT
3.3 SCANNER UNIT

3.3.1 EXPOSURE GLASS
[D] [A]
1. Rear scale [A] ( x 3)
2. Left scale [B] ( x 2) [B]
NOTE: After replacing the left scale,
adjust the scanner white
level ( 3.14).
3. Exposure glass [C]
NOTE: When reassembling, position the
glass marker [D] at the rear-left
corner.
[C]
B156R222.WMF
3.3.2 APS SENSORS [A]
1. Exposure glass ( 3.3.1)

[C]
2. Original length sensor 1 [A]
( x 1, x 1)
3. Original length sensor 2 [B]
( x 1, x 1) [B]
4. Original width sensor [C]
( x 1, x1)
B156R223.WMF
B156/B220 3-2 SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SCANNER UNIT
3.3.3 LENS BLOCK ASSEMBLY

[B]
[A]
2. Rear cover ( 3.4.2)
3. Scanner right cover [A] ( x 2)
4. Inner cover [B] ( x 4)
Replacement
Adjustment
and
B156R004.WMF
[C]
5. Lens block assembly [C]
( x 4, x 4)
NOTE: Do not remove the paint-
locked screws.
6. After reassembling, input the data
in accordance with the data sheet
included in the spare SBU unit (
SP4-540).
Refer to the diagram on the next

page.
Row No. 1: Numbers 1 to 6

please ignore
Row No. 2: Numbers 7 to 10 B156R224.WMF
please store in the following SP
modes
7: SP 4-540-001
8: SP 4-540-002
9: SP 4-540-003
10: SP 4-540-004
Row No. 3: Numbers 11 to 14 please store in the following SP modes
11: SP 4-540-021
12: SP 4-540-022
13: SP 4-540-023
14: SP 4-540-024
Before inputting the number, check whether it is + or (look at the data
sheet), then input a +ve or ve number accordingly.
7. Check the registrations ( SP4-010/011 Chapter 3, Copy adjustments)
NOTE: After replacing the left scale, adjust the scanner white level ( 3.14).
SM 3-3 B156/B220
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SCANNER UNIT
B156R999.JPG
B156/B220 3-4 SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SCANNER UNIT
3.3.4 EXPOSURE LAMP STABILIZER

2. Exposure lamp stabilizer bracket [A]
( x 2, x 2)
[A]
3. Exposure lamp stabilizer [B] ( x 2)
Replacement
Adjustment
[B]
and
B156R007.WMF
3.3.5 SCANNER LAMP
1. Exposure glass ( 3.3.1) [D]

[C]
3. Operation panel [A]
( x 5, x 1)
4. Scanner right cover [B] ( x 2)
5. Scanner left cover [C] ( x 1) [A]
6. Scanner rear cover [D] ( x 1)
[B]
B156R002.WMF
[E]
7. Left frame [E] ( x 2)
8. Front frame [F] ( x 5)
[F]
B156R225.WMF
SM 3-5 B156/B220
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SCANNER UNIT
[A]
9. Scanner I/O board ( 3.3.6)
10. Rear frame with the rear rail frame [A]
( x 9, x 1)
B156R103.WMF
[B]
11. Lamp guard [B] ( x 2) [F]
12. Release the cable holder [C]. [C]
[D]
13. Pulley [D]
NOTE: Use caution not to
bend the pulley guides.
14. Push down the part [E]
15. Slide out the scanner lamp [F]
NOTE: After replacing the
scanner lamp, adjust
the scanner white level
( 3.14).
[E]
B156R101.WMF
B156/B220 3-6 SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SCANNER UNIT
16. Disconnect the connector [A]. [A]

17. Remove the paper length sensor [B]
( x 1).
[C]
18. Remove the scanner lamp cable (
[C] with a screw).
19. Remove the cable guide [D]. [D]
Reassembling [B]
When you install the scanner lamp,
make sure that the binding [E] is set as
Replacement
Adjustment
shown. Also, make sure that the cable
and
that has a black tube is installed on the
cable guide as shown [F]. [F]
[E] B156R102.WMF
The cable must not be loose. Move the

clamp [G] to adjust the tension in the
cable.
OK
NG
B156R104.WMF
[G]
SM 3-7 B156/B220
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SCANNER UNIT
3.3.6 SCANNER I/O BOARD
1. Scanner right cover and scanner [A]

rear cover ( 3.3.5)
2. Scanner I/O board [A]
( x 4, x 7)
B156R006.WMF
3.3.7 SCANNER MOTOR
1. Scanner I/O board ( 3.3.6) [B]

2. Scanner motor [A] ( x 2, Spring x 1)
[A]
3. Timing belt [B]
B156R008.WMF
3.3.8 FRONT SCANNER WIRE
1. Front frame ( 3.3.5) [A]

2. To make reassembly easy, slide the
first scanner to the right
( Reassembling the Front Scanner
Wire).
3. Front scanner wire clamp [A]
4. Front scanner wire bracket [B]
( x 1)
5. Front scanner wire and scanner drive [B]
pulley [C] ( x 1) [C] B156R226.WMF
B156/B220 3-8 SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SCANNER UNIT
Reassembling the Front Scanner Wire

[C]
1. Pass the end with the ball [A] through
the left square hole from the front.
[A]
2. Position the center ball [B] in the
middle of the notch, as shown by the
[B]
arrow.
3. Pass the ball end [A] through the
notch on the right. [D]
4. Wind the end with the ring [C]
clockwise three times; wind the ball
end [A] counterclockwise five times.
Replacement
NOTE: The two red marks [D] should
Adjustment
meet when you have done
and
B156R227.WMF
this.
5. Stick the wire to the pulley with tape,
so you can easily handle the pulley
and wire during installation. [F] [G] [H]
6. Install the drive pulley on the
shaft [E].
NOTE: Do not screw the pulley
onto the shaft yet.
7. Insert the ball end into the slit [F],
with the end going via the rear
track of the left pulley [G] and
the rear track of the movable
pulley [H].
B156R228.WMF
[E]
SM 3-9 B156/B220
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SCANNER UNIT
8. Hook the ring end onto the front

scanner wire bracket [A], with the
end going via the front track of
the right pulley [B] and the front [A]
track of the movable pulley [C].
NOTE: Do not screw the
scanner wire bracket in
place yet.
9. Remove the tape from the drive [C]
pulley.
[B] B156R229.WMF
[G]
10. Insert a scanner positioning pin [D]
[D] through the 2nd carriage hole [L]
[E] and the left holes [F] in the
front rail. Insert another scanner
positioning pin [G] through the
1st carriage hole [H] and the right [J]
holes in the front rail [I].
11. Insert two more scanner
[E]
positioning pins through the
holes in the rear rail.
[K]
12. Screw the drive pulley to the [H]
shaft [J].
13. Screw the scanner wire bracket
to the front rail [K]. [F] [I] B156R230.WMF
14. Install the scanner wire clamp [L].

15. Pull out the positioning pins.
NOTE: 1) After removing the positioning pins, make sure the 1st and 2nd
carriages move smoothly. If they do not, repeat steps 10 through 15.
2) After replacing the carriage, adjust the scanner white level ( 3.14).
B156/B220 3-10 SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SCANNER UNIT
3.3.9 REAR SCANNER WIRE

[A]
2. Scanner motor ( 3.3.7)
3. Left frame ( 3.3.5)
4. Scanner I/O board ( 3.3.6)
5. Rear frame [A] with the rear rail frame
( x 9, x 1)
6. To make reassembly easy, slide to the
right ( Reassembling the Rear
Scanner Wire).
Replacement
Adjustment
and
B156R103.WMF
[C]
[B]
7. Rear scanner wire clamp [B]
8. Rear scanner wire bracket [C] ( x 1)
9. Scanner motor gear [D] ( x 1)
10. Rear scanner wire and scanner drive
pulley [E] ( x 1)
[D]
B156R231.WMF
[E]
SM 3-11 B156/B220
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SCANNER UNIT
Reassembling the Rear Scanner Wire

1. Pass the end with the ball [A] [A] [C]
through the right square hole
from the front.
2. Position the center ball [B] in
the middle of the notch, as
shown by the arrow. [B]
3. Pass the ball end [A] through

the drive pulley notch.
[D]
4. Wind the end with the ring [C]
counterclockwise three times;
wind the ball end [A] clockwise
five times.
NOTE: The two red marks [D]
should meet when you
have done this. B156R232.WMF
5. Stick the wire to the pulley with tape, so you can easily handle the pulley and
wire during installation.
6. Install the drive pulley on the shaft.
NOTE: Do not screw the pulley onto the shaft yet.
7. Install the wire.
NOTE: The winding pattern is a mirror image of that of the front scanner wire.
8. Perform steps 10 through 15 in Reassembling the Front Scanner Wire.
B156/B220 3-12 SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
LASER UNIT
3.4 LASER UNIT
WARNING
Turn off the main switch and unplug the machine before beginning any of
the procedures in this section. Laser beams can cause serious eye injury.
3.4.1 CAUTION DECAL LOCATION
Replacement
Adjustment
and
CAUTION
CATION-CLASS 3B LASER RADIATION
VORSICHT
WHEN OPEN
AVOID EXPOSURE TO THE BEAM
VORSICHT-LASERSTRAHLUNG KLASSE 3B
WENN ABDECKUNG GEOFFNET
NICHT DEM STRAHL AUSSETZEN
>PS<
B156CAUTION.WMF
B156R233.WMF
DANGER
Turn off the main switch and disconnect the power plug from the power
outlet before beginning any disassembly or adjustment of the laser unit.
This printer uses a class-1 laser beam with a wavelength of 650 nm and an
output of 7 mW. The laser can cause serious eye injury.
SM 3-13 B156/B220
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
LASER UNIT
3.4.2 LASER UNIT
[D]
[F]
[B]
[E]
[C]
B156R924.WMF
[E]
[A] B156I620.WMF
1. Connector cover [A] ( x 1)

2. Rear cover [B] ( x 2)
3. Lower rear cover [C] ( x 2)
4. Remove the screw [D]. Then loosen the eight screws [E].
5. Move the controller box cover [F]
to the right, and then remove it.
6. LD unit cable [G] ( x 1)
[G]
B156R151.WMF
B156/B220 3-14 SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
LASER UNIT
7. Open the left cover [A] ( x 2).

8. ID chip connectors [B] ( x 4) [C]
9. Development units [C] x 4 ( 3.5)
[B]
Replacement
Adjustment
[A]
and
B156R234.WMF
10. Left cover [D]

11. Open the front cover.
[D]
12. Lower left cover [E] ( x 3)
[E]
B156R235.WMF
[F]
13. Dust shield glass cleaner lever [F]
NOTE: The dust shield glass cleaner
lever is the blue lever at the
left side of the charge corona
unit ( 3.6.3).
B156R236.WMF
SM 3-15 B156/B220
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
LASER UNIT
[A]
14. LD cover [A] ( x 2)
15. Laser unit [B] ( x 4, Flat cable x 1)
NOTE: When reassembling,
connect the flat cable with
the blue side down.
[B]
B156R237.WMF
Adjusting for Image Skew

[A]
1. Positioning pin [A] ( x 1)
2. Loosen (x 4) [B].
3. Adjust the position of the laser unit
4. Fasten (x 4) [B].
NOTE: After changing the position of [ NOTE]
the laser unit, do not reinstall
the positioning pin. Keep the
pin in a safe place.
[B]
B156R238.WMF
NOTE: When the image skews as
shown on the right, move the unit
1 mm in the direction of the black
arrow as shown in the diagram
above and to the right.
0.6mm
Paper feed
(A3 SEF)
B156R239.WMF
B156/B220 3-16 SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
LASER UNIT
D-Phase Adjustment
This adjustment corrects the difference in density on the left and right sides of the
paper. The data sheet (distributed with the laser unit) is necessary for this
adjustment. After replacing the laser unit, do the following adjustment.
NOTE: 1) If the D-phase adjustment is not made, a difference in the density may
be seen. This difference can be conspicuous when the gray scale in the
Color Chart C-4 is copied or when an original is repeatedly copied.
2) The D-phase adjustment is necessary whenever a difference in the
density is seen. Keep the data sheet inside the front cover for future
use.
1. Print out the test pattern with SP5-
955-1 and select pattern 50 ( Feed direction
Replacement
Adjustment
5.1.3).
and
2. Check if horizontal black stripes can
be seen.
a) If stripes cannot be seen
(Figure 2), the D-phase
adjustment is not required.
b) If stripes can be seen (Figure
1), the D-phase adjustment is
required. Go on to the next B156R241.WMF
step.
3. See the value of Mag. Shift Error: LD1-2 below the bar code on the data sheet,
and find the range in Table 1 which Mag. Shift Adjustment
includes the value. Error: LD1-2 SP2-951-1 SP2-951-2
11.8 10.4 8 0
4. Find the corresponding values of 7 0
10.3 9.0
Adjustment in Table 1, and input
8.9 7.6 6 0
them in SP2-951-1 and SP2-951-2
7.5 6.2 5 0
respectively.
6.1 4.8 4 0
For example, when the value of 4.7 3.4 3 0
Mag. Shift Error: LD1-2 on the 3.3 2.0 2 0
data sheet is 4.0, enter 3 in 1.9 1.0 1 0
SP2-951-1 and enter 0 in SP2- 0.9 1.0 0 0
951-2. 1.1 2.0 0 1
2.1 3.4 0 2
5. Print out the test pattern with SP5- 0 3
3.5 4.8
955-1 and select pattern 50. 0 4
4.9 6.2
6.3 7.6 0 5
6. Check if vertical black stripes can
7.7 9.0 0 6
be seen.
9.1 10.4 0 7
7. After you complete the test prints, 10.5 11.8 0 8
set SP 5-955-1 to 0.
Table 1
SM 3-17 B156/B220
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
LASER UNIT
Laser Beam Pitch Adjustment
1. Print out the test pattern with

SP5-955-1, then select pattern Feed direction
15 ( 5.1.3).
2. Check if vertical black stripes
can be seen.
a) If stripes cannot be seen
(Figure 2), laser beam
pitch adjustment is not
required.
b) If stripes can be seen
(Figure 1), laser beam
pitch adjustment is
required. Go on to the B156R240.WMF
next step.
3. To adjust the laser beam pitch,

tighten or loosen the screw [A]
on the LD unit holder. [A]
4. Print out the test pattern with
SP5-955-1 and select pattern
15.
5. Repeat steps 2 through 4 until
the black stripes disappear
(Figure 2).
6. After you complete the test
prints, set SP 5-955-1 to 0.
B156R242.WMF
B156/B220 3-18 SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
LASER UNIT
3.4.3 POLYGONAL MIRROR MOTOR AND LSD
WARNING
Do not touch any edges of the polygon mirror, spring, or bracket. These
edges can cause serious injury.
1. Development units x 4 ( 3.5), LD cover [A]

( 3.4.2)
2. Cover [A] ( x 1)
NOTE: Before removing the cover, clean
the cover to prevent toner from
entering into the unit.
Replacement
Adjustment
and
B156R243.WMF
[C]
3. Polygonal mirror motor [B]
( x 1, x 4) [B]
NOTE: Do not touch the mirror
surface.
4. Synch. detection board (LSD) [C]
( x 1, x 1)
SM 3-19 B156/B220
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
DEVELOPMENT UNIT
3.5 DEVELOPMENT UNIT
CAUTION
Do not touch the development unit sleeves or ID chip terminals.
WARNING
Turn off the main switch before you start the procedures in this section.
1. Open the left cover [A] ( x 2)

2. ID chip connector [B]
3. Lift up the development unit [C], [B]
and pull it out of the machine.
NOTE: Remove the units in the order
K, C, Y, M. For example,
before removing the M unit, [C]
remove the K, C, and Y units
first.
4. Remove the dummy toner
cartridge from the new [A]
development unit.
B156R234.WMF
5. Remove the toner cartridge from
the old development unit, and put
it in the new development unit.
6. Put the new development unit in the machine.
7. Turn on the main switch and start SP3-929 (Development Unit Replace).
1) Select the colors for the development units that you replaced.
2) Select 1.execute for the colors that you selected. Then, push OK.
3) Repeat 1) and 2) until all the colors of the replaced development units
are selected.
4) Go out from the SP mode.
Then, open and close the
front cover. The machine
does the development unit
set-up procedure.
NOTE: A white line or band may
appear on one end of the [D]
paper if a development unit
is incorrectly installed. To
correct this, pull out the
30mm
development unit partially
(about 30 mm) [D] and
slowly reinstall it. B156R246.WMF
B156/B220 3-20 SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PHOTOCONDUCTOR UNIT (PCU)
3.6 PHOTOCONDUCTOR UNIT (PCU)

3.6.1 PCU ASSEMBLY
NOTE: 1) Before replacing any of the parts or consumables in this section, cover
the floor with cloth or some sheets of paper.
2) Never tilt the unit. The toner may come out of the unit.
3) When handling the unit, grasp the brown (front) and metal (top) grips.
Never touch the OPC (left) or transfer (right) belts.
4) After removing the photoconductor unit, cover it with a light-proof sheet.
Keep it in a dark place.
Replacement
Adjustment
and
[B]
[A]
B156R247.WMF
1. Open the front cover [A].

2. Open the right cover [B].
3. Pull the unit out of the machine ( x 3).
4. Grasp the brown and metal grips.
5. Lift the unit and remove it.
SM 3-21 B156/B220
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
6. Before you install the new PCU, remove the cap [C].
[C]
Install the new PCU carefully. If you install it too quickly, this will cause damage to
the quenching lamp support.
Deformed
B156/B220 3-22 SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
If you removed or installed the left inner cover, make sure that the projections
shown here are below the cover (they must not be seen).
Replacement
Adjustment
and
SM 3-23 B156/B220
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
3.6.2 WASTE TONER BOTTLES
1. T/B waste toner bottle [A]
[A]
B156R248.WMF
2. O/B waste toner bottle [B]

NOTE: There is much more O/B
waste toner than T/B waste
toner. Dispose of the O/B
waste toner whenever you
work on the machine.
[B]
B156R249.WMF
Toner Disposal
1) Remove the cap [C].
2) Dispose of the toner according to local regulations.
[C]
O/B waste T/B waste toner

toner bottle bottle
B156R250.WMF
T/B: Transfer Belt

O/B: OPC Belt
B156/B220 3-24 SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
3.6.3 CHARGE CORONA UNIT, GRID, WIRE, AND CLEANER
1. Modular cable [A]

2. Charge corona unit [C] (Loosen
[B])
[B]
[A]
Replacement
Adjustment
[C]
and
B156R251.WMF
3. Front bracket ( x 1) [D] [F]

4. Grid [E] [E]
5. Rear bracket [F]
[D]
B156R252.WMF
[H]
6. Front wire cover [G]
[J]
7. Rear wire cover [H]
[G]
8. Wire cleaner [I]
9. Unhook the corona wire [J].
[I]
B156R253.WMF
SM 3-25 B156/B220
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
When you remove the charge corona unit, keep the unit level while you pull it out
carefully. Do not lower or turn the unit.
B156/B220 3-26 SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
3.6.4 CHARGE CORONA WIRE CLEANER MOTOR
1. Charge corona unit ( 3.6.3)

2. Front cover [A] ( x 3)
3. Motor [B]
[A] [B]
B156R254.WMF
Replacement
Adjustment
and
3.6.5 OPC BELT CLEANING UNIT
1. O/B waste toner bottle ( 3.6.2) [A]
2. Photoconductor unit ( 3.6.1)

4. Drive gear [A] ( x 1)
5. Rear brace [B] ( x 1) [B]
6. Front brace [C] ( x 1)

7. OPC belt cleaning unit [D] ( x 2)
[C]
NOTE: Hold up the photoconductor unit [D]
while removing the OPC belt
B156R255.WMF
cleaning unit.
3.6.6 IMAGE TRANSFER BELT CLEANING UNIT

[A]
1. Photoconductor unit ( 3.6.1)
[B]
2. Bracket [A] ( x 3)
3. Image transfer belt cleaning unit [B]
(spring x 2)
B156R919.WMF
SM 3-27 B156/B220
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PAPER TRANSFER UNIT
3.7 PAPER TRANSFER UNIT

3.7.1 VERTICAL TRANSPORT UNIT
1. Open the right lower cover [A].

2. Right cover [B] ( x 1)
[B]
B156R256.WMF
[A]
3.7.2 TRANSFER ROLLER
1. Brace [A] ( x 1)
2. Remove the screws ( x 4) for
the discharge unit.
NOTE: To remove the screws,
turn the roller unit [B] on
its pivot.
[B]
B156R403.WMF
[A]
3. Transfer roller [C]
( x 2, Bushing x 2, Bearing x 2)
[C]
B156R404.WMF
B156/B220 3-28 SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
FUSING/PAPER EXIT
3.8 FUSING/PAPER EXIT

CAUTION
Turn off the main switch and wait until the fusing unit cools down before
beginning any of the procedures in this section. The fusing unit can cause
serious burns.
3.8.1 FUSING UNIT
NOTE: 1) After removing the fusing unit, see if oil had dripped from the exit of the
oil pipe.
2) Do not turn the main power on with the fusing unit out of the machine if
Replacement
an oil end condition exists. This will clear the oil end counter, and the
Adjustment
machine will incorrectly detect oil.
and
1. Remove the screw [A], and pull [B] [C]
out the unit out of the machine.
2. Unhook the bottom stopper [B], [E]
and grasp the rear end [C] of the
unit.
3. Slide the unit to the end of the
base plate [D].
4. Release the unit [E].
5. After you install a new fusing unit,
reset the PM counter with SP 7- [A] [D] B156R257.WMF
804-7.
3.8.2 OIL SUPPLY UNIT
1. Fusing unit ( 3.8.1) [B]

2. Put the fusing unit on a level
place.
[D]
3. Remove the cap [A] from the
fusing unit cover, and put it in the
oil supply opening [B]. [C]
4. Connector cover [C] ( x 1)
5. Oil supply unit [D] ( x 1)
NOTE: Do not touch the oiling felt.
NOTE: When reassembling, install
the oil supply unit, remove the
cap from the oil supply [E]
B156R258.WMF
opening, wipe the cap and the [A]
cap holder [E] with dry cloth, and put it on the holder.
SM 3-29 B156/B220
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
FUSING/PAPER EXIT
3.8.3 OIL SUPPLY PAD

CAUTION: Empty silicone oil out of the oil supply unit into a vessel or container
before beginning the following steps.
1. Oil supply unit [A] ( 3.8.2) [A]

2. Springs [B] x 2 [C]
3. Cleaning roller assembly [C]

( x 1, Shoulder screw x 1)
4. Stay [D] ( x 1)
5. Slide the pad [E] and pull it out.
NOTE: If you cannot put the springs in the
places, remove the cleaning roller
[E]
( 3.8.4). [D]
[B]
B156R259.WMF
3.8.4 CLEANING ROLLER AND FUSING SPONGE ROLLER
1. Oil supply unit ( 3.8.2) [B]
2. Cleaning roller [A] (Bushing x 2, x [A]

2)
3. Fusing sponge roller [B] (Bushing x
2, x 2, Spring x 2)
B156R260.WMF
B156/B220 3-30 SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
FUSING/PAPER EXIT
3.8.5 OILING ROLLER AND OIL SUPPLY ROLLER
[A]
[D]
Replacement
Adjustment
and
[B]
[C] B156R261.WMF
1. Oil supply unit ( 3.8.2)

2. Upper cover ( 3.8.6)
3. Oil supply roller [A] (Spring x 2, Bushing x 1, one-way clutch x 1)
NOTE: Make sure that the one-way clutch [D] is at the front side of the
machine.
4. Oiling roller [B] (Spring x 2, Bushing x 2)
SM 3-31 B156/B220
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
FUSING/PAPER EXIT
3.8.6 FUSING LAMPS
1. Oil supply unit ( 3.8.2)

2. Gear bracket [A] ( x 2)
[B]
3. Upper cover [B]
( x 1, shoulder screw x 1)
[A]
B156R262.WMF
4. Pull out the lamp (350W) [C] (

x 2).
5. Pull out the lamp (770W) [D] (
x 2, Cable x 1).
NOTE: 350W and 770W are
printed on the respective [D]
terminals.
[C] [F]
When installing the fusing B156R263.WMF
lamps
Make sure that you install the lamp in the correct orientation. The beveled terminals
[E] must be at the front of the machine as
shown, and the square terminals [F]
must be at the rear. If not, paper
creasing and/or unsatisfactory fusing can
occur.
[E]
B156R264.WMF
B156/B220 3-32 SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
FUSING/PAPER EXIT
3.8.7 FUSING INNER UNIT
1. Lamps ( 3.8.6)
2. Drive gear [A] [C] [B]
3. Hot roller lamp harness terminal [B]
( x 1)
4. Fusing inner unit [C] ( x 2, x 3)
[A]
Replacement
Adjustment
and
B156R265.WMF
3.8.8 PRESSURE ROLLER THERMOFUSE

[A]
1. Fusing inner unit ( 3.8.7)
2. Pressure roller thermofuse [A] ( x 2)
B156R266.WMF
SM 3-33 B156/B220
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
FUSING/PAPER EXIT
3.8.9 HOT ROLLER STRIPPERS
1. Oil supply unit ( 3.8.2) [F] [C] [B]

2. Fusing lamps ( 3.8.6)
3. Fusing inner unit ( 3.8.7) [D]
4. Gear [A] [E]
NOTE: Remove the gear before
removing the stripper pawl
assembly; otherwise, the
gear may be damaged.
[A]
5. Hot roller stripper pawl assembly [B]
(Spring x 1, x 2)
6. Hot roller stripper pawl [C]
B156R267.WMF
Reassembling
1. Put the spring [D] on the pawl.
2. Put the left end of the pawl in the square opening [E].
3. Put the front and rear ends of the pawl in the holder [F].
4. Confirm that the pawl moves correctly.
3.8.10 FUSING BELT UNIT AND PRESSURE ROLLER UNIT

[C]
2. Springs [A] [B]
3. Separate the fusing belt unit [C] and
the pressure roller unit [D].
[B]
[D]
[A] B156R268.WMF
B156/B220 3-34 SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
FUSING/PAPER EXIT
3.8.11 PRESSURE ROLLER, PRESSURE ROLLER GEAR, AND

CLEANING ROLLER
[A]
[G]
[C]
[F]
[E]
Replacement
Adjustment
and
[D]
[B]
B156R269.WMF
1. Pressure roller unit ( 3.8.10)

2. Gear [A]
3. Spring [B] ( x 1)
4. Pressure roller stripper assembly [C] ( x 2)
5. Front bracket [D] ( x 1)
6. Bearing [E]
7. Pressure roller [F]
8. Cleaning roller [G]
SM 3-35 B156/B220
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
FUSING/PAPER EXIT
3.8.12 PRESSURE ROLLER THERMISTOR
[C]
[B]
[A]
B156R270.WMF

2. Pressure roller lower stay [A] ( x 2)
3. Pressure roller thermistor holder [B] ( x 1)
4. Pressure roller thermistor [C]
B156/B220 3-36 SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
FUSING/PAPER EXIT
3.8.13 OIL ABSORBERS
[A]
[C]
[D]
Replacement
Adjustment
B156R271.WMF [F]
[G]
and
[B]
[L]
[K]
[J]
[I]
[E]
[H]
B156R825.WMF

2. Absorber 1 [A]
4. Absorber holder [B] ( x 1)
5. Absorber 2 [C]
6. Spring [D]
7. Absorber holder [E] ( x 1)
8. Absorber 3 [F]
9. Spring [G]
10. Base bracket [H] ( x 2)
11. Absorber holder [I] ( x 1)
12. Absorber 4 [J]
13. Absorber 5 [K]
14. Absorber 6 [L]
SM 3-37 B156/B220
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
FUSING/PAPER EXIT
3.8.14 FUSING ENTRANCE AND TRANSFER BELT SENSORS
[B]
[C]
[A]
[D]
B156R051.WMF
1. Right cover
2. Pull the PCU out of the machine. ( 3.6.1)
3. Fusing entrance sensor bracket [A] ( x 1)
4. Fusing entrance sensor [B] ( x 1)
5. Transfer belt sensor bracket [C] ( x 1, x 1)
6. Transfer belt sensor [D]
B156/B220 3-38 SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
FUSING/PAPER EXIT
3.8.15 PAPER EXIT/OVERFLOW SENSORS
CAUTION
Turn off the main switch and wait until the paper exit unit cools down
before beginning any of the procedures in this section. The paper exit unit
can cause serious burns.
1. Open the right cover [A]

2. Upper right cover [B]
[B]
Replacement
Adjustment
and
[A]
B156R272.WMF
3. Open the front cover [C].

4. Upper front cover [D] ( x 1) [D]
5. Paper exit upper cover [E]
[C] [E]
B156R273.WMF
SM 3-39 B156/B220
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
FUSING/PAPER EXIT
6. Paper exit tray [A] ( x 2)

7. Paper exit lower cover [B] ( x 1)
[B]
[A]
B156R274.WMF
[E]
8. Paper exit unit [C] ( x 3, x 1)
NOTE: Remove 2 connectors
[C]
before removing the unit.
To remove the last
connector, remove the unit
and turn it over. The
connector is on the bottom.
9. Paper exit sensor [D] [D]
10. Paper overflow sensor [E]
B156R275.WMF
B156/B220 3-40 SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PAPER FEED AND TRANSPORT
3.9 PAPER FEED AND TRANSPORT

3.9.1 FEED ROLLER AND FRICTION PAD
1. Paper trays [A]
[A]
Replacement
Adjustment
and
B156R276.WMF
[B]
2. Slide out the shaft [B] ( x 1).
[C]
3. Feed roller [C] (1 hook)
4. Friction pad [D] (2 hooks)
[D]
B156R277.WMF
SM 3-41 B156/B220
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
3.9.2 REGISTRATION SENSOR
1. Front cover [A] (L-shaped pin x 2)

2. Remove the upper tray.
3. Rear cover, lower rear cover, and
lower left cover ( 3.4.2)
4. Right cover ( 3.7.1)
5. Paper exit tray ( 3.8.14)
[A]
B156R278.WMF
[D]
7. Dust shield glass cleaning lever [B]
8. Open the left inner cover door [C].
9. Left inner cover [D] ( x 2)
10. Right inner cover [E] ( x 3)
NOTE: Pull out the PCU when
removing the right inner
cover. [C]
[E]
[B]
B156R279.WMF
B156/B220 3-42 SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
11. Rear right cover [A] ( x 4)
Replacement
Adjustment
and
[A]
B156R604.WMF
12. SD card cover [B] ( x 1)

13. Move the controller box [C] on its
hinge, away from the machine.
( x 6)
[B]
[C]
B156R605.WMF
SM 3-43 B156/B220
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
[C]
14. Connector bracket [A]
( x 2, x 1)
15. Connector bracket [B] ( x 2)
16. Pull out the handle [B].
[B]
17. Loosen the two screws on the
paper feed clutch bracket
( 3.11.6).
18. Vertical transport clutch [C]
( x 1)
[A]
B156R606.WMF
19. Transport guide [D] ( x 1)
[D]
B156R280.WMF
20. While releasing the wire, remove the

transport stay [E] ( x 2, x 1).
NOTE: You can see the wire clip from
the rear of the machine.
21. Registration sensor [F] ( x 1)
[E]
[F]
B156R281.WMF
B156/B220 3-44 SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
3.9.3 PAPER FEED SENSOR 1
1. Transport stay ( 3.9.2)

2. Paper feed sensor 1 [A] ( x 1)
NOTE: Unhook the rear two pawls
first, move the feeler, and
unhook the front pawl.
Replacement
Adjustment
and
B156R282.WMF [A]
3.9.4 PAPER NEAR-END SENSORS

2. Feeler [A]
3. Sensor bracket [B] ( x 1 each)
4. Paper near-end sensor [C] ( x 1
each)
[A]
B156R283.WMF [B]
[C]
SM 3-45 B156/B220
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
3.9.5 PAPER FEED SENSOR 2
1. Controller box ( 3.9.2).

2. Paper trays ( 3.9.1)
3. Connector bracket [A] ( x 3) [B]
4. Vertical transport clutch [B] ( x 1)
5. Bushing [C] ( x 1)
[C]
[A] B156R612.WMF
6. Roller unit [D] ( x 1, x 2)
B156R284.WMF
[D]
7. Roller bracket [E] ( x 1, Bushing x

1) [F]
8. Paper feed sensor 2 [F]
[E]
B156R285.WMF
B156/B220 3-46 SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
3.9.6 PAPER END SENSOR 1

2. Lower the feeler [A].
3. Sensor bracket [B] ( x 1)
4. Paper end sensor 1 [C] ( x 1)
[C]
Replacement
Adjustment
[B] [A]
and
B156R286.WMF
3.9.7 PAPER END SENSOR 2

2. Lower the feeler [A].
3. Paper end sensor 2 [B] ( x 1)
[A]
B156R287.WMF
[B]
SM 3-47 B156/B220
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS
3.10 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS

3.10.1 EXHAUST FAN AND I/O BOARD

2. SD card cover [A] ( x 1)
3. Move the controller box [B] on its hinge,
away from the machine ( x 6).
[A]
[B]
B156R605.WMF
4. Exhaust fan [C] ( x 2, x 1) [E]

5. I/O board cover [D] ( x 4)
6. I/O board [E] ( x 29, x 7)
[D]
[C] B156R801.WMF
B156/B220 3-48 SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
3.10.2 BICU BOARD AND CONTROLLER BOARD

[A]
2. Remove the screw [A], and then loosen
the eight screws [B].
3. Slide the controller box cover [C] to the
right, and then remove it.
[B]
Replacement
Adjustment
[C]
and
[B]
B156R924.WMF
[B]
4. BICU board [B] ( x 14, x 7)

NOTE: 1) Compare the settings of the
dip switches on the old
board with the settings on
the new board. If they are
different, change the
settings on the new board
to make them identical.
2) When replacing the
controller board only; leave
the 14 connectors
[B]
connected, remove the
seven screws, and
[C]
disconnect the BICU board
from the controller board. B156R817.WMF
5. Controller board [C] ( x 7, x 2)

NOTE: Remove the NVRAM, DIMMs, and optional boards from the old
controller board and install them on the new one.
SM 3-49 B156/B220
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
3.10.3 HDD
[A]
1. Controller box cover ( 3.10.2)
2. Disconnect the connectors [A] ( x 2).
3. Move the controller box, on its hinge, away
from the machine. ( 3.10.1)
4. HDD cover [B] ( x 5)
[B]
B156R823.WMF
5. Harness cover [C]

[D]
6. HDD bracket [D] ( x 4)
7. HDD [E] ( x 4, x 2)
After replacing the hard disk, do SP5-853- [E]
1 to download the preset stamp data from
the machine firmware to the new hard disk.
Then switch the machine off/on.
B156R891.WMF
[C]
B156/B220 3-50 SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
3.10.4 HIGH VOLTAGE SUPPLY BOARD
1. Photoconductor unit ( 3.6) [A]
2. Right inner cover ( 3.9.2)

3. Photoconductor unit rail [A] ( x 2)
Replacement
Adjustment
B156R288.WMF
and
4. High voltage supply board [B] [B]
( x 18, x 6)
NOTE: When reassembling, check
that the connectors are
correctly set.
W: White connector
Y: Yellow connector
G: Green connector
B: Blue connector
R: Red connector
B156R824.WMF
SM 3-51 B156/B220
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
3.10.5 POWER SUPPLY UNIT

NOTE: When you remove the oil pipe from the oil tank, hang the left oil pipe in the
notch in the controller box. Then, oil does not fall from the pipe to the floor
(see section 1.18: Installation Anti-Condensation Heater).
1. Move the controller box, on its [B]

hinge, away from the machine.
( 3.10.1).
2. Lower rear cover ( 3.4.2)
[A]
3. Oil tank [A]
4. Flywheel [B] ( x 3)
5. Duct [C] with bracket [D]
( x 5, x 1)
6. Oil tank holder [E] ( x 2)
7. Bracket [F] ( x 2) [E]
[F]
[D]
[C]
B156R814.WMF
8. Power supply unit [G]

( x 9, x 6) [G]
B156R815.WMF
B156/B220 3-52 SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
DRIVE UNITS
3.11 DRIVE UNITS

3.11.1 DEVELOPMENT CLUTCHES
K Development Units
[B]
1. Move the controller box, on its
hinge, away from the machine
( 3.10.1).
2. Unhook the locks [A] and pull out
the clutch [B] ( x 1).
NOTE: When reassembling,
connect the black clutch
Replacement
connector to the CN 334
Adjustment
[A]
coupler.
and
B156R803.WMF
C, Y and M Development Units

1. Flywheel [A] ( x 3) [D]
2. Clutch harness bracket [B] B
(x 1, x4)
3. Unhook the locks [C] and pull out
Y
the clutches [D] ( x 1).
W
When reassembling, connect the

[B]
clutches as follows: [C]
Cyan clutch connector to the blue
coupler
Yellow clutch connector to the yellow
coupler [A]
Magenta clutch connector to the white B156R804.WMF
coupler.
In the diagram B: Blue

Y: Yellow
W: White
SM 3-53 B156/B220
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
DRIVE UNITS
3.11.2 DEVELOPMENT MOTORS

( 3.10.1). [A]
2. Development motor for black and

cyan [A] ( x 1, x 3)
3. Development motor for yellow and
magenta [B] ( x 1, x 3)
[B]
B156R805.WMF
3.11.3 MAIN MOTOR

( 3.10.1).
[A]
2. Flywheel [A] ( x 3)
3. Main motor [B] ( x 1, x 3)
B156R806.WMF
[B]
B156/B220 3-54 SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
DRIVE UNITS
3.11.4 PCU GEAR BOX
1. Move the controller box on its

( 3.10.1).
2. Main motor ( 3.11.3)
3. Y and M development unit clutches
( 3.11.1)
4. Harness bracket screws [A] ( x 2, [C]
x 2)
[A]
5. Tension spring [B]
Replacement
Adjustment
6. PCU gear box assembly [C]
( x 1, x 5)
and
NOTE: When reassembling, make sure [B] B156R807.WMF
the tension spring [B] is
correctly installed. The spring maintains the tension of the timing belt that
transfers the drive power to the gear box.
3.11.5 FUSING UNIT MOTOR
1. Move the controller box, on its hinge,

away from the machine ( 3.10.1).
2. Fusing unit motor [A] ( x 1, x 3)
[A]
B156R289.WMF
SM 3-55 B156/B220
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
DRIVE UNITS
3.11.6 PAPER FEED CLUTCH 1
1. Move the controller box, on its hinge,

away from the machine ( 3.10.1). [D]
2. Pull out the handle [A].
3. Connector bracket [B] ( x 2, x 1)
4. Handle guard [C] ( x 2) [C]
5. Paper feed clutch bracket [D]
( x 1, bushing x 2)
[A]
[B]
B156R811.WMF
3.11.7 PAPER FEED MOTOR

2. Move the controller box, on its [B]
( 3.10.1).
3. Pull out the handle [A].
4. Connector bracket ( 3.11.6)
5. Handle guard ( 3.11.6)
6. Paper feed motor [B] with gears
( x 1, x 6)
NOTE: When reassembling, make
sure the vertical transport [A]
clutch is in position.
B156R810.WMF
B156/B220 3-56 SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
DRIVE UNITS
3.11.8 PAPER FEED CLUTCH 2

( 3.10.1). [A]
2. Flywheel ( 3.10.5)
3. Duct [A] with bracket [B]
( x 1, x 1)
4. Pull out the lower tray.
5. Connector bracket ( 3.11.6) [B]
6. Paper feed clutch assembly [C]
Replacement
Adjustment
( x 1, x 3) [C]
and
B156R812.WMF
3.11.9 REGISTRATION CLUTCH

( 3.10.1).
2. Unhook the lock [A] and pull the
clutch out [B] ( x 1).
[A]
B156R290.WMF
[B]
SM 3-57 B156/B220
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
DRIVE UNITS
3.11.10 OIL PUMP
[C]
[A]
[D]
[E]
[B] B156R822.WMF
1. Move the controller box, on it hinge, away from the machine ( 3.10.1)
2. Pipes [A, B]
NOTE: 1) Keep a piece of waste cloth at hand. Oil may drip from the pipe.
2) When reinstalling the pump, make sure to attach the upper tube
correctly to the oil exit [C]. If not, oil may leak inside the machine.
3. I/O board cover ( 3.10.1)
4. Oil pump bracket [D] ( x 3, x 1)
5. Oil pump [E] ( x 2)
Install the correct way up. There are two tabs at the top of the pump.
B156/B220 3-58 SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
COPY ADJUSTMENT
3.12 COPY ADJUSTMENT

3.12.1 PRINTING
NOTE: 1) Make sure the paper is installed correctly in each paper tray before you
start these adjustments.
2) Use the Trimming Area Pattern (SP5-955-1, No.11) to print the test
pattern for the following procedures.
3) Set SP 5-955-1 to 0 again after completing these printing adjustments.
Registration - Leading Edge/Side-to-Side

1. Check the leading edge registration for each paper feed station, and adjust
Replacement
Adjustment
them using SP1-001.
and
2. Check the side-to-side registration for each paper feed station, and adjust them
using SP1-002.
Tray SP mode Specification
B
Any paper tray SP1-001-1
By-pass feed SP1-001-9 3 2 mm
Duplex SP1-001-12 A
1st paper tray SP1-002-2
2nd paper tray SP1-002-3
3rd paper tray (optional
SP1-002-4 2 1.5 mm
paper tray 1), or LCT
4th paper tray (optional
SP1-002-5
paper tray 2)
By-pass feed SP1-002-1
B156R291.WMF
Duplex, side 2 SP1-002-6
A: Leading Edge Registration

B: Side-to-side Registration
SM 3-59 B156/B220
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
COPY ADJUSTMENT
Blank Margin
NOTE: If the leading edge/side-to-side registration cannot be adjusted within the
specifications, adjust the leading/back side edge trim margin.
1. Check the trailing edge and front side edge blank margins, and adjust them
using the following SP modes.
SP mode Specification D
Trailing edge SP2-101-4 3 2 mm
Front edge SP2-101-1 2 +2.5/-1.5 mm C
Leading edge SP2-101-3 3 2 mm
Back edge SP2-101-2 2 1.5 mm
B
B156R292.WMF
A: Trailing Edge Blank Margin

B: Right Edge Blank Margin
C: Leading Edge Blank Margin
D: Left Edge Blank Margin
Main Scan Magnification

1. Print the single-dot grid pattern (SP5-955-1, No.5).
2. Check the magnification, and adjust the magnification using SP2-100-1 if
necessary. The specification is 1%.
B156/B220 3-60 SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
COPY ADJUSTMENT
3.12.2 SCANNING
Before doing the following scanner adjustments, perform or check the printing
registration/side-to-side adjustment and the blank margin adjustment.
NOTE: Use a C4 test chart to perform the following adjustments.
Scanner Sub-Scan Magnification
1. Place the test chart on the exposure glass and

make a copy from one of the feed stations.
2. Check the magnification ratio. Use SP4-008 to
adjust if necessary.
Replacement
Adjustment
Standard: 1.0%.
and
A
A: Sub-scan magnification
B156R293.WMF
Scanner Leading Edge and Side-to-Side Registration
1. Place the test chart on the exposure glass and make A

a copy from one of the feed stations.
2. Check the leading edge and side-to-side registration,
and adjust them with the following SP modes if
necessary. Standard: 0 2 mm.
SP mode B
Sub-scan SP4-010
Main-scan SP4-011
B156R294.WMF
SM 3-61 B156/B220
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
COPY ADJUSTMENT
Main Scan Dot Position Correction

NOTE: Before adjusting the scanner, adjust the printer registration.
1. Enter the Copy SP mode and open SP4-932.

2. Check that each value corresponds to the factory-set value.
3. Touch the COPY Window key and copy the C-4 chart in the full-color photo
mode.
NOTE: Be sure to copy in the photo mode. This is because color displacement
cannot be checked properly in text mode.
4. Check the yellow and cyan vertical lines. (Use a Magnification Scope to do
this.) If they exactly overwrite the black line at the edges of the copy, exit the
SP mode to end the adjustment. If the yellow and cyan lines significantly
extend beyond the black line, proceed to the next step.
5. Press the SP Mode to return to the SP mode. Adjust the SP settings until the
output is acceptable.
SP4-932-1 Picture element correction red left edge
SP4-932-2 Picture element correction red right edge
SP4-932-3 Picture element correction blue left edge
SP4-932-4 Picture element correction blue right edge
B156/B220 3-62 SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
COPY ADJUSTMENT
3.12.3 ARDF IMAGE ADJUSTMENT

ARDF Side-to-Side and Leading Edge Registration
B
A: Sub-registration
Replacement
Adjustment
B: Main registration
and
B156R295.WMF
B156R294.WMF
Make a temporary test chart as shown above using A3/DLT paper.

1. Place the temporary test chart on the ARDF and make a copy from one of the
feed stations.
2. Check the registration, and adjust using the following SP modes if necessary.
SP Code What It Does Adjustment Range
SP6-006-1 Main Scan Registration 10 mm
SP6-006-2 Sub-Scan Registration (Simplex) 10 mm
SP6-006-4 Main Scan Registration (Duplex) 10 mm
SM 3-63 B156/B220
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
COPY ADJUSTMENT
ARDF Skew Adjustment
1
3
2
B156R297.WMF
When making a copy using the ADF and the image is skewed, do the following to
fix the skewed image.
NOTE: Before doing the following steps, make sure to confirm whether or not the
copy images made in platen mode and test patterns are not skewed.
1. Peel off the black tape on the right hinge of the ADF.
2. Loosen the screw that secures the left hinge.
3. Change the position of the screw that secures the right hinge to the long hole.
NOTE: Do not tighten the screw at this moment.
4. Move the right hinge position to correct the skewed image.
5. Tighten both screws and check the copy image.
6. If it is not fixed, repeat steps 2 to 5.
B156/B220 3-64 SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
COLOR ADJUSTMENT
3.13 COLOR ADJUSTMENT

3.13.1 AUTO COLOR CALIBRATION (ACC)
The machine automatically calibrates the printer gamma curve. the ACC Test
Pattern is printed by the UP mode. The machine scans the test pattern and
corrects the printer gamma by comparing the ideal setting with the current image
density.
The ACC should be performed any time when the customer is not satisfied with the
image quality.
The previous settings of the ACC can be loaded with SP5-610-6.
Replacement
Adjustment
and
SM 3-65 B156/B220
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
COLOR ADJUSTMENT
3.13.2 PRINTER GAMMA CORRECTION

NOTE: Normally, the ACC is enough to adjust the color balance to achieve the
optimum print output. The printer gamma correction is only required for
fine-tuning to meet user requirements.
The printer gamma curve created during ACC can be modified using SP modes.
The SP value will be applied to the gamma curve created during ACC.
The gamma data for highlight, middle, shadow areas, and IDmax can be adjusted.
The adjustable range is from 0 to 30 (31 steps).
Copy Mode
KCMY Color Balance Adjustment
Adjust only the Offset values.
NOTE: Never change the Option values (default values are 0).
Highlight (Low ID) Levels 2 through 5 in the C4 chart 10-level scale
Middle (Middle ID) Levels 3 through 7 in the C4 chart 10-level scale
Shadow (High ID) Levels 6 through 9 in the C4 chart 10-level scale
Level 10 in the C4 chart 10-level scale (affects the entire image
ID max
density.)
The higher the number in the range associated with the low ID,
Offset
middle ID, high ID, and ID max, the greater the density.
There are four adjustable modes:

Text (Letter) mode: full colour
Photo mode: full colour
Text (Letter) mode: single color (SC)
Photo mode: single color (SC)
SP 4-918 screen: The screen with SC on it is for single colour mode settings. The
other two screens are for full colour mode settings.
B502R500.WMF
B156/B220 3-66 SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
COLOR ADJUSTMENT
Adjustment Procedure
1. Copy the C-4 chart in mode that you are going to adjust.
2. Enter the SP mode.
3. Select Copy SP.
4. Enter SP4-918 and select the screen that you are going to adjust.
5. Adjust the offset values until the copy quality conforms to the standard ( the
tables below).
NOTE: 1) Never change an Option value (default value is 0).
2) Adjust the density in order from ID Max, Middle (M), Shadow (S),
and then Highlight (H).
Replacement
Adjustment
and
- Photo Mode, Full Colour -
Step Item to Adjust Level on the C-4 chart Adjustment Standard
ID max: Adjust the offset value so that
1 (K, C, M, and Y) the density of level 10 matches
that of level 10 on the C-4 chart.
Middle (Middle ID) Adjust the offset value so that
Shadow (High ID) Adjust the offset value so that
Highlight (Low ID) Adjust the offset value so that
(K, C, M, and Y) dirty background is not visible on
4 the copy and the density of level
3 is slightly lighter that of level 3
on the C-4 chart.
K Highlight (Low ID) Adjust the offset value so that
(C,M, and Y) the color balance of black scale
<on the full color levels 3 through 5 in the copy is
5 copy> seen as gray (no C, M, or Y
should be visible). If the black
scale contains C, M, or Y, redo
step 1 to 4.
SM 3-67 B156/B220
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
COLOR ADJUSTMENT
- Photo Mode, Single Colour -

Step Item to Adjust Level on the C-4 chart Adjustment Standard
1 (K) the density of level 10 matches
(K) dirty background is not visible on
on the C-4 chart.
- Text (Letter) Mode, Full Colour -
Step Item to Adjust Level on the C-4 chart (K) Adjustment Standard
(K, C, M, and Y) dirty background is not visible on
on the C-4 chart.
B156/B220 3-68 SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
COLOR ADJUSTMENT
- Text (Letter) Mode, Single Colour -
Step Item to Adjust Level on the C-4 chart (K) Adjustment Standard
(K) dirty background is not visible on
Replacement
Adjustment
on the C-4 chart.
and
NOTE: After adjusting shadow as explained above, text parts of the test pattern
may not be printed clearly. If this happens, check whether the 5 line/mm
pattern at each corner is printed clearly. If it is not, adjust the offset value of
shadow again until it is.
SM 3-69 B156/B220
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
COLOR ADJUSTMENT
Printer Mode
There are five adjustable modes selected by printer SP1-102:
1800 x 1200 photo mode
1800 x 600 text mode
1800 x 600 graph mode
600 x 600 photo mode
600 x 600 text mode
K C M Y
Highlight SP1-104-1 SP1-104-21 SP1-104-41 SP1-104-61
Shadow SP1-104-2 SP1-104-22 SP1-104-42 SP1-104-62
Middle SP1-104-3 SP1-104-23 SP1-104-43 SP1-104-63
IDmax SP1-104-4 SP1-104-24 SP1-104-44 SP1-104-64
Adjustment Procedure
1. Do ACC for the printer mode.
2. Turn the main power off and on.
3. Enter SP mode.
4. Select Printer SP.
5. Select SP1-102 and select the print mode that you are going to adjust.
6. To review the image quality for these settings, choose SP1-103-1 to print out a
tone control test sheet.
7. Adjust the color density with SP1-104 as shown below comparing the tone
control test sheet with the C4 test chart.
NOTE: Adjust the density in order from ID Max, Shadow, Middle, and then
Highlight.
8. Save the adjusted settings with SP1-105.
B156/B220 3-70 SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
COLOR ADJUSTMENT
Adjustment Reference For Gamma Correction

The following tables show the adjustment reference for gamma correction. The
tables show the level of the color scale on the C4 test chart and on the tone control
test sheet printed in the printer SP mode.
For example, for K at text mode, grade 12 on the tone control test sheet should be
the same as grade 7 on the C4 chart.
Normally, it is not necessary to adjust the gamma data as shown in the table since
ACC adjusts the gamma curve automatically. The fine-tuning of color balance by
gamma data adjustment will be required only when the result from ACC and Color
Calibration does not meet the customers requirements.
Replacement
Adjustment
C4 test chart 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
K Test Text - 1 2 5 6 9 12 13 16 -
and
sheet Photo/Graph - 1 2 5 6 9 11 13 16 -
C4 test chart 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
C 12/
Test Text - 1 2 3 4 7 9 10 15
13
sheet
Photo/Graph - 1 2 3 5 8 9 11 12 14
C4 test chart 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
M Test Text - 1 2 4 5 7 10 12 16 -
sheet Photo/Graph - 1 2 5 6 9 11 13 16 -
C4 test chart 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Y 12/
Test Text - 1 3 6 8 10 16 - -
13
sheet
Photo/Graph - 1 4 7 8 10 13 16 - -
SM 3-71 B156/B220
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SCANNER WHITE LEVEL ADJUSTMENT
3.14 SCANNER WHITE LEVEL ADJUSTMENT

Check the scanner white level after the left scale (with the white reference plate),
scanner lamp, 1st or 2nd scanner (carriage), or the lens block assembly is replaced.
If the white level is not correct, adjust the level.
White Level Check

1. Load the following paper (referred to as standard paper in this section) into
the paper tray.
Hammermill Copy Plus, 20 lbs. (North America)
Ricoh Copy paper for Aficio Color, 100 g (Europe)
2. Print out the ACC test pattern (User Tools Maintenance ACC).
3. Put the ACC test pattern on the exposure glass.
4. Stack 250 sheets or more of the standard paper on the ACC test pattern.
5. Scan the ACC pattern.
6. Remove the stack of the standard paper and the ACC test pattern from the
exposure glass.
7. Put Color Chart C-4 on the exposure glass.
8. Activate the full color, text/photo mode.
9. Copy Color Chart C-4.
10. Check whether any of the coloured patches in column 2 (in the gradation
pattern area right below the caption COLOR CHART C-4) are printed. Also,
check that yellow patch 10 does not contain any other colours.
11. If any of the patches in column 2 is printed, or if yellow patch 10 contains other
colours, adjust the white level ( White Level Adjustment). If not, adjustment is
not required.
White Level Adjustment

1. Perform as instructed in White Level Check.
2. Activate the SP mode.
3. Select SP5-990-002 and print out the SP mode data list.
4. Select SP4-902-002 (G_DATA1) and read the value.
5. Compare the value with the values in table 1 (when Hammermill Copy Plus is
used) or 2 (when Ricoh Copy paper for Aficio Color is used).
6. Increase or decrease the values in SP4-885-1, 886-1, and 887-1 if necessary.
7. Check the white level as instructed in White Level Check.
NOTE: The machine may have some other trouble when this adjustment causes
abnormal outputs or when this adjustment is not effective.
B156/B220 3-72 SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Table 1: Hammermill Copy Plus, 20 lbs. (North America)

SP4-885-001 SP4-886-001 SP4-887-001
SP4-902-2 Necessary
(Reference (Reference (Reference
(G_DATA1) adjustment
Adjustment: R) Adjustment: G) Adjustment: B)
255 +17 +13 +17
254 +15 +12 +16
253 +14 +11 +15 Increase the
252 +13 +10 +13 values in SP4-
251 +12 +9 +12 885-1, 886-1,
250 +10 +8 +11 and 887-1.
249 +9 +7 +9
248 +8 +6 +8
247
Replacement
: No adjustment is
Adjustment
0 0 0
: required.
and
237
236 -8 -6 -8
235 -10 -7 -10
234 -11 -8 -11
233 -13 -10 -13
232 -14 -11 -14
231 -15 -12 -16
230 -17 -13 -17
229 -18 -14 -19
228 -20 -15 -20
227 -21 -16 -22 Decrease the
226 -23 -17 -23 values in SP4-
225 -24 -19 -25 885-1, 886-1,
224 -26 -20 -27 and 887-1.
223 -28 -21 -28
222 -29 -22 -30
221 -31 -23 -31
220 -32 -24 -33
219 -34 -26 -35
218 -35 -27 -36
217 -37 -28 -38
216 -39 -29 -40
215 -40 -30 -41
Example 1: When the value in SP4-902-2 is 255, add 17 to the value in SP4-885-
001, 13 to the value in SP4-886-001, and 17 to the value in SP4-887-
001.
Example 2: When the value in SP4-902-2 is 247, do not change any values in
SP4-885-001, SP4-886-001, and SP4-887-001.
Example 3: When the value in SP4-902-2 is 236, subtract 8 from the value in
SP4-885-001, 6 from the value in SP4-886-001, and 8 from the value
in SP4-887-001.
SM 3-73 B156/B220
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Table 2: Ricoh Copy paper for Aficio Color, 100 g (Europe)

SP4-885-001 SP4-886-001 SP4-887-001
SP4-902-2
(Reference (Reference (Reference Remarks
(G_DATA1)
Adjustment: R) Adjustment: G) Adjustment: B)
255 +23 +18 +23
254 +22 +17 +21
253 +21 +16 +20
252 +20 +15 +19
251 +19 +14 +18
250 +17 +13 +17 Increase the
values in SP4-
249 +16 +12 +15
885-1, 886-1,
248 +15 +11 +14 and 887-1.
247 +13 +10 +13
246 +12 +9 +12
245 +11 +8 +11
244 +10 +7 +9
243 +8 +6 +8
242
: No adjustment is
0 0 0
: required.
232
231 -9 -7 -8
230 -10 -8 -10
229 -12 -9 -11
228 -13 -10 -13
227 -15 -11 -14
226 -16 -12 -16
225 -18 -13 -17
224 -19 -14 -19 Decrease the
values in SP4-
223 -21 -16 -20
885-1, 886-1,
222 -22 -17 -22 and 887-1.
221 -24 -18 -23
220 -25 -19 -25
219 -27 -20 -26
218 -29 -22 -28
217 -30 -23 -30
216 -32 -24 -31
215 -34 -25 -33
Example 1: When the value in SP4-902-2 is 255, add 23 to the value in SP4-885-
001, 18 to the value in SP4-886-001, and 23 to the value in SP4-887-
001.
Example 2: When the value in SP4-902-2 is 242, do not change any values in
SP4-885-001, SP4-886-001, and SP4-887-001.
Example 3: When the value in SP4-902-2 is 231, subtract 9 from the value in
SP4-885-001, 7 from the value in SP4-886-001, and 8 from the value
in SP4-887-001.
B156/B220 3-74 SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
TOUCH SCREEN CALIBRATION
3.15 TOUCH SCREEN CALIBRATION

After clearing the memory, or if the touch screen detection function is not working
correctly, follow this procedure to calibrate the touch screen.
NOTE: Do not attempt to use items [2] to [9] on the Self-Diagnostic Menu. These
items are for design use only.
1. Press , press , and then press 5 times to open the Self-
Diagnostics menu.
Replacement
Adjustment
and
B156R298.WMF
B156R299.WMF
2. On the touch screen press Touch Screen Adjust (or press ).

3. Use a pointed (not sharp!) tool to press the upper left mark .
4. Press the lower right mark after it appears.
5. Touch a few spots on the touch screen to confirm that the marker (+) appears
exactly where the screen is touched.
If the + mark does not appear where the screen is touched, press Cancel and
repeat from Step 2.
6. When you are finished, press [#] OK on the screen (or press ).
7. Touch [#] Exit on the screen to close the Self-Diagnostic menu and save the
calibration settings.
SM 3-75 B156/B220
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CHECKING THE BREAKER SWITCH
3.16 CHECKING THE BREAKER SWITCH

3.16.1 BREAKER
CAUTION
Before you test the breaker, always make sure that the main power switch
is off. Do not try to test the breaker switch with the copier power turned on.
1. Make sure that the main power is

turned off.
2. Make sure that the power cord of the [A]
copier is connected to the power source.
3. Check if the mark on the breaker
switch [A] is shown. If is shown, the
breaker switch is turned on.
4. Push the test button [B] of the breaker.
This turns off the breaker switch (it goes
from the right to the center position). [B]
IMPORTANT
If the breaker switch does not move to the center position:
Make sure that the power cord of the copier is securely connected to the
power supply.
Push the test button again. If the breaker switch does not move to the center
position, replace the breaker switch.
5. Check that the breaker switch is turned off and the mark on the switch is
shown.
6. Turn the breaker switch to the left position first. Then turn it to the On position
(right position).
B156/B220 3-76 SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
TROUBLESHOOTING
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SERVICE CALL
4. TROUBLESHOOTING
4.1 SERVICE CALL
4.1.1 SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS
Level Definition Reset Procedure

Fusing unit SCs displayed on the operation Turn the main power switch off
panel. The machine is disabled. The user then on before entering SP mode.
A cannot reset the SC. Reset the SC (push "EXECUTE"
with SP5-810), then turn the main
switch off then on again.
SCs to disable only the features that use the Turn the main power switch off
defective item. Although these SCs are not and on.
B shown to the user under normal conditions,
they are displayed on the operation panel only
when the defective feature is selected.
SCs that are not shown on the operation Logging only
C
panel. They are internally logged.
The SC is displayed on the operation panel. Turn the main power switch off
Turning the operation switch or main power and on.
shooting
Trouble-
D switch off then on resets the SC. The SC is
redisplayed if it occurs after the main power
switch is turned on again.
NOTE: 1) All SCs are logged.

2) When an electrical circuit board has a problem, check the connections
before replacing the PCBs.
3) When a motor has a problem, check the mechanical load before
replacing the motor or sensor.
When a Level D SC code occurs
A screen opens on the operation panel to tell the user that 1) an error occurred, 2)
the job that the machine does at that time will be erased, and 3) the machine will
reboot automatically after approximately 30 seconds.
The user can: 1) stop until the machine reboots automatically after a short time, or
2) touch Reset on the screen to reset the machine immediately, and go back to
the copy screen.
If the operator does not touch Reset, the next message tells the user that 1) the
machine reset automatically and 2) the previous job was lost and must be done
again. After the user reads the message, the user touches Confirm on the screen.
The next screen shows the number and title of the SC code, and stops until the
user turns the machine off and on.
If the operator touches Reset to bypass the 30-second interval for the machine to
reboot, the machine reboots immediately and the operation panel displays the copy
screen.
Important
Do not try to use the operation panel during an automatic reboot.
If the Remote Service System is used, the SC code is sent immediately to the
Service Center
SM 4-1 B156/B220
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SERVICE CALL
4.1.2 SC TABLE
No.
Symptom Possible Cause
Definition
101 D Exposure lamp error
The standard white level is not Exposure lamp defective
properly detected when scanning the Lamp stabilizer defective
shading plate. (The shading data Exposure lamp connector defective
peak does not reach the specified Standard white plate dirty
threshold.) Scanner mirror or scanner lens out of
position or dirty
SBU defective
120 D Scanner home position error 1

The scanner home position sensor Scanner I/O board or SBU defective
does not detect the "off" condition Scanner motor defective
during scanning. Harness between scanner I/O board
The scanner home position sensor and scanner motor disconnected
does not detect the "off" condition Scanner HP sensor defective
during initialization. Harness between SBU and HP sensor
disconnected
Scanner wire, timing belt, pulley, or
carriage defective
121 D Scanner home position error 2

The scanner home position sensor Scanner I/O board or SBU defective
does not detect the "on" condition Scanner motor defective
during initialization. Harness between scanner I/O board
The scanner home position sensor and scanner motor disconnected
does not detect the "on" condition Scanner HP sensor defective
when starting to scan. Harness between SBU and HP sensor
The scanner home position sensor disconnected
does not detect the "on" condition Scanner wire, timing belt, pulley, or
when the scanner returns. carriage defective
142 D White level detection error

The white level cannot be adjusted Dirty exposure glass or optics section
within the target during auto gain SBU board defective
control. BICU board defective
Exposure lamp defective
Lamp stabilizer defective
144 D SBU communication error

The operation software version for the Update the BICU software.
SBU does not match the installed Replace the SBU.
SBU.
B156/B220 4-2 SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SERVICE CALL
No.
Definition
161 D IPU error
The self-diagnostic error for the IPU IPU board defective
occurs immediately after the main BICU board defective (defective
power is turned on. connection between ASICs)
195 D Serial number mismatch

Serial number stored in the memory NVRAM defective
is not correct. BICU replaced without original NVRAM
NOTE: Check the serial number with
SP5-811-002.
If the stored serial number is
incorrect, contact your product
specialist for details of how to solve
the problem.
199 D PSU fan error
The PSU fan low signal is detected PSU fan defective
for 2 seconds when the PSU fan Disconnected or damaged harness
controller sends the high signal to the
PSU fan.
201 D Polygon motor error
The polygon motor starts operating Defective polygon motor
shooting
Trouble-
or changes its speed. The lock Defective harness
signal is not detected within 5
seconds.
The polygon motor stops operating.
The lock signal is still detected
for 3 seconds.
The polygon motor is operating.
The lock signal remains undetected
for 0.5 seconds.
220 D 1st beam synchronization error

A polygon motor lock is detected; the Disconnected synchronization detector
LD door is closed; and the LD board
remains on. The LD error (1st Defective LD unit
beam synchronization error) Defective BICU
continues for 0.5 seconds.
221 D 2nd beam synchronization error

A polygon motor lock is detected; the Disconnected synchronization detector
LD door is closed; and the LD board
remains on. The LD error (2nd Defective LD unit
beam synchronization error) Defective BICU
continues for 0.5 seconds.
230 D FGATE on error

A transfer belt mark is detected. Defective BICU
No FGATE on signal is detected
within 1 second.
231 D FGATE off error

An FGATE assert signal is detected. Defective BICU
The FGATE negate signal is not
detected within 30 seconds.
SM 4-3 B156/B220
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SERVICE CALL
No.
Definition
241 D LD error
An LD error continues for 0.5 Defective LD unit
seconds. (After an LD error is
detected, an LD error release is
written to the GAVD chip during
monitoring.)
280 D Image transfer belt mark detection error
An imaging process starts. No Defective BICU
belt mark for the first color is Poor electrical connection between
detected within 5 seconds. sensor and BICU
A color imaging process starts.
A belt mark other than the one for
the first color is not detected within
8 seconds after a former belt mark
has been detected.
282 D GAVD communication error
Data is transferred. The status Defective BICU
register in the BICU does not get to
the ready condition within 10
milliseconds.
300 D Charge corona unit electrical leak
The supply to the charge corona unit Short circuit in the charge corona unit
is continuously output, and the unit is Defective high voltage supply board
operating at the minimum PWM duty Defective harness (BICU - high voltage
value. 1 Volt (or more) returns for supply board)
300 milliseconds.
302 D Charge grid electrical leak

The returning voltage N from the OPC Defective PCU installation (OPC belt)
unit is detected for 60 ms. Short circuit in the charge grid
N 1/2 output value Defective high voltage supply board
Defective harness (BICU - high voltage
supply board)
305 D Charge corona unit cleaner error
Cleaning starts. The lock signal Defective PCU installation (OPC belt)
is not detected within 30 seconds. Defective cleaner
Cleaning starts. The cleaner Incorrect charge corona unit installation
starts to turn. The lock signal is Toner fallen into the cleaner drive
detected within 6 seconds. mechanism
The lock signal is detected while
the unit is moving away from the
home position. The next lock
signal is detected within 6 seconds
after the unit has turned toward the
home position.
350 D Development short circuit error

A development process starts. The Short circuit in the development unit
returning voltage stays at 1V or less Defective high voltage supply board
within 0.48 seconds. Defective harness (BICU - high voltage
supply board)
B156/B220 4-4 SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SERVICE CALL
No.
Definition
352 D Development motor 1 error
Development motor 1 changes its Defective development motor (Y & M)
speed from half to normal. Too much load on the development unit
1) Motor 1 does not detect a 0.3- (Y & M)
second lock signal within 0.9 Defective harness connection
seconds.
2) Motor 1 does not detect the
lock signal for 0.3 seconds
after it detected a 0.3-second
lock signal before.
The development motor starts
3) Motor 1 does not detect a 1-
second lock signal within 3
seconds.
after it detected a 1-second
lock signal before.
353 D Development motor 2 error
Development motor 2 changes its Defective development motor (K & C)
speed from half to normal. Too much load on the development unit
3) Motor 2 does not detect a 0.3- (K & C)
shooting
Trouble-
second lock signal within 0.9 Defective harness connection
seconds.
after it detected a 0.3-second
lock signal before.
The development motor starts
5) Motor 2 does not detect a 1-
second lock signal within 3
seconds.
after it detected a 1-second
lock signal before.
401 D 1st transfer (image transfer) circuit open
The returning voltage N from the Open circuit in the image transfer belt
image transfer unit is detected for 60 Defective high voltage supply board
ms. Defective harness (BICU - high voltage
N 1/2 output value supply board)
410 D 2nd transfer (paper transfer) electric leakage (+)

Paper transfer starts. The positive Short circuit in the paper transfer unit
(+) output is at the minimum PWM Defective high voltage supply board
duty value. The returning voltage Defective harness (BICU - high voltage
does not reach 4.29 V or less for 60 supply board)
milliseconds.
411 D 2nd transfer (paper transfer) electric leakage ()

Paper transfer starts. The negative Short circuit in the paper transfer unit
() output is at the minimum PWM Defective high voltage supply board
duty value. The returning voltage Defective harness (BICU - high voltage
stays at 4.75 V or more for 60 supply board)
milliseconds.
SM 4-5 B156/B220
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SERVICE CALL
No.
Definition
412 D 2nd transfer (paper transfer) disconnection (+)
The returning voltage N from the Right cover not closed
paper transfer unit is detected for 180 Defective transfer roller contact
ms. mechanism
supply board)
420 D Discharge error (fusing bias)
The returning voltage N from the Fusing bias short circuit
fusing unit is detected for 60 ms. Scratched fusing belt
supply board)
421 Discharge plate error

The returning voltage N from the Short circuit in the discharge plate
discharge unit is detected for 60 ms. Defective high voltage supply board
N 1/2 output value Defective harness (BICU - high voltage
supply board)
430 D Transfer belt cleaning error
The returning voltage N from the Short circuit in the transfer belt cleaning
discharge unit is detected for 480 ms. unit
supply board)
440 D Main motor error
The main motor starts. The lock Defective main motor
signal does not continue for 0.1 Too much load of the main motor drive
second within 1 second.
The main motor starts. The lock
signal is detected and operation
proceeds normally. The lock
signal is not detected for 0.1
second.
The main motor changes its speed.
The lock signal does not
continue for 0.1 second within 1
second.
460 D Temperature sensor error

The output is 4.5 V (or higher) or 0.3 Defective temp./ humidity sensor
V (or lower) for 12 seconds. Defective circuit
Defective connector
461 D Humidity sensor error
The output is 4.5 V (or higher) or 0.3 Defective temp./ humidity sensor
V (or lower) for 12 seconds. Defective circuit
Defective connector
480 D ID sensor error
The ID sensor is being calibrated Defective ID sensor
(process control, step 1) While the Defective circuit
LED is off, the output voltage is 0.5 V Defective connector
or lower.
B156/B220 4-6 SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SERVICE CALL
No.
Definition
481 D Transfer belt mark detection error
The main motor is operating or Defective main motor
changes its speed. The lock Image transfer belt out of position
signal is detected. The belt mark Belt mark blurred or absent
sensor signal is not detected for 0.2
second in normal speed mode or
0.4 second in half speed mode.
503 B 3rd tray error
The tray lift motor turns on. The Defective paper height sensor
top of the paper stack is not Defective tray lift motor
detected for 18 seconds.
The tray is set. The top of the
paper stack is detected. The
bottom plate is lowered. The
stack detection is not cleared within
7 seconds. These steps are
repeated 4 times.
504 B 4th tray error
The tray lift motor turns on. The Defective paper height sensor
top of the paper stack is not Defective tray lift motor
shooting
The tray is set. The top of the
Trouble-
paper stack is detected. The
bottom plate is lowered. The
stack detection is not cleared within
7 seconds. These steps are
repeated 4 times.
515 D Duplex unit communication error

A connection error occurs. Defective duplex unit board
The signal is sent from the copier to Defective BICU
the duplex unit every 3 seconds Defective IOB
while paper is not transported by Defective connection (Main unit -
the unit. However, the duplex unit Duplex unit)
does not respond within 5 seconds.
520 D Fusing unit motor

The motor starts or changes speed. Defective fusing unit motor
continue for 1 second within a 3-
second interval.
The motor starts. The lock signal
is detected and operation proceeds
normally. The lock signal is
interrupted for 1 second.
521 D Paper feed motor error
The motor starts or changes speed. Defective paper feed motor
continue for 1 second within a 3-
second interval.
The motor starts. The lock signal
is detected and operation proceeds
normally. The lock signal is
interrupted for 1 second.
SM 4-7 B156/B220
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SERVICE CALL
No.
Definition
530 D Fusing fan motor error
The main power is turned on. Defective fusing fan
The fusing fan lock signal is Disconnected or broken harness of the
detected for 2 seconds. fusing fan
The fusing fan is activated. The
fusing fan lock signal is not
541 A Thermistor disconnection (heating roller)
The fusing unit starts warm up to the Defective thermistor
print ready temperature. The Thermistor loose connection
temperature does not reach 0C for Defective connector
10 seconds.
542 A Fusing warm-up timeout (heating roller)
The main switch is turned on or a Defective lamp (loose connection,
cover is closed. The heating roller thermostat failure, PSU, thermostat)
does not reach the warm-up Incorrect detection (loose thermistor
temperature within 4 seconds. connection, fusing - drawer loose
connection)
543 A Overheat error (heating roller)
The heating roller thermistor detects Short circuit
220C for 5 seconds. Defective BICU board
Defective PSU
544 A Overheat error (heating roller)

The heating roller thermistor detects Short circuit
230 C. Defective BICU board
Defective PSU
545 A Full power error (heating roller)
Fusing unit warm-up is complete. Thermistor loose connection
The heating roller stops turning. Fusing - drawer loose connection
The heating roller lamp keeps
outputting the maximum power for 12
seconds.
546 A Unstable temperature (heating roller)
The heating roller thermistor detects Thermistor loose connection
unstable temperature increases or Fusing - drawer loose connection
decreases within 60 seconds.
547 A Zero cross error
The main power is turned on and the Replace the PSU.
machine checks how many zero- FU12 is open.
cross signals are generated during
500 ms.
If the number of zero-cross signal
generated is more than 66 or less
than 45 and when this condition is
detected 10 consecutive times, this
code is displayed.
551 A Thermistor disconnection (pressure roller)
The pressure roller thermistor detects Thermistor loose connection
7C or lower for 80 seconds. Defective harness
Defective connector
B156/B220 4-8 SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SERVICE CALL
No.
Definition
552 A Warm-up time over (pressure roller)
The main switch is turned on or a Defective lamp (loose connection,
cover is closed. The fusing thermostat failure, PSU, thermostat)
pressure roller does not reach the Incorrect detection (thermistor loose
ready temperature within 200 connection, fusing - drawer loose
seconds. connection)
553 A Overheat error (pressure roller)
The pressure roller thermistor detects Loose connection
165C for 5 seconds. Defective BICU board
Defective PSU
554 A Low temperature error (pressure roller)
During standby or operation, the Defective lamp (loose connection,
pressure roller thermistor detects thermostat failure, PSU, thermostat)
60C or less for 5 seconds. Incorrect detection (thermistor loose
connection, fusing - drawer loose
connection)
555 A Full power error (pressure roller)
Fusing unit warm-up is complete. Thermistor loose connection
The fusing pressure roller stops Fusing - drawer loose connection
turning. The pressure roller lamp
keeps outputting the maximum power
shooting
for 150 seconds.
Trouble-
556 A Unstable temperature (pressure roller)
The pressure roller thermistor detects Thermistor loose connection
unstable temperature increases or Fusing - drawer loose connection
decreases within 60 seconds.
557 C Zero cross over error
The main switch is turned on; the Noise from a power supply line
fusing relay turns on. The detected
zero cross is out of the target range
(less than 45 or more than 65).
The zero cross is detected more than
65 in ten cases out of eleven zero
cross detections.
570 A Fusing oil end

500 sheets of paper have been output Insufficient oil (the oil tank in the rear of
since oil end was detected. the machine)
Defective oil pipe
Defective oil pump
Defective oil end sensor
571 A Fusing oil overflow
The oil overflow sensor detects oil. Defective oil end sensor
When the machine covers are Defective oil overflow sensor
closed, the oil supply unit is not Defective sensor cable
detected. Oil supply unit not installed
When the machine covers are
closed, the fusing unit is not
detected.
572 D Oil overflow sensor error
The oil overflow sensor power is Defective oil overflow sensor
turned off. The oil overflow sensor Defective harness
does not detect the oil overflow Defective BICU
condition.
SM 4-9 B156/B220
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SERVICE CALL
No.
Definition
620 D ADF communication error
The ADF has been detected. A Loose connection
communication error has occurred. Defective ADF
Defective BICU board
Defective scanner I/O board
External noise
630 C CSS communication error
The machine tries to communicate Communication error on the public
with one of the terminals of a relevant telephone network (logged only; the
service center. An error signal machine can still operate)
returns.
632 D MF accounting device error 1

The machine sends a data frame. Defective or broken line between
No normal end signal returns. This machine and device
symptom happens three times.

The machine is communicating with Defective or broken line between
the accounting device. The break machine and device
signal returns.

A backup RAM error is reported from Defective accounting device controller
the accounting device. Defective battery in the accounting
device

A battery voltage error is reported Defective accounting device controller
from the accounting device. Defective battery in the accounting
device
640 C Engine-to-controller communication checksum error

While the BICU and controller are Logged only; the machine can still
communicating, a checksum error operate
has occurred.
641 C Engine-to-controller response error

The controller has sent a frame with Defective controller board
the RAPI protocol, but the engine External noise
does not respond.
670 D Engine startup error

Just after the main power is turned on Defective BICU
or the machine is recovering from Defective controller board
auto off mode, the engine ready
signal assertion fails.
Just after the main power is turned
on, the engine does not respond.
B156/B220 4-10 SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SERVICE CALL
No.
Definition
672 D Controller-to-operation panel communication error at startup
After powering on the machine, Controller stalled
communication between the controller Controller board installed incorrectly
and operation panel does not begin, Defective controller board
or the communication is interrupted Operation panel connector loose or
after a normal startup. defective
Poor connection of DIMM and optional
boards on the controller board
685 D SBU/IPU communication error
While data is sent between the Defective scanner unit cable
scanner and BICU board, a Defective SBU board
communication error has occurred. Defective BICU board
687 D PER command error
Some image data is transferred. Poor connection between BICU and
The controller does not report the controller
necessary memory address. Defective BICU
Defective controller
720 D Finisher jogger motor error (500-sheet finisher)
The finisher jogger H.P sensor Jogger HP sensor defective
remains de-activated for a certain Jogger motor defective
time when returning to home Defective finisher control board
shooting
Trouble-
position. Defective BICU
The finisher jogger H.P sensor Defective IOB
remains activated for a certain time Incorrect installation
when moving away from home
position.
722 B Finisher jogger motor error (1000-sheet finisher)
The finisher jogger H.P sensor Jogger HP sensor defective
remains de-activated for a certain Jogger motor defective
time when returning to home position. Defective finisher control board
The finisher jogger H.P sensor Defective BICU
remains activated for a certain time Defective IOB
when moving away from home Incorrect installation
position.
724 B Finisher staple hammer motor error (1000-sheet finisher)
Stapling hammer motor jam is Staple jam
detected consecutively twice after the Stapler overload caused by trying to
staple hammer motor turned on. staple too many sheets
Staple hammer motor defective
Stapler home position sensor defective
Defective finisher control board
Defective BICU
Defective IOB
Incorrect installation
725 B Finisher stack feed-out motor error (1000-sheet finisher)

The stack feed-out motor jam is Stack feed-out HP sensor defective
detected consecutively twice after the Stack feed-out motor defective
stack feed-out motor turned on. Defective finisher control board
Defective BICU
Defective IOB
SM 4-11 B156/B220
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SERVICE CALL
No.
Definition
726 D Finisher tray lift motor error (1000-sheet finisher)/
Finisher output tray motor error (500-sheet finisher)
The tray lift motor jam is detected Tray lift motor or output tray motor
consecutively twice after the tray lift defective
motor turned on (1000-sheet Stack height sensor defective
finisher). Defective finisher control board
The output tray motor lock signal is Defective BICU
detected for 10 seconds after the Defective IOB
output tray motor turned on (500- Incorrect installation
sheet finisher).
727 D Finisher stapler motor error (500-sheet finisher)
Stapling does not finish within a Staple jam
certain time after the stapler motor Stapler overload caused by trying to
turned on. staple too many sheets
Stapler motor defective
Defective BICU
Defective IOB
728 D Finisher paper stack height error (500-sheet finisher)
The stack height detection lever does Stack height lever solenoid defective
not return to its home position before Stack height sensor defective
going to detect the stack height. Lever sensor defective
Main control board defective
Defective BICU
Defective IOB
730 B Finisher stapler motor error (1000-sheet finisher)

The stapler motor jam is detected Stapler motor defective
consecutively twice after the staple Stapler HP sensor defective
motor turned on. Poor stapler motor connection
Defective board
Defective BICU
Defective IOB
731 D Output tray motor error (500-sheet finisher)

Exit guide plate motor error (1000-sheet finisher)
The tray upper limit sensor does Defective finisher control board
not activate within a certain time Defective BICU
after the tray motor turned on (500- Defective IOB
sheet finisher). Incorrect installation
The exit guide plate motor jam is
detected consecutively twice after 500-sheet finisher
the exit guide plate motor turned on Output tray motor defective
(1000-sheet finisher). Tray upper limit sensor defective
1000-sheet finisher
Exit guide plate motor defective
Exit guide plate HP sensor defective
B156/B220 4-12 SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SERVICE CALL
No.
Definition
732 D Finisher shift motor error (1000-sheet finisher)
The shift motor jam is detected Shift motor defective
consecutively twice after the shift Shift HP sensor defective
motor turned on. Defective finisher control board
Defective BICU
Defective IOB
740 D Finisher communication error
A connection error occurs. Defective finisher control board
The UART reports a Defective BICU
communication error. Defective IOB
In cases other than paper transport, Incorrect installation
after an every-3-second command
is sent, the finisher does not
respond within 5 seconds.
750 D 1st paper tray unit communication error

A connection error occurs. Defective paper tray unit control board
The UART reports a Defective BICU
communication error. Defective IOB
In cases other than paper transport, Defective connection (Paper tray - main
shooting
Trouble-
after an every-3-second command unit)
is sent, the paper tray unit does not
respond within 5 seconds.
770 B Shift tray unit motor error

The machine starts. The tray Defective tray motor
motor operates for 2.2 seconds. Defective sensor
The sensor does not detect the Defective shift tray connector
operation.
The machine is printing. The tray
motor operates for 2.2 seconds.
The sensor does not detect the
operation.
791 D Bridge unit error

The machine recognizes the finisher, Defective connector
but does not recognize the bridge Defective cable
unit.
792 D Finisher error
The machine does not recognize the Defective connector
finisher, but recognizes the relay unit. Defective cable
793 D Interchange unit error

The machine recognizes the duplex Incorrect installation
unit/1-bin tray unit, but does not Defective connector
recognize the interchange unit. Defective cable
800 B Startup without video output end error (K)

Video transfer to the engine is Defective controller board
started, but a video transmission end
command is not issued by the engine
within the specified time.
SM 4-13 B156/B220
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SERVICE CALL
No.
Definition
801 B Startup without video output end error (Y)
802 B Startup without video output end error (M)
803 B Startup without video output end error (C)
804 B Startup without video input end error (K)
command is not issued by the
scanner within the specified time.
805 B Startup without video input end error (Y)
806 B Startup without video input end error (M)
807 B Startup without video input end error (C)
808 B Startup without video input end error (R)
809 B Startup without video input end error (G)
810 B Startup without video input end error (B)

818 B Watchdog error
While the system program is running, Defective controller board
no other programs can run (due to a
bus hold or endless loop).
B156/B220 4-14 SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SERVICE CALL
No.
Definition
819 B Kernel abnormal end error
A HDD error or a software error has HDD error
occurred, terminating the SCS Software application error
process, gwinit process, and finally RAM shortage
the kernel program.
A system process has exhausted the
RAM.
820 B Self-Diagnostic Error: CPU
An unexpected exception or Defective controller board
interruption has occurred. Software defective
821 B Self-Diagnostic Error: ASIC
The ASIC returned an error during the Defective controller board
self-diagnostic test, because the
ASIC and CPU timer interrupts are
compared and determined to be out
of range.
822 B Self-Diagnostic Error: HDD
The hard disk drive returned an error HDD defective
during the self-diagnostic test. HDD connector defective
Defective controller board
823 B Self-diagnostic Error: NIB
The network interface board returned Network interface board defective
shooting
Trouble-
an error during the self-diagnostic Defective controller board
test.
824 B Self-diagnostic Error: NVRAM
The resident non-volatile RAM NVRAM damaged or abnormal
returned an error during the self- Backup battery has discharged
diagnostic test. NVRAM socket damaged
826 B Self-diagnostic Error: RTC/Optional NVRAM

The RTC (real time clock) or optional RTC defective
NVRAM returned an error during the NVRAM defective
self-diagnostic test.
827 B Self-diagnostic Error: RAM
The resident RAM returned a verify Memory malfunction
error during the self-diagnostic test.
828 B Self-diagnostic Error: ROM

The resident read-only memory Defective controller board
returned an error during the self- Firmware defective
diagnostic test.
829 B Self-diagnostic Error: Optional RAM
The optional RAM returned an error RAM DIMM defective
during the self-diagnostic test. Defective controller board
835 B Self-Diagnostic Error: Parallel Interface

A loopback test error occurred. Loopback connector not detected
IEEE1284 connector defective
Defective controller board
836 B Self-diagnostic Error: Resident Font ROM
The resident font ROM returned an Font ROM defective
SM 4-15 B156/B220
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SERVICE CALL
No.
Definition
837 B Self-diagnostic Error: Optional Font ROM
The optional font ROM returned an Font ROM defective
838 D Verification error

The verification data of the clock Defective controller board
generator is read via the
communication bus. The data
contradicts the normal value.
850 B Network I/F abnormal

The IP address is incorrect, or the Incorrect network setting
controller cannot accesses the Defective controller board
network due to a driver error.
851 B IEEE1394 I/F abnormal

The IEEE1394 interface cannot be IEEE1394 interface board defective
used, due to a driver error. Defective controller board
853 D Wireless card startup error

The machine starts up. The Loose connection between the card and
IEEE802 11b card connection board the connection board
is recognized. The wireless LAN
card or bluetooth card is not
recognized.
854 D Wireless card access error

The machine has been reading the Loose connection between the card and
data from the card. The machine the connection board
loses access to the card; the wireless
LAN card or bluetooth card
connection board is still recognized.
855 D Wireless card error

Some illegal data is found in the card. Defective card
856 D Wireless card connection board error

An error is detected in the wireless Defective card connection board
LAN card or bluetooth card
connection board.
860 C Startup without HD connection at main power on
The hard disk is not detected. (The Cable between controller and HD loose
hard disk is not formatted.) or defective
HD power connector loose or defective
HD defective
Controller defective
861 C Startup without HD detection when the power key was pressed
The hard disk is not detected. Cable between controller and HD loose
or defective
HD power connector loose or defective
HD defective
Controller defective
B156/B220 4-16 SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Rev. 04/2006 SERVICE CALL
No.
Definition
862 D Bad sector count at the maximum
The hard disk has 100 bad sectors in Data corruption
the image storage area. More data Defective hard disk
is read from the hard disk. SC863
occurs. The number of bad sectors
exceeds the maximum value.
NOTE: To format the hard disk, use
SP5-832-1. Bad sectors may
affect quality or reduce
productivity. The hard disk
should be replaced when it
contains bad sectors.
863 B Startup without HD data lead
Data stored on the hard disk is not Bad sector detected during operation of
read correctly. the HD
864 B HD data CRC error
During operation of the HD, the HD Data transfer from the HD was
responded with a CRC error. abnormal.
865 B HD access error
The hard disk returned an error. Error detected other than a bad sector
error (SC863) or a CRC error (SC864)
870 D Address book data error
shooting
Trouble-
The address book in the hard disk is Data corruption
accessed. An error is detected in Defective hard disk
the address book data; address book Defective controller software
data is not read; or data is not written
into the address book.
NOTE: To recover from the error, do
any of the following
countermeasures:
Format the address book by using
SP5-846-050 (all data in the
address bookincluding the user
codes and countersis initialized).
Initialize the user data by using
SP5-832-006 (the user codes and
counters are recovered when the
main switch is turned on if those
data are stored in Smart Device
Monitor for Admin).
Replace the hard disk (the user codes
and counters are recovered when the
main switch is turned on if those data
are stored in Smart Device Monitor

for Admin).
872 B Email Receiving Data Error
Machine detects an HDD error during Email(s) previously received by the
warm-up. machine and stored in the hard drive
may contain damaged data. This can
See NOTE 1: be deleted by executing SP5832-007,
however note that doing so will also
delete all other received emails.
Defective HDD
SM 4-17 B156/B220
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SERVICE CALL Rev. 05/2006
No.
Definition
873 B Email Sending Data Error
Machine detects an HDD error during Email(s) previously sent by the
warm-up. machine and stored in the hard drive
may contain damaged data. This can
See NOTE 1: be deleted by executing SP5832-008,
however note that doing so will also
delete all other sent emails and
initialize the senders user
name/password and administrator mail
address.
Defective HDD
874 D Delete All Error 1: HDD
An HDD/NVRAM data error is Turn the main switch OFF/ON and try
detected after the Delete All the operation again.
Memory feature of the Data Install the Data Overwrite Security Unit
Overwrite Security Unit is executed. again.
Replace the HDD.
NOTE: The source of the error is a
Data Overwrite Security Unit that is

run from an SD card.
875 D Delete All error 2: Data area
An error occurs while the Data Turn the main switch OFF/ON and try
Overwrite Security Unit is deleting the operation again.
data from the hard drive.
NOTE: The source of the error is a

Data Overwrite Security Unit that is
run from an SD card.
880 File Format Converter (MLB) error
A request to get access to the MLB MLB defective
was not answered within the specified
time.
900 B Electronic total counter error
The value of the total counter is out of Defective NVRAM
the normal range.
901 B Mechanical total counter error 1
Mechanical counter 1 is not initialized, Defective connection
or not detected. Defective counter
902 B Mechanical total counter error 2
Mechanical counter 2 is not initialized, Defective connection
or not detected. Defective counter
B156/B220 4-18 SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Rev. 05/2006 SERVICE CALL

No.
Definition
925 D Net file error
The management file for net files is Defective hard disk
corrupted; net files are not normally Data corruption
read. Defective software
Netfiles: Jobs to be printed from the
document server using a PC and the 1. When SC860 to 865 occurs with this
DeskTopBinder software SC at the same time:
The main cause is in SC860 to
865. Refer to those possible
causes.
2. When only SC925 occurs:
Turn the main power off and on.
Initialize the net file partition of the
HDD (with SP5-832-11) after you
ask the customer for permission.
This also erases the transmitted
and received fax documents.
If the above actions do not solve
the problem, try to initialize all
partitions of the HDD with SP5-
832-1 after you ask the customer
shooting
Trouble-
for permission.
Replace the HDD.
NOTE 1: The HDD can be damaged easily if the main switch is turned OFF during data
processing. Do not turn OFF the main power switch immediately after turning it ON.
Doing so may result in damage to the hard disk or memory, leading to malfunction.
Do not turn OFF the main power switch when the ON indicator is lit or blinking. Doing
so may result in damage to the hard disk or memory.
No.
Definition
990 B Software performance error
The software attempted to perform an Software defective
unexpected operation. Internal parameter incorrect
NOTE: When this error occurs, the Insufficient working memory
file name, address, and data
will be stored in NVRAM. This Turn the main power off and on.
information can be checked
by using SP7-403. See the
data and the situation in
which this SC occurs. Then
report the data and conditions
to your technical control
center.
991 C Software continuity error
The software attempted to perform an Logged only; the machine can continue
unexpected operation. However, to operate
unlike SC990, the process can keep
on running.
SM 4-19 B156/B220
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SERVICE CALL Rev. 05/2006

No.
Definition
995 D Model matching error
The CPM registered in the controller The controller and the engine board are
does not match the DIP switch not for the same model
settings on the engine board.
997 B Application function selection error
The application selected by a key Software for that application is defective
press on the operation panel does not An option required by the application
start or ends abnormally. (RAM, DIMM, board) is not installed.
998 B Application start error
After switching the machine on, the Software for that application is defective
application does not start within 60 An option required by the application
s. (No applications start or end (RAM, DIMM, board) is not installed.
normally.)
999 B Program download error
The download (program, print data, Software defective
language data) from the SD card An option required by the application
does not execute normally. (RAM, DIMM, board) is not installed
Important Notes About SC999 Board installed incorrectly
This SC is not logged, because it BICU defective
operates primarily in the download Controller defective
mode. SD card defective
If the machine loses power while NVRAM defective
downloading, or if for some other Loss of power during downloading
reason the download does not end
normally, this could damage the
controller board or the PCB
targeted for the download and
prevent subsequent downloading. If
this problem occurs, the damaged
PCB must be replaced.
B156/B220 4-20 SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Rev. 05/2006 SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
4.2 SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

4.2.1 OVERVIEW
There are three types of self-diagnostics for the controller.
Power-on self-diagnostics: The machine automatically starts the self-diagnostics
just after the power has been turned on.
Detailed self-diagnostics: The machine does the detailed self-diagnostics by
using a loop-back connector (P/N G0219350)
SC detection: The machine automatically detects SC conditions at power-on or
during operation.
The following shows the workflow of the power-on and detailed self-diagnostics.
Power ON A
Diagnostic RAM Check NG Not initialized Power-on or

Detailed
CPU Check NG SC820 Detailed
ROM Sum Check SC828
shooting
NG
Trouble-
ASIC Check NG SC821
Standard RAM Detailed

NG SC829
Standard RAM Check
NG SC827
Conection Check
Optional RAM Detailed
NG
Optional RAM Check Not use optional RAM
NG SC829
Connection Check Error Logged
Standard NVRAM
NG
Detailed Check
Clock Generator Check NG SC838
Error Logged
Optional NVRAM Power-on
NG
Standard NVRAM Detailed Check
NG SC824
Check Error Logged
Optinoal HDD Check NG

Optional NVRAM Check NG
Error Logged
Error Logged IEEE1284 Loop-back
NG
Check
Font Header Check NG
Error Logged
Error Logged Real Time Clock
NG SC826
Detailed Check
Real Time Clock Check NG SC826
Font ROM Sum Check NG

Network Check NG
Error Logged
Error Logged
END
Engine I/F Check NG
Error Logged
Interrupt Check NG
Error Logged
Memory Chip Check NG
Error Logged
B156T501.WMF
SM 4-21 B156/B220
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
IMAGE TEST MODE Rev. 05/2006
4.2.2 DETAILED SELF-DIAGNOSTICS

This detailed self-diagnostic test requires a loop-back connector (P/N: G0219350).
1. Turn off the machine and attach the loop-back connector to the parallel
interface.
2. Hold down , press and hold down , and then while pressing both keys at
the same time, switch on the machine. You will see Now Loading on the
touch-panel, and prints the diagnostic report after completing the test.
Refer to the diagnostics report for the detected errors. The errors detected
during self-diagnostics can be checked with SP7-832-001 (Diag. Result).
Refer to section 4.1 for details about the error codes.
4.3 IMAGE TEST MODE

4.3.1 OVERVIEW
The SBU, BICU, and LD board have the function that prints out their test pattern. It
is useful to find the defective board when the image data problem is occurred.
4.3.2 VPU TEST

The SBU has the VPU test pattern. To make sure the scanner VPU control is
functioning, output the VPU test pattern with SP4-907.
SP4-907-1: VPU Test Pattern: R

SP4-907-2: VPU Test Pattern: G
SP4-907-3: VPU Test Pattern: B
4.3.3 IPU TEST

The BICU board has the IPU test pattern. To make sure the image processing is
functioning, output the IPU test pattern with SP4-417.
4.3.4 GAVD TEST

The LD board has the GAVD test pattern. To make sure the printing control is
functioning, output any test pattern with SP5-955.
This test pattern includes the pattern for image adjustment such as registration,
blank margin, laser beam pitch, etc.
B156/B220 4-22 SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DEFECTS
4.4 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DEFECTS

4.4.1 SENSORS
Component
CN Condition Symptom
(Symbol)
Fusing exit A paper jam is detected when paper is fed; and
sensor 324 Open the paper jam is cleared when the paper is
(I/O board) removed
Shorted A paper jam is detected when paper is not fed.
ID sensor Open No immediate symptom is seen. ( NOTE)
260
The machine does not respond.
(BICU) Shorted
No immediate symptom is seen. ( NOTE)
Image transfer Open SC481 is displayed.
307
belt mark SC481 is displayed.
(I/O board) Shorted
sensor
O/B waste Open Bottle full is not detected when the bottle is full.
307
toner bottle full No symptom is seen.
(I/O board) Shorted
sensor
Oil end sensor Open No immediate symptom is seen.
261
The oil pump turns on to pump oil up when there
(BICU) Shorted
is enough oil.
shooting
Trouble-
Oil overflow 261 Open SC571 is displayed.
sensor (BICU) Shorted SC571 is displayed.
Original length The original size is not correctly detected. Output
Open
sensor 1 632 images are blurred.
(SBU) The original size is not correctly detected. Output
Shorted
images are blurred.
Original length The original size is not correctly detected. Output
Open
sensor 2 632 images are blurred.
Shorted
images are blurred.
Original width The original size is not correctly detected. Output
Open
sensor 632 images are blurred.
Shorted
images are blurred.
Paper end Paper end is not detected when the tray is
406 (High Open
sensor 1 empty.
voltage
Paper end is detected when the tray is not
supply) Shorted
empty.
Paper end Paper end is not detected when the tray is
Open
sensor 2 308 empty.
(I/O board) Paper end is detected when the tray is not
Shorted
empty.
Paper exit 324 Open A paper jam is detected when paper is fed.
sensor (I/O board) Shorted A paper jam is detected when no paper is fed.
Paper feed A paper jam is detected when paper is fed; and
sensor 1 Open the paper jam is not cleared when the paper is
406 removed.
(High voltage A paper jam is detected when paper is fed; and
supply) the paper jam is not cleared when the paper is
Shorted
removed. Or, a paper jam is detected before
paper is fed.
SM 4-23 B156/B220
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Component
(Symbol)
Paper feed A paper jam is detected when paper is fed; and
sensor 2 Open the paper jam is not cleared when the paper is
removed.
340
(I/O board) A paper jam is detected when paper is fed; and
the paper jam is not cleared when the paper is
Shorted
removed. Or, a paper jam is detected before
paper is fed.
Paper near-end 406 Open Paper near end is detected when the tray is full.
sensor 1 (High voltage Paper full is detected when the tray is almost
Shorted
supply) emptily.
Paper near-end Paper end is detected when the tray is not
Open
sensor 2 empty.
308 Paper full is detected when the tray is almost
(I/O board) empty.
Shorted
Paper near-end is detected when the tray is
full.
Paper overflow Paper overflow is not detected when the paper
Open
sensor 324 exit tray is full.
(I/O board) Paper overflow is detected when the paper exit
Shorted
tray is not full.
Platen cover 219 Open The original size is not correctly detected.
sensor (Scanner I/O No symptom
Shorted
board)
Registration A paper jam is detected when paper is fed; and
sensor Open the paper jam is not cleared when the paper is
405 removed.
(High voltage A paper jam is detected when paper is fed;
supply) and the paper jam is not cleared when the
Shorted
paper is removed.
A paper jam is detected before paper is fed.
Scanner HP Open SC120 is displayed.
240
sensor The scanner motor tries to operate for about 40
(SBU) Shorted
seconds before SC122 is displayed.
Synchronization Open SC220 is displayed.
503
detector The machine does not respond.
(LDB) Shorted
SC220 is displayed.
T/B waste toner Open Bottle full is not detected when the bottle is full.
307
bottle full Bottle full is detected when the bottle is not full.
(I/O board) Shorted
sensor
Temperature/hu 259 Open SC460 is displayed.
midity sensor (BICU) Shorted SC460 is displayed.
Fusing Open A paper jam is not detected when paper is fed.
307
entrance A paper jam is detected when paper is not fed.
(I/O board) Shorted
sensor
Transfer belt 307 Open A paper jam is not detected when paper is fed.
sensor (I/O board) Shorted A paper jam is detected when paper is not fed.
NOTE: An SC condition occurs only when a new PCU is being installed in the
machine. During copying, if the ID sensor fails, the image density will be
changed.
B156/B220 4-24 SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
4.4.2 SWITCHES
Component
(Symbol)
Exit cover 324 Open The user is prompted to close the exit cover.
switch (I/O board) Shorted No symptom is seen.
Front cover 324 Open The user is prompted to close the front cover.
switch (I/O board) Shorted No symptom is seen.
Interlock switch 312 Open The user is prompted to close the front cover.
(I/O board) Shorted No symptom is seen.
O/B waste Open The bottle is not detected when it is installed.
307
toner bottle The bottle is detected when it is not installed.
(I/O board) Shorted
switch
Tray set/paper Open The tray is not detected when it is installed.
size switch (tray The paper tray is detected when it is not
308
1) installed.
(I/O board) Shorted
The paper size is incorrectly detected (a paper
jam may occur).
Tray set/paper Open The tray is not detected when it is installed.
size switch (tray The paper tray is detected when it is not
308
2) installed.
(I/O board) Shorted
The paper size is incorrectly detected (a paper
shooting
Trouble-
jam may occur).
Right cover 324 Open The user is prompted to close the right cover.
switch (I/O board) Shorted No symptom
T/B waste toner Open The bottle is not detected when it is installed.
307
bottle switch Bottle full is detected when the bottle is not
(I/O board) Shorted
installed.
4.4.3 BLOWN FUSE CONDITIONS
Rating
Fuse Symptom when turning on the main switch
115V 220 ~ 240V
Power Supply Board
FU1 (N.A.) 15A/125V No response
FU2 10A/250V 5A/250V No response
The machine starts initialization (the sound is
FU8 5A/250V 5A/250V heard), but nothing appears on the operation
panel.
The machine starts program loading, and
optional units (PFU, LCT, Interchange, By-
FU9 5A/250V 5A/250V
pass, Duplex, bridge, shift tray and key
counter) are disabled.
The machine starts program loading, and
FU12 5A/250V 5A/250V "Functional Problems" appears on the
operation panel with the "SC547".
SM 4-25 B156/B220
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CHECK POINTS FOR IMAGE PROBLEMS AT REGULAR INTERVALS
4.5 CHECK POINTS FOR IMAGE PROBLEMS AT

REGULAR INTERVALS
Image problems may appear at regular intervals that depend on the circumference
of certain components. The following diagram shows the possible symptoms (black
or white dots at regular intervals).
Paper feed
Problems at regular intervals
B156T502.WMF
Colored spots at 54-mm intervals: Development roller

Abnormal image at 68-mm intervals: Transfer roller
Abnormal image at 188-mm intervals: Fusing belt
Abnormal image at 125-mm intervals: Pressure roller in the fusing unit
B156/B220 4-26 SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SKEWED, TRAPEZOID, AND PARALELLOGRAM IMAGES
4.6 SKEWED, TRAPEZOID, AND PARALELLOGRAM

IMAGES
4.6.1 SKEWED IMAGES
The images leading and trailing edges are parallel to one another.
The images left and right edges are also parallel.
However, all four sides are slanted with respect to the papers edge.
Feed direction
Skewed image may

Parallel
Parallel also appear in the
opposite orientation.
shooting
Trouble-
Paper Image Area
4.6.2 TRAPEZOID IMAGES

Only the images trailing edge is slanted with respect to the paper.
The remaining 3 sides are parallel to the papers edges.
Feed direction
Trapezoid image may

Parallel
also appear in the
Paper Image Area
SM 4-27 B156/B220
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
4.6.3 PARALLELOGRAM IMAGES

Like skewed images, the leading/trailing edges and left/right edges are parallel to
each other, however here, the leading and trailing edges are both slanted with
respect to the papers edge.
Feed direction
Parallel Parallel
Parallelogram may
also appear in the
Paper Image Area
B156/B220 4-28 SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
4.6.4 CHECKING THE IMAGE WITH THE TRIMMING PATTERN
Print out 5, A3 Trimming Patterns from

SP5-955 (value: 11)
Skewed Parallelogram
See Action 1 (Skewed See Action 2
shooting
Trouble-
Images) (Parallelogram Image
Adjustment)
SM 4-29 B156/B220
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
4.6.5 CORRECTING THE IMAGES

Flow Chart
Please use the following flowchart to correct skewed, parallelogram, and trapezoid
images.
Image is skewed, trapezoid, parallelogram or

combination skewed/trapezoid.
Print out SP5-955-11 trimming pattern
Do the above occur? Print out sample using

No
exposure glass.
Yes
Do the above Print out sample

Are the lines running along No
Action 1 still occur? using ADF.
Yes the main-scan and sub-scan directions
(Skewed)
at 90 degrees to one another?
No
Do the above still
OK No
occur?
Action 2 Yes
(Parallelgram)
Yes
Action 3 Action 4/5

(Parallelogram) (Original skew)
B156T505.WMF
B156/B220 4-30 SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Action
Action 1 (skewed image of trimming pattern)

Image skew when feeding from mainframe Trays 1 and 2 because the operator
does not set the side fence flush against the paper stack.
1. Advise customers that the side fence should be set flush against the loaded
paper stack, or in cases where the customer gives approval, secure the side
fences in places [A] with two screws. Two screws [B] are located on the tray 1
and 2 as shown below.
shooting
Trouble-
[B] B156T602.JPG
B156T601.JPG
[A]
NOTE: The level of skew will increase twofold if there is a 1mm gap between the
paper and side fence.
2. As a supplement, the level of skew can be further minimized by increasing the

paper buckle in SP1-003. Try adjusting this value several times while checking
the level of skew on the printouts, keeping in mind that a higher value tends to
cause Z-folds and a lower value tends to cause paper jams.
SM 4-31 B156/B220
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Action 2 (parallelogram image of trimming pattern)

Adjust the position of the laser unit as described in section 3.4.2 of the Service
Manual.
Adjusting for Image Skew
[A]
1. Positioning pin [A] ( x 1)
2. Loosen (x 4) [B].
3. Adjust the position of the laser optics
housing unit ( Adjustment).
4. Fasten (x 4) [B].
NOTE: After changing the position of
the laser optics housing unit, do
not reinstall the positioning pin.
Keep the pin in a safe place.
B156R221.WMF
[B]
NOTE: When the image skews as shown on the
right, move the unit 0.6 mm in the direction of
the black arrow as shown in the diagram
above and to the right.
0.6mm
Paper feed
(A3 SEF)
B156R239.WMF
B156/B220 4-32 SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Action 3 (parallelogram image in platen mode)

Parallelogram slants to the right Raise the left side of the scanner unit.
Parallelogram slants to the left Lower the left side of the scanner unit.
1. Remove the rear cover, scanner left cover, and upper left cover.
2. Mark the position of the left scanner reinforcement plate by drawing a line
along the lower edge (see photograph below).
3. While holding the scanner unit in place, loosen the 6 screws of the left scanner
reinforcement plate.
Note: The scanner must be held in place, as it will tend to sink due to its own
weight.
4. Raise or lower the scanner with respect to the reference line, then tighten the
screws.
Left scanner reinforcement plate
shooting
Trouble-
Mark the
line
SM 4-33 B156/B220
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Action 4 (original skew)
Perform the following checks:

1. Make sure the ADF side fences are in the proper position for the size of the
original.
2. Check to see if the surfaces of the pick-up roller, separation roller, feed belt,
transport rollers and exit rollers are dirtied, and clean if necessary.
3. Check to see if the skewing still occurs, and if it does, continue onto the next
step.
4. Cut two sheets of paper to a size of A4 x 30mm (297mm x 30mm), then open
the ADF left cover [A] and insert the two sheets into the paper path as shown
(left and right sides).
5. Close the ADF unit (keeping the ADF left cover open).
6. Pull on both strips of paper at the same time (from the left side of the DF) and
check for a difference in resistance.
If there is no difference in resistance between the front and rear, adjust the
ADF skew as shown below in Action 5-1(see ARDF Skew Adjustment in the
Service Manual, 3.12.3).
If the resistance with the rear sheet is larger than the front, adjust the skew as
shown below in Action 5-2.
DF (top) DF (bottom)
297x30mm
297x30mm
B156/B220 4-34 SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Action 5-1 Adjusting the original skew with equal front/rear pulling loads
B156T011.WMF
shooting
Trouble-
1. Peel off the black tape on the right hinge of the ADF.
2. Loosen the screw that secures the left hinge.
3. Change the position of the screw that secures the right hinge to the long hole.
NOTE: Do not tighten the screw at this moment.
4. Adjust the right hinge position to correct the skewed image.
NOTE: Shifting the hinge to the rear will slant the image to the right (and vice-
versa).
5. Tighten both screws and check the copy image.
6. If it is not fixed, repeat steps 2 to 5.
SM 4-35 B156/B220
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Action 5-2 Adjusting the original skew when the rear pulling load is larger
Raise the left side of the ADF by adding washers as shown below.
[C] [A]
[E]
[B]
[D]
[B, C]
M03070202.WMF
M03070201.WMF
1. Remove the ADF unit from the copier.

2. Remove the shoulder screw [A].
3. Add one or two washers (P/N 07010050Z [B], t=0.7mm) between the hinge
bracket (mainframe) and ADF left hinge [E] to raise the height of the left side of
the ADF.
4. Add the same quantity of the washers [C] to the neighboring screw hole [D] on
the hinge bracket.
5. Reattach the ADF so that the ADF hinge [E] is positioned horizontal on top of
the washers added to the left hinge bracket.
B156/B220 4-36 SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SERVICE TABLES
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE
5. SERVICE TABLES
5.1 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE
CAUTION
Do not turn off the main power switch while the power LED ( ) lights or
flashes. Doing so may severely damage the hard disk or the memory of the
copier. Before turning off the main power switch, press the operation
power switch, and wait for the power LED to go out.
NOTE: The main power LED lights or flashes when:

1) the platen cover or ARDF is open
2) the hard disk or memory is accessed
3) the copier is communicating with another device
5.1.1 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE OPERATION

Starting the SP mode
1. Press the clear modes key.

2. Type 107 at the numeric keypad.
3. Press the clear/stop key and hold it down until the screen
display changes (for about 3 seconds).
Service
Tables
4. Touch Copy Sp on the touch screen. Copy SP
Quitting the SP mode
1. Touch Exit on the touch screen until the screen Exit

display changes.
2. Touch Exit on the touch screen until the screen Exit
display changes.
SM 5-1 B156/B220
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SP Mode Touch Screen

For details on the SP modes, see section 5.1.2.
1 2 3 4 5
6 7 8 9
10
B156S001.WMF
Expands all SP mode menus.

Collapses all SP mode menus.
Opens the copy window ( Copy Window for Test Printing).
Enables numeric keypad inputs for specifying a SP mode menu.
(Type a menu number at the numeric keypad, and press the key.)
Quits the SP mode.
Expands or collapses the menu list of each group.
Scrolls up or down through the groups.
Scrolls up or down to the previous or next page.
Scrolls up or down to the previous or next line.
Selects the previous or next menu.
B156/B220 5-2 SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Copy Window for Test Printing

1) Touch the Copy Window button ( SP Mode Touch Screen). The copy
window is displayed.
2) Adjust the settings if necessary, and press the (start) key to make the
test print.
3) Touch the SP Mode button (highlighted on the touch screen). The SP
mode screen is displayed.
Working on SP Mode Menus

The SP mode menus are classified in three levels.
1. Find the necessary SP mode menu from the SP Mode Table ( 5.1.2).
2. Select an SP using either of the following two operations:
1) Using the numeric key pad
a) Make sure the SP Direct button is highlighted. (If not, touch the button.)
b) Type the SP mode menu number at the numeric key pad.
2) Using the touch screen
c) Touch the Open All button or the Group # button (where the #
indicates the group number which the necessary menu belongs to).
d) Scroll the menu if necessary ( SP Mode Touch Screen).
e) Touch the necessary menu, or touch the Prev Page or Next Page
button to select the menu.
3. Type the necessary values at the numeric key pad. The value in the input box
is overwritten.
Service
Tables
Input box
B156S002.WMF
NOTE: 1) Initial indicates the default value.

2) To toggle plus/minus, press the (clear/stop) key.
4. Press the key. If an out-of-range value has been input in the box, the value
is ignored.
NOTE: If you are prompted to complete the setting, touch Yes.
5. Quit the SP mode ( Quitting the SP mode).
SM 5-3 B156/B220
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Service Mode Lock/Unlock

At locations where the machine contains sensitive data, the customer engineer
cannot operate the machine until the Administrator turns the service mode lock off.
This function makes sure that work on the machine is always done with the
permission of the Administrator.
NOTE: This function is not used on B051 series machines.
1. If you cannot go into the SP mode, ask the Administrator to log in with the User
Tool and then set Service Mode Lock to OFF. After he or she logs in:
User Tools > System Settings > Administrator Tools > Service Mode Lock >
OFF
This unlocks the machine and lets you get access to all the SP codes.
The CE can do servicing on the machine and turn the machine off and on. It
is not necessary to ask the Administrator to log in again each time the
machine is turned on.
2. If you must use the printer bit switches, go into the SP mode and set SP 5169
to 1.
3. After machine servicing is completed:
Change SP 5169 from 1 to 0.
Turn the machine off and on. Tell the administrator that you completed
servicing the machine.
The Administrator will then set the Service Mode Lock to ON.
B156/B220 5-4 SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
5.1.2 SP MODE TABLE

In the Function/[Setting] column:
The related pop-up screen name and function name (if any) appear in
parenthesis following the function description.
Comments are in italics.
The setting range is enclosed in brackets, with the default setting written in
bold.
An asterisk (*) after the mode number means that this modes value is
stored in the NVRAM. If you do a RAM reset, all these SP modes will be
returned to their factory settings.
DFU stands for Design/Factory Use only. Values marked DFU should not be
changed.
An SP number set in bold-italic (e.g. x-001-1) denotes a Special Service
Program mode setting.
NOTE: The Service Program Mode is for use by service representatives only, so
that they can properly maintain product quality. If this mode is used by
anyone other than service representatives for any reason, data might be
deleted or settings might be changed. In such case, product quality cannot
be guaranteed any more.
SP1-XXX: (Feed)
Mode No.
1 (Class 1, 2, and 3)
Function / [ Setting ]
001* Lead Edge
1 Tray 1: Plain Adjusts the leading edge registration by changing the
Service
Tables
2 Tray 1: Thick registration clutch operation timing for each mode.
3 Tray 1: OHP [9.0 ~ 9.0 / 0.0 / 0.1 mm/step]
4 Tray 2: Plain The user mode cannot adjust the settings for thick paper
5 Tray 2: Thick or OHP sheets.
6 Tray 2: OHP NOTE: When adjusting SP1-001-2 or 3, check SP1-001-
1 first. SP1-001-2 and 3 adjust the differences
7 Tray 3
between the leading edge registration positions
8 Tray 4 for the following paper types:
9 By-pass: Plain 1: Plain paper and thick paper
10 By-pass: Thick 2: Plain paper and OHP
11 By-pass: OHP In the same manner, when adjusting SP1-001-5
12 Duplex or 6, check SP1-001-4 first; and when adjusting
SP1-001-10 or 11, check SP1-001-9 first.
002* Side-to-Side
1 By-pass Adjusts the side-to-side registration by changing the
2 Tray 1 laser main scan start position for each mode.
3 Tray 2 [4.0 ~ 4.0 / 0.0 / 0.1 mm/step]
4 Tray 3 NOTE: When adjusting SP1-002-1, 3, 4, 5, or 6, check
5 Tray 4 SP1-002-2 first. SP1-002-1, 3, 4, 5, and 6 adjust
the differences in the side-to-side registrations
6 Duplex
between each paper tray and tray 1.
SM 5-5 B156/B220
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Mode No.
1 (Class 1, 2, and 3)
003* Paper Buckle
1 Tray: Plain Adjusts the amount of paper buckle at the registration
roller by changing the paper feed timing.
[4 ~ 6 / 0 / 1 mm/step]
2 Tray: Thick [4 ~ 6 / 2 / 1 mm/step]
3 Tray: OHP [4 ~ 6 / 2 / 1 mm/step]
4 Tray: Small Size [4 ~ 6 / 0 / 1 mm/step]
Small Size includes LT long edge feed and smaller.
5 By-pass: Plain [4 ~ 6 / 3 / 1 mm/step]
6 By-pass: Thick [4 ~ 6 / 0 / 1 mm/step]
7 By-pass: OHP [4 ~ 6 / 0 / 1 mm/step]
8 Duplex [4 ~ 6 / 0 / 1 mm/step]
105* Fusing Temperature
1 Heating: Idling Sets the temperature at which the heating roller starts
idling.
[100 ~ 180 / 145 / 1C/step]
2 Heating: Ready Sets the temperature at which the heating roller enters
the print ready condition.
[100 ~ 180 / 155 / 1C/step]
3 Heating: Standby Sets the heating roller temperature for the ready
(standby) condition. After the main switch has been
turned on, the machine enters this condition when the
heating roller temperature reaches the temperature
specified in this SP mode. When the machine is
recovering from energy saver or auto off mode, the
machine becomes ready when both heat and pressure
roller temperatures reach the specified temperature.
Pressure roller: SP1-105-16
[100 ~ 180 / 160 / 1C/step ]
4 Heating: Plain/1 Color Sets the heating roller temperature for thin paper in
single-color mode.
[120 ~ 190 / 155 / 1C/step]
5 Heating: Plain/Full Sets the heating roller temperature for thin paper in full-
Color color mode.
[120 ~ 190 / 160 / 1C/step]
6 Heating: Middle Sets the heating roller temperature for normal plain
Thick/1 Color paper in single-color mode.
[120 ~ 190 / 165 / 1C/step]
7 Heating: Middle Sets the heating roller temperature for normal plain
Thick/Full Color paper in full-color mode.
[120 ~ 190 / 170 / 1C/step]
8 Heating: Thick/1 Color Sets the heating roller temperature for thick paper in
single-color mode.
[120 ~ 190 / 165 / 1C/step]
9 Heating: Thick/Full Sets the heating roller temperature for thick paper in full-
Color color mode.
[120 ~ 190 / 170 / 1C/step]
10 Heating: OHP/1 Color Sets the heating roller temperature for OHP sheets in
single-color mode.
[120 ~ 190 / 165 / 1C/step]
B156/B220 5-6 SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Mode No.
1 (Class 1, 2, and 3)
105* 11 Heating: OHP/Full Sets the heating roller temperature for the OHP sheets
Color in full-color mode.
[120 ~ 190 / 175 / 1C/step]
12 Heating: Duplex/1 Sets the heating roller temperature for duplex printing
Color (both sides) in single-color mode.
[120 ~ 190 / 150 / 1C/step]
13 Heating: Duplex/Full Sets the heating roller temperature for duplex printing
Color (both sides) in full-color mode.
[120 ~ 190 / 155 / 1C/step]
14 Pressure: Idling Sets the temperature at which the pressure roller starts
idling.
[10 ~ 100 / 10 / 1C/step]
15 Pressure: Ready Sets the temperature at which the pressure roller
becomes ready for printing.
[60 ~ 150 / 65 / 1C/step]
16 Pressure: Standby Sets the pressure roller temperature for the ready
(standby) condition. After the main switch has been
turned on, the machine enters this condition when the
pressure roller temperature reaches the temperature
specified in this SP mode. When the machine is
recovering from energy saver or auto off mode, the
machine becomes ready when both heat and pressure
roller temperatures reach the specified temperature.
Heating roller: SP1-105-3
[60 ~ 150 / 115 / 1C/step]
27 Heating: OFFSET + Sets the heating roller temperature correction for when
room temperature is 15C or lower.
[0 ~ 20 / 5 / 1C/step]
Service
Tables
28 Pressure: OFFSET + Sets the pressure roller temperature correction for when
room temperature is 15C or lower.
[0 ~ 20 / 0 / 1C/step]
29 Heating: OFFSET Sets the heating roller temperature correction for when
room temperature is 30C or higher.
[0 ~ 20 / 5 / 1C/step]
30 Pressure: OFFSET Sets the pressure roller temperature correction for when
room temperature is 30C or higher.
[0 ~ 20 / 0 / 1C/step]
106 Temperature Display
1 Heating Roller Displays the current temperature of the heating and
2 Pressure Roller pressure rollers.
109 Fusing Nip
1 Execute Mode Checks the fusing nip width using an OHP sheet.
The OHP sheet stops in the fusing unit for the
specified time ( SP1-109-2).
The nip width should be 9 0.5 mm at front and rear.
If this requirement is not met, change the fusing unit.
2 Stop Duration Adjusts the stoppage time for the OHP sheet in the
fusing unit ( SP1-109-1).
[0 ~ 100 / 10 / 1 s/step]
SM 5-7 B156/B220
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Mode No.
1 (Class 1, 2, and 3)
905 Fusing Roller
0: New 1: Old Selects the pressure roller type.
[0 ~ 1 / 0 / 1 /step] DFU
0: New pressure roller
1: Old pressure roller
NOTE: If you change this SP, it changes the fusing
temperature values (SP1-105-2 to 13 and
SP1-105-15 to 16)
920 Exit Full Timer
Exit Full Timer [10 ~ 60 / 10 / 1 s/step] DFU
930 Fusing Oil Add
Fusing oil add Forces the oil pump to supply silicone oil up from the oil
tank to the tank in the oil supply unit. If the oil end
sensor detects oil in the oil supply unit, this SP will not
start the pump.
940 LEF PriorityBypass

LEF PriorityBypass Selects the default paper feed direction of the by-pass
tray.
[0 ~ 1 / 0 / 1 /step]
0: SEF
1: LEF
The machine detects only the width, but detects the size
based on this information.
If the setting is 0 (SEF): When A4 LEF is placed in the
bypass tray, the machine detects this as A3. A4 SEF will
be detected as A4.
If the setting is 1 (LEF): The machine will detect A4LEF
as A4. However, if A4 SEF is placed in the bypass tray,
it will be detected as A5.
B156/B220 5-8 SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SP2-XXX: (Drum)
Mode No.
2 (Class 1, 2, and 3)
001* Charge Bias
1 [M] Adjusts the charge corona unit grid voltage.
2 [C] [300 ~ 800 / 500 / 1 Volt/step]
3 [Y] Only effective if process control is disabled.
4 [K]
5 No Image Area
6 Charger Current Adjusts the charge corona unit current.
[400 ~ 800 / 500 / 1 A/step]
100* Magnification Adjustment
1 Main Scan Adjusts the magnification in each scan direction.
2 Sub Scan [12.8 ~ 12.7 / 0 / 0.1%/step]
101* Trim Adjustment
1 front Adjusts the width of the white margin.
[0.0 ~ 9.0 / 4.0 / 0.1 mm/step]
2 back [0.0 ~ 9.0 / 2.0 / 0.1 mm/step]
3 lead
4 trail
201* Develop Bias Adjustment
1 [M] Adjusts the development bias.
2 [C] [0 ~ 500 / 250 / 1 Volt/step]
3 [Y] Only effective if process control is disabled.
4 [K]
208 Forced Toner
1 [K] Forcefully supplies toner to the development unit.
2 [C]
Service
Tables
3 [M]
4 [Y]
5 All Color
213 Toner End Set
Toner End Set Specifies how many sheets can be printed after the
toner near end message.
[0 255 / 50 / 1 /step]
306 Trans Belt First
1 1 Color Adds the transfer current to the first page to improve
insufficient transfer of the whole solid image.
[3.0 ~ 14.0 / 9.0 / 1 A /step]
2 2/3/4 Colors [3.0 ~ 14.0 / 13.0 / 1 A /step]
400* Cleaning Bias LL1
1 1 Color Adjusts the transfer belt cleaning voltage when absolute
humidity AH (g/m3) is in the following range:
0 < AH 3.5 (this is the LL1 humidity range)
[0 ~ 2000 / 1200 / 10 Volt/step]
2 2 Colors-4 Colors [0 ~ 2000 / 1200 / 10 Volt/step]
3 Half Speed/1 Color [0 ~ 2000 / 1200 / 10 Volt/step]
4 Half Speed/2 Colors-4 [0 ~ 2000 / 1200 / 10 Volt/step]
Colors
5 ID pattern [0 ~ 2000 / 1600 / 10 Volt/step]
6 No Image Area [0 ~ 2000 / 1400 / 10 Volt/step]
SM 5-9 B156/B220
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE Rev. 10/2005
Mode No.
2 (Class 1, 2, and 3)
400* 7 Jam Recovery [0 ~ 2000 / 1600 / 10 Volt/step]
401*
8 Toner Revital
Cleaning Bias LL2
[0 ~ 2000 / 1100 / 10 Volt/step] (BICU v1.06)

3.5 < AH 8.0 (this is the LL2 humidity range) DFU
[0 ~ 2000 / 1600 / 10 Volt/step]
Colors
7 Jam Recovery [0 ~ 2000 / 1600 / 10 Volt/step]
402*
8 Toner Revital
Cleaning Bias NN1
[0 ~ 2000 / 1100 / 10 Volt/step] (BICU v1.06)

8.0 < AH 14 (this is the NN1 humidity range) DFU
[0 ~ 2000 / 1700 / 10 Volt/step]
Colors
403*
8 Toner Revital
Cleaning Bias NN2
[0 ~ 2000 / 1100 / 10 Volt/step] (BICU v1.06)

14 < AH 19 (this is the NN2 humidity range) DFU
[0 ~ 2000 / 1700 / 10 Volt/step]
Colors
404*
8 Toner Revital
Cleaning Bias HH
[0 ~ 2000 / 1100 / 10 Volt/step] (BICU v1.06)

19 < AH (this is the HH humidity range) DFU
[0 ~ 2000 / 1700 / 10 Volt/step]
Colors
B156/B220 5-10 SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Rev. 10/2005 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE
Mode No.
2 (Class 1, 2, and 3)
404* 6 No Image Area [0 ~ 2000 / 1400 / 10 Volt/step]
501*
8 Toner Revital
Fusing Bias Status
[0 ~ 2000 / 1100 / 10 Volt/step] (BICU v1.06)
Fusing Bias Status Displays the status of fusing and discharge pin bias
control (ON or OFF).
[0 ~ 1 / 1 / 1/step]
0: Control OFF
1: Control ON
502 Discharge Bias

1 LL1: 1st Adjusts the discharge plate voltage (paper separation
from transfer belt).
[2500 0 / 2000 / 100 Volt/step]
2 LL2: 1st [2500 0 / 2000 / 100 Volt/step]
3 NN1: 1st [2500 0 / 1500 / 100 Volt/step]
503 Fusing Bias SW
Fusing Bias SW Controls the status of fusing bias control.
[0 ~ 2 / 2 / 1 /step]
If a current leak occurs because of a small hole in the
fusing belt surface, the machine automatically turns this
SP off. After this, the fusing bias is not applied until the
fusing counter is reset and the SP is set back to ON or
the PM counter is reset.
0: OFF fixed
The fusing and discharge pin bias are always off.
1: ON fixed
Service
Tables
The fusing and discharge pin bias are always on. It
only turns off when SC 420 occurs.
2: Auto
The fusing and discharge pin bias turns off after 2K
prints.
It also turns off when SC 420 occurs, even if the
number of prints is less than 2K prints.
It turns on after you install a new fusing unit and
reset the PM counter with SP7-804-7.
801* Charge Cleaning Interval
1 Reference Value Sets the charge corona unit cleaning interval.
[0 ~ 5000 / 600 / 100 counts/step]
See section 6 for details. SP7-925 displays the number
of counts since the last cleaning.
3 Additional Value [100 ~ 5000 / 400 / 100 counts/step]
With this SP, you can adjust the interval for charge
corona cleaning in the middle of a job.
The charge corona cleaning is done after 600
development counts (SP2-801-1), at job end or after
1000 development counts (= the sum of the settings in
SP2-801-1 and -3) in the middle of the job.
802 Charger Cleaning
Charger Cleaning Executes a forced charge corona unit cleaning.
Set to 1 to start cleaning.
SM 5-11 B156/B220
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Mode No.
2 (Class 1, 2, and 3)
803 Charger Cleaning Off Time
1 Charger Cleaning Off [10 ~ 200 / 10 / 10 sec /step]
Time Sets the time for charging the corona wire after charger
cleaning to prevent uneven image density.
904 1C Bias Adjustment
1 M Default 50V DFU
2 C Default 0V DFU
3 Y Default 0V DFU
4 K Default 0V DFU
905 Paper Transfer Roller Type
1 0:D type 1:S type Selects the paper transfer roller type.
[0 ~ 1 / 0 / 1 /step] DFU
0: Drum type
1: Straight type
912* Temperature Humidity Display
1 Temperature Displays the temperature measured by the temperature
sensor inside the machine.
[127 ~ 127 / 0 / 1C/step]
2 Humidity 1 Displays the humidity measured by the humidity sensor
inside the machine.
[0 ~ 255 / 0 / 1%/step]
3 Humidity 2 Displays the absolute humidity calculated from the
temperature/humidity sensor readings.
[0 ~ 65535 / 0 / 0.1 g/m3/step]
4 Environment Level Displays the current humidity level calculated from the
absolute humidity.
LL1: 0 < AH 3.5
LL2: 3.5 < AH 8.0
NN1: 8.0 < AH 14
* AH = absolute NN2: 14 < AH 19
humidity HH: 19 < AH
920 ITB Cleaning Clutch OFF Time
[500 ~ 500 / 0 / 10 ms/step] DFU
921 ITB Cleaning Clutch OFF Mode
[0 ~ 1 / 0 / 1 /step] DFU
0: New PCU with ITB cleaning blade (do not adjust
SP 2-920)
1: Old PCU without ITB cleaning blade
924 ITB Cleaning Clutch OFF/ON
1 Time [100 ~ 500 / 300 / 10 /step]
Toner accumulates on the edge of the ITB cleaning
blade. Turning the ITB clutch OFF/ON forces
accumulated toner on the blade edge to drop on the ITB
while there is no image on the ITB, and then this toner
can be removed. If this is not done, toner may drop on
the image. These SPs adjust the time and number of
times for blade cleaning.
2 Number [0 ~ 5 / 2 / 1 /step]
925
3 Duplex
ITB Cleaning Exec Variable
[0 ~ 5 / 2 / 1/step] (BICU v1.07 & Controller v1.07)
[1 ~ 100 / 20 / 1 sheet/step] DFU
B156/B220 5-12 SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Mode No.
2 (Class 1, 2, and 3)
926 Coverage Ratio Reference DFU
1 MC [0~ 100 / 1.7 / 0.1%/step]
2 FC [0~ 100 / 1.7 / 0.1%/step]
927 Disable Time (ITB Cleaning) DFU
[0 ~ 14 / 3 / 1 sec/step]
938 OPC Reverse Interval
[0 ~ 100 / 10 / 1 /step]
The main motor turns the OPC belt in reverse for 500ms
at the end of every job, to remove unwanted particles
between the OPC belt and OPC cleaning blade.
However, it is not necessary to do this often. In addition,
if the frequency of OPC belt reverse rotation is reduced,
the cleaning blade operates better.
This SP adjusts the counter for the OPC belt reverse
rotation, and is incremented as follows:
LT/A4 LEF or shorter: 1, Longer than LT/A4 LEF: 2.
When this SP reaches its set maximum, reverse rotation
is done for 500ms at job end.
940 OPC Lubricant Mode
OPC Lubricant Mode Executes a forced OPC lubrication to reduce the friction
on the OPC belt. DFU
The OPC belt and the lubricant brush operate for 2
minutes.
944 OPC Lubrication: High Coverage
1 Setting Enables/disables OPC lubrication after a certain amount
of images are printed. The lubrication timing depends on
SP2-944-2 to -5.
[0 ~ 1 / 1 / 1 /step]
Service
0: Disables
Tables
1: Enables
When high coverage images are continuously printed,
cleaning of the OPC may not be enough. To correct this,
OPC lubrication is carried out during printing
2 Image Coverage1 Specifies standard average coverage condition 1.
[50 ~ 800 / 300 / 10 units/step]
OPC lubrication is executed under the following
conditions.
After the previous OPC lubrication, the number of
output pages reaches the value specified with SP2-
944-4.
The average coverage of the outputs after the
previous OPC lubrication exceeds standard average
coverage condition 1.
3 Image Coverage2 Specifies standard average coverage condition 2.
[50 ~ 800 / 200 / 10 units/step]
OPC lubrication is executed under the following
conditions.
After the previous OPC lubrication, the number of
output pages reaches the value specified with SP2-
944-5.
The average coverage of the outputs after the
previous OPC lubrication exceeds standard average
coverage condition 2.
SM 5-13 B156/B220
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Mode No.
2 (Class 1, 2, and 3)
944 4 Sheets1 [6 ~ 80 / 30 / 1 sheet/step]
5 Sheets2 [6 ~ 80 / 60 / 1 sheet/step]
6 Time Specifies the time for OPC lubrication.
[8 ~ 30 / 14 / 1 sec/step]
950 Start Registration Adjustment 1
1 K (32/24cpm) Color registration adjustment: Adjusts the start timing of
imaging for each color.
[6 ~ 6 / 1 / 1 /step]
The value indicates 2 lines.
2 lines = 0.047566 ms (about 85 m)
+: Delays the start timing.
: Advances the start timing.
The start timing is adjusted only in plain paper mode,
and when one of the following conditions is satisfied:
1) Between the two images on the transfer belt (when
two images are developed on the OPC at the
same time ( 6.3))
2) B4 SEF or larger (multi-print job)
2 M (32/24cpm) [6 ~ 6 / 1 / 1 /step]
3 C (32/24cpm) [6 ~ 6 / 0 / 1 /step]
4 Y (32/24cpm) [6 ~ 6 / 0 / 1 /step]
5 K (32/24cpm) Adjusts the start timing of the second imaging for each
color.
[6 ~ 6 / 2 / 1 /step]
6 M (32/24cpm) [6 ~ 6 / 1 / 1 /step]
7 C (32/24cpm) [6 ~ 6 / 0 / 1 /step]
8 Y (32/24cpm) [6 ~ 6 / 0 / 1 /step]
9 K (20cpm) Adjusts the start timing of imaging for each color.
[6 ~ 6 / 1 / 1 /step]
10 M (20cpm) [6 ~ 6 / 1 / 1 /step]
11 C (20cpm) [6 ~ 6 / 0 / 1 /step]
12 Y (20cpm) [6 ~ 6 / 0 / 1 /step]
13 K (20cpm) [6 ~ 6 / 1 / 1 /step]
14 M (20cpm) [6 ~ 6 / 1 / 1 /step]
15 C (20cpm) [6 ~ 6 / 0 / 1 /step]
16 Y (20cpm) [6 ~ 6 / 0 / 1 /step]
951 Clock Phase Control
1 LD 1 Adjusts the clock phase of the LD to reduce the density
2 LD 2 difference between the left and right sides of the printout
when the color misalignment correction (SP29521) is
enabled.
[0 ~ 8 / 0 / 1 /step]
Do this after installing a new laser unit; see
Replacement and Adjustment for details.
B156/B220 5-14 SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Mode No.
2 (Class 1, 2, and 3)
952 Color Misalignment Correction
Color Misalignment Selects either color misalignment correction or reduction
Correction in density difference between the left and right sides of
pages.
[0 ~ 1 / 1 / 1 /step]
1: ON
The data for LD1 and LD2 are switched between the
left and right sides of each page. This is done
because of the difference in the output of each LD.
However, in some cases this correction may cause
density differences between sides.
0: OFF
Use this setting if there are density differences
between sides.
953 S Reg. Adjustment
0:New 1:Old [0 ~ 1 / 0 / 1 /step] DFU
954 New PCU Settings
0:New 1:Old Selects the PCU type.
[0 ~ 1 / 0 / 1 /step] DFU
0: New PCU
1: Old PCU
970 Oil Removal Mode
1 Oil Removal 1 Enables/disables the oil removal process for a multi-
page job.
[0 ~ 1 / 1 / 1 /step]
0: Disables
1: Enables
Oil on duplex copies gets on the transfer belt, and this
Service
can cause uneven image density. To remove this oil,
Tables
printing stops, the PCU turns, and the cleaning unit
removes the oil.
2 Oil Removal 2 Enables/disables the oil removal process after job end.
[0 ~ 1 / 1 / 1 /step]
0: Disables
1: Enables
3 Number of Continue Specifies how many times the oil removal process is
repeated.
[1 ~ 20 / 5 / 1 /step]
The more times the oil removal is repeated, the better
the output images are; but the longer it takes.
4 Number of Duplex Specifies how often the oil removal process is done. The
unit is the number of duplex prints. The counter counts
down once every narrow (A4 SEF or less) duplex sheet,
and counts back up 1 for every other type of sheet.
[1 ~ 50 / 10 / 1 /step]
5 ITB Cleaning Clutch [0 ~ 5 / 2 / 1 /step]
Off/On Number This SP sets the number of times the ITB clutch is
turned on/off at the end of oil removal mode (SP2-970-
01 - this removes oil from the ITB to ensure uniform
image density). Turning the ITB clutch on/off helps to
remove excess toner that can cling to and then drop
from the edge of the newly added ITB cleaning blade
during oil removal.
SM 5-15 B156/B220
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Mode No.
2 (Class 1, 2, and 3)
980 Dctr Roller Interval
1 Job_Interruption: K Specifies the timing for reversing the doctor roller during
2 Job_Interruption: M the multiple printing with single color. When this counter
3 Job_Interruption: C reaches the prescribed value, reversing the doctor roller
4 Job_Interruption: Y is done during the print job.
In addition, reversing the doctor roller is done when the
counter reaches the 1/2 prescribed value in these SPs
after the toner near end has been detected.
[0 ~ 200 / 100 / 10 /step] 0: Disables job interruption.
5 Job_end: K Specifies the timing for reversing the doctor roller after
6 Job_end: M job end with single color. When this counter reaches the
7 Job_end: C prescribed value and next job is not commanded,
8 Job_end: Y reversing the doctor roller is done after the job end.
[1 ~ 100 / 20 / 1 /step]
981 Toner Revitalization (3 and 4 requires BICU v1.04 and Main Unit Controller v1.05)
1 Job_Interruption Specifies the number of prints for executing toner
revitalization in the middle of a job.
For A4 SEF, the [0 ~ 200 / 100 / 10 /step]
counter counts twice. 0: Disables job interruption.
2 Job_ End Specifies the number of prints for executing toner
revitalization at the end of a job.
For A4 SEF, the [0 ~ 100 / 20 / 1 /step]
counter counts twice. 0: Disables toner refresh at end of a job.
3 Toner Revitalization
Duplex Job
The oil removal mode (PCU idling and toner refresh) is
carried out when the duplex printing accumulated
Interruption number. [0 ~ 200 / 30 / 1 sheet/step]
Duplex PCU Idling
The duplex printing accumulated number is 6 (default) to
29 at the toner refresh mode timing after job end, the oil
removal mode is carried out. [0 ~ 200 / 6 / 1 sheet/step]
Page Count Up
When the single printing is made, the number of the
single printing {absolute value of (default) times single
printing number} reduces the duplex printing
accumulated number. After oil removal mode the duplex
printing accumulated number is cleared to 0.
[0.0 ~ -1.0 / -0.1 / 0.1/step]
982 Dev. Motor Control
1 Speed Shift Time Specifies the interval for changing the development
motor speed from half speed to normal speed.
[0 ~ 500 / 100 / 10 ms/step] DFU
2 Dev.CL_Off Time Specifies the interval until turning off the development
clutch after turning off the development motor.
[150 ~ 0 / 60 / 10 ms/step] DFU
983 Control Development Fan At Job End
1 Development Unit Fan To prevent dirty background, which can occur in high-
temperature/high-humidity conditions turn ON the
development fan at job end. [0 ~ 900 / 0 / 10 s/step]
984 Duplex PCU Idling Setting (Requires BICU v1.04 and Main Unit Controller v1.05)
1 Total Period: T1 The total period of the PCU idling in duplex mode.
[6 ~ 200 / 60 / 1 s/step]
2 Printing Prohibited The machine can print 6 seconds (default) after PCU
Period: T2 idling starts.
[6 ~ 60 / 6 / 1 s/step]
B156/B220 5-16 SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SP3-XXX: (Process)
Mode No.
3 (Class 1, 2, and 3)
001 Forced Process Control
1 Execute Does a forced process control, and displays the result as
one of the following codes.
2 Display Displays the completion code.
1: Normal termination
99: Stop (Interruption due to SC or door open)
103: Error (ID sensor inactive Defective ID sensor,
Defective circuit, Defective BCU board)
104: Error (ID sensor unable to receive light
Defective OPC belt, Dirty OPC belt, Defective ID
sensor, Defective circuit, Defective BCU board)
105: Error (ID sensor unable to receive reflection from
OPC Same as 104)
110: Error (Cyan: ID sensor unable to detect correct
image)
111: Error (Magenta: ID sensor unable to detect
correct image)
112: Error (Yellow: ID sensor unable to detect correct
image)
113: Error (Cyan: ID sensor unable to detect correct
image)
114: Error (Magenta: ID sensor unable to detect
correct image)
115: Error (Yellow: ID sensor unable to detect correct
image)
116: Error (Black: ID sensor unable to detect correct
image)
Service
Tables
118: Error (Black image not detected)
123: Error (Development bias error; Black ID sensor
unable to detect correct image)
Solutions for codes 110 to 123:
Poor connection to the development unit
Dirty development bias terminal
Abnormal development bias
PCU not installed correctly
LD unit defective
Abnormal charge corona voltage
Defective BICU
003* Lubricant Interval
1 Interval Sets the process control interval. Process control for this
SP is done only after job end.
[0 ~ 1000 / 200 / 10 sheets/step]
0: Disables automatic process control
2 Forced Interval Sets the process control interval. Process control for this
SP is done during a job if the counter reaches the value
(N1 + N2).
If the counter is between N1 and N2, process control is
done after job end.
N1: the value specified with SP3-003-1.
N2: the value specified with this SP.
[0 ~ 5000 / 500 / 10 sheets/step]
SM 5-17 B156/B220
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Mode No.
3 (Class 1, 2, and 3)
004* Environment Change
1 Temperature Sets the temperature/humidity change that triggers
process control (process control is done if temperature
or humidity has changed by this amount since the
previous process control).
[0 ~ 100 / 15 / 1C/step]
2 Humidity [0 ~ 200 / 15 / 1 g/m3/step]
006* Density Adjustment
1 M/A Correction Select the toner density compensation level for process
2 Highlight Correction control. If prints are not dark enough when making multi-
print jobs, increasing this value ensures that prints will
be darker after the next process control. The default (0)
is for no correction.
SP3-006-1: Use this one if the density of solid areas is
not satisfactory.
SP3-006-2: Use this one if the density of highlight areas
is not satisfactory.
[0 ~ 3 / 0 / 1/step]
0: None
1: Weak
2: Medium
3: Strong
The higher the value, the darker the prints will be.
125 ACC Self Check Set
0: No 1: Yes Enables process control execution before ACC.
[0 ~ 1 / 1 / 1/step]
0: No
1: Yes
911 Doctor Roller Rotation Interval
1 M Development The doctor rollers for M and K are rotated backwards to
2 K Development prevent toner clumping. It is not necessary to do this for
every M & K job, because this may cause doctor roller
filming and dirty background images. To prevent this, the
reverse rotation is done after 20 development jobs.
These SP modes can adjust the reverse rotation interval.
The doctor roller reverse rotation for SP3-911 is
performed at job end.
[1 ~ 50 / 20 / 1 /step] DFU
922* Lubricant Clutch Off
1 1C The setting determines the number of seconds after
image transfer belt cleaning roller charging that the
clutch is turned off.
[0 ~ 11 / 0 / 1 sec/step]
2 2C/3C/4C [0 ~ 11 / 3 / 1 sec/step]
929 Development Unit Replace
1 M Initializes the development unit for each color.
2 C [0 ~ 1 / 0 / -]
3 Y 0: No action
4 Bk 1: Initialize the development unit
When you initialize the development unit, refer to 3.5
development unit in the Replacement and Adjustments.
B156/B220 5-18 SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Rev. 10/2005 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE
Mode No.
3 (Class 1, 2, and 3)
970 Image Area Rate
1 M Specifies the minimum image area (expressed as a
percentage of an A4 page) required to maintain optimum
development unit condition ( Toner Revitalization:
SP3971).
[0 ~ 10.0 / 2.0 / 0.1 %/step]
After 20 sheets over a number of small jobs (or after 50
sheets in one job), if the developed area is less than the
value of this SP mode, toner is transferred to the image
transfer belt and cleaned off. This is performed during
the doctor roller reverse rotation.
2 C [0 ~ 10.0 / 2.0 / 0.1 %/step]
3 Y [0 ~ 10.0 / 2.0 / 0.1 %/step]
4 Bk [0 ~ 10.0 / 4.7 / 0.1 %/step]
5 Oil End When the average BK Image pixel is larger than 4.2%,
0.5% toner refresh (default) is carried out in duplex
mode. When the average BK Image pixel is 4.2% or
less, current toner refresh is carried out.
[0 ~ 10.0 / 0.5 / 0.1 %/step] (BICU v1.04, Main v1.05)
1 Toner Revitalization Enables/disables the toner revitalization.
[0 ~ 1 / 0 / 1 /step]
0: Disables
1: Enables
Continuous printing with a relatively low coverage ratio
(CMYK less than 5% each) tends to reduce the charge
potential of the toner, because the toner remains in the
hopper for a long time. This can lead to spots on the
copy. Toner revitalization removes this defective toner
Service
Tables
periodically.
972 Counting The Number Of A4/Lt SEF Developments For Toner Refresh Mode
1 Development counter Usually, 1 A4/LT SEF sheet is counted as 1, but for
for A4/LT SEF machines which use this paper as their main size, a
setting of 1.2. [1 or 1.2 count/ 1 / ]
980 1C Idling
1 1C Idling Enables/disables 1-color idling after paper transfer.
[0 ~ 1 / 0 / 1 /step]
0: Disables
1: Enables
Set to 1 if the user complains about diagonal lines in
solid areas that only use one toner color (M, C, or Y).
990 Process Control Off
1 All ON/OFF Selection Turns on/off process control for all process control
(0: OFF/ 1: ON) execution timings.
[0 ~ 1 / 0 / 1 /step] DFU
0: OFF (Process control enabled)
1: ON (Process control disabled)
2 After CH Cleaning Turns on/off process control for the process control that
ON/OFF Selection is done after charge corona wire cleaning.
(0: OFF/ 1: ON) [0 ~ 1 / 0 / 1 /step]
0: OFF (Process control enabled)
1: ON (Process control disabled)
SM 5-19 B156/B220
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SP4-XXX: (Scanner)
Mode No.
4 (Class 1, 2, and 3)
008* Scanner Sub Scan Magnification
Scanner Sub Scan Adjusts the magnification in the sub scan direction for
Magnification scanning.
[1.0 ~ 1.0 / 0.0 / 0.1 %/step]
Use the key to toggle between + and before entering
the value. The specification is 1%. See Replacement
and Adjustment Copy Adjustment for details.
010 Scanner Leading Edge Registration
Scanner Leading Edge Adjusts the leading edge registration for scanning in platen
Registration mode.
[3.0 ~ 3.0 / 0.0 / 0.1 mm/step]
(): The image moves in the direction of the leading edge.
the value. The specification is 2 1.5 mm. See
Replacement and Adjustment Copy Adjustment for
details.
011* Scanner Side-to-side Registration
Scanner Side-to-side Adjusts the side-to-side registration for scanning in platen
Registration mode.
[6.0 ~ 6.0 / 0.0 / 0.1 mm /step]
(): The image disappears at the left side.
(+): The image appears.
the value. The specification is 2 1.5 mm. See
Replacement and Adjustment Copy Adjustment for
details.
012* Scale Shadow Erase

1 Book: Lead Edge L Adjusts the erase margin at each side for scanning.
2 Book: Trail Edge R [0.0 ~ 3.0 / 0.0 / 0.1 mm/step]
3 Book: Left Do not adjust this unless the user wishes to have a
4 Book: Right scanner margin that is greater than the printer margin.
5 ADF: Lead Edge
7 ADF: Left
8 ADF: Right
013 Scanner Free Run
1 Lamp: OFF Performs a scanner free run with the exposure lamp on or
2 Lamp: ON off.
Press ON on the touch panel to start this feature. Press
OFF on the touch panel to stop.
017 Scan
1 Shading ON Performs a scanner free run with shading on or off. Only
2 Shading OFF one scan is made.
Press ON on the touch panel to start this feature. Press
OFF on the touch panel to stop.
B156/B220 5-20 SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Mode No.
4 (Class 1, 2, and 3)
020 DF Glass Dust Check
1 Dust Check Turns DF glass dust detection on/off.
[0 ~ 1 / 0 / 1 /step]
0: OFF
1: ON
2 Detect Level Selects the detection level.
[0 ~ 8 / 4 / 1 /step]
0: Least detailed detection, 8: Most detailed detection
3 Image Correct Level Selects the vertical line correction when using the DF.
[0 ~ 4 / 0 / 1 /step]
0: Disables image correction level
4: Most effective correction
301 APS Data Confirmation

APS Data Displays the status of the APS sensors and platen/DF
Confirmation cover sensor.
303 APS Minimum Size Setting

Selects whether the copier determines that the original is
A5 sideways or lengthwise size when the APS sensor
cannot detect the size.
[0 2 / 0 / 1 /step]
If 2: A5 lengthwise is selected, paper sizes that cannot
be detected by the APS sensors are regarded as A5
lengthwise.
If 1: A5 sideways is selected, paper sizes that cannot be
detected by the APS sensors are regarded as A5
sideways.
Service
Tables
If 0: Not detected is selected, Cannot detect original
size will be displayed.
305 ADF Size Change

Selects the original size type for the default original size
detection.
[0 ~ 2 / 0 / 1 /step]
0: Standard
1: A4/LT
2: 8K/16K
400 Scanning Blank Margin

1 Book: Lead Edge L Specifies the scanning blank margin for each edge in
2 Book: Trail Edge R platen mode.
3 Book: Left [ 0 ~ 3.0 / 0 / 0.1 mm/step]
4 Book: Right
5 ADF: Lead Edge Specifies the scanning blank margin for each edge in ADF
7 ADF: Left mode.
8 ADF: Right [ 0 ~ 3.0 / 0 / 0.1 mm/step]
SM 5-21 B156/B220
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Mode No.
4 (Class 1, 2, and 3)
417 IPU Test Pattern Select
select any test pattern Prints test patterns from the IPU video data outputs.
0: Scanning Image
1: Checker
2: Oblique Checker
3: Horizontal Gray Scale
4: Vertical Gray Scale
5: RGB YMCK Scale
6: UCR Gray Scale
7: Color Patch 16 Steps 1
8: Color Patch 16 Steps 2
9: Color Patch 64 Steps
10: Checker (YMCK)
11: Patch (YMCK)
12: Banding 1 (Gray)
13: Banding 2 (Gray)
14: Horizontal Gray Scale 2
15: Scanning Image + Checker
16: Scanning Image + Gray Scale
Change to the copy mode display by pressing the Interrupt
key, then print the test pattern.
440 Chroma Adjustment

Adjusts the color chroma for the scanner.
[0 ~ 5 / 3 / 1 /step] DFU
460 ADS (Digital) Level

Selects the auto erase background level. All background
below this level is automatically erased.
[0~ 128 / 10 / 1 /step]
540 Printer Vector

1 R: Option Adjust the vector correction of the filter in the CCD on the
2 R: R SBU unit.
3 R: G [0 255 / 0 / 1 /step]
4 R: B When replacing the SBU, input the data from the data
5 Y: Option sheet that is included with the spare SBU unit.
6 Y: R
7 Y: G
8 Y: B
9 G: Option
10 G: R
11 G: G
12 G: B
13 C: Option
14 C: R
15 C: G
16 C: B
17 B: Option
18 B: R
B156/B220 5-22 SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Mode No.
4 (Class 1, 2, and 3)
540 19 B: G Adjust the vector correction of the filter in the CCD on the
20 B: B SBU unit.
21 M: Option [0 255/ 0 / 1 /step]
22 M: R When replacing the SBU, input the data from the data
23 M: G sheet that is included with the spare SBU unit.
24 M: B
550 Scanner Application
5 Text (Print) MTF Adjusts the MTF level.
[0 ~ 15 / 8 / 1 /step]
0: Least effective MTF, 15: Most effective MTF
6 Text (Print) Smoothing Adjusts the smoothing level.
[0 ~ 7 / 4 / 1 /step]
0: Least effective smoothing, 7: Most effective smoothing
7 Text (Print) Brightness Adjusts the brightness level.
[1 ~ 255 / 128 / 1 /step]
1: Least bright, 255: Brightest
8 Text (Print) Contrast Adjusts the contrast level.
[1 ~ 255 / 128 / 1 /step]
1: Least effective contrast, 255: Most effective contrast

5 Text (OCR) MTF Adjusts the MTF level.
[0 ~ 15 / 8 / 1 /step]
6 Text (OCR) Smoothing Adjusts the smoothing level.
[0 ~ 7 / 4 / 1 /step]
Service
Tables
7 Text (OCR) Brightness Adjusts the brightness level.
[1 ~ 255 / 128 / 1 /step]
8 Text (OCR) Contrast Adjusts the contrast level.
[1 ~ 255 / 128 / 1 /step]

5 Text (OCR) D.O.C Adjusts the MTF level.
MTF [0 ~ 15 / 8 / 1 /step]
6 Text (OCR) D.O.C Adjusts the smoothing level.
Smoothing [0 ~ 7 / 4 / 1 /step]
7 Text (OCR) D.O.C Adjusts the brightness level.
Brightness [1 ~ 255 / 128 / 1 /step]
8 Text (OCR) D.O.C Adjusts the contrast level.
Contrast [1 ~ 255 / 128 / 1 /step]
SM 5-23 B156/B220
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Mode No.
4 (Class 1, 2, and 3)
5 Text /Photo MTF Adjusts the MTF level.
[0 ~ 15 / 8 / 1 /step]
6 Text /Photo Smoothing Adjusts the smoothing level.
[0 ~ 7 / 4 / 1 /step]
7 Text /Photo Brightness Adjusts the brightness level.
[1 ~ 255 / 128 / 1 /step]
8 Text /Photo Contrast Adjusts the contrast level.
[1 ~ 255 / 128 / 1 /step]
5 Photo MTF Adjusts the MTF level.
[0 ~ 15 / 8 / 1 /step]
6 Photo Smoothing Adjusts the smoothing level.
[0 ~ 7 / 4 / 1 /step]
7 Photo Brightness Adjusts the brightness level.
[1 ~ 255 / 128 / 1 /step]
8 Photo Contrast Adjusts the contrast level.
[1 ~ 255 / 128 / 1 /step]
5 Grayscale MTF Adjusts the MTF level.
[0 ~ 15 / 8 / 1 /step]
6 Grayscale Smoothing Adjusts the smoothing level.
[0 ~ 7 / 4 / 1 /step]
7 Grayscale Brightness Adjusts the brightness level.
[1 ~ 255 / 128 / 1 /step]
8 Grayscale Contrast Adjusts the contrast level.
[1 ~ 255 / 128 / 1 /step]
5 Color (T/P) MTF Adjusts the MTF level.
[0 ~ 15 / 8 / 1 /step]
6 Color (T/P) Smoothing Adjusts the smoothing level.
[0 ~ 7 / 4 / 1 /step]
558 7 Color (T/P) Brightness Adjusts the brightness level.
[1 ~ 255 / 128 / 1 /step] 1: Least bright, 255: Brightest
8 Color (T/P) Contrast Adjusts the contrast level.
[1 ~ 255 / 128 / 1 /step]
B156/B220 5-24 SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Mode No.
4 (Class 1, 2, and 3)
5 Color (GlossyPhoto) Adjusts the MTF level.
MTF [0 ~ 15 / 8 / 1 /step]
6 Color (GlossyPhoto) Adjusts the smoothing level.
7 Color (GlossyPhoto) Adjusts the brightness level.
Brightness [1 ~ 255 / 128 / 1 /step]
8 Color (GlossyPhoto) Adjusts the contrast level.
Contrast [1 ~ 255 / 128 / 1 /step]

5 sRGB (T/P) MTF Adjusts the MTF level.
[0 ~ 15 / 8 / 1 /step]
6 sRGB (T/P) Smoothing Adjusts the smoothing level.
[0 ~ 7 / 4 / 1 /step]
7 sRGB (T/P) Brightness Adjusts the brightness level.
[1 ~ 255 / 128 / 1 /step]
8 sRGB (T/P)Contrast Adjusts the contrast level.
[1 ~ 255 / 128 / 1 /step]
Service
Tables
5 sRGB (GlossyPhoto) Adjusts the MTF level.
MTF [0 ~ 15 / 8 / 1 /step]
6 sRGB (GlossyPhoto) Adjusts the smoothing level.
7 sRGB (GlossyPhoto) Adjusts the brightness level.
Brightness [1 ~ 255 / 128 / 1 /step]
8 sRGB (GlossyPhoto) Adjusts the contrast level.
Contrast [1 ~ 255 / 128 / 1 /step]
5 ACS MTF Adjusts the MTF level.
[0 ~ 15 / 8 / 1 /step]
6 ACS Smoothing Adjusts the smoothing level.
[0 ~ 7 / 4 / 1 /step]
7 ACS Brightness Adjusts the brightness level.
[1 ~ 255 / 128 / 1 /step]
SM 5-25 B156/B220
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Mode No.
4 (Class 1, 2, and 3)
8 ACS Contrast Adjusts the contrast level.
[1 ~ 255 / 128 / 1 /step]
628 Gain Adjustment: R
1 R EVEN Displays the values of the even and odd gain adjustment.
2 R ODD
629 Gain Adjustment: G
1 G EVEN Displays the values of the even and odd gain adjustment.
2 G ODD
630 Gain Adjustment: B
1 B EVEN Displays the values of the even and odd gain adjustment.
2 B ODD
661 Last Gain Data: R
1 R EVEN Displays the last gain value for the even red signal in the
CCD image processing circuit.
2 R ODD Displays the last gain value for the odd red signal in the
662 Last Gain Data: G
1 G EVEN Displays the last gain value for the even green signal in
the CCD image processing circuit.
2 G ODD Displays the last gain value for the odd green signal in the
663 Last Gain Data: B
1 B EVEN Displays the last gain value for the even blue signal in the
2 B ODD Displays the last gain value for the odd blue signal in the
688 DF: Density Adjustment
DF: Density Adjusts the brightness for scanning using the ARDF.
Adjustment [83 100 / 100 / 1 %/step]
The density when scanning from the DF exposure glass
tends to be higher than the density from the main
exposure glass. SP4-688 adjusts the density on the DF
exposure glass.
800 DF: Density Correction
1 R Adjusts the red density when scanning with the ARDF
[20 20 / 0 / 1 %/step]
2 G Adjusts the green density when scanning with the ARDF
[20 20 / 0 / 1 %/step]
800 3 B Adjusts the blue density when scanning with the ARDF
[20 20 / 0 / 1 %/step]
885 Level Adjustment: R
Adjusts the ADC reference voltage. Details are in
Replacement and Adjustment.
[ 128 ~ 127 / 49 / 1 /step]
886 Level Adjustment: G
Adjusts the ADC reference voltage.
[ 128 ~ 127 / 17 / 1 /step]
887 Level Adjustment: B
Adjusts the ADC reference voltage.
[ 128 ~ 127 / 29 / 1 /step]
B156/B220 5-26 SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Mode No.
4 (Class 1, 2, and 3)
902 ACC Data Display
1 R DATA 1 Displays ACC data.
2 G DATA 1 [0 255 / 0 / 1 /step]
3 B DATA 1
4 R DATA 2
5 G DATA 2
6 B DATA 2
903 Vertical Line Correct DFU

905* Dither selection
Dither selection [0 255 / 0 / 1 /step] DFU
906* Binary Threshold
Binary Threshold Specifies the black/white threshold for binary image
processing.
[0 255 / 128 / 1 /step]
Lower values increase the proportion of black in the
image.
907 VPU Test Pattern Selection
1 select any test pattern: [0 4 / 0 / 1 /step]
R 0: CCD
2 select any test pattern: 1: Black
G 2: White
3 select any test pattern: 3: 15-grade gray scale
B 4: Vertical line
918 Manual Gamma Adjustment
Service
Please refer to section 3.13.2
Tables
932* Picture Element Correction
1 R: Left Corrects the left or right side alignment of the red or blue
2 R: Right filter on the CCD.
3 B: Left [0 9 / 5 / 1 /step]
4 B: Right
SM 5-27 B156/B220
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SP5-XXX: (Mode)
Mode No.
5 (Class 1, 2, and 3)
024* mm/inch Display Selection
mm/inch Display Selects a unit system.
Selection North America: [0 1 / 1 / 1 /step]
Europe: [0 1 / 0 / 1 /step]
0: mm
1: inch
045* Accounting Counter
Counter Method Changes the counter method.
The setting can only be changed once.
[0 ~ 1 / 0 / 1 /step]
0: Developments
1: Prints
051 Toner Refill Detection Display
Toner Refill Detection Activates/inactivates the toner refill detection display.
Display [0 ~ 1 / 0 / 1 /step]
0: ON
1: OFF
055 Display IP Address
1 Display IP Address Display the IP Address on the LCD.
[0 ~ 1/ 0 / 1/step] (0: No, 1:Yes)
112 Non-Standard Paper Selection
0: OFF 1: ON Turns the custom paper size selection on/ off.
[0 ~ 1 / 1 / 1 /step]
0: OFF
1: ON
113 Optional Counter Type
1 Default Optional Determines the type of accounting device.
Counter Type [0 ~ 9 / 0 / 1 /step]
0: None
1: Key Card (RK3, 4)
2: Key Card (count down)
3: Prepaid Card
4: Coin Lock
5: MF Key Card
6: (not used)
7: (not used)
8: Key Counter + Vendor
9: Bar-code Printer
2 External Optional For use with the SDK package.
Counter Type [0 ~ 3 / 0 / 1 /step]
0: None
1: Expansion Device 1
118 Disable copying
Disable copying [0 ~ 1 / 0 / 1 /step]
0: Copying enabled
1: Copying disabled
B156/B220 5-28 SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Mode No.
5 (Class 1, 2, and 3)
120 Mode Clear Opt. Counter Removal
Mode Clear Opt. Selects the mode clear for all accounting devices when
Counter Removal canceling the accounting devices counter.
[0 ~ 2 / 0 / 1 /step]
0: Yes (always cleared)
1: Standby (cleared before and after a job, not
cleared during an interrupt)
2: No (never cleared)
121 Counter Up Timing

Counter Up Timing Selects the accounting timing.
[0 ~ 1 / 0 / 1 /step]
0: Feed (counted up when the feed sensor detects the
paper)
1: Exit (counted up when the exit sensor detects the
paper)
SP5-121 affects only the timing for sending signals to
the accounting device. The counters for other units or
devices are not affected.
126 F Size Setting

F Size Setting Selects the size when the original size sensors of the
ADF or platen detect that the original size is F size.
[0 ~ 2 / 0 / 1/step]
0: 8 x 13
1: 8 x 13
Service
Tables
2: 8 x 13
127 APS Mode

APS Mode Enables or disables the APS (Auto Paper Selection)
mode.
[0 ~ 1 / 0 / 1 /step]
0: Enables
1: Disables
128 Code Mode With Key/Card Option

Code Mode With [0 ~ 1 / 0 / 1 /step]
Key/Card Option 0: No combination (user codes cannot be used with
key/card options)
1: Combination (user codes can be used with
key/card options)
Also see SP 5-113.
SM 5-29 B156/B220
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Mode No.
5 (Class 1, 2, and 3)
131 Paper Size Type
Paper Size Type Selects the original size type.
[0 ~ 2 / Depending on DIP switch setting / 1 /step]
0: Japan
1: N. America
2: Europe
DIP switch setting ( 5.8)
150 Bypass Length Setting
Bypass Length Setting Use or do not use long paper in the bypass tray.
[0 ~ 1 / 0 / 1 /step]
0: OFF
1: ON (jams are not detected in the paper path)
The standard length (sub scan) is limited to 600mm
even if "1" is selected in this SP.
162 Application Switch Method

App. Switch Method Selects the switching method of the application display.
[0 ~ 1 / 0 / 1 /step]
0: Soft Key Set
1: Hard Key Set
167 Fax Printing Mode at Optional

Fax Printing Mode at Selects the fax printing mode without the optional
Optional Counter Off accounting device when the fax printing is set for
accounting.
[0 ~ 1 / 0 / 1 /step]
0: Automatic printing
1: No automatic printing
169 CE Login
CE Login If you change the printer bit switches, you must log in to
service mode with this SP before you go into the printer
SP mode.
[0 ~ 1 / 0 / 1 /step]
0: Off. Printer bit switches cannot be adjusted.
1: On. Printer bit switches can be adjusted.
212 Page Numbering

3 Duplex Printout Adjusts the positions of the 2nd page's numbers.
Right/Left Position [10 10 / 0 / 1 mm/step]
4 Duplex Printout
High/Low Position
B156/B220 5-30 SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Mode No.
5 (Class 1, 2, and 3)
302 Setting Time
Time Difference Sets the time difference.
North America: [1440 1440 / 300 / 1 minute/step]
Europe: [1440 1440 / 60 / 1 minute/step]
Values indicate the time difference from the Greenwich
Mean Time (GMT). 300 indicates the eastern
standard time of Canada and the United States of
America. 60 indicates the standard time of the French
Republic.
307 Summer Time

1 Setting Enables or disables the summer time mode.
[0 ~ 1 / NA, EU, ASIA / 1 /step]
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
NA and EUR: 1, ASIA: 0
NOTE: Make sure that both SP5-307-3 and -4 are
correctly set. Otherwise, this SP is not activated
even if this SP is set to "1".
3 Rule Set (Start) Specifies the start setting for the summer time mode.
There are 8 digits in this SP. For months 1 to 9, the "0"
cannot be input in the first digit, so the eight-digit setting
for -2 or -3 becomes a seven-digit setting.
1st and 2nd digits: The month. [1 to 12]
3rd digit: The week of the month. [1 to 5]
4th digit: The day of the week.
Service
[0 to 6 = Sunday to Saturday]
Tables
5th and 6th digits: The hour. [00 to 23]
7th digit: The length of the advanced time.
[0 to 9 / 1 hour /step]
8th digit: The length of the advanced time.
[0 to 5 / 10 minutes /step]
For example: 3500010 (EU default)
The timer is advanced by 1 hour at am 0:00 on the 5th
Sunday in March
The digits are counted from the left.
Make sure that SP5-307-1 is set to "1".
4 Rule Set (End) Specifies the end setting for the summer time mode.
There are 8 digits in this SP.
1st and 2nd digits: The month. [1 to 12]
3rd digit: The week of the month. [1 to 5]
4th digit: The day of the week.
[0 to 6 = Sunday to Saturday]
5th and 6th digits: The hour. [00 to 23]
The 7th and 8 digits must be set to "00".
The digits are counted from the left.
Make sure that SP5-307-1 is set to "1".
SM 5-31 B156/B220
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Mode No.
5 (Class 1, 2, and 3)
401* Access Control
When installing the SDK application, SAS (VAS) adjusts the following settings. DFU
200 SDK1 Unique ID This ID is overwritten by SAS (VAS) when you install or
uninstall the SDK application.
201 SDK1 Certification [ 0 ~ 255 / 0 / 1 /step]
Method
210 SDK2 Unique ID
Method
220 SDK3 Unique ID
Method
404 User Code Count Clear
User Code Count Clears the user code counter.
Clear
501 PM Alarm
1 PM Alarm Level Specifies the PM alarm level.
[0 ~ 9999 / 0 / 1 /step]
0: Disables the PM alarm
1 ~ 9999: Specifies the PM alarm level.
The PM alarm occurs when L x 1000 >= C, where L is
the specified level and C is the current PM counter
value.
2 Original Count Alarm Turns the original count alarm on or off.

[0 ~ 1 / 1 / 1 /step] Used for RSS.
0: OFF
1: ON
504 Jam Alarm Used with RSS.
Jam Alarm Selects the jam alarm level.
[0 3 / 3 / 1 /step]
0: Z (none)
1: L (6K x 1/4)
2: M (6K x 1/2)
3: H (6K)
When you select "1, 2 or 3", the machine does these
steps:
1) The jam alarm counter increases by "1" when a
paper jam is detected (except for jams in the ADF).
2) The jam alarm counter decreases by "1" when the set
number of sheets was copied or printed after the
machine detected the previous paper jam.
3) A jam alarm occurs when the jam alarm counter gets
to "10".
505 Error Alarm Used with RSS.

Error Alarm Specifies the error alarm level.
[0 255 / 40 / 1 /step]
The unit is a hundred sheets. The default "40" means
4,000 sheets.
B156/B220 5-32 SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Mode No.
5 (Class 1, 2, and 3)
507 Supply Alarm Used with RSS.
1 Paper Supply Alarm Turns the supply alarm on or off.
[0 1 / 0 / 1 /step]
0: Off 1: On
This alarm occurs when one of the limits in SPs 5507-
128 to 172 is reached.
2 Staple Supply Alarm Turns the supply alarm on or off.
[0 1 / 0 / 1 /step]
0: Off 1: On
This alarm occurs when every 1000 staples are used.
3 Toner Supply Alarm Turns the supply alarm on or off.

[0 1 / 0 / 1 /step]
0: Off 1: On
This alarm occurs when toner near end occurs.
128 Interval: Others The machine issues the control call when the number of
132 Interval: A3 paper sheets reaches the specified value.
133 Interval: A4 [ 250 10000 / 1000 / 1 sheet/step]
134 Interval: A5
141 Interval: B4
142 Interval: B5
160 Interval: DLT
164 Interval: LG
166 Interval: LT
172 Interval: HLT
508 CC Call Used with RSS.
Service
Tables
1 Jam Remains Enables/disables alarms for unremoved jams.
[0 1 / 1 / 1 /step]
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
2 Continuous Jams Enables/disables alarms for consecutive jams.
[0 1 / 1 / 1 /step]
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
3 Continuous Door Open Enables/disables alarms when a cover remains open
continuously.
[0 1 / 1 / 1 /step]
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
SM 5-33 B156/B220
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Mode No.
5 (Class 1, 2, and 3)
508 4 Low Call Mode Selects the alarm mode.
[0 1 / 1 / 1 /step]
0: Normal Mode (CC Auto Call)
1: Reduce Mode (CC Manual Call)
When selecting 1 (reduce mode), SP5-508-011 through
-023 specify parameters (referred to as P in the
following descriptions). Alarms occur under the following
conditions:
Continuous jam:
When paper jams occur P times consecutively, where
P can be between 2 and 10. The default for P is 5 (
SP5-508-012).
Continuous door open:
When a door is left open for P minutes, where P can
be between 3 and 30. The default for P is 10 ( SP5-
508-013).
Unremoved jam:
When a paper jam is left unremoved for P minutes,
where P can be between 3 and 30. The default for P
is 10 ( SP5-508-011).
11 Jam Detection: Time Specifies the unremoved jam timer ( SP5-508-004).
Length [3 30 / 10 / 1 minute/step]
12 Jam Detection: Specifies the number of consecutive jams ( SP5-508-
Continuous Count 004).
[2 10 / 5 / 1 time/step]
13 Door Open: Time Specifies the continuous door open timer ( SP5-508-
Length 004).
[3 30 / 10 / 1 minute/step]
21 Jam Operation: Time Selects how the machine handles the unremoved jam
Length alarm.
[0 1 / 1 / 1 /step]
0: Auto call
1: Beeper
If an unremoved jam occurs, a phone call is
automatically made when 0 (auto call) is selected. To
enable SP5-508-21 through -23, SP5-508-4 must be set
to 1.
22 Jam Operation: Selects how the machine handles the consecutive jam
Continuous Count alarm.
[0 1 / 1 / 1 /step]
0: Auto call
1: Manual Call
23 Door Operation: Time Selects how the machine handles the continuous door
Length open alarm.
[0 1 / 1 / 1 /step]
0: Auto call
1: Manual Call
610 ACC Factory Setting
4 Recall Recalls the ACC factory settings.
5 Overwrite Overwrites the ACC factory settings with the current
settings.
6 Previous Setting Recalls the previous ACC settings.
B156/B220 5-34 SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Mode No.
5 (Class 1, 2, and 3)
611 2nd. Single Color Adj.
1 BC [0 100 / 90 / 1 %/step]
2 BM [0 100 / 60 / 1 %/step]
3 GC [0 100 / 85 / 1 %/step]
4 GY [0 100 / 80 / 1 %/step]
5 RM [0 100 / 95 / 1 %/step]
6 RY [0 100 / 65 / 1 %/step]
801 Memory Clear Refer to section 5.1.9 for how to use this SP
1 All Clear Clears the settings from the NVRAM and initializes the
settings.
2 Engine Clear Clears the engine settings.
3 SCS Clears the system settings.
4 IMH Memory Clr Clears IMH data. DFU
5 MCS Clears MCS data. DFU
6 Copier application Clears the copy settings.
7 Fax Application Clears the fax settings.
8 Printer Application Clears the user tool settings.
9 Scanner Application Clears the scanner settings.
This SP must be performed after updating the scanner
software.
10 Web Service/Network Clears the net file settings.
Application
11 NCS Clears the network settings.
12 R-FAX Clears the R-FAX settings.
14 Clear DCS Setting Clears the DCS settings.
15 Clear UCS Setting Clears the UCS settings.
16 MIRS Setting Clears the MIRS settings.
Service
Tables
17 CCS Clears the CCS settings.
802 Free Run
1 A4: BANK 2: Bk Makes a free run test.
2 A4: TRAY 1: Bk All mode: Goes through tests 1 to 4.
3 A4: By-pass: Bk [0 ~ 1 / 0 / 1/step]
4 A4: BANK 2: FC 0: OFF
5 All Mode 1: ON
803 Input Check (See section 5.1.4, Input Check)

804 Output Check (See section 5.1.5, Output Check.)
810 SC Reset
SC Reset Resets a fusing-related SC.
Resets a type A service call condition.
NOTE: Turn the main switch off and on after using this
SP.
811 Serial Number Display
SN Display Displays the machine serial number.
812* Service Telephone No. Setting
1 Service 5-812-1: Service representative telephone number
2 Facsimile 5-812-2: Service representative fax number
3 Supply 5-812-3: Number for ordering consumables
4 Operation 5-812-4: Telephone number of the sales representative
Both numbers and alphabetic characters can be input.
SM 5-35 B156/B220
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Mode No.
5 (Class 1, 2, and 3)
816 Remote Service
1 I/F Setting Selects the remote service setting.
[0 ~ 2 / 2 / 1 /step]
0: Remote service off
1: CSS remote service on
2: NRS remote service on
2 CE Call Performs the CE Call at the start or end of the service.
[0 ~ 1 / 0 / 1 /step]
0: Start of the service
1: End of the service
This SP is activated only when SP 5816-001 is set to
2.
3 Function Flag Enables/disables the remote service function.
[0 ~ 1 / 0 / 1 /step]
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
4 Communicate Test Communication Test Call
Call
5 Device Information Device Information Call
Call
6 Device Information Displays/does not display the device information call
Call Display Setting content.
[0 ~ 1 / 0 / 1 /step]
0: Not displayed
1: Displayed
7 SSL Disable Uses/does not use the RCG certification by SSL when
calling the RCG.
[0 ~ 1 / 0 / 1 /step]
0: Uses the RCG certification
1: Does no use the RCG certification
8 RCG Connect Timeout Specifies the connect timeout interval when calling the
RCG.
[1 ~ 90 / 10 / 1 second/step]
9 RCG Write Timeout Specifies the write timeout interval when calling the
RCG.
[0 ~ 100 / 60 / 1 second/step]
10 RCG Read Timeout Specifies the read timeout interval when calling the
RCG.
[0 ~ 100 / 60 / 1 second/step]
11 Port 80 Enable Enables/disables the access via port 80 to the SOAP
(Simple Object Access Protocol) method.
[0 ~ 1 / 0 / 1 /step]
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
821 Remote Service Address
1 CSS-PI device code Selects the PI device code.
[0 4 / 0 / 1 /step]
To validate the setting, turn off and on the main power
switch.
2 RCG IP Address Sets the RCG IP address for calling the center.
B156/B220 5-36 SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Mode No.
5 (Class 1, 2, and 3)
824 NV-RAM Data Upload
NV-RAM Data Upload Use this to copy NVRAM data from the machine to an
SD card.
825 NV-RAM Data Download
NV-RAM Data Imports data from an SD card to the NVRAM.
Download
When data has been normally imported into the
NVRAM, a message appears on the operation panel.
After reading the message, turn the main power switch
off and on.
828 Network Setting
50 1284 Compatibility Validates/invalidates IEEE1284 compatibility.
(Centro) [0 ~ 1 / 1 / 1 /step]
0: Invalidated
1: Validated
52 ECP (Centro) Validates/invalidates ECP.
[0 ~ 1 / 1 / 1 /step]
This SP is activated only when SP5828-050 is set to 1.
0: Invalidated
1: Validated
65 Job Spooling Enables/disables Job Spooling.
[0 ~ 1 / 0 / 1 /step]
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
66 Job Spooling Clear: Enables/disables Job Spooling Clear when the main
Start Time power turns on.
[0 ~ 1 / 1 / 1/step]
0: ON (Erases the spooled job in the HDD before the
Service
Tables
main power is turned off.)
1: OFF (Prints the spooled job in the HDD before the
main power is turned off.)
69 Job Spooling Enables/disables Job Spooling for each protocol.
(Protocol) [0 ~ 1 / 1 / 1/step]
0: Enables Job Spooling
1: Disables Job Spooling
Bit switch
Bit 0: LPR
Bit 1: FTP
Bit 2: IPP
Bit 3: SMB
Bit 4: BMLinks
Bit 5: DIPRINT
Bit 6: Reserved
Bit 7: Reserved
84 Printing Settings List Prints the settings list related to NCS parameters.
90 TELNET Turns on/ off TELNET.
(0: OFF 1:ON) [0 ~ 1 / 1 / 1 /step]
0: OFF
1: ON
SM 5-37 B156/B220
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Mode No.
5 (Class 1, 2, and 3)
828 91 Web Turns on/ off the web.

(0: OFF 1: ON) [0 ~ 1 / 1 / 1 /step]
0: OFF
1: ON
832 HDD
Enter the SP number for the partition to initialise, then press . When the execution
ends, cycle down and on.
NOTE: Use this SP mode only for hard disk error recovery.
1 HDD Formatting (ALL) Initializes the hard disk.
2 HDD Formatting (IMH) Initializes followings:
Documents stored on the document server
Stamp print data
Scanner delivery images
Fax delivery images
3 HDD Formatting Initializes MCS thumbnail images.
(Thumbnail)
4 HDD Formatting Initializes lob data used by the Poplar server.
(Job Log)
5 HDD Formatting Initializes printer fonts, overlay forms.
(Printer Fonts)
6 HDD Formatting Initializes user information (UCS).
(User Info)
7 Mail RX Data Initializes mail receive data (DCS)
8 Mail TX Data Initializes mail send data (DCS)
9 HDD Formatting Designer use only.
(Data for a Design)
10 HDD Formatting (Log) Initializes the logs (fax history and debug log).
11 HDD Formatting Initializes the Net File management area.
(Ridoc interface)
833 e-Cabinet enable
e-Cabinet enable Enables/disables the e-Cabinet.
[0 ~ 1 / 0 / 1 /step]
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
The e-Cabinet supplies the interface for registration,
editing, deleting and obtaining the users code name.
NOTE: Turn the main switch on and off after using this
SP.
NOTE:
836 Capture Setting
1 Capture Function Turn the capture function on/off.
0: Off 1: On [0 1 / 0 / 1 /step]
0: Off
1: On
2 Panel Setting Displays or does not display the capture function
buttons.
[0 1 / 0 / 1 /step]
0: Displayed
1: Not displayed
B156/B220 5-38 SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Mode No.
5 (Class 1, 2, and 3)
71 Reduction for Copy Selects the reduction rate of the document resolution
Color when transmitting the stored document data with the
copy color mode to the document management server.
[0 ~ 3 / 2 / 1 /step]
0: No reduction
1: 1/2
2: 1/3
3: 1/4
B&W Text when transmitting the stored document data with the
copy B&W text mode to the document management
server.
[0 ~ 3 / 0 / 1 /step]
0: No reduction
1: 1/2
2: 1/3
3: 1/4
B&W Other when transmitting the stored document data with the
copy B&W other mode to the document management
server.
[0 ~ 3 / 0 / 1 /step]
0: No reduction
1: 1/2
2: 1/3
3: 1/4
74 Reduction for Printer Selects the reduction rate of the document resolution
Service
Tables
Color when transmitting the stored document data with the
print color mode to the document management server.
[0 ~ 3 / 2 / 1 /step]
0: No reduction
1: 1/2
2: 1/3
3: 1/4
B&W when transmitting the stored document data with the
print B&W mode to the document management server.
[0 ~ 3 / 0 / 1 /step]
0: No reduction
1: 1/2
2: 1/3
3: 1/4
SM 5-39 B156/B220
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Mode No.
5 (Class 1, 2, and 3)
836 76 Reduction for Printer Selects the reduction rate of the document resolution
B&W HQ when transmitting the stored document data with the
print B&W HQ mode to the document management
server.
[0 ~ 3 / 0 / 1 /step]
0: No reduction
1: 1/2
2: 1/3
3: 1/4
Color 1200dpi when transmitting the stored document data with the
print color 1200dpi mode to the document management
server.
[1, 3 ~ 5 / 4 / 1 /step]
1: 1/2
2: Skipped
3: 1/4:
4: 1/6
5: 1/8
B&W 1200dpi when transmitting the stored document data with the
print B&W 1200dpi mode to the document management
server.
[1, 3 ~ 5 / 1 / 1 /step]
1: 1/2
2: Skipped
3: 1/4:
4: 1/6
5: 1/8
81 Format for Copy Color This SP shows the format when capturing the image
with copy color mode. This SP cannot be adjusted.
0: JFIF/JPEG
1: TIFF/MMR
2: TIFF/MH
3: TIFF/MR
This SP is activated only when the File Format
Converter has been installed.
82 Format for Copy B&W Selects the format when capturing the image with copy
Text B&W text mode.
[0 ~ 3 / 1 / 1 /step]
0: JFIF/JPEG
1: TIFF/MMR
2: TIFF/MH
3: TIFF/MR
83 Format for Copy B&W Selects the format when capturing an image with copy
Other B&W modes other than text.
[0 ~ 3 / 1 / 1 /step]
0: JFIF/JPEG
1: TIFF/MMR
2: TIFF/MH
3: TIFF/MR
B156/B220 5-40 SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Mode No.
5 (Class 1, 2, and 3)
836 84 Format for Printer This SP shows the format when capturing the image
Color with print color mode. This SP cannot be adjusted.
0: JFIF/JPEG
85 Format for Printer Selects the format when capturing the image with print
B&W B&W mode.
[0 ~ 3 / 1 / 1 /step]
0: JFIF/JPEG
1: TIFF/MMR
2: TIFF/MH
3: TIFF/MR
86 Format for Printer Selects the format when capturing the image with print
B&W HQ B&W HQ mode.
[0 ~ 3 / 2 / 1 /step]
0: JFIF/JPEG
1: TIFF/MMR
2: TIFF/MH
3: TIFF/MR
91 Default for JPEG Selects the default quality for JPEG
[5 ~ 95 / 50 / 1 /step]
839 IEEE1394
4 Host Name Displays the 1394 host name.
[Text up to 64 bytes / NULL / /step]
7 Cycle Master Turns the cycle master function on/off.
[0 1 / 1 / 1 /step]
0: OFF
1: ON
8 BCR mode Selects either Standard, 'IRM Color Copy', or 'Always
Service
Effective'.
Tables
9 IRM 1394a Check Turns the IRM 1394a check on/off.
[0 1 / 0 / - ]
0: OFF
1: ON
If the IRM is not defined as 1394a standard, its node is
used as IRM.
10 Unique ID [0 1 / 1 / - ]
0: OFF
1: ON
11 Logout Prevents initiators from logging on or makes initiators log
off.
[0 1 / 1 / - ]
0: OFF
(Prevents the initiators, having already logged on, to
log on if they try to log on.)
1: ON
(Makes initiators, having already logged on, to log off
if they try to log on.)
12 Login Allows/disallows an initiator to exclusively log on.

[0 1 / 0 / - ]
0: OFF (Disallows)
1: ON (Allows)
SM 5-41 B156/B220
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Mode No.
5 (Class 1, 2, and 3)
839 13 Login MAX Specifies the maximum initiators able to log on.
[0 63 / 8 / 1 /step]
840 IEEE 802.11b
6 Channel MAX Specifies the maximum number of IEEE 802.11b
channels.
North America/ Asia: [1 11 / 11 / 1 /step]
Europe: [1 14 / 14 / 1 /step]
7 Channel MIN Specifies the minimum number of IEEE 802.11b
channels.
North America/ Asia: [1 11 / 1 / 1 /step]
Europe: [1 14 / 1 / 1 /step]
11 WEP Key Select Selects the WEP key.

[00, 01, 10, 11 / 00 / /step]
00: 1st key
01: 2nd key
10: 3rd key
11: 4th key
841 Supply Name Setting

1 Toner Name Setting: Specifies supply names with the soft keys on the LCD.
Black These appear on the screen when the user presses the
2 Toner Name Setting: Inquiry button in the user tools screen.
Cyan
3 Toner Name Setting:
Yellow
4 Toner Name Setting:
Magenta
7 Org Stamp
11 Staple Std1
12 Staple Std2
13 Staple Std3
14 Staple Std4
842 Net File Analysis Mode Setting
Net File Analysis Mode DFU
Setting Default: 00000000 do not change
Netfiles: Jobs to be printed from the document server
using a PC and the DeskTopBinder software
844 USB
1 Transfer Rate Selects the Full Speed or Auto Change for the
transfer rate.
Default: Auto Change
2 Vendor ID Specifies the vendor ID.

[0 ~ FFFF / 5CA / -/step]
3 Product ID Specifies the product ID.

[0 ~ FFFF / 403 / -/step]
B156/B220 5-42 SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Mode No.
5 (Class 1, 2, and 3)
844 4 Device Release Specifies the device release number with BCD (Binary
Number Coded Decimal).
[0 ~ 9999 / 100 / 1 /step]
845 Delivery Server Setting

1 FTP Port No. Specifies the FTP port number.
[0 65535 / 3670 / 1 /step]
2 IP Address (Primary) Specifies the primary distribution server IP address.
[000.000.000.000 ~ 255.255.255.255 / 000.000.000.000
/ 1/step]
6 Delivery Error Display Specifies the display time of the distribution delivery
Time error.
[0 ~ 999 / 300 / 1 second/step]
8 IP Address Specifies the secondary distribution server IP address.
(Secondary) [000.000.000.000 ~ 255.255.255.255 / 000.000.000.000
/ 1/step]
9 Delivery Server Model Changes the delivery server model.
[0 ~ 4 / 0 / 1 /step]
0: Unknown
1: SG1 Provided
2: SG1 Package
3: SG2 Provided
4: SG2 Package
10 Delivery Srv. Selects the capability of the server registered as the I/O
Capability device for each function.
[0 to 255 / 00000000 / 1/step]
0: Disabled, 1: Enabled
Bit switch:
Service
Tables
Bit 0: Sender specification required (if set to 1, Bit6 is
set to 0)
Bit 1: Function to link MK-1 user and sender
Bit 2: Sender password function
Bit 3: Fax RX delivery function
Bit 4: Address book automatic update function
Bit 5: Mail RX confirmation setting
Bit 6: Direct specification of mail address
Bit 7: Comments information
11 Delivery Srv. Selects the capability of the server registered as the I/O
Capability (Ext) device for each function.
[0 to 255 / 00000000 / 1/step]
Bit switch:
Bit 0 ~ 5: Not used
Bit 6: RDH authorization link
Bit 7: Address book usage limitation (Limitation for
each authorized user)
846 UCS Setting
1 Machine ID (for Displays the machine ID of the distribution server.
Delivery Server)
2 Machine ID Clear (for Clears the machine ID of the distribution server.
Delivery Server)
SM 5-43 B156/B220
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Mode No.
5 (Class 1, 2, and 3)
846 3 Maximum Entries Specifies the maximum entry counts.
[2000 ~ 20000 / 2000 / 1 /step]
6 Delivery Server Retry Specifies the retry interval. The retry is executed when
Timer the machine fails to get an address book from the
distribution server.
[0 ~ 255 / 0 / 1 second/step]
NOTE: When this SP is set to 0, the retry is not
executed.
7 Delivery Server Retry Specifies the retry times. The retry is executed when the
Times machine fails to get an address book from the
distribution server.
[0 ~ 255 / 0 / 1 /step]
NOTE: When this SP is set to 0, the retry is not
executed.
8 Delivery Server Specifies the maximum account entries in the
Maximum Entries distribution server user information that UCS controls.
[2000 ~ 20000 / 2000 / 1 /step]
10 LDAP Search Timeout Specifies the timeout for searching the LDAP server.
[1 ~ 255 / 60 / 1 /step]
47 Initialize Local Addr Clears the local address book information, including the
Book user code.
48 Initialize Delivery Addr Clears the distribution address book information, except
Book the user code.
49 Initialize LDAP Addr Clears the LDAP address book information, except the
Book user code.
50 Initialize All Addr Book Clears all the address book information, including the
user code.
NOTE: The administrators account information cannot
be cleared with this SP.
51 Backup All Addr Book Uploads all directory information to the SD card.
52 Restore All Addr Book Downloads all directory information from the SD card.
53 Clear Backup Info Deletes the address book data from the SD card in the
service slot.
Deletes only the files that meet same machine category.
This feature does not work if the card is write-protected.
NOTE: After you do this SP, go out of the SP mode,
and then turn the power off.
Do not remove the SD card until the Power
LED stops flashing.
90 Plain Data Forbidden Enables or disables the address book data writing to the
HDD or SD card in plane data.
[0 ~ 1 / 0 / 1 /step]
0: Enable
1: Disable
91 FTP Auth Port Setting Specifies the FTP port for getting a distribution server
address.
[0 ~ 65535 / 3671 / 1 /step]
94 Encryption Stat Shows the status of the encryption function for the
address book data.
B156/B220 5-44 SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Mode No.
5 (Class 1, 2, and 3)
847 Net File Resolution Reduction
1 Rate for Copy Color Selects the net file resolution reduction (copy, color)
[0 ~ 5 / 2 / 1 /step]
0: No reduction
1: 1/2
2: 1/3
3: 1/4
4: 1/6
5: 1/8
This resolution reduction is for jobs displayed on a PC
screen with the DeskTopBinder software.
SP 5847 adjustments are only available when the File
Format Converter is installed.
2 Rate for Copy B&W Selects the net file resolution reduction (copy, black &
Text white, text)
[0 ~ 6 / 0 / 1 /step]
0: No reduction
1: 1/2
2: 1/3
3: 1/4
4: 1/6
5: 1/8
6: 2/3
3 Rate for Copy B&W Selects the net file resolution reduction (copy, black &
Other white, others)
[0 ~ 6 / 0 / 1 /step]
0: No reduction
Service
Tables
1: 1/2
2: 1/3
3: 1/4
4: 1/6
5: 1/8
6: 2/3
4 Rate for Printer Color Selects the net file resolution reduction (printer, color)
[0 ~ 5 / 2 / 1 /step]
0: No reduction
1: 1/2
2: 1/3
3: 1/4
4: 1/6
5: 1/8
SM 5-45 B156/B220
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Mode No.
5 (Class 1, 2, and 3)
847 5 Rate for Printer B&W Selects the net file resolution reduction (printer, black &
white
[0 ~ 6 / 0 / 1 /step]
0: No reduction
1: 1/2
2: 1/3
3: 1/4
4: 1/6
5: 1/8
6: 2/3
6 Rate for Printer B&W Selects the net file resolution reduction (printer, black &
HQ white)
[0 ~ 6 / 0 / 1 /step]
0: No reduction
1: 1/2
2: 1/3
3: 1/4
4: 1/6
5: 1/8
6: 2/3
21 Network Quality Selects the net file default quality level (network, JPEG)
Default for JPEG [5 ~ 95 / 50 / 1 /step]
848 Web Service
5848 2 sets the 4-bit switch assignment for the access control setting. Setting of 0001
has no effect on access and delivery from Scan Router.
5848 100 sets the maximum size of images that can be downloaded. The default is
equal to 1 gigabyte.
1 Access Ctrl: Net File Bit switch settings.
Protocol (Lower 4bits 0000: No access control
only) 0001: Denies access to DeskTop Binder. Access and
deliveries from Scan Router have no effect on capture.
2 Access Ctrl: 0000: No access control
Repository (only Lower 0001: Denies access to DeskTop Binder.
4bits) 0010: No writing control
3 Access Ctrl: Doc. Svr. Switches access control on and off.
Print (Lower 4bits) 0000: No access control
4 Access Ctrl: uDirectory 0001: Denies access to DeskTop Binder.
(Lower 4bits)
5 Access Ctrl: Delivery
Input (Lower 4bits)
7 Access Ctrl: Comm.
Log Fax (Lower 4bits)
9 Access Ctrl: Job Ctrl Switches access control on and off.
(Lower 4bits) 0000: No access control
0001: Denies access to DeskTop Binder.
11 Access Ctrl: Switches access control on and off.

Devicemanagement 0000: No access control
(Lower 4bits) 0001: Denies access to DeskTop Binder.
13 Access Ctrl: Device
Ctrl Fax (Lower 4bits)
B156/B220 5-46 SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Mode No.
5 (Class 1, 2, and 3)
848 21 Access Ctrl: Delivery Switches access control on and off.
(Lower 4bits) 0000: No access control
22 Access Ctrl: 0001: Denies access to DeskTop Binder.
uAdministration (Lower
4bits)
41 Security Setting
(Lower 4bits only)
100 Repository: Download Specifies the max size of the downloaded image data
Image Max Size when downloading an image data.
[1 ~ 1024 / 1024 / 1 MB /step]
849 Installation Date

1 Display Displays the date when the electrical counter was reset
to zero.
2 Switch to Print Allows /disallows printing the installation day on the user
counter list.
[0 1 / 1 / 1 /step]
0: OFF (Not printed)
1: ON (Printed)
850 Address Book Function

Replacement of Circuit Replaces all the line type settings in the address book
Classifications for fax at the same time. Japan only
853 Stamp Data Download
Service
Stamp Data Download Copies the stamp data stored in the ROM to the HDD.
Tables
Do this SP to download the fixed stamp data from the
machine ROM onto the hard disk. Then these stamps
can be used by the system. If this is not done, the user
will not have access to the fixed stamps (Confidential,
Urgent, etc.). You must always do this SP after you
replace or format the HDD. Always switch the machine
off and on after you do this SP.
856 Remote ROM Update

Local Port Validates/invalidates the firmware download from the
local port (IEEE 1284) when updating the remote ROM.
[0 ~ 1 / 0 / 1 /step]
0: Invalidated
1: Validated
NOTE: This setting is automatically reset to 0 after
rebooting.
NOTE:
857 Save Debug Log
1 On/Off (1: ON 0: OFF) Turns the save debug log function on/off.
[0 ~ 1 / 0 / 1 /step]
0: OFF
1: ON
SM 5-47 B156/B220
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Mode No.
5 (Class 1, 2, and 3)
857 2 Target (2: HDD 3: SD) Selects the storage device when the conditions set with
SP5-858 are satisfied.
[2 ~ 3 / 2 / 1 /step]
2: HDD
3: SD Card
5 Save to HDD Saves the selected key number log to the HDD.
6 Save to SD Card Saves the selected key number log to the SD Card.
9 Copy HDD to SD Card Copies the latest 4MB log file on the HDD to the SD
(Latest 4MB) Card. Each file is automatically given a unique name.
10 Copy HDD to SD Card Copies the latest 4MB log file of the selected key
(Latest 4MB Any Key) number on the HDD to the SD Card. Each file is
automatically given a unique name.
NOTE: If the selected number is not on the HDD, this
SP has no effect.
11# Erase HDD Debug Deletes the debug log file on the HDD.
Data
12# Erase SD Card Debug Deletes the debug log file on the SD Card (this file is
Data copied when the conditions set with SP5-858 are
satisfied).
NOTE: The debug log files, which are copied with
SP5-857-10, cannot be deleted with this SP.
NOTE:
13 Free Space on SD Displays the free space on the SD Card.
Card
14 Copy SD to SD (Latest Copies the latest 4MB log file on the SD Card to another
4MB) SD Card. Each file is automatically given a unique
name.
15 Copy SD to SD (Latest Copies the latest 4MB log file of the selected key
4MB Any Key) number on the SD Card to another SD Card. Each file is
automatically given a unique name.
NOTE: If the selected number is not on the HDD, this
SP has no effect.
NOTE:
16 Make HDD Debug Makes a debug log file.
17 Make SD Debug This function is automatically executed without this SP
when saving a debug log file to the HDD or SD Card at
the very first time. However, it takes a long time to save
it. In that case, the user may turn off the main power
before completing the saving. To prevent failing to save
it, this SP is useful.
858 Debug Save When

1 Engine SC Error Turns on/off the debug log save to the device set with
(0: OFF 1:ON) SP5-857-2 when an engine SC error occurs.
[0 ~ 1 / 0 / 1 /step]
0: OFF
1: ON
B156/B220 5-48 SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Mode No.
5 (Class 1, 2, and 3)
858 2 Controller SC Error Turns on/off the debug log save to the device set with
(0: OFF 1:ON) SP5857-2 when a controller SC error occurs.
[0 ~ 1 / 0 / 1 /step]
0: OFF
1: ON
3 Any SC Error Saves the debug log to the device set with SP5-857-2
when the SC that you have set occurs.
4 Jam (0: OFF 1: ON) Turns on/off the debug log save to the device set with
SP5857-2 when a paper jam occurs.
[0 ~ 1 / 0 / 1 /step]
0: OFF
1: ON
859 Debug Save Key No.

1 Key 1 Sets the key number of a specific event ( NOTE)
2 Key 2 whose logs are saved in the specified storage location
3 Key 3 ( NOTE). When multiple key numbers are assigned,
4 Key 4 the logs are collected in this order: Key 1, Key 2, ..., Key
9, Key 10.
5 Key 5
[0000000 to 9999999 / 0 / 1/step]
6 Key 6
NOTE: The event is set with SP5-858. The storage
7 Key 7
location is set with SP5-857-2.
8 Key 8
9 Key 9
10 Key 10
860 SMTP/ POP3/ IMAP4
20 Partial Mail Receive Specifies the amount of the time to keep a received mail
Service
Tables
Timeout that is divided into more than one mail.
[1 ~ 168 / 72 / 1 hour /step]
The received mail is discarded if the remaining portion of
the mail is not received during this prescribed time.
21 MDN Response Determines whether RFC2298 compliance is switched
RFC2298 Compliance on for MDN reply mail.
[0 ~ 1 / 1 / 1 /step]
0: No
1: Yes
22 SMTP Auth. From Determines whether the FROM item of the mail header
Field Replacement is switched to the validated account after the SMTP
server is validated.
[0 ~ 1 / 0 / 1 /step]
0: No. FROM item not switched.
1: Yes. FROM item switched.
25 SMTP Auth. Direct Selects the authentication method for SMTP.
Setting Bit switch:
Bit 0: LOGIN
Bit 1: PLAIN
Bit 2: CRAM MD5
Bit 3: DIGEST MD5
Bit 4 ~ 7: Not used
NOTE: This SP is activated only when the SMTP
Authentication (UP) is set to "on".
SM 5-49 B156/B220
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Mode No.
5 (Class 1, 2, and 3)
866 E-mail Alert Not Used
1 Notice function of E- Turn the E-mail notice function on/off.
Mail [0 ~ 1 / 0 / 1 /step]
5 Add Date Field [0 ~ 1 / 0 / 1 /step]
870 Common Key Info Writing
1 Writing Writes the common key information of the device
authentication for NRS specifications to the flash ROM
etc.
3 Initialize Initialize the common key information. DFU
871 HDD function disable
1 HDD function disable Turns the HDD disable function on/off.
(0: OFF 1: ON) This function must be activated when the data overwrite
security unit is installed.
[0 ~ 1 / 0 / 1 /step]
0: OFF
1: ON (HDD function limited)
873 SD Card Appli Move
1 Move Exec Copies the application programs from the original SD
card in the SD card slot 3 to an SD card in the SD card
slot 1.
2 Undo Exec Copies back the application programs from an SD card
in SD Card Slot 1 to the original SD card in the SD card
slot 3. Use this menu when you have mistakenly copied
some programs by using "Move Exec" (SP5873-1).
875 SC Auto Reboot
SC Auto Reboot Determines whether the machine reboots automatically
when an SC error occurs.
[0 ~ 1/ 0 / 1/step]]
0: The machine reboots automatically when the
machine issues an SC error and logs the SC
error code. If the same SC occurs again, the
machine does not reboot.
1: The machine does not reboot when an SC error
occurs.
The reboot does not occur for Type A, B, or C SC codes.
876 Security Clear
1 All Clear.
11 Clear NCS Security Setting
15 Clear UCS Security Setting
886 ROM Update
1 Allows access to the ROM by the Remote Firmware Update function
[0 ~ 1/ 0 / 1/step] (0: Yes, 1: No)
B156/B220 5-50 SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Mode No.
5 (Class 1, 2, and 3)
907 Plug & Play Maker/ Model Name

Plug & Play Maker/ [0 ~ 11 / 0 / - ]
Model Name Select the required setting from the menu.
MF Model Name
0 RICOH Aficio 3224C
1 RICOH Aficio 3232C
2 SAVIN C2410
3 SAVIN C3210e
4 Gestetner DSc424
5 GestetnerDSc432
6 NRG DSc424
7 NRG DSc432
8 infotec ISC1024c
9 infotecISC1032c
10 LANIER LD124c
11LANIERLD132c
912 Unit PM Alert
Unit PM Alert Display or does not display the unit PM alert for PCU
and development units when the PM counters for the
PCU and development units reach the PM cycle.
[0 ~ 1 / 0/ 1 /step]
0: Does not display the alert banner
1: Display the alert banner
913 Switchover Permission Time

2 Print Application Timer Sets the amount of time to elapse while the machine is
in standby mode (and the operation panel keys have not
been used) before another application can gain control
of the display.
[3 ~ 30 / 3 / 1 minute/step]
Service
Tables
102 Print Application Set [0 ~ 1 / 1 / 1 /step] DFU
955 Test Pattern

1 Pattern Selects the test pattern. See section 5-1-3.
2 Density Selects the image density for a test pattern.

[0 ~ 255 / 255 / 1 /step]
967 Copy Server: Set Function

(0: ON 1: OFF) Enables and disables the document server. This is a
security measure that prevents image data from being
left in the temporary area of the HDD. After changing
this setting, you must switch the main switch off and on
to enable the new setting.
SM 5-51 B156/B220
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Mode No.
5 (Class 1, 2, and 3)
974 Cherry Server
Cherry Server Selects which version of the Scan Router application
program, Light or Full (Professional), is installed.
[0 ~ 1 / 0 / 1 /step]
0: Light version (supplied with this machine)
1: Full version (optional)
985 Device Setting

1 On Board NIC Enables/disables the On-Board Ethernet NIB.
[0 ~ 1 / 0 / 1 /step]
0: disable
1: enable
2 On Board USB Enables/disables the On Board USB.

[0 ~ 1 / 0 / 1 /step]
0: disable
1: enable
990* SP Print Mode

1 All (Data List) [0 ~ 0xff / 0x00 / 0 /step]
2 SP (Mode Data List) Prints SP setting data.
3 User Program [0 ~ 255 / 0 / 0 /step]
4 Logging Data SP all print: All items printed out with SP5-990-2, 3, 4,
5 Diagnostic Report 6, and 7.
6 Non-Default All: All SP mode settings
7 NIB Summary Non-Default: SP settings that have been changed
(Configuration page, from the defaults
system log page
NVRAM log page)
8 Capture Log
21 Copier User Program [0 ~ 0xff / 0x00 / 0 /step]
(Copy Management Prints SP setting data.
Report) [0 ~ 255 / 0 / 0 /step]
22 Scanner SP SP all print: All items printed out with SP5-990-2, 3, 4,
23 Scanner User Program 6, and 7.
(Scanner Management All: All SP mode settings
Report) Non-Default: SP settings that have been changed
from the defaults
996 Density Adjustment
1 Bk Adjusts the density.
2 Y [3 3 / 0 / 1 /step]
3 M 3: Image becomes lighter
4 C 3: Image becomes darker
This setting changes the development bias and charge
corona voltage to adjust the image density.
B156/B220 5-52 SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SP6-XXX: (Peripherals)
Mode No.
6 (Class 1, 2, and 3)
006* ADF Adjustment
1 S-to-S Registration Adjusts the side-to-side registration of the optional ADF.
[5.0 5.0 / 0 / 0.1 mm/step]
First adjust the copier registration. Then if ADF
registration is incorrect, adjust this SP.
2 Leading Edge Adjusts the sub-scan registration of the optional ADF.
Registration [5.0 5.0 / 0 / 0.1 mm/step]
3 Trailing Edge Erase Adjusts the trail edge erase of the optional ADF.
[5.0 5.0 / 0 / 0.1 mm/step]
4 S-to-S Registration Adjusts the rear-side side-to-side registration of the
(Rear) optional ADF.
[5.0 5.0 / 0 / 0.1 mm/step]
First adjust the copier registration. Then if ADF
registration is incorrect, adjust this SP.
5 Sub-san Magnification Adjusts the sub-scan magnification of the optional ADF.
[5.0 5.0 / 0 / 0.1 %/step]
6 Orig. Buckling Enables/disables original buckling during rear side
scanning. Disable if the customer is scanning fragile
originals.
[0 1 / 1 / 1 /step]
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
7 Buckle Adjustment Adjusts original buckling for rear side scanning.
[5.0 5.0 / 0 / 0.1 mm/step]
007 DF Input Check
1 Original Set Displays the signals received from sensors and switches
Service
Tables
2 Original Width 1 of the ARDF.
3 Original Width 2 See section 5.1.4
4 Original Length 1
5 Original Length 2 Do not check another item before the result is returned.
6 Orig. Trailing Edge
7 Cover Open
8 DF Position
9 Registration
10 Original Exit
11 Original Reverse
008 DF Output Check
1 Feed Motor (Forward) Switches on each electrical component of the ARDF for
2 Feed Motor (Reverse) testing.
3 Trans. Motor See section 5.1.5
(Forward)
4 Feed Clutch Do not start to check another item before ending the test
5 Pick-up Solenoid that is in progress.
6 Junction Gate
Solenoid
7 Stamp Solenoid
SM 5-53 B156/B220
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Mode No.
6 (Class 1, 2, and 3)
009 ADF Free Run
ADF Free Run Executes an ADF free run.
[0 1 / 0 / 1 /step]
0: End
1: Start
010 ADF Stamp Position
ADF Stamp Position Adjusts the stamp position of the optional ADF.
[5.0 5.0 / 0 / 0.1 mm/step]
050 Staple Position
Staple Position Adjusts the staple position of the optional finisher.
[3.5 3.5 / 0.0 / 0.5 mm/step]
117 Finisher Input Check
1 Entrance Displays the signals received from sensors and switches
2 Tray Exit in the finisher.
4 Staple Entrance
5 Stapler Home Position See section 5.1.4
6 Jogger Fence Home
Position
8 Feed-out Belt Home
Position
9 Stapler Tray Paper
10 Stapler Rotation Home
Position
11 Staple
14 Staple Sheet
17 Exit Plate Home
Position
18 Tray Shift Home
Position
21 Stack Height
23 Tray Lower Limit
35 Paper Limit
101 500 Fin Entrance
102 500 Fin Exit
103 500 Fin Jogger Home
Position
104 500 Fin Top Cover
105 500 Fin Height
106 500 Fin Lever
107 500 Fin Upper Limit Displays the signals received from sensors and switches
108 500 Fin Near Limit in the finisher.
109 500 Fin Staple Cover See section 5.1.4
110 500 Fin Stapler Home
Position
111 500 Fin Staple End
112 500 Fin Staple
113 500 Fin Stapler Lock
118 Output Check
1 Fin All Off Switches on each electrical component of the finisher.
2 Upper Transfer Motor See section 5.1.5
B156/B220 5-54 SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Mode No.
6 (Class 1, 2, and 3)
118 3 Lower Transfer Motor Switches on each electrical component of the finisher.
4 Exit Motor See section 5.1.5
5 Tray Gate Sol
6 Tray Lift Motor
7 Jogger Motor
12 Stapler Motor
13 Staple Hummer
15 Stapler Gate Sol
16 Pos. Roller Sol
18 Feed-out Motor
19 Shift Motor
22 Guide Plate Motor
23 Fin Free Run 1
24 Fin Free Run 2
101 500 Fin All Off
102 500 Fin Main Motor
103 500 Fin Jogger Motor
104 500 Fin Paddle Sol
105 500 Fin Gear Sol
106 500 Fin Lever Sol
107 500 Fin Tray Motor
108 500 Fin Stapler Motor
109 500 Fin Free Run 1
110 500 Fin Free Run 2
Service
Tables
SM 5-55 B156/B220
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SP7-XXX: (Data Log)

Mode No.
7 (Class 1, 2, and 3)
001* Operation Time
Operation Time Displays the main motor operation time.
[0000000 9999999 / 0 / 1 minute/step]
Logging this operation time helps identify the cause of a
difficulty by analyzing the correlation between the
printing count and the OPC-belt operation time.
106* Waste Tnr Cnter (Waste Toner Counter)
1 OPC Displays the waste toner bottle counters.
[0 ~ 65535 / 0 / 1 /step]
2 Belt [0 ~ 65535 / 0 / 1 /step]
401* Total SC Counter
SC Counter Displays how many times SC codes have been output.
[0 ~ 9999 / 0 / 0 time/step]
403 SC History
1 Latest Displays the latest ten SC codes.
2 Latest 1
3 Latest 2
4 Latest 3
5 Latest 4
6 Latest 5
7 Latest 6
8 Latest 7
9 Latest 8
10 Latest 9
502* Total Paper Jam Counter
Total Paper Jam Displays the total number of jams detected.
Counter [0 ~ 9999 / 0 / 0 /step]
503 Total Original Jam Counter
Total Original Jam Displays the total original jam count.
Counter [0 ~ 9999 / 0 / 0 /step]
504* Paper Jam Location
1 Initial jam Displays the number of jams according to the location
3 main003 (Tray 1: ON) where they were detected.
4 main004 [0 ~ 9999 / 0 / 0 /step]
(Tray 2: Non Feed)
5 main005
(Tray 3: Non Feed)
6 main006
(Tray 4: Non Feed)
7 main007
(Bypass: Non Feed)
8 main008
(1st Relay ON)
9 main009
(2nd Relay: ON)
10 main010
(3rd Relay: ON)
12 main012 (Registration
from Tray)
B156/B220 5-56 SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Mode No.
7 (Class 1, 2, and 3)
504* 13 main013 (Registration Displays the number of jams according to the location
from Duplex) where they were detected.
14 main014 (Duplex Exit) [0 ~ 9999 / 0 / 0 /step]
15 main015
(Interchange Exit: ON)
16 main016
(Paper Exit: On)
17 main017
(Bridge Exit: On)
18 main018
(Bridge Relay: On)
19 main019 (Duplex
Entrance 1: On)
20 main020 (Duplex
Entrance 2: On)
23 main023
(Duplex Exit: On)
40 Finisher040 (Finisher
Entrance: On)
41 Finisher041
(Finisher Exit: On)
58 main058
(1st Relay: Off)
59 main059
(2nd Relay: Off)
60 main060
(3rd Relay: Off)
61 main061
Service
(4th Relay: Off)
Tables
63 main063
(Registration: Off)
64 main064 (Fusing Exit)
65 main065
(Interchange Exit: Off)
66 main066
(Paper Exit: Off)
67 main067
(Bridge Exit: Off)
68 main068
(Bridge Relay: Off)
69 main069 (Duplex
Entrance 1: Off)
70 main070 (Duplex
Entrance 2: Off)
73 main073
(Duplex Exit: Off)
80 Wrap around ITB
100 Finisher100 (Finisher
Entrance: Off)
101 Finisher 101
(Finisher Exit: Off)
SM 5-57 B156/B220
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Mode No.
7 (Class 1, 2, and 3)
504* 103 main103 (Finisher Displays the number of jams according to the location
Staple) where they were detected.
104 main104 (Finisher [0 ~ 9999 / 0 / 0 /step]
Stack Feed-out)
105 main105 (Finisher
Paper Taking out)
Drive Error)
Tray Lift Error)
Jogger Error)
Tray Shift Error)
Stapler Error)
Stack Feed-out)
Feed out Error)
115 main115 (Finisher No
Response)
505 Original Jam Detection
1 Initial jam
5 Regist Sensor005
6 Exit 006 Exit = Original Trailing Edge Sensor (S9)
7 Inverter Sensor 007 Inverter Sensor = Original Reverse Sensor (S10)
55 Regist Sensor 055

56 Exit 056 Exit = Original Trailing Edge Sensor (S9)
57 Inverter Sensor 057 Inverter Sensor = Original Reverse Sensor (S10)
506* Jam Count by Paper Size

5 A4 LEF Displays the number of jams according to paper size.
6 A5 LEF [0 ~ 9999 / 0 / 1 /step]
14 B5 LEF
38 LT LEF
44 HLT LEF
132 A3 SEF
133 A4 SEF Displays the number of jams according to paper size.
134 A5 SEF [0 ~ 9999 / 0 / 1 /step]
141 B4 SEF
142 B5 SEF
160 DLT SEF
164 LG SEF
166 LT SEF
172 HLT SEF
255 Others
B156/B220 5-58 SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Mode No.
7 (Class 1, 2, and 3)
507* Plotter Jam History
1 Latest Displays the latest 10 paper jams.
2 Latest 1
3 Latest 2 The information contains the following four lines:
4 Latest 3 Location code ( SP7-504)
5 Latest 4 Paper size
6 Latest 5 Total counter (as of the jam)
7 Latest 6 Date
8 Latest 7
9 Latest 8
10 Latest 9
508 Original Jam History
1 Latest Displays the logs of the latest 10 original jams.
2 Latest 1 The logs are composed of the following four lines:
3 Latest 2 Location code ( SP7-505)
4 Latest 3 Paper size
5 Latest 4 Total counter (as of the jam)
6 Latest 5 Date
7 Latest 6
8 Latest 7
9 Latest 8
10 Latest 9
801 ROM No./ Firmware Version
Displays the firmware versions and part numbers if
available.
803* PM Counter Display
Service
Tables
1 Paper Displays the number of sheets printed for each current
2 PCU unit.
3 Development: M [0 ~ 9999999 / 0 / 1 sheet/step]
4 Development: C For clearing the counters, see SP7-804.
5 Development: Y
6 Development: Bk
7 Fusing Unit
8 Charger
9 Waste Tnr: OPC
10 Waste Tnr: Belt
11 Oil
12 Filter 1
13 Filter 2
14 Bank 1 Feed
15 Bank 2 Feed
16 Bank 3 Feed
17 Bank 4 Feed
18 Manual Feed
19 Paper Transfer unit
20 ADF
21 PCU: Rotation Time
(9045 mm = 120kD)
SM 5-59 B156/B220
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Mode No.
7 (Class 1, 2, and 3)
804 PM Counter Reset
1 Paper Clears the PM counters.
2 PCU [0 ~ 1 / 0 / 1 /step]
3 Development: M For displaying the counter, see SP7-803.
4 Development: C 7-804-2 resets 7-803-2 and 7-803-21.
5 Development: Y
6 Development: Bk
7 Fusing Unit
8 Charger
9 Waste Tnr: OPC
10 Waste Tnr: Belt
11 Oil
12 Filter 1
13 Filter 2
14 Tray 1 Roller
15 Tray 2 Roller
16 Tray 3 Roller
17 Tray 4 Roller
18 By-pass Feed
19 Paper Transfer Unit
20 ADF
100 All
807 SC Jam Counter Reset
SC Jam Counter Clears the counters related to SC codes and paper
Reset jams.
826 MF Error Counter

1 Error Total Displays the MF error counters.
2 Error Staple
827 MF Error Counter Clear

MF Error Counter Clears the MF error counter.
Clear
832* Self-Diagnose Result Display

Self-Diagnose Result Displays the result of the diagnostics. Refer to section
Display 4.2 for the error codes.
B156/B220 5-60 SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Mode No.
7 (Class 1, 2, and 3)
833 Coverage
1 Last: M Displays coverage ratios.
2 Last: C [0.00 ~ 100.0 / 0.00 / 0.01 %step]
3 Last: Y This SP mode displays the coverage ratio of the
4 Last: Bk output, i.e. the ratio of the total pixel area of the
5 Average: M image data to the total printable area on the paper.
6 Average: C Do not use this counter for billing purposes. This is
7 Average: Y because this value is not directly proportional to the
8 Average: Bk amount of toner consumed, although of course
it is one factor that affects this amount. The other major
factors involved include: the type, total image
area and image density of the original, toner
concentration and developer potential.
Last: This is the coverage for the previous sheet.
Average: This is the average coverage for each sheet.
834 Tnr Consume (Toner Consume)

5 M Displays the coverage ratios, including toner
6 C revitalization mode.
7 Y [0 ~ 9999999 / 0 / 1 /step]
8 Bk This displays the average coverage ratio, including toner
consumed during printing and toner consumed during
toner revitalization mode (SP3-971).
Do not use this counter for billing purposes.
835 ACC Counter
1 Copy ACC Displays the number of times ACC has been done for
each mode.
Service
2 Printer ACC
Tables
[0 9999999 / 0 / 1 /step]
836 Total Memory Size

Total Memory Size Displays the memory capacity.
850 High Duty Cnt (High Duty Counter)

1 M Used for the toner revitalization process (SP3-971).
2 C Counts the number of developments made during the
3 Y past 12 hours.
4 Bk
852 DF Glass Dust Chk Cnt (DF Glass Dust Check Counter)
DF Glass Dust Chk Displays the number of times that dust was detected on
Cnt the DF glass.
901 Assert Info. (Assert Information)

1 File Name Records the location where the last problem (SC990)
2 Number of Lines was detected in the program. The data stored in this SP
is used for problem analysis.
[0 ~ 0 / 0 / 0 /step]
3 Location
SM 5-61 B156/B220
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Mode No.
7 (Class 1, 2, and 3)
904 Waste Tnr Full Cln (Waste Toner Full Clear)
1 OPC Clears the waste toner bottle full counters.
2 Belt
100 All
906* PM Counter-PREV
1 PCU Displays the previous PM counters.
2 Development: M [0 ~ 9999999 / 0 / 0 /step]
3 Development: C
4 Development: Y
5 Development: Bk
6 Fusing Unit
7 Charger
8 Waste Tnr: OPC
9 Waste Tnr: Belt
10 Oil
11 Filter 1
12 Filter 2
13 Tray 1 Roller
14 Tray 2 Roller
15 Tray 3 Roller
16 Tray 4 Roller
17 By-pass Feed
19 ADF
20 PCU: Turn Time
907 Replace Cnter (Replace Counter)
1 PCU Displays the number of times the unit was replaced.
2 Development: M [0 ~ 255 / 0 / 1 /step]
3 Development: C
4 Development: Y
5 Development: Bk
6 Fusing Unit
7 Charger
8 Waste Tnr: OPC
9 Waste Tnr: Belt
10 Oil
11 Filter 1
12 Filter 2
13 Tray 1 Roller
14 Tray 2 Roller
15 Tray 3 Roller
16 Tray 4 Roller
17 By-pass Feed
19 Toner: M
20 Toner: C
21 Toner: Y
22 Toner: Bk
23 ADF
B156/B220 5-62 SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Mode No.
7 (Class 1, 2, and 3)
908 Proc Cont Cnter (Process Control Counter)
Proc Cont Cnter Displays the process control counter.
[0 ~ 9999999 / 0 / 1 sheet/step]
909 Proc Cont Reset (Process Control Reset)
Proc Cont Reset Resets the process control counter.
913 Oil Cnter (Oil Counter)
Oil Cnter Displays the oil supply unit counter.
[0 ~ 65535 / 0 / 1 sheet/step]
914 Oil Cln Cnt Rst (Oil Clean Counter Reset)
Oil Cln Cnt Rst Resets the oil cleaner counter.
915 Proc Error Log (Process Error Log)
1 Log 1 Displays the latest three process control error logs.
2 Log 2 The following are the error codes:
3 Log 3 Development unit initial settings errors:
110: Incorrect image detected by cyan ID sensor
116: Incorrect image detected by magenta ID
sensor
118: No black image
Development bias settings errors:
113: Incorrect image detected by cyan ID sensor
114: Incorrect image detected by magenta ID
sensor
115: Incorrect image detected by yellow ID sensor
123: Incorrect image detected by black ID sensor
ID sensor errors:
103: ID sensor error
104: ID sensor unable to detect image
Service
Tables
105: OPC belt not detected
920 Machine Counter
Machine Counter [0 ~ 0xFFFFFFF / 0 / 1 /step]
921 Machine Cnt Clr (Machine Counter Clear)
Machine Cnt Clr Clears the machine counter.
922 Toner End Cnter (Toner End Counter)
1 K Toner Displays the toner end counter, which indicates the
2 C Toner possible print count after a toner near end.
3 M Toner
4 Y Toner
923 Toner End Cnt Clr (Toner End Counter Clear)

1 K Toner Clears the toner end counter (SP7-922).
2 C Toner
The machine goes back to the normal operation mode if
3 M Toner the toner end counter is cleared.
4 Y Toner
100 All
924 Charger Cln Cntr (Charger Clean Counter)
Charger Cln Cntr Displays how many times the charge corona wire has
been cleaned.
[0 ~ 9999999 / 0 / 1 sheet/step]
SP7-926 resets the counter.
SM 5-63 B156/B220
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Mode No.
7 (Class 1, 2, and 3)
925 Time Cnter Disp (Time Counter Display)
Time Cnter Disp Displays the current counter of the charge corona unit
cleaning interval. (Number of counts since the last
cleaning)
SP2-801 specifies the charge corona unit cleaning
interval.
926 Chgr Cln Cnt Rst (Charger Cleaner Counter Reset)
Chgr Cln Cnt Rst Resets the charge wire cleaner counter (SP7-924).
927 Time Cnter Clr (Timer Counter Clear)
Time Cnter Clr Clears the counter of the charge corona unit cleaning
interval.
SP7-927 clears the counter displayed by SP7-925, but
does not clear the value specified with SP2-801.
928 PREV PM Cnt Clr (Previous PM Counter Clear)
PREV PM Cnt Clr Clears the previous PM counter (SP7-906).
929 Replace Cnter Clr (Replace Counter Clear)
Replace Cnter Clr Clears the replace counter.
931 Engine Status Display DFU
1 Status 1 These SPs are used for previous models.
2 Status 2
3 Status 3
4 Status 4
5 Status 5
6 Status 6
7 Status 7
8 Status 8
9 Status 9
10 Status 10
11 Status 11
12 Status 12
13 Status 13
14 Status 14
15 Status 15
16 Status 16
17 Status 17
934 Coverage Cler (Coverage Clear)
1 Average Clears the average coverage.
This SP clears the following SPs:
SP8-831-1 to 4
SP8-841-1 to 4
2 Toner Clears the consumed toner bottle number.
This SP clears the following SP:
SP8-781-1 to 4
3 S: PREV Toner Clears the number of prints copied or printed with last
toner bottle.
SP8-891-1 to4
SP8-901-1 to 4
SP8-911-1 to 4
B156/B220 5-64 SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Mode No.
7 (Class 1, 2, and 3)
934 4 S: Coverage 0-100 Clears the number of scanned sheets for each coverage
range.
SP8-851-001004 (0 ~ 10%)
SP8-861-001004 (11 ~ 20%)
SP8-871-001004 (21 ~ 30%)
SP8-881-001004 (31% ~ )
255 ALL Clears the all coverage related data.
This SP clears SPs that can be cleared in the SP7-934-
1 to 4.
Service
Tables
SM 5-65 B156/B220
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SP8-xxx: Data Log2

Many of these counters are provided for features that are currently not available,
such as sending color faxes, and so on. However, here are some Group 8 codes
that when used in combination with others, can provide useful information.
SP Numbers What They Do
SP8 211~SP8 216 The number of pages scanned to the document server.
SP8 401~SP8 406 The number of pages printed from the document server
SP8 691~SP8 696 The number of pages sent from the document server
Specifically, the following questions can be answered:
How is the document server actually being used?
What application is using the document server most frequently?
What data in the document server is being reused?
Most of the SPs in this group are prefixed with a letter that indicates the mode of
operation (the mode of operation is referred to as an application). Before reading
the Group 8 Service Table, make sure that you understand what these prefixes
mean.
Prefixes What it means

T: Total: (Grand Total). Grand total of the items counted for all
applications (C, F, P, etc.).
C: Copy application. Totals (pages, jobs, etc.) executed for each
F: Fax application. application when the job was not stored on the
P: Print application. document server.
S: Scan application.
L: Local storage Totals (jobs, pages, etc.) for the document
(document server) server. The L: counters work differently case by
case. Sometimes, they count jobs/pages stored
on the document server; this can be in
document server mode (from the document
server window), or from another mode, such as
from a printer driver or by pressing the Store
File button in the Copy mode window.
Sometimes, they include occasions when the
user uses a file that is already on the document
server. Each counter will be discussed case by
case.
O: Other applications Refers to network applications such as Web
(external network Image Monitor. Utilities developed with the SDK
applications, for (Software Development Kit) will also be counted
example) with this group in the future.
B156/B220 5-66 SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
The Group 8 SP codes are limited to 17 characters, forced by the necessity of

displaying them on the small LCDs of printers and faxes that also use these SPs.
Read over the list of abbreviations below and refer to it again if you see the name
of an SP that you do not understand.
Key for Abbreviations
Abbreviation What it means
/ By, e.g. T:Jobs/Apl = Total Jobs by Application
> More (2> 2 or more, 4> 4 or more
AddBook Address Book
Apl Application
B/W Black & White
Bk Black
C Cyan
ColCr Color Create
ColMode Color Mode
Comb Combine
Comp Compression
Deliv Delivery
DesApl Designated Application. The application (Copy, Fax, Scan,
Print) used to store the job on the document server, for
example.
Dev Counter Development Count, no. of pages developed.
Dup, Duplex Duplex, printing on both sides
Emul Emulation
FC Full Color
FIN Post-print processing, i.e. finishing (punching, stapling, etc.)
Full Bleed No Margins
GenCopy Generation Copy Mode
Service
Tables
GPC Get Print Counter. For jobs 10 pages or less, this counter
does not count up. For jobs larger than 10 pages, this
counter counts up by the number that is in excess of 10
(e.g., for an 11-page job, the counter counts up 11-10 =1)
IFax Internet Fax
ImgEdt Image Edit performed on the original with the copier GUI,
e.g. border removal, adding stamps, page numbers, etc.
K Black (YMCK)
LS Local Storage. Refers to the document server.
LSize Large (paper) Size
Mag Magnification
MC One color (monochrome)
NRS New Remote Service, which allows a service center to
monitor machines remotely. NRS is used overseas, CSS
is used in Japan.
Org Original for scanning
OrgJam Original Jam
Palm 2 Print Job Manager/Desk Top Editor: A pair of utilities that
allows print jobs to be distributed evenly among the printers
on the network, and allows files to moved around,
combined, and converted to different formats.
PC Personal Computer
SM 5-67 B156/B220
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Abbreviation What it means

PGS Pages. A page is the total scanned surface of the original.
Duplex pages count as two pages, and A3 simplex count as
two pages if the A3/DLT counter SP is switched ON.
PJob Print Jobs
Ppr Paper
PrtJam Printer (plotter) Jam
PrtPGS Print Pages
R Red (Toner Remaining). Applies to the wide format model
A2 only. This machine is under development and currently
not available.
Rez Resolution
SC Service Code (Error SC code displayed)
Scn Scan
Sim, Simplex Simplex, printing on 1 side.
S-to-Email Scan-to-E-mail
SMC SMC report printed with SP5990. All of the Group 8
counters are recorded in the SMC report.
Svr Server
TonEnd Toner End
TonSave Toner Save
TXJob Send, Transmission
YMC Yellow, Magenta, Cyan
YMCK Yellow, Magenta, Cyan, Black
NOTE: All of the Group 8 SPs are reset with SP5-801-1 Memory All Clear.
B156/B220 5-68 SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
8 Mode No.(Class 1, 2, and 3)
1 T:Total Jobs *CTL These SPs count the number of times each
2 C:Total Jobs *CTL application is used to do a job.
3 F:Total Jobs *CTL [0 ~ 9999999/ 0 / 1]
4 P:Total Jobs *CTL NOTE: The L: counter is the total number of
5 S:Total Jobs *CTL times the other applications are used to
send a job to the document server, plus
6 L:Total Jobs *CTL
the number of times a file already on
the document server is used.
These SPs reveal the number of times an application is used, not the number of
pages processed.
When an application is opened for image input or output, this counts as one job.
Interrupted jobs (paper jams, etc.) are counted, even though they do not finish.
Only jobs executed by the customer are counted. Jobs executed by the customer
engineer using the SP modes are not counted.
When using secure printing (when a password is required to start the print job),
the job is counted at the time when either Delete Data or Specify Output is
specified.
A job is counted as a fax job when the job is stored for sending.
When a fax is received to fax memory, the F: counter increments but the L:
counter does not (the document server is not used).
A fax broadcast counts as one job for the F: counter (the fax destinations in the
broadcast are not counted separately).
A fax broadcast is counted only after all the faxes have been sent to their
Service
Tables
destinations. If one transmission generates an error, then the broadcast will not
be counted until the transmission has been completed.
A printed fax report counts as one job for the F: counter.
The F: counter does not distinguish between fax sending or receiving.
When a copy job on the document server is printed, SP8022 also increments,
and when a print job stored on the document server is printed, SP8024 also
increments.
When an original is both copied and stored on the document server, the C: and
L: counters both increment.
When a print job is stored on the document server, only the L: counter
increments.
When the user presses the Document Server button to store the job on the
document server, only the L: counter increments.
When the user enters document server mode and prints data stored on the
document server, only the L: counter increments.
When an image received from Palm 2 is received and stored, the L: counter
increments.
When the customer prints a report (user code list, for example), the O: counter
increments. However, for fax reports and reports executed from the fax
application, the F: counter increments.
SM 5-69 B156/B220
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
11 T:Jobs/LS *CTL These SPs count the number of jobs stored to

12 C:Jobs/LS *CTL the document server by each application, to
13 F:Jobs/LS *CTL reveal how local storage is being used for input.
14 P:Jobs/LS *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
15 S:Jobs/LS *CTL The L: counter counts the number of jobs
stored from within the document server mode
16 L:Jobs/LS *CTL
screen at the operation panel.
17 O:Jobs/LS *CTL
When a scan job is sent to the document server, the S: counter increments.
When you enter document server mode and then scan an original, the L: counter
increments.
When a print job is sent to the document server, the P: counter increments.
When a network application sends data to the document server, the O: counter
increments.
When an image from Palm 2 is stored on the document server, the O: counter
increments.
When a fax is sent to the document server, the F: counter increments.
21 T:Pjob/LS *CTL These SPs reveal how files printed from the
22 C:Pjob/LS *CTL document server were stored on the document
23 F:Pjob/LS *CTL server originally.
24 P:Pjob/LS *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
25 S:Pjob/LS *CTL The L: counter counts the number of jobs
26 L:Pjob/LS *CTL
27 O:Pjob/LS *CTL
When a copy job stored on the document server is printed with another
application, the C: counter increments.
When an application like DeskTopBinder merges a copy job that was stored on
the document server with a print job that was stored on the document server, the
C: and P: counters both increment.
When a job already on the document server is printed with another application,
the L: counter increments.
When a scanner job stored on the document server is printed with another
application, the S: counter increments. If the original was scanned from within
document server mode, then the L: counter increments.
When images stored on the document server by a network application (including
Palm 2), are printed with another application, the O: counter increments.
When a copy job stored on the document server is printed with a network
application (Web Image Monitor, for example), the C: counter increments.
When a fax on the document server is printed, the F: counter increments.
B156/B220 5-70 SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
8 031 T:Pjob/DesApl *CTL These SPs reveal what applications were used
8 032 C:Pjob/DesApl *CTL to output documents from the document server.
8 033 F:Pjob/DesApl *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
8 034 P:Pjob/DesApl *CTL The L: counter counts the number of jobs
8 035 S:Pjob/DesApl *CTL printed from within the document server mode
8 036 L:Pjob/DesApl *CTL
8 037 O:Pjob/DesApl *CTL
When documents already stored on the document server are printed, the count
for the application that started the print job is incremented.
When the print job is started from a network application (Desk Top Binder, Web
Image Monitor, etc.) the L: counter increments.
8 041 T:TX Jobs/LS *CTL These SPs count the applications that stored
8 042 C:TX Jobs/LS *CTL files on the document server that were later
8 043 F:TX Jobs/LS *CTL accessed for transmission over the telephone
8 044 P:TX Jobs/LS *CTL line or over a network (attached to an e-mail, or
as a fax image by I-Fax).
8 045 S:TX Jobs/LS *CTL
[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
8 046 L:TX Jobs/LS *CTL
NOTE: Jobs merged for sending are counted
8 047 O:TX Jobs/LS *CTL separately.
The L: counter counts the number of jobs
scanned from within the document server mode
When a stored copy job is sent from the document server, the C: counter
Service
Tables
increments.
When images stored on the document server by a network application or Palm2
are sent as an e-mail, the O: counter increments.
8 051 T:TX Jobs/DesApl *CTL These SPs count the applications used to send
8 052 C:TX Jobs/DesApl *CTL files from the document server over the
8 053 F:TX Jobs/DesApl *CTL telephone line or over a network (attached to an
8 054 P:TX Jobs/DesApl *CTL e-mail, or as a fax image by I-Fax). Jobs
merged for sending are counted separately.
8 055 S:TX Jobs/DesApl *CTL
[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
8 056 L:TX Jobs/DesApl *CTL
The L: counter counts the number of jobs sent
8 057 O:TX Jobs/DesApl *CTL from within the document server mode screen
at the operation panel.
If the send is started from Desk Top Binder or Web Image Monitor, for example,
then the O: counter increments.
SM 5-71 B156/B220
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
8 061 T:FIN Jobs *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]

These SPs total the finishing methods. The finishing method is specified by
the application.
8 062 C:FIN Jobs *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs total finishing methods for copy jobs only. The finishing method is
specified by the application.
8 063 F:FIN Jobs *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]

These SPs total finishing methods for fax jobs only. The finishing method is
Note: Finishing features for fax jobs are not available at this time.
8 064 P:FIN Jobs *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs total finishing methods for print jobs only. The finishing method is
8 065 S:FIN Jobs *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs total finishing methods for scan jobs only. The finishing method is
Note: Finishing features for scan jobs are not available at this time.
8 066 L:FIN Jobs *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs total finishing methods for jobs output from within the document
server mode screen at the operation panel. The finishing method is specified
from the print window within document server mode.
8 067 O:FIN Jobs *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs total finishing methods for jobs executed by an external
application, over the network. The finishing method is specified by the
application.
8 06x 1 Sort Number of jobs started in Sort mode. When a stored copy job is
set for Sort and then stored on the document server, the L: counter
increments. (See SP8 066 1)
8 06x 2 Stack Number of jobs started out of Sort mode.
8 06x 3 Staple Number of jobs started in Staple mode.
8 06x 4 Booklet Number of jobs started in Booklet mode. If the machine is in staple
mode, the Staple counter also increments.
8 06x 5 Z-Fold Number of jobs started In any mode other than the Booklet mode
and set for folding (Z-fold).
8 06x 6 Punch Number of jobs started in Punch mode. When Punch is set for a
print job, the P: counter increments. (See SP8 064 6.)
8 06x 7 Other Reserved. Not used.
B156/B220 5-72 SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
8 071 T:Jobs/PGS *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]

These SPs count the number of jobs broken down by the number of pages
in the job, regardless of which application was used.
8 072 C:Jobs/PGS *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count and calculate the number of copy jobs by size based on
the number of pages in the job.
8 073 F:Jobs/PGS *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count and calculate the number of fax jobs by size based on the
number of pages in the job.
8 074 P:Jobs/PGS *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count and calculate the number of print jobs by size based on
8 075 S:Jobs/PGS [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count and calculate the number of scan jobs by size based on
8 076 L:Jobs/PGS *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count and calculate the number of jobs printed from within the
document server mode window at the operation panel, by the number of
pages in the job.
8 077 O:Jobs/PGS *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count and calculate the number of Other application jobs (Web
Image Monitor, Palm 2, etc.) by size based on the number of pages in the
job.
8 07x 1 1 Page 8 07x 8 21~50 Pages
8 07x 2 2 Pages 8 07x 9 51~100 Pages
8 07x 3 3 Pages 8 07x 10 101~300 Pages
8 07x 4 4 Pages 8 07x 11 301~500 Pages
Service
8 07x 5 5 Pages 8 07x 12 501~700 Pages
Tables
8 07x 6 6~10 Pages 8 07x 13 701~1000 Pages
8 07x 7 11~20 Pages 8 07x 14 1001~ Pages
For example: When a copy job stored on the document server is printed in
document server mode, the appropriate L: counter (SP8-076 0xx) increments.
Printing a fax report counts as a job and increments the F: counter (SP8-073).
Interrupted jobs (paper jam, etc.) are counted, even though they do not finish.
If a job is paused and re-started, it counts as one job.
If the finisher runs out of staples during a print and staple job, then the job is
counted at the time the error occurs.
For copy jobs (SP8-072) and scan jobs (SP8-075), the total is calculated by
multiplying the number of sets of copies by the number of pages scanned. (One
duplex page counts as 2.)
The first test print and subsequent test prints to adjust settings are added to the
number of pages of the copy job (SP8-072).
When printing the first page of a job from within the document server screen, the
page is counted.
SM 5-73 B156/B220
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
8 111 T:FAX TX Jobs *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]

These SPs count the total number of jobs (color or black-and-white) sent by
fax, either directly or using a file stored on the document server, on a
telephone line.
Note: Color fax sending is not available at this time.
8 113 F:FAX TX Jobs *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count the total number of jobs (color or black-and-white) sent by
fax directly on a telephone line.
Note: Color fax sending is not available at this time.
8 11x 1 B/W
8 11x 2 Color
These counters count jobs, not pages.

This SP counts fax jobs sent over a telephone line with a fax application,
including documents stored on the document server.
If the mode is changed during the job, the job will count with the mode set when
the job started.
If the same document is faxed to both a public fax line and an I-Fax at a
destination where both are available, then this counter increments, and the I-Fax
counter (8 12x) also increments.
The fax job is counted when the job is scanned for sending, not when the job is
sent.
8 121 T:IFAX TX Jobs *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]

These SPs count the total number of jobs (color or black-and-white) sent,
either directly or using a file stored on the document server, as fax images
using I-Fax.
NOTE: Color fax sending is not available at this time.
8 123 F:IFAX TX Jobs *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count the number of jobs (color or black-and-white) sent (not
stored on the document server), as fax images using I-Fax.
NOTE: Color fax sending is not available at this time.
8 12x 1 B/W
8 12x 2 Color

The counters for color are provided for future use; the color fax feature is not
available at this time.
The fax job is counted when the job is scanned for sending, not when the job is
sent.
B156/B220 5-74 SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
8 131 T:S-to-Email Jobs *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]

These SPs count the total number of jobs (color or black-and-white) scanned
and attached to an e-mail, regardless of whether the document server was
used or not.
8 135 S:S-to-Email Jobs *CTL
These SPs count the number of jobs (color or black-and-white) scanned and
attached to e-mail, without storing the original on the document server.
8 13x 1 B/W
8 13x 2 Color
8 13x 3 ACS
If the job is stored on the document server, after the job is stored it is determined
to be color or black-and-white then counted.
If the job is cancelled during scanning, or if the job is cancelled while the
document is waiting to be sent, the job is not counted.
If the job is cancelled during sending, it may or may not be counted, depending
on what stage of the process had been reached when the job was cancelled.
If several jobs are combined for sending to the Scan Router, Scan-to-Email, or
Scan-to-PC, or if one job is sent to more than one destination. each send is
counted separately. For example, if the same document is sent by Scan-to-Email
as well as Scan-to-PC, then it is counted twice (once for Scan-to-Email and once
for Scan-to-PC).
8 141 T:Deliv Jobs/Svr *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]

and sent to a Scan Router server.
Service
Tables
8 145 S:Deliv Jobs/Svr *CTL
These SPs count the number of jobs (color or black-and-white) scanned in
scanner mode and sent to a Scan Router server.
8 14x 1 B/W
8 14x 2 Color
8 13x 3 ACS
The jobs are counted even though the arrival and reception of the jobs at the
Scan Router server cannot be confirmed.
If even one color image is mixed with black-and-white images, then the job is
counted as a Color job.
If the job is cancelled during scanning, or if the job is cancelled while the
document is waiting to be delivered, the job is not counted.
Even if several files are combined for sending, the transmission counts as one
job.
SM 5-75 B156/B220
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
8 151 T:Deliv Jobs/PC *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]

and sent to a folder on a PC (Scan-to-PC).
NOTE: At the present time, SP8 -151 and 8-155 perform identical counts.
8 155 S:Deliv Jobs/PC *CTL
and sent with Scan-to-PC.
8 15x 1 B/W
8 15x 2 Color
8 13x 3 ACS

If the job is cancelled during scanning, it is not counted.
If the job is cancelled while it is waiting to be sent, the job is not counted.
Even if several files are combined for sending, the transmission counts as one
job.
8 161 T:PCFAX TX Jobs *CTL These SPs count the number of PC Fax
8 163 F:PCFAX TX Jobs *CTL transmission jobs. A job is counted from when it
is registered for sending, not when it is sent.
[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
NOTE: At the present time, these counters
perform identical counts.
This counts fax jobs started from a PC using a PC fax application, and sending
the data out to the destination from the PC through the copier.
8 191 T:Total Scan PGS *CTL These SPs count the pages scanned by each
8 192 C:Total Scan PGS *CTL application that uses the scanner to scan
8 193 F:Total Scan PGS *CTL images.
8 195 S:Total Scan PGS *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
8 196 L:Total Scan PGS *CTL
SP8-191 to 8-196 count the number of scanned sides of pages, not the number
of physical pages.
These counters do not count reading user stamp data, or reading color charts to
adjust color.
Previews done with a scanner driver are not counted.
A count is done only after all images of a job have been scanned.
Scans made in SP mode are not counted.
B156/B220 5-76 SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Examples
If 3 B5 pages and 1 A3 page are scanned with the scanner application but not
stored, the S: count is 4.
If both sides of 3 A4 sheets are copied and stored to the document server using
the Store File button in the Copy mode window, the C: count is 6 and the L:
count is 6.
If both sides of 3 A4 sheets are copied but not stored, the C: count is 6.
If you enter document server mode then scan 6 pages, the L: count is 6.
8 201 T:LSize Scan PGS *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]

These SPs count the total number of large pages input with the scanner for
scan and copy jobs. Large size paper (A3/DLT) scanned for fax transmission
are not counted.
NOTE: These counters are displayed in the SMC Report, and in the User
Tools display.
8 205 S:LSize Scan PGS *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count the total number of large pages input with the scanner for
scan jobs only. Large size paper (A3/DLT) scanned for fax transmission are
not counted.
NOTE: These counters are displayed in the SMC Report, and in the User
Tools display..
8 211 T:Scan PGS/LS *CTL These SPs count the number of pages scanned
8 212 C:Scan PGS/LS *CTL into the document server.
Service
Tables
8 213 F:Scan PGS/LS *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
8 215 S:Scan PGS/LS *CTL The L: counter counts the number of pages
8 216 L:Scan PGS/LS *CTL stored from within the document server mode
screen at the operation panel, and with the
Store File button from within the Copy mode
screen
Reading user stamp data is not counted.

If a job is cancelled, the pages output as far as the cancellation are counted.
If the scanner application scans and stores 3 B5 sheets and 1 A4 sheet, the S:
count is 4.
If pages are copied but not stored on the document server, these counters do not
change.
If both sides of 3 A4 sheets are copied and stored to the document server, the C:
count is 6 and the L: count is 6.
If you enter document server mode then scan 6 pages, the L: count is 6.
SM 5-77 B156/B220
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
8 221 ADF Org Feeds *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]

These SPs count the number of pages fed through the ADF for front and
back side scanning.
8 221 1 Front Number of front sides fed for scanning:
With an ADF that can scan both sides simultaneously, the Front
side count is the same as the number of pages fed for either
simplex or duplex scanning.
With an ADF that cannot scan both sides simultaneously, the Front
side count is the same as the number of pages fed for duplex front
side scanning. (The front side is determined by which side the user
loads face up.)
8 221 2 Back Number of rear sides fed for scanning:
With an ADF that can scan both sides simultaneously, the Back
count is the same as the number of pages fed for duplex scanning.
With an ADF that cannot scan both sides simultaneously, the Back
count is the same as the number of pages fed for duplex rear-side
scanning.
When 1 sheet is fed for duplex scanning the Front count is 1 and the Back count
is 1.
If a jam occurs during the job, recovery processing is not counted to avoid double
counting. Also, the pages are not counted if the jam occurs before the first sheet
is output.
8 231 Scan PGS/Mode *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]

These SPs count the number of pages scanned by each ADF mode to
determine the work load on the ADF.
8 231 1 Large Volume Selectable. Large copy jobs that cannot be loaded
in the ADF at one time.
8 231 2 SADF Selectable. Feeding pages one by one through the
ADF.
8 231 3 Mixed Size Selectable. Select Mixed Sizes on the operation
panel.
8 231 4 Custom Size Selectable. Originals of non-standard size.
8 231 5 Platen Book mode. Raising the ADF and placing the
original directly on the platen.
If the scan mode is changed during the job, for example, if the user switches
from ADF to Platen mode, the count is done for the last selected mode.
The user cannot select mixed sizes or non-standard sizes with the fax application
so if the originals page sizes are mixed or non-standard, these are not counted.
If the user selects Mixed Sizes for copying in the platen mode, the Mixed Size
count is enabled.
In the SADF mode if the user copies 1 page in platen mode and then copies 2
pages with SADF, the Platen count is 1 and the SADF count is 3.
B156/B220 5-78 SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
8 241 T:Scan PGS/Org *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]

These SPs count the total number of scanned pages by original type for all
jobs, regardless of which application was used.
8 242 C:Scan PGS/Org *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count the number of pages scanned by original type for Copy
jobs.
8 243 F:Scan PGS/Org *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count the number of pages scanned by original type for Fax jobs.
8 245 S:Scan PGS/Org *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count the number of pages scanned by original type for Scan
jobs.
8 246 L:Scan PGS/Org *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count the number of pages scanned and stored from within the
document server mode screen at the operation panel, and with the Store File
button from within the Copy mode screen
8 241 8 242 8 243 8 245 8 246
8 24x 1: Text Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
8 24x 2: Text/Photo Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
8 24x 3: Photo Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
8 24x 4: GenCopy, Pale Yes Yes No Yes Yes
8 24x 5: Map Yes Yes No Yes Yes
8 24x 6: Normal/Detail Yes No Yes No No
8 24x 7: Fine/Super Fine Yes No Yes No No
8 24x 8: Binary Yes No No Yes No
8 24x 9: Grayscale Yes No No Yes No
8 24x 10: Color Yes No No Yes No
8 24x 11: Other Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Service
Tables
If the scan mode is changed during the job, for example, if the user switches
from ADF to Platen mode, the count is done for the last selected mode.
SM 5-79 B156/B220
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
8 251 T:Scan PGS/ImgEdt *CTL These SPs show how many times Image Edit
8 252 C:Scan PGS/ImgEdt *CTL features have been selected at the operation
8 254 P:Scan PGS/ImgEdt *CTL panel for each application. Some examples of
8 256 L:Scan PGS/ImgEdt *CTL these editing features are:
8 257 O:Scan PGS/ImgEdt *CTL Erase> Border
Erase> Center
Image Repeat
Centering
Positive/Negative
[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
Note: The count totals the number of times the
edit features have been used. A detailed
breakdown of exactly which features have been
used is not given.
The L: counter counts the number of pages stored from within the document server mode
screen at the operation panel, and with the Store File button from within the Copy mode screen.
8 261 T:Scn PGS/ColCr *CTL

8 262 C:Scn PGS/ColCr *CTL
8 266 L:Scn PGS/ColCr
8 26x 1 Color Conversion These SPs show how many times color creation
8 26x 2 Color Erase features have been selected at the operation
8 26x 3 Background panel.
8 26x 4 Other
8 281 T:Scan PGS/TWAIN *CTL These SPs count the number of pages scanned
8 285 S:Scan PGS/TWAIN *CTL using a TWAIN driver. These counters reveal
how the TWAIN driver is used for delivery
functions.
[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
NOTE: At the present time, these counters
perform identical counts.
8 291 T:Scan PGS/Stamp *CTL These SPs count the number of pages stamped
8 293 F:Scan PGS/Stamp *CTL with the stamp in the ADF unit.
8 295 S:Scan PGS/Stamp *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
8 296 L:Scan PGS/Stamp *CTL The L: counter counts the number of pages
screen at the operation panel, and with the
Store File button from within the Copy mode
screen
B156/B220 5-80 SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
8 301 T:Scan PGS/Size *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]

These SPs count by size the total number of pages scanned by all
applications. Use these totals to compare original page size (scanning) and
output (printing) page size [SP8-441].
8 302 C:Scan PGS/Size *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by size the total number of pages scanned by the Copy
application. Use these totals to compare original page size (scanning) and
output (printing) page size [SP8-442].
8 303 F:Scan PGS/Size *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by size the total number of pages scanned by the Fax
output page size [SP8-443].
8 305 S:Scan PGS/Size *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by size the total number of pages scanned by the Scan
output page size [SP8-445].
8 306 L:Scan PGS/Size *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by size the total number of pages scanned and stored from
within the document server mode screen at the operation panel, and with the
Store File button from within the Copy mode screen. Use these totals to
compare original page size (scanning) and output page size [SP8-446].
8 30x 1 A3
8 30x 2 A4
8 30x 3 A5
8 30x 4 B4
8 30x 5 B5
8 30x 6 DLT
8 30x 7 LG
Service
Tables
8 30x 8 LT
8 30x 9 HLT
8 30x 10 Full Bleed
8 30x 254 Other (Standard)
8 30x 255 Other (Custom)
SM 5-81 B156/B220
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
8 311 T:Scan PGS/Rez *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]

These SPs count by resolution setting the total number of pages scanned by
applications that can specify resolution settings.
8 315 S:Scan PGS/Rez *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by resolution setting the total number of pages scanned by
applications that can specify resolution settings.
NOTE: At the present time, SP8-311 and 8-315 perform identical counts.
8 31x 1 1200dpi ~
8 31x 2 600dpi~1199dpi
8 31x 3 400dpi~599dpi
8 31x 4 200dpi~399dpi
8 31x 5 ~199dpi
Copy resolution settings are fixed so they are not counted.

The Fax application does not allow finely-adjusted resolution settings so no count
is done for the Fax application.
B156/B220 5-82 SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
8 381 T:Total PrtPGS *CTL These SPs count the number of pages printed
8 382 C:Total PrtPGS *CTL by the customer. The counter for the application
8 383 F:Total PrtPGS *CTL used for storing the pages increments.
8 384 P:Total PrtPGS *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
8 385 S:Total PrtPGS *CTL The L: counter counts the number of pages
8 386 L:Total PrtPGS *CTL
screen at the operation panel. Pages stored
8 387 O:Total PrtPGS *CTL with the Store File button from within the Copy
mode screen go to the C: counter.
When the A3/DLT double count function is switched on with SP5-104, 1 A3/DLT
page is counted as 2.
When several documents are merged for a print job, the number of pages stored
are counted for the application that stored them.
These counters are used primarily to calculate charges on use of the machine,
so the following pages are not counted as printed pages:
Blank pages in a duplex printing job.
Blank pages inserted as document covers, chapter title sheets, and slip
sheets.
Reports printed to confirm counts.
All reports done in the service mode (service summaries, engine
maintenance reports, etc.)
Test prints for machine image adjustment.
Error notification reports.
Partially printed pages as the result of a copier jam.
Service
Tables
8 391 LSize PrtPGS *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count pages printed on paper sizes A3/DLT and larger.
NOTE: In addition to being displayed in the SMC Report, these counters are
also displayed in the User Tools display on the copy machine.
8 401 T:PrtPGS/LS *CTL These SPs count the number of pages printed
8 402 C:PrtPGS/LS *CTL from the document server. The counter for the
8 403 F:PrtPGS/LS *CTL application used to print the pages is
8 404 P:PrtPGS/LS *CTL incremented.
The L: counter counts the number of jobs
8 405 S:PrtPGS/LS *CTL
8 406 L:PrtPGS/LS *CTL screen at the operation panel.
[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
Print jobs done with Web Image Monitor and Desk Top Binder are added to the
L: count.
Fax jobs done with Web Image Monitor and Desk Top Binder are added to the F:
count.
SM 5-83 B156/B220
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
8 411 Prints/Duplex *CTL This SP counts the amount of paper (front/back

counted as 1 page) used for duplex printing.
Last pages printed only on one side are not
counted.
[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
8 421 T:PrtPGS/Dup Comb *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]

These SPs count by binding and combine, and n-Up settings the number of
pages processed for printing. This is the total for all applications.
8 422 C:PrtPGS/Dup Comb *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
pages processed for printing by the copier application.
8 423 F:PrtPGS/Dup Comb *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
pages processed for printing by the fax application.
8 424 P:PrtPGS/Dup Comb *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
pages processed for printing by the printer application.
8 425 S:PrtPGS/Dup Comb *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
pages processed for printing by the scanner application.
8 426 L:PrtPGS/Dup Comb *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
pages processed for printing from within the document server mode window
at the operation panel.
8 427 O:PrtPGS/Dup Comb *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
pages processed for printing by Other applications
8 42x 1 Simplex> Duplex
8 42x 2 Duplex> Duplex
8 42x 3 Book> Duplex
8 42x 4 Simplex Combine
8 42x 5 Duplex Combine
8 42x 6 2> 2 pages on 1 side (2-Up)
8 42x 10 9> 9 pages on 1 side (9-Up)
8 42x 11 16> 16 pages on 1 side (16-Up)
8 42x 12 Booklet
8 42x 13 Magazine
These counts (SP8-421 to SP8-427) are especially useful for customers who
need to improve their compliance with ISO standards for the reduction of paper
consumption.
Pages that are only partially printed with the n-Up functions are counted as 1
page.
Here is a summary of how the counters work for Booklet and Magazine modes:
B156/B220 5-84 SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Booklet Magazine
Original Original
Count Count
Pages Pages
1 1 1 1
2 2 2 2
3 2 3 2
4 2 4 2
5 3 5 4
6 4 6 4
7 4 7 4
8 4 8 4
8 431 T:PrtPGS/ImgEdt *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]

These SPs count the total number of pages output with the three features
below, regardless of which application was used.
8 432 C:PrtPGS/ImgEdt *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
below with the copy application.
8 434 P:PrtPGS/ImgEdt *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
below with the print application.
8 436 L:PrtPGS/ImgEdt *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count the total number of pages output from within the document
server mode window at the operation panel with the three features below.
8 437 O:PrtPGS/ImgEdt *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
Service
Tables
below with Other applications.
8 43x 1 Cover/Slip Sheet Total number of covers or slip sheets inserted. The
count for a cover printed on both sides counts 2.
8 43x 2 Series/Book The number of pages printed in series (one side) or
printed as a book with booklet right/left pagination.
8 43x 3 User Stamp The number of pages printed where stamps were
applied, including page numbering and date stamping.
SM 5-85 B156/B220
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
8 441 T:PrtPGS/Ppr Size *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]

These SPs count by print paper size the number of pages printed by all
applications.
8 442 C:PrtPGS/Ppr Size *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by print paper size the number of pages printed by the
copy application.
8 443 F:PrtPGS/Ppr Size *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by print paper size the number of pages printed by the fax
application.
8 444 P:PrtPGS/Ppr Size *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
printer application.
8 445 S:PrtPGS/Ppr Size *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
scanner application.
8 446 L:PrtPGS/Ppr Size *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by print paper size the number of pages printed from within
the document server mode window at the operation panel.
8 447 O:PrtPGS/Ppr Size *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by print paper size the number of pages printed by Other
applications.
8 44x 1 A3
8 44x 2 A4
8 44x 3 A5
8 44x 4 B4
8 44x 5 B5
8 44x 6 DLT
8 44x 7 LG
8 44x 8 LT
8 44x 9 HLT
8 44x 10 Full Bleed
8 44x Other (Standard)
254
8 44x Other (Custom)
255
These counters do not distinguish between LEF and SEF.
B156/B220 5-86 SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
8 451 PrtPGS/Ppr Tray *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]

These SPs count the number of sheets fed from each paper feed station.
8 451 1 Bypass Bypass Tray
8 451 2 Tray 1 Copier
8 451 3 Tray 2 Copier
8 451 4 Tray 3 Paper Tray Unit (Option)
8 451 5 Tray 4 Paper Tray Unit (Option)
8 451 6 Tray 5 LCT (Option)
8 451 7 Tray 6 Currently not used.
8 461 T:PrtPGS/Ppr Type *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]

These SPs count by paper type the number pages printed by all
applications.
These counters are not the same as the PM counter. The PM counter is
based on feed timing to accurately measure the service life of the feed
rollers. However, these counts are based on output timing.
Blank sheets (covers, chapter covers, slip sheets) are also counted.
During duplex printing, pages printed on both sides count as 1, and a
page printed on one side counts as 1.
8 462 C:PrtPGS/Ppr Type *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by paper type the number pages printed by the copy
application.
8 463 F:PrtPGS/Ppr Type *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by paper type the number pages printed by the fax
Service
Tables
application.
8 464 P:PrtPGS/Ppr Type *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by paper type the number pages printed by the printer
application.
8 466 L:PrtPGS/Ppr Type *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by paper type the number pages printed from within the
document server mode window at the operation panel.
8 46x 1 Normal
8 46x 2 Recycled
8 46x 3 Special
8 46x 4 Thick
8 46x 5 Normal (Back)
8 46x 6 Thick (Back)
8 46x 7 OHP
8 46x 8 Other
SM 5-87 B156/B220
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
8 471 PrtPGS/Mag *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]

These SPs count by magnification rate the number of pages printed.
8 471 1 ~49%
8 471 2 50%~99%
8 471 3 100%
8 471 4 101%~200%
8 471 5 201% ~
Counts are done for magnification adjusted for pages, not only on the operation
panel but performed remotely with an external network application capable of
performing magnification adjustment as well.
Magnification adjustments done with printer drivers with PC applications such as
Excel are also counted.
Magnification adjustments done for adjustments after they have been stored on
the document server are not counted.
Magnification adjustments performed automatically during Auto Reduce/Enlarge
copying are counted.
The magnification rates of blank cover sheets, slip sheets, etc. are automatically
assigned a rate of 100%.
8 481 T:PrtPGS/TonSave *CTL

8 484 P:PrtPGS/TonSave *CTL
These SPs count the number of pages printed with the Toner Save feature
switched on.
NOTE: These SPs return the same results as this SP is limited to the Print
application.
[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
8 491 T:PrtPGS/Col Mode *CTL These SPs count the number of pages printed
8 492 C:PrtPGS/Col Mode *CTL in the Color Mode by each application.
8 493 F:PrtPGS/Col Mode *CTL
8 496 L:PrtPGS/Col Mode *CTL
8 49x 1 B/W
8 49x 2 Single Color
8 49x 3 Two Color
8 49x 4 Full Color
8 501 T:PrtPGS/Col Mode *CTL These SPs count the number of pages printed
8 504 P:PrtPGS/Col Mode *CTL in the Color Mode by the print application.
8 50x 1 B/W
8 50x 2 Single Color
8 50x 3 Full Color
B156/B220 5-88 SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
8 511 T:PrtPGS/Emul *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]

These SPs count by printer emulation mode the total number of pages
printed.
8 514 P:PrtPGS/Emul *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by printer emulation mode the total number of pages
printed.
8 514 1 RPCS
8 514 2 RPDL
8 514 3 PS3
8 514 4 R98
8 514 5 R16
8 514 6 GL/GL2
8 514 7 R55
8 514 8 RTIFF
8 514 9 PDF
8 514 10 PCL5e/5c
8 514 11 PCL XL
8 514 12 IPDL-C
8 514 13 BM-Links Japan Only
8 514 14 Other
SP8-511 and SP8-514 return the same results as they are both limited to the
Print application.
Print jobs output to the document server are not counted.
Service
Tables
SM 5-89 B156/B220
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
8 521 T:PrtPGS/FIN *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]

These SPs count by finishing mode the total number of pages printed by all
applications.
8 522 C:PrtPGS/FIN *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by finishing mode the total number of pages printed by the
Copy application.
8 523 F:PrtPGS/FIN *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
Fax application.
NOTE: Print finishing options for received faxes are currently not available.
8 524 P:PrtPGS/FIN *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
Print application.
8 525 S:PrtPGS/FIN *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
Scanner application.
8 526 L:PrtPGS/FIN *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by finishing mode the total number of pages printed from
within the document server mode window at the operation panel.
8 52x 1 Sort
8 52x 2 Stack
8 52x 3 Staple
8 52x 4 Booklet
8 52x 5 Z-Fold
8 52x 6 Punch
8 52x 7 Other
NOTE: 1) If stapling is selected for finishing and the stack is too large for stapling,
the unstapled pages are still counted.
2) The counts for staple finishing are based on output to the staple tray, so
jam recoveries are counted.
8 531 Staples *CTL This SP counts the amount of staples used

by the machine.
[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
B156/B220 5-90 SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
8 581 T:Counter *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]

These SPs count the total output broken down by color output, regardless of
the application used. In addition to being displayed in the SMC Report, these
counters are also displayed in the User Tools display on the copy machine.
8 581 1 Total
8 581 2 Total: Full Color
8 581 3 B&W/Single Color
8 581 4 Development: CMY
8 581 5 Development: K
8 581 6 Copy: Color
8 581 7 Copy: B/W
8 581 8 Print: Color
8 581 9 Print: B/W
8 581 10 Total: Color
8 581 11 Total: B/W
8 581 12 Full Colour: A3
8 581 13 Full Colour: B4 JIS or Smaller
8 581 14 Full Colour Print
8 581 15 Mono Colour Print
8 581 16 Full Colour GPC
8 582 C:Counter *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]

These SPs count the total output of the copy application broken down by
color output.
8 582 1 B/W
8 582 2 Single Color
8 582 3 Two Color
Service
Tables
8 582 4 Full Color
8 583 F:Counter *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]

These SPs count the total output of the fax application broken down by color
output.
8 583 1 B/W
8 584 P:Counter *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]

These SPs count the total output of the print application broken down by
color output.
8 584 1 B/W
8 584 3 Full Color
SM 5-91 B156/B220
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
8 586 L:Counter *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]

These SPs count the total output of the local storage broken down by color
output.
8 582 1 B/W
8 582 3 Two Color
8 582 4 Full Color
8 591 O:Counter *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]

These SPs count the totals for A3/DLT paper use, number of duplex pages
printed, and the number of staples used. These totals are for Other (O:)
applications only.
8 591 1 A3/DLT
8 591 2 Duplex
8 591 3 Staple
8 631 T:FAX TX PGS *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]

These SPs count by color mode the number of pages sent by fax to a
telephone number.
8 633 F:FAX TX PGS *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by color mode the number of pages sent by fax to a
telephone number.
8 63x 1 B/W
8 63x 2 Color
If a document has color and black-and-white pages mixed, the pages are
counted separately as B/W or Color.
At the present time, this feature is provided for the Fax application only so
SP8-631 and SP8-633 are the same.
The counts include error pages.
If a document is sent to more than one destination with a Group transmission,
the count is done for each destination.
Polling transmissions are counted but polling RX are not.
Relay, memory, and confidential mailbox transmissions and are counted for each
destination.
B156/B220 5-92 SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
8 641 T:IFAX TX PGS *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]

These SPs count by color mode the number of pages sent by fax to as fax
images using I-Fax.
8 643 F:IFAX TX PGS *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by color mode the number of pages sent by Fax as fax
images using I-Fax.
8 64x 1 B/W
8 64x 2 Color
If a document has color and black-and-white pages mixed, the pages are
counted separately as B/W or Color.
At the present time, this feature is provided for the Fax application only so
SP8-641 and SP8-643 are the same.
The counts include error pages.
If a document is sent to more than one destination with a Group transmission,
the count is done for each destination.
Polling transmissions are counted but polling RX are not.
Relay, memory, and confidential mailbox transmissions and are counted for each
destination.
8 651 T:S-to-Email PGS *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]

These SPs count by color mode the total number of pages attached to an e-
mail for both the Scan and document server applications.
8 655 S:S-to-Email PGS *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by color mode the total number of pages attached to an e-
mail for the Scan application only.
Service
Tables
8 65x 1 B/W
8 65x 2 Color
NOTE: 1) The count for B/W and Color pages is done after the document is stored
on the HDD. If the job is cancelled before it is stored, the pages are not
counted.
2) If Scan-to-Email is used to send a 10-page document to 5 addresses,
the count is 10 (the pages are sent to the same SMTP server together).
3) If Scan-to-PC is used to send a 10-page document to 5 folders, the
count is 50 (the document is sent to each destination of the SMB/FTP
server).
4) Due to restrictions on some devices, if Scan-to-Email is used to send a
10-page document to a large number of destinations, the count may be
divided and counted separately. For example, if a 10-page document is
sent to 200 addresses, the count is 10 for the first 100 destinations and
the count is also 10 for the second 100 destinations, for a total of 20.).
SM 5-93 B156/B220
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
8 661 T:Deliv PGS/Svr *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]

These SPs count by color mode the total number of pages sent to a Scan
Router server by both Scan and LS applications.
8 665 S:Deliv PGS/Svr *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by color mode the total number of pages sent to a Scan
Router server by the Scan application.
8 66x 1 B/W
8 66x 2 Color
NOTE: 1) The B/W and Color counts are done after the document is stored on the
HDD of the Scan Router server.
2) If the job is canceled before storage on the Scan Router server finishes,
the counts are not done.
3) The count is executed even if regardless of confirmation of the arrival at
the Scan Router server.
8 671 T:Deliv PGS/PC *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]

These SPs count by color mode the total number of pages sent to a folder
on a PC (Scan-to-PC) with the Scan and LS applications.
8 675 S:Deliv PGS/PC *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by color mode the total number of pages sent with Scan-
to-PC with the Scan application.
8 67x 1 B/W
8 67x 2 Color
B156/B220 5-94 SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
8 681 T:PCFAX TXPGS *CTL These SPs count the number of pages sent by PC
8 683 F:PCFAX TXPGS *CTL Fax. These SPs are provided for the Fax
application only, so the counts for SP8 681 and
SP8 683 are the same.
[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
This counts pages sent from a PC using a PC fax application, from the PC
through the copier to the destination.
When sending the same message to more than one place using broadcasting,
the pages are only counted once. (For example, a 10-page fax is sent to location
A and location B. The counter goes up by 10, not 20.)
8 691 T:TX PGS/LS *CTL These SPs count the number of pages sent from
8 692 C:TX PGS/LS *CTL the document server. The counter for the
8 693 F:TX PGS/LS *CTL application that was used to store the pages is
8 694 P:TX PGS/LS *CTL incremented.
8 695 S:TX PGS/LS *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
The L: counter counts the number of pages stored
8 696 L:TX PGS/LS *CTL
from within the document server mode screen at
the operation panel. Pages stored with the Store
File button from within the Copy mode screen go
to the C: counter.
NOTE: 1) Print jobs done with Web Image Monitor and Desk Top Binder are
added to the count.
2) If several documents are merged for sending, the number of pages
stored are counted for the application that stored them.
Service
Tables
3) When several documents are sent by a Fax broadcast, the F: count is
done for the number of pages sent to each destination.
8 701 TX PGS/Port *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]

These SPs count the number of pages sent by the physical port used to
send them. For example, if a 3-page original is sent to 4 destinations via
ISDN G4, the count for ISDN (G3, G4) is 12.
8 701 1 PSTN-1
8 701 2 PSTN-2
8 701 3 PSTN-3
8 701 4 ISDN (G3, G4)
8 701 5 Network
8 711 T: Scan PGS/Comp *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]

These SPs count the number of total pages compressed by each
compression method.
8 711 1 JPEG/ JPEG2000
8 711 2 TIFF (Multi/ Single)
8 711 3 PDF
8 711 4 Other
SM 5-95 B156/B220
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
8 715 S: Scan PGS/Comp *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]

These SPs count the number of pages for the scanner compressed by each
compression method.
8 715 1 JPEG/ JPEG2000
8 715 2 TIFF (Multi/ Single)
8 715 3 PDF
8 715 4 Other
8 741 RX PGS/Port *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]

These SPs count the number of pages received by the physical port used to
receive them.
8 741 1 PSTN-1
8 741 2 PSTN-2
8 741 3 PSTN-3
8 741 4 ISDN (G3,G4)
8 741 5 Network
8 771 Dev Counter *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]

These SPs count the frequency of use (number of rotations of the
development rollers) for black and other color toners.
8 771 1 Total
8 771 2 K
8 771 3 Y
8 771 4 M
8 771 5 C
8 781 No. of Toner *BCU [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]

These SPs display the number of already replaced toner bottles.
NOTE: Currently, the data in SP7-833-011 through 014 and the data in SP8-
781-001 through -004 are the same.
8 781 1 K The number of black-toner bottle
8 781 2 Y The number of yellow-toner bottle
8 781 3 M The number of magenta-toner bottle
8 781 4 C The number of cyan-toner bottle
8 791 LS Memory Remain *CTL This SP displays the percent of space

available on the document server for
storing documents.
[0~100/ 0 / 1]
B156/B220 5-96 SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
8 801 Toner Remain *CTL [0~100/ 0 / 1]

These SPs display the percent of toner remaining for each color. This SP
allows the user to check the toner supply at any time.
NOTE: This precise method of measuring remaining toner supply (1% steps)
is better than other machines in the market that can only measure in
increments of 10 (10% steps).
8 801 1 K
8 801 2 Y
8 801 3 M
8 801 4 C
8 831 Coverage Average *BCU [0~100/ 0 / 1]

These SPs display the average coverage by color. ( SP7-833)
8 831 1 K
8 831 2 Y
8 831 3 M
8 831 4 C
8 841 Coverage Newest *BCU [0~100/ 0 / 1]

Page
These SPs display the coverage of the last print by color. ( SP7-833)
8 841 1 K
8 841 2 Y
8 841 3 M
8 841 4 C
Service
Tables
8 851 Coverage: 0-10% *BCU [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs display the number of scanned sheets on which the coverage of
each color is from 0% to 10%.
8 851 1 S: BK
8 851 2 S: Y
8 851 3 S: M
8 851 4 S: C
8 861 Coverage: 11-20% *BCU [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]

8 851 1 S: BK
8 851 2 S: Y
8 851 3 S: M
8 851 4 S: C
8 871 Coverage: 21-30% *BCU [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]

8 871 1 S: BK
8 871 2 S: Y
8 871 3 S: M
SM 5-97 B156/B220
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
8 871 4 S: C
8 881 Coverage: 31%- *BCU [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]

each color is 31% or higher.
8 881 1 K
8 881 2 Y
8 881 3 M
8 881 4 C
8 891 Page/Toner Bottle *BCU [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]

These SPs display the number of sheets output by the scan application.
8 891 1 K
8 891 2 Y
8 891 3 M
8 891 4 C

Prev 1
These SPs display the number of sheet output by the scan application with
the previously replaced units.
8 901 1 K
8 901 2 Y
8 901 3 M
8 901 4 C

Prev 2
These SPs display the number of sheet output by the scan application with
the previously replaced units.
8 911 1 K
8 911 2 Y
8 911 3 M
8 911 4 C
B156/B220 5-98 SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
8 941 Machine Status *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]

These SPs count the amount of time the machine spends in each operation
mode. These SPs are useful for customers who need to investigate machine
operation for improvement in their compliance with ISO Standards.
8 941 1 Operation Time Engine operation time. Does not include time while
controller is saving data to HDD (while engine is not
operating).
8 941 2 Standby Time Engine not operating. Includes time while controller
saves data to HDD. Does not include time spent in
Energy Save, Low Power, or Off modes.
8 941 3 Energy Save Time Includes time while the machine is performing
background printing.
8 941 4 Low Power Time Includes time in Energy Save mode with Engine on.
Includes time while machine is performing
background printing.
8 941 5 Off Mode Time Includes time while machine is performing
background printing. Does not include time machine
remains powered off with the power switches.
8 941 6 Down Time/SC Total down time due to SC errors.
8 941 7 Down Time/PrtJam Total down time due to paper jams during printing.
8 941 8 Down Time/OrgJam Total down time due to original jams during scanning.
8 941 9 Down Time/TonEnd Total down time due to toner end.
8 951 AddBook Register *CTL

These SPs count the number of events when the machine manages data
registration.
8 951 1 User Code User code registrations. [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
Service
Tables
8 951 2 Mail Address Mail address registrations.
8 951 3 Fax Destination Fax destination registrations.
8 951 4 Group Group destination registrations.
8 951 5 Transfer Request Fax relay destination registrations
for relay TX.
8 951 6 F-Code F-Code box registrations.
8 951 7 Copy Program Copy application registrations with [0~255 / 0 / 255]
the Program (job settings) feature.
8 951 8 Fax Program Fax application registrations with
the Program (job settings) feature.
8 951 9 Printer Program Printer application registrations
with the Program (job settings)
feature.
8 951 10 Scanner Scanner application registrations
Program with the Program (job settings)
feature.
SM 5-99 B156/B220
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
5.1.3 TEST PATTERN PRINTING (SP5-955-1)
1. Enter the SP mode and select SP5-955-1.

2. Enter the number for the test pattern that you want to print and press . (See
the tables below.)
3. Press Copy Window to open the copy window and then select the settings for
the test print (paper size, etc.)
4. Press Start to start the test print.
5. Press SP Mode (highlighted) to return to the SP mode display.
No. Test Pattern No. Test Pattern

None 1 dot Grid Pattern
0 23
(Reverse order of LD1/2 on)
1 Vertical Line (1-dot) 24 3 lines Grayscale
2 Horizontal Line (1-dot) 25 Horizontal Grayscale 1
3 Vertical Line (2-dot) 26 Vertical Grayscale 1
4 Horizontal Line (2 dot) 29 Horizontal Grayscale 2
5 1 dot Grid Pattern0 1 30 Vertical Grayscale 2
6 1 dot pair Grid Pattern 1 31 Horizontal Grayscale (600 dpi)
7 Alternating Dot Pattern (1 dot) 32 Vertical Grayscale (600 dpi)
8 Alternating Dot Pattern (2 dot) 35 Horizontal Grayscale with White Line 1
9 Full Dot Pattern 36 Vertical Grayscale with White Line 1
10 Black band 38 Horizontal Grayscale with White Line 2
11 Trimming Area (1 dot) 39 Vertical Grayscale with White Line 2
Trimming Area (2 dot) Horizontal Grayscale with White Line
12 40
(600 dpi)
Argyle Pattern (1 dot) Vertical Grayscale with White Line
13 41
(600 dpi)
14 Argyle Pattern (2 dot) 43 Blank image
15 Horizontal Cross Stitch 50 Vertical Cross Stitch
16 Checker Flag 51 2 beam
19 Alternating Dot Pattern (4 dot) 52 Trimming Area with Crossed Lines
1 dot Horizontal Line 1 dot Grid Pattern 2
20 53
1 dot Grid Pattern 1 dot pair Grid Pattern 2
21 54
1 dot pair Grid Pattern
22
After finishing your tests, reset SP 5-955-1 to 0.
B156/B220 5-100 SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
5.1.4 INPUT CHECK

Main Machine Input Check (SP5-803)
1. Enter the SP mode and select SP5-803.
2. Select an item that you want to check. A small box will be displayed on the SP
mode screen with a series of 0s and 1s.
The meaning of the display is as follows.
00000000
Bit 76543210
3. Check the status of each item against the corresponding bit numbers listed in
the table below.
SP5-803 Reading
Description
-XXX 0 1
1 Tray 1 Set Tray 1 set (standard tray) Set Not set
Tray 1 Paper End Tray 1 paper end sensor Paper is
2 Paper End
(standard tray) present
Tray 1 Paper Tray 1 paper near-end
3 Not near end Near end
Near End sensor (standard tray)
Tray 1 Paper Size Tray 1 paper size switch
4 (See table 1.)
(standard tray)
5 Tray 2 Set Tray 2 set (standard tray) Set Not set
Tray 2 Paper End Tray 2 paper end sensor Paper is
6 Paper End
(standard tray) present
Tray 2 Paper Tray 2 paper near-end
7 Not near end Near end
Service
Tables
Near End sensor (standard tray)
Tray 2 Paper Size Tray 2 paper size switch
8 (See table 1.)
(standard tray)
9 Registration Sensor Detected Not detected
10 Paper feed sensor 1 (Upper relay) Detected Not detected
11 Paper feed sensor 2 (Lower relay) Detected Not detected
12 Right Cover SW Closed Open
13 Exit Sensor Detected Not detected
14 Paper Overflow Full Not full
15 Exit Cover Switch Closed Open
16 Interchange Unit Set Set Not set
17 Interchange Exit Detected Not detected
18 By-pass Tray Set Not set Set
By-pass Paper End Paper is
19 Paper End
present
20 By-pass Paper Size (See table 2.)
21 Fusing Unit Set Set Not set
Fusing Exit Paper is
22 Paper End
present
23 Fusing Oil End Not End End
Fusing High
24 Detected Not detected
Temperature
Fuser Entrance Fusing entrance sensor
Sensor
SM 5-101 B156/B220
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SP5-803 Reading
Description
-XXX 0 1
PCU-Coil Paper Transfer belt sensor
Check
PPI-Level: Bit 0 High voltage power
supply unit
PPI-Level: Bit 1 High voltage power
supply unit
30 Toner End: M Toner end sensor: M Not end End
31 Toner End: C Toner end sensor: C Not end End
32 Toner End: Y Toner end sensor: Y Not end End
33 Toner End: K Toner end sensor: K Not end End
O/B Waste Toner OPC belt waste toner
38 Full Not full
Sensor sensor
O/B Waste Toner OPC belt waste toner
39 Set Not set
Switch bottle switch
40 Belt Mark Belt mark sensor Not detected Detected
T/B Waste Toner Transfer belt waste toner
42 Full Not full
Sensor sensor
T/B Waste Toner Transfer belt waste toner
43 Set Not set
Switch bottle switch
44 LD 5V Cover Interlock switch Closed Open
45 Left Cover Closed Open
46 Right Upper Cover Closed Open
47 Front Cover Closed Open
49 Main Motor Lock Main motor lock Locked Not locked
Paper Feed Motor Paper feed motor lock
50 Locked Not locked
Lock
51 Polygon Motor Lock Polygon motor lock Locked Not locked
52 1 Bin Set Set Not set
53 1 Bin Paper Sensor Detected Not detected
Dev. Motor 1: Lock Development motor for
black and cyan
Dev. Motor 2: Lock Development motor for
yellow and magenta
56 PSU-Fan Lock PSU fan motor lock Locked Not locked
57 Fuser-Fan lock Fusing fan motor lock Locked Not locked
60 Duplex Connection Duplex unit Not connected Connected
61 Bank 1 Connection 1st optional paper tray Not connected Connected
62 Bank 2 Connection 2nd optional paper tray Not connected Connected
63 Finisher Connection Finisher Connection Not connected Connected
64 Bridge Exit Sensor Detected Not detected
65 Bridge Relay Sensor Detected Not detected
66 Bridge Set Sensor Set Not set
67 Bridge Right Cover Closed Open
68 Bridge Left Cover Closed Open
Bank Upper Relay Relay Sensor 3 (optional
69 No paper Paper present
paper tray unit)
Bank Lower Relay Relay Sensor 4 (optional
70 No paper Paper present
paper tray unit)
Bank Cover 1 Right cover (vertical guide
71 Closed Open
switch)
B156/B220 5-102 SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SP5-803 Reading
Description
-XXX 0 1
Bank Cover 2 2nd optional tray: Right
72 cover (vertical guide Closed Open
switch)
73 Bank Tray 1 Set 1st optional tray: Set Not set Set
74 Bank Tray 2 Set 2nd optional tray: Set Not set Set
Bank Tray 1 Paper 1st optional tray: Paper
75 Not end End
End end
Bank Tray 2 Paper 2nd optional tray: Paper
76 Not end End
End end
77
Size size
(See table 3.)
78
Size size
79
Height height
(See table 4.)
80
Height height
81 Duplex Entrance Duplex: Entrance sensor Not detected Detected
82 Duplex Exit Duplex: Exit sensor Detected Not detected
83 Duplex Open Duplex unit open switch Closed Open
84 Duplex Cover Duplex cover sensor Open Closed
Scanner Home Scanner HP sensor
Position
87 Recycle Counter Mechanical Counter Set Set Not set
88 Counter Set Set Not set
89 Key Counter Set Set Not set
Shift Tray Home
Position Sensor
Service
Tables
91 Platen Cover Sensor Detected Not detected
SM 5-103 B156/B220
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Table 1: Tray 1 and 2 Paper Size

Switch North America Europe/Asia Value
1000 81/2" x 11" SEF 81/2" x 11" SEF 00001110
1001 B5 SEF B5 SEF 00000110
1010 51/2" x 81/2" LEF A5 LEF 00001010
1011 11" x 17" SEF A3 SEF 00000010
1100 A4 SEF A4 SEF 00001100
1101 B5 LEF B5 LEF 00000100
1110 81/2" x 11" LEF A4 LEF 00001000
1111 81/2" x 14" SEF B4 SEF 00000000
0: pushed
1: not pushed
Table 2: By-pass Tray Paper Size

Paper Width Value Paper Width Value
A3/11"/12" 01110000 B5/8" 10010000
B4 00110000 A5/5.5" 11010000
A4/8.5" 10110000 B6 11000000
Table 3: Optional Paper Tray Unit Paper Size

Size North America Europe/Asia Code
A3 SEF Detected Detected 10000100
B4 SEF None Detected 10001101
A4 SEF None Detected 10000101
A4 LEF Detected Detected 00000101
B5 LEF Detected Detected 00001110
A5 LEF None Detected 00000110
DLT SEF Detected Detected 10100000
LG SEF Detected None 10001101
LT SEF Detected None 10000101
LT LEF Detected Detected 00100110
HLT LEF Detected None 00000110
Table 4: Optional Paper Tray Unit Paper Near End

Remaining paper Paper height sensor 2 Paper height sensor 1 Code
Full ON ON 11111111
Nearly full OFF ON 11111110
On OFF 11111101
Near end OFF OFF 11111100
B156/B220 5-104 SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
ARDF Input Check (SP6-007)

2. Enter the number (1 11) for the item that you want to check. A small box will
be displayed on the SP mode screen with a series of 0s and 1s, as shown
below. However, only bit 0 at the right side of the screen is valid.
00000000
Bit 76543210
3. Check the status of bit 0 for the required item listed in the table below.
B156S505.WMF
Reading
No. Description
0 1
Service
1 Original set sensor Paper not detected Paper detected
Tables
2 Original width sensor 1 (W1) Paper not detected Paper detected
3 Original width sensor 2 (W2) Paper not detected Paper detected
4 Original length sensor 1 (L1) Paper not detected Paper detected
5 Original length sensor 2 (L2) Paper not detected Paper detected
6 Original trailing edge sensor Paper not detected Paper detected
7 ADF cover sensor Cover closed Cover opened
8 DF position sensor ADF closed ADF opened
9 Registration sensor Paper not detected Paper detected
10 Exit sensor Paper not detected Paper detected
11 Inverter sensor (Original reverse) Paper not detected Paper detected
SM 5-105 B156/B220
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Finisher Input Check (SP6-117)

2. Enter the number (1 113) for the item that you want to check. A small box will
be displayed on the SP mode screen with a series of 0s and 1s, as shown
below. However, only bit ) at the right side of the screen is valid.
00000000
Bit 76543210
3. Check the status of each item against the corresponding bit numbers listed in
the table below.
Reading
No. Description
0 1
1 Entrance Sensor Activated Deactivated
2 Tray Exit Sensor Activated Deactivated
4 Staple Entrance Sensor Activated Deactivated
5 Stapler Home Position Sensor Activated Deactivated
6 Jogger Fence Home Position Sensor Activated Deactivated
8 Feed-out Belt Home Position Sensor Activated Deactivated
9 Stapler Tray Paper Activated Deactivated
10 Stapler Rotation Home Position Activated Deactivated
11 Staple Sensor Activated Deactivated
14 Staple Sheet Sensor Activated Deactivated
17 Exit Plate Home Position Sensor Activated Deactivated
18 Tray Shift Home Position Sensor Activated Deactivated
21 Stack Height Sensor Activated Deactivated
23 Tray Lower Limit Sensor Activated Deactivated
35 Paper Limit Activated Deactivated
101 500 Fin Entrance Sensor Activated Deactivated
102 500 Fin Exit Sensor Activated Deactivated
103 500 Fin Jogger Home Position Sensor Activated Deactivated
104 500 Fin Top Cover Sensor Closed Opened
105 500 Fin Height Sensor Activated Deactivated
106 500 Fin Lever Sensor Activated Deactivated
107 500 Fin Upper Limit Sensor Activated Deactivated
108 500 Fin Near Limit Sensor Activated Deactivated
109 500 Fin Staple Cover Sensor Closed Opened
110 500 Fin Stapler Home Position Sensor Activated Deactivated
111 500 Fin Staple End Sensor Activated Deactivated
112 500 Fin Staple Sensor Activated Deactivated
113 500 Fin Stapler Lock Sensor Locked Not Locked
B156/B220 5-106 SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
5.1.5 OUTPUT CHECK

NOTE: Motors keep turning in this mode regardless of upper or lower limit sensor
signals. To prevent mechanical or electrical damage, do not keep an
electrical component on for a long time.
Main Machine Output Check (SP5-804)

1. Open SP5-804.
2. Select the SP number that corresponds to the component you wish to check.
(Refer to the table below.)
3. Touch ON to test the selected item. Press OFF to end the test.
NOTE: You cannot exit and close this display until you touch OFF to switch off
the output check currently executing. Do not keep an electrical
component switched ON for a long time.
Service
Tables
B156S505.WMF
Output Check Table
SP5-804
Description
-XXX
1 Feed Mot: 89 mm/s Paper feed motor: 89 mm/s
5 Upper Paper Feed Tray 1 paper feed clutch
Clutch
6 Lower Paper Feed Tray 2 paper feed clutch
Clutch
7 Upper Relay Roller Tray 1 vertical transport clutch
Clutch
8 Lower Relay Roller Tray 2 vertical transport clutch
Clutch
9 Transfer Motor: Half Main motor: 178 mm/s
Speed
SM 5-107 B156/B220
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SP5-804
Description
-XXX
10 Transfer Motor: Low Main motor: 89 mm/s
Speed
11 Regist Clutch Registration clutch
12 Interchange Upper Interchange Junction Gate Solenoid 1
Gate
13 Interchange Lower Interchange Junction Gate Solenoid 2
Gate
14 By-pass Feed Clutch By-pass paper feed clutch
15 By-pass Pick-Up By-pass pick-up solenoid
Solenoid
16 Development Clutch: M Development clutch: M
17 Development Clutch: C Development clutch: C
18 Development Clutch: Y Development clutch: Y
19 Development Clutch: K Development clutch: K
24 Lubricant Clutch OPC belt cleaning clutch
25 Main Motor (Forward) Main motor: Regular Speed
26 Main Motor Half Speed Main motor: Half Speed
(Forward)
27 Main Motor (Reverse) Main motor: Reverse
28 Main Motor Half Speed Main motor: Reverse Half Speed
(Reverse)
29 Polygon Motor Polygon motor
30 LD On LD
31 Polygon Motor + LD Polygon Motor + LD
32 Transfer 2nd Solenoid Paper Transfer Solenoid
33 T/B Cleaning Clutch Image transfer belt cleaning clutch
34 T/B Cleaning Solenoid Image transfer belt cleaning contact solenoid
40 Engine Ready Signal Engine Ready Signal
41 ID sensor LED
42 QL Quenching Lamp
43 Toner End Led Toner End LED
44 Charger Bias Charge corona unit output
45 Development Bias 1 Development Bias: 1
46 Development Bias 2 Development Bias: 2
47 Belt Transfer Image transfer power supply
48 Paper Transfer: + Paper transfer bias: +
49 Paper Transfer: Paper transfer bias:
50 T/B Cleaning: + Image transfer belt cleaning bias: +
51 Discharge Discharge plate power supply
53 Fuser Main Relay Fusing Main Relay
54 Fusing Bias Fusing Bias
55 Scanner Lamp
56 Development Motor 1 Development motor for black and cyan (Forward)
(Fwd)
57 Development Motor 1 Development motor for black and cyan: High Speed
High Sped (Fwd) (Forward)
58 Development Motor 1 Development motor for black and cyan (Reverse)
(Rev)
B156/B220 5-108 SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SP5-804
Description
-XXX
59 Development Motor 1 Development motor for black and cyan: High Speed
High Speed (Rev) (Reverse)
60 Development Motor 2 Development motor for yellow and magenta:
(Fwd) (Forward)
High Sped (Fwd) High Speed (Forward)
62 Development Motor 2 Development motor for yellow and magenta
(Rev) (Reverse)
High Speed (Rev) High Speed (Reverse)
100 Bank Upper Feed Cl 1st paper feed clutch (optional paper tray unit)
101 Bank Lower Feed Cl 2nd paper feed clutch (optional paper tray unit)
102 Bank Feed Motor: L 1st paper feed motor (optional paper tray unit)
103 Bank Feed Motor: H 1st Paper feed motor half speed (optional paper tray
unit)
110 Shift Tray Motor: CW Shift Tray Motor continuous clockwise
111 Shift Tray Motor: CCW Shift Tray Motor continuous counter-clockwise
112 Shift Tray Motor: Run Shift Tray Motor shifts once
120 Duplex Reverse Motor Duplex: Inverter motor
(Forward)
121 Duplex Reverse Motor Duplex: Inverter motor reverse
(Reverse)
122 Duplex Feed Motor Duplex: Transport motor
(Forward)
123 Duplex Feed Motor Duplex: Transport motor reverse
(Reverse)
124 Duplex Solenoid Duplex: Inverter gate solenoid
Service
Tables
125 Duplex Free Run Duplex: Free run
130 Bridge Motor: H
131 Bridge Motor: L
132 Bridge Gate Sol
140 Fusing Fan: H
141 Fusing Fan: L
142 Dev Fan: H Development Fan Motor: H
143 Dev. Fan: L Development Fan Motor: L
144 Cooling Fan: H Controller Fan Motor: H
145 Cooling Fan: L Controller Fan Motor: L
146 Ozone Fan: Hi
147 Ozone Fan: Low
148 Scanner Fan: Hi
149 Scanner Fan: Low
160 Bridge Cooling Fan: H
161 Bridge Cooling Fan: L
162 PSU Fan
SM 5-109 B156/B220
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
ARDF Output Check (SP6-008)

1. Open SP6-008.
3. Touch ON to test the selected item. To end the test, touch OFF. You cannot
exit and close this display until you touch OFF to switch off the output check
currently executing.
No. Description
1 Feed Motor (Forward)
2 Feed Motor (Reverse)
3 Transport Motor (Forward)
4 Feed Clutch
5 Pick-up Solenoid
6 Junction Gate Solenoid
7 Stamp Solenoid
Finisher Output Check (SP6-118)

1. Open SP6-118.
3. Touch ON to test the selected item. To end the test, touch OFF. You cannot
exit and close this display until you touch OFF to switch off the output check
currently executing.
Description Description
No. No.
1000-sheet finisher 500-sheet finisher
1 Fin All Off 101 500 Fin All Off
2 Upper Transfer Motor 102 500 Fin Main Motor
3 Lower Transfer Motor 103 500 Fin Jogger Motor
4 Exit Motor 104 500 Fin Paddle Sol
5 Tray Gate Sol 105 500 Fin Gear Sol
6 Tray Lift Motor 106 500 Fin Lever Sol
7 Jogger Motor 107 500 Fin Tray Motor
12 Stapler Motor 108 500 Fin Stapler Motor
13 Staple Hummer 109 500 Fin Free Run 1
15 Stapler Gate Sol 110 500 Fin Free Run 2
16 Pos. Roller Sol
18 Feed-out Motor
19 Shift Motor
22 Guide Plate Motor
23 Fin Free Run 1
24 Fin Free Run 2
B156/B220 5-110 SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
5.1.6 SMC DATA LISTS (SP5-990)
1. Open SP mode 5-990 and select the number corresponding to the list that you
wish to print.
SMC (System Parameter and Data Lists)
1 All Data List
2 SP Mode Data List
3 User Program
4 Logging Data
5 Self-Diagnostic Report
6 Non-Default
7 NIB summary
8 Capture Log (Jobs to be printed from the document server using
a PC and the Desk Top Binder software)
21 Copier User Program
22 Scanner SP
23 Scanner User Program
2. Touch EXECUTE on the touch panel

3. Operate according to the instructions on the display.
4. Check that the completion message appears, and touch Exit.
5.1.7 ORIGINAL JAM HISTORY DISPLAY
Service
Tables
Total Count
SP7-503 displays the number of original jams having occurred in the optional
ARDF.
Details on the Most Recent Jams

SP7-508 displays the detailed information on the latest 10 original jams having
occurred in the optional ARDF.
SP7-508-
1 Latest Information on the latest original jam
2 Latest 1 Information on the 2nd latest original jam
3 Latest 2 Information on the 3rd latest original jam
: : :
: : :
8 Latest 7 Information on the 8th latest original jam
SM 5-111 B156/B220
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
5.1.8 COPY JAM HISTORY DISPLAY

Total Count
SP7-502 displays the number of copy paper jams having occurred in all paper
paths.
Details on the Most Recent Jams

SP7-507 displays the detailed information on the latest 10 copy paper jams having
occurred in all paper paths.
SP7-507-
1 Latest Information on the latest paper jam
2 Latest 1 Information on the 2nd latest paper jam
3 Latest 2 Information on the 3rd latest paper jam
: : :
: : :
8 Latest 7 Information on the 8th latest paper jam
B156/B220 5-112 SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
5.1.9 MEMORY ALL CLEAR (SP5-801)

Executing Memory All Clear resets all the settings stored in the NVRAM to their
default settings except the following:
SP8-381 to -387
SP8-391 and -411
Counter values
SP8-491 to -493 and -496
SP8-581 to -584 and -586
SP5-811 Machine serial number
Plug & play brand name and
SP5-907
production name setting
Normally, this SP mode should not be used. This procedure is necessary only after
replacing the NVRAM, or when the copier malfunctions because the NVRAM is
damaged.
Using an SD card
1. Upload the NVRAM data to an SD card ( 5.4.2 NVRAM Data Upload).
2. Print out all SMC data lists (SP5-990).
NOTE: Be sure to print out all the lists. If the NVRAM data upload is not
completed, it is necessary to manually change the SP mode settings.
3. Open SP5-801.
4. Press the number for the item that you want to initialize. The number you select
determines which application software is initialized. Touch 1, for example, if you
want to initialize all modules; or select the appropriate number from the table
Service
Tables
below.
No. What It Initializes Comments
1 All Clear Initializes items 2 ~ 15 below.
2 Engine Clear Initializes all registration settings for the engine and
process settings.
3 SCS (System Control Initializes default system settings, CSS settings,
Service) operation display coordinates, and ROM update
information.
4 IMH (Image Memory Initializes the registration setting for the image
handler) Memory Clear memory handler. (Deletes all image files in the
HDD).
5 MCS (Memory Control Initializes the automatic delete time setting for
Service) stored documents.
6 Copier Application Initializes all copier application settings.
7 Fax Application Initializes the fax reset time, job login ID, all TX/RX
settings, local storage file numbers, and off-hook
timer.
8 Printer Application Initializes the printer defaults, programs registered,
the printer SP bit switches, and the printer CSS
counter.
9 Scanner Application Initializes the scanner defaults for the scanner and
all the scanner SP modes.
SM 5-113 B156/B220
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
No. What It Initializes Comments

10 Web Service/Network Deletes the network file application management
Application files and thumbnails, and initializes the job login ID.
11 NCS Initializes the system defaults and interface settings
(Network Control Service) (IP addresses also), SmartNetMonitor for Admin,
WebStatusMonitor settings, and the TELNET
settings.
12 R-FAX Initializes the job login ID, SmartNetMonitor for
Admin, job history, and local storage file numbers.
14 Clear DCS Setting Initializes the DCS (Delivery & Receive Control Server)
settings
15 Clear UCS Setting Initializes the UCS (User Directory Control Server)
settings.
16 MIRS Setting Initializes the MIRS (Machine Information Report
Service) settings.
17 CCS Initializes the CCS (Certification and Charge-control
Service) settings.
5. Touch EXECUTE, and turn the main switch off and on.
6. Download the NVRAM data from an SD card ( 5.4.2).
Without Using a Flash Memory Card

If there is no SD card, follow the steps below.
1. Execute SP5-990 to print out all SMC data lists.
2. Open SP5-801.
3. Select the number for the item that you want to initialize.
4. Press EXECUTE and turn the main switch off and on.
5. Make sure that you do the following:
Do the printer and scanner registration and magnification adjustments
( 3.12 Copy Adjustments).
Do the touch screen calibration ( 3.15 Touch Screen Calibration").
Referring to the SMC data lists, re-enter all values that have been changed
from their factory settings.
Do the white level adjustment ( Section 3.14 "Scanner White Level
Adjustment")
6. Check the copy quality and the paper paths, and do any necessary
adjustments.
B156/B220 5-114 SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PRINTER SERVICE MODE
5.2 PRINTER SERVICE MODE

5.2.1 SERVICE MODE TABLE
Service Table Key

Notation What it means
[range / default / step] Example: [-9 ~ +9 / +3.0 / 0.1 mm step]. The setting can be
adjusted in the range 9, value reset to +3.0 after an NVRAM
reset, and the value can be changed in 0.1 mm steps with each
key press.
italics Comments added for your reference.
* This value is stored in NVRAM. After a RAM reset, the default
value (factory setting) is restored.
DFU Denotes Design or Factory Use. Do not change this value
SP1 Mode Number Function / [Setting]

001 Bit Switch
1 Bit Switch 1 Settings Adjusts bit switch settings.
2 Bit Switch 2 Settings Note: Currently the bit switches are not being used.
3 Bit Switch 3 Settings
Service
Tables
003 Clear Setting
1 Initialize Printer System Initializes settings in the System menu of the user
mode.
3 Delete Program DFU

004 Print Summary
Print Printer Summary Prints the printer summary sheet
(An error log is printed in addition to the
configuration page).
005 Display Version

Displays the version of the controller firmware.
006 Sample/ Locked Print

0:Link with Doc. Srv [0 ~ 1 / 0 / 1 /step]
1:Enable
101 Data Recall
1 Factory Recalls a set of gamma settings.
2 Previous
3 Current
4 ACC
SM 5-115 B156/B220
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SP1 Mode Number Function / [Setting]

102 Resolution Settings
Toner Control Mode Selects the printing mode (resolution) for the printer
Selection gamma adjustment.
1800x600 Photo
1800x600 Text
1800x600 Graph
600x600 Photo
600x600 Text
103 Test Page
1 Color Gray Scale Prints the Color Calibration Test Sheet or Color Test
Pattern to check the color balance before and after
2 Color Pattern
toner control adjustment (gamma adjustment).
For toner control adjustment, see SP1-104 and
SP1-105.
104 Gamma Adjustment
1 Black: Highlight Adjusts the printer gamma for the mode selected in
2 Black: Shadow the Mode Selection menu.
3 Black: Middle [0 ~ 30 / 15 / 1/step ]
4 Black: IDmax For the Color Calibration Test Sheet and Color Test
21 Cyan: Highlight Pattern, see SP1-103. For saving adjusted values,
22 Cyan: Shadow see SP1-105.
23 Cyan: Middle
24 Cyan: IDmax
41 Magenta: Highlight
42 Magenta: Shadow
43 Magenta: Middle
44 Magenta: IDmax
61 Yellow: Highlight
62 Yellow: Shadow
63 Yellow: Middle
64 Yellow: IDmax
105 Save Tone Control Value
Save Tone Control Stores the print gamma adjusted with the Gamma
Value Adj. menu item as the current setting. Before the
machine stores the new current setting, it moves
the data currently stored as the current setting to
the previous setting memory storage location.
106 Toner Limit
1 Toner Limit Photo Adjusts the maximum toner amount for image
development.
[100 400 / 260 / 1%/step]
2 Toner Limit Text [100 400 / 260 / 1%/step]
B156/B220 5-116 SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
5.2.2 SP MODES RELATED TO THE PRINTER CONTROLLER

The following SP modes are located in the copier SP mode.
Section 5.1.
SP No. Description Function and Setting

5104 A3/DLT Double Specifies whether the counter is doubled for A3/DLT.
Count 0: No, 1: Yes, 2: Yes except By-pass
If Yes is selected, the total counter and the current user
code counter count up twice when A3 or DLT paper is
used.
NOTE: Contact your supervisor if you wish to change this
SP.
5801 Memory All Clear Resets data for process control and all software counters,
and returns all modes and adjustments to their defaults
values.
5907 Plug & Play Selects the brand name and the production name for
Windows Plug & Play. This information is stored in
NVRAM.
7832 Self-Diagnose Displays the controller self-diagnostic result.
Result Display
Service
Tables
SM 5-117 B156/B220
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SCANNER SERVICE MODE
5.3 SCANNER SERVICE MODE

5.3.1 SCANNER PROGRAM MODE TABLE
SP1-XXX (System and Others)
Mode No.
1 (Class 1, 2, and 3)
Function / [Setting]
004 [Compression Type]
Compression Type Selects the compression type for binary picture
processing.
[ 1 to 3 / 1 / 1/step ]
1: MH, 2: MR, 3: MMR
005 [Erase margin (Remote scan)]
Erase Margin Creates an erase margin for all edges of the scanned
image.
If the machine has scanned the edge of the original,
create a margin.
[0 to 5 / 0 / 1 mm/step]
009 Remote scan disable
0: enable 1: disable [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 /step]
Remote scan: Network TWAIN scanner
SP2-XXX (Scanning-image quality)

Mode Number
2 (Class 1, 2, and 3)
Function / [Setting]
021 [Compression ratio of gray-scale]
1 Compression ratio Selects the compression ratio for grayscale processing
(Normal image) mode (JPEG) for the three settings that can be
selected at the operation panel.
[ 5 to 95 / 40 / 1 /step ]
5: lowest compression ratio,
95: highest compression ratio
2 Compression ratio [ 5 to 95 / 50 / 1 /step ]
(High-comp image)
(Low-comp image)
(High Lv2-comp image)
(Low Lv2-comp image)
B156/B220 5-118 SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SCANNER SERVICE MODE
5.3.2 APS OUTPUT DISPLAY (SP4-301)

SP4-301 displays a code that indicates the current status of the APS sensors. The
table lists the codes and the activated sensors.
L1 L2 L3
W1
W2
B156S540.WMF
Sensors
Code
W1 W2 L1 L2 L3
5 P P
132 P P P P P
165 P P P
133 P P
Service
Tables
128 Other combinations
P: Activated
: Deactivated
SM 5-119 B156/B220
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PROGRAM DOWNLOAD
5.4 PROGRAM DOWNLOAD

5.4.1 FIRMWARE
The procedure is the same for all firmware modules.
NOTE: If you will change scanner firmware, print 5-990-22 and -23 (SMC reports
for scanner settings) before you start this procedure.
1. Turn off the main power switch.

2. Remove the cover [A] ( x 1).
3. Insert the SD card [B] containing
the software you wish to
download into SD card slot 3.
4. Open the front cover.
5. Turn on the main power.
6. Follow the instructions displayed [B]
on the operation panel
7. Monitor the downloading status [A]
on the operation panel.
While downloading is in
progress, the panel displays B156I451.WMF
Writing. When downloading has been completed, the panel displays

Completed.
The Start key lights red while downloading is in progress, and then lights
green again after downloading is completed. (only for "Operation Panel"
downloading)
CAUTION
Never switch off the power while downloading. Switching off the power while the
new software is being downloading will damage the boot files in the controller.
8. After confirming that downloading is completed, turn off the main power and
remove the SD card.
9. If more software needs to be downloaded, repeat steps 1 to 7.
10. Turn the main power on and confirm that the new software loads and that the
machine starts normally.
11. After installing new scanner firmware, perform copier SP5-801-9 (Memory All
Clear Scanner Application). Then input scanner settings that are different
from the defaults (see the SMC prints of 5-990-22 and -23 that you made
earlier).
NOTE: If the download failed, an error message appears on the panel. In this case,
download the firmware again using the SD card.
In this condition, if the firmware cannot be downloaded again, do the
following:
B156/B220 5-120 SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PROGRAM DOWNLOAD
Controller firmware: Turn on dip switch 1 on the controller board, and

switch on. The machine boots from the SD card. Download the new
firmware.
Others: Replace the appropriate PCB.
Service
Tables
SM 5-121 B156/B220
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PROGRAM DOWNLOAD
5.4.2 NVRAM DATA UPLOAD/DOWNLOAD

The content of the NVRAM can be uploaded to and downloaded from an SD card.
The following data (related to the accounting counter) are not uploaded from
NVRAM to the SD card:
SP8-381 to -387
SP8-391 and -411
SP8-491 to -493 and -496
SP8-581 to -584 and -586
Uploading NVRAM Data (SP5-824)

The data in the NVRAM in the machine can be uploaded to an SD memory card.
1. Turn off the main switch.

2. Remove the cover [A].
3. Insert the SD card [B] into SD card [Slot 3]
slot 3 (lower slot).
[Slot 2]
5. Open SP5-824.
6. Touch EXECUTE to start
uploading the NVRAM data. [B]
7. Turn off the main switch, and then
remove the SD card. [A]
B156I451.WMF
B156/B220 5-122 SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PROGRAM DOWNLOAD
Downloading NVRAM Data (SP5-825)

SP5-825 downloads data from an SD card to the NVRAM inside the machine.
[Slot 1]
1. Turn off the main switch.
2. Remove the cover [A] ( x 1). [Slot 2]
3. Insert the SD card [B] into SD card [Slot 3]
slot 3 (lower slot).
8. Open SP5-825.
5. Touch EXECUTE to start [B]
download the NVRAM data.
6. Turn off the main switch, and then
remove the SD card.
[A]
B156I451.WMF
Note that the following errors may occur during downloading:

If an SD card is not installed in the SD card slot and a message tells you that
downloading cannot proceed, you cannot execute downloading, even by
pressing EXECUTE.
If the correct card for the NVRAM data is not inserted in the card slot, after you
Service
Tables
press EXECUTE a message will tell you that downloading cannot proceed
because the card is abnormal and the execution halts.
SM 5-123 B156/B220
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SOFTWARE RESET
5.5 SOFTWARE RESET

The software can be rebooted when the machine hangs up. Use either of the
following procedures.
Procedure 1
1. Turn the main power switch off and on.
2. Check that Now loading. Please wait is displayed and that the copy window
opens.
Procedure 2
1. Press and hold down the and keys together until the machine beeps (for
about 10 seconds).
2. Release both buttons.
3. Check that Now loading. Please wait is displayed and that the copy window
opens.
5.6 SYSTEM SETTINGS AND COPY SETTING RESET

5.6.1 SYSTEM SETTING RESET
To reset the system settings in the UP mode to their defaults. Use the following
procedure.
1. Press the User Tools/Counter key ().
2. Hold down the key and touch System Settings.
NOTE: Hold down the key before touching System Settings.
B156S503.WMF
3. When the display asks if you want to reset the system settings, touch Yes.
B156/B220 5-124 SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SYSTEM SETTINGS AND COPY SETTING RESET
5.6.2 COPIER SETTING RESET

To reset the copy settings in the UP mode to their defaults, use the following
procedure.
1. Press the User Tools/Counter key ().
2. Hold down the key and then touch Copier/Document Server Features.
NOTE: Hold down the key before touching Copier/Document Server
Features.
B156S504.WMF
3. When the display asks if you want to reset the Copier Document Server
settings, touch Yes.
Service
Tables
SM 5-125 B156/B220
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
USER TOOLS
5.7 USER TOOLS

The user program (UP) mode can be accessed by users and operators, and by
sales and service staff. UP mode is used to input the copiers default settings. The
user can reset the default settings at any time.
5.7.1 HOW TO ENTER USER TOOLS

UP Mode Initial Screen: User Tools/Counter Display
To enter the UP mode, press the User Tools/Counter key ().
System Settings
In the User Tools/Counter display, touch System Settings.
Touch a tab to display the settings. If the Next button is lit in the lower right corner,
touch it to display more options. Specify the settings, touch Exit to return to the
User Tools/Counter display, and then touch Exit to return to the copy window.
Copier/Document Server Features

In the User/Tools Counter display, touch Copy/Document Server Settings.
Click a tab to display the settings. If the Next button is lit in the lower right corner,
press it to display more options. Perform the settings, press Exit to return to the
User Tools/Counter display, and then press Exit to return to the copy window.
Printer, Facsimile, Scanner Settings

In the User/Tools Counter display, touch Printer Settings, Facsimile, or Scanner
Settings to open the appropriate screen and then touch the tab to display more
settings. The screen below shows the Printer Features screen.
Inquiry
In the User/Tools Counter display, touch Inquiry.
The following SP mode settings will be displayed.
Service Telephone Number (SP5-812-1)
Service Facsimile Number (SP5-812-2)
Telephone Number for ordering consumables (SP5-812-3)
Sales Telephone Number (SP5-812-4)
Toner Type (SP5-841-1~4)
B156/B220 5-126 SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Rev. 11/2005 DIP SWITCHES
Counter
In the User/Tools Counter display, touch Counter.
The total counters will be displayed.
View the settings, touch Print Counter Exit to return to the User Tools/Counter
display, and then touch Exit to return to the copy window.
5.8 DIP SWITCHES

Controller Board: SW2
DIP SW No. OFF ON
1 Boot-up from SD card
Default: OFF DFU
Default: Boot-up from Machine
2 to 7
8 Default: ON DFU
If the controller firmware download attempt failed, you must boot the machine from
the SD card. To do this, set DIP SW 1 on the controller board to OFF.
BICU Board: SW2

DIP
SW Function Settings
No.
1
2
Not used Default: ON DFU
Off: Off: Off: On: On: Off:
Service
3 Destination Off: JAN On: NA Off: EU On: AA Off: TWN On: CHN
Tables
4 Off: Off: On: Off: Off: On:
5 Not used Default: OFF DFU
6 Debug Default: OFF DFU
Mode
JAN: Japan, NA: North America, EU: Europe, AA: Asia, TWN: Taiwan, CHN: China
SM 5-127 B156/B220
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SD CARD APPLICATION MOVE
5.9 SD CARD APPLICATION MOVE

Overview
The service program SD Card Appli Move (SP5873) copies application programs
from one SD card to a different card.
The machine has three SD card slots. Slots 1 and 2 are used for application
programs, and Slot 3 is used for servicing only.
Three SD cards cannot be used at the same time for applications. If the customer
must use more than two SD cards, more than one application can be stored on the
same SD card.
Important
The data necessary for authentication is transferred with the application program
to the target SD card.
Always use a new SD card. Do not use the SD card if it was previously used with
a computer. Correct operation is not guaranteed if this type of SD card is used.
Keep the SD card in a safe place after you copy the application program from the
card to another card. The SD card is the only evidence that the customer is
licensed to use the application program, and the CE may need to check the SD
card and its data to solve a problem in the future.
Licensing does not let you copy PostScript data or DOSS data to a different SD
card. But, you can copy an application from an SD card to an SD card that holds
PostScript data.
If an SD card was used to combine applications on that card, that SD card
cannot be used for a different function.
B156/B220 5-128 SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SD CARD APPLICATION MOVE
Move Exec
Do this procedure to move an application from one SD card to another.
1. Turn the main switch off.
2. Put the destination SD card in SD Card Slot 1 (upper slot).
3. Put the source SD card into SD Card Slot 3 (lower slot). This SD card holds the
application program that you want to copy to the destination SD card in Slot 1.
4. Turn the main switch on.
5. Go into the SP mode.
6. Do SP5873-001 Move Exec.
7. Follow the messages on the operation panel to complete the procedure.
9. Remove the SD card from SD Card Slot 3.
11. Check that the application programs combined on the SD card in Slot 1 operate
correctly.
Undo Exec
Do this procedure to repair the original source SD card if you accidentally move the
application to a different SD card.
Service
Tables
2. Put the original source SD card in SD Card Slot 3 (lower slot). The application
program is copied back into this card.
3. Put the original destination SD card (with the stored application program that
you want to return to the original source SD card in Slot 3) in SD card Slot 1
(upper slot).
5. Go into the SP mode and do SP5873-002 (Undo Exec)
6. Obey the messages on the operation panel to complete the procedure.
8. Remove the SD card from SD card Slot 3.
10. Check that the application programs run correctly.
SM 5-129 B156/B220
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
USING THE DEBUG LOG
5.10 USING THE DEBUG LOG

This machine provides a Save Debug Log feature that allows the Customer
Engineer to save and retrieve error information for analysis.
Every time an error occurs, debug information is recorded in volatile memory but
this information is lost when the machine is switched off and on.
To capture this debug information, the Save Debug Log feature provides two main
features:
Switching on the debug feature so error information is saved directly to the HDD
for later retrieval.
Copying the error information from the HDD to an SD card.
When a user is experiencing problems with the machine, follow the procedure
below to set up the machine so the error information is saved automatically to the
HDD. Then ask the user to reproduce the problem.
5.10.1 SWITCHING ON AND SETTING UP SAVE DEBUG LOG

The debug information cannot be saved until the Save Debug Log function has
been switched on and a target has been selected.
1. Enter the SP mode and switch the Save Debug Log feature on.
Press then use the 10-key pad to enter .
Press and hold down for more than 3 seconds.
Touch Copy SP.
On the LCD panel, open SP5857.
2. Under 5857 Save Debug Log, touch 1 On/Off.
COPY : SP-5-857-001
Save Debug Log
On/Off (1:ON 0:OFF)
_1_
Initial 0
3. On the control panel keypad, press 1 then press . This switches the Save
Debug Log feature on.
NOTE: The default setting is 0 (OFF). This feature must be switched on in
order for the debug information to be saved.
B156/B220 5-130 SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
USING THE DEBUG LOG
4. Next, select the target destination where the debug information will be saved.
Under 5857 Save Debug Log, touch 2 Target, enter 2 with the operation
panel key to select the hard disk as the target destination, then press .
COPY : SP-5-857-002
Save Debug Log
Target (2:HDD 3:SD)
_2_
Initial 2
NOTE: Select 3 SD Card to save the debug information directly to the SD

card if it is inserted in the service slot.
5. Now touch 5858 and specify the events that you want to record in the debug
log. SP5858 (Debug Save When) provides the following items for selection.
Saves data when an engine-related
1 Engine SC Error
SC code is generated.
Saves debug data when a controller-
2 Controller SC Error
related SC Code is generated.
Saves data only for the SC code that
3 Any SC Error
you specify by entering code number.
4 Jam Saves data for jams.
NOTE: More than one event can be selected.
Example 1: To Select Items 1, 2, 4
Touch the appropriate items(s). Press ON for each selection. This example
shows Engine SC Error selected.
COPY : SP-5-858-001
Service
Tables
Debug Save When
Engine SC Error
__ OFF __ __ ON __
Example 2: To Specify an SC Code

Touch 3 Any SC Error, enter the 3-digit SC code number with the control
panel number keys, then press . This example shows an entry for SC670.
COPY : SP-5-858-003
Debug Save When
Any SC Error
__670
NOTE: For details about SC code numbers, please refer to the SC tables in
Section 4. Troubleshooting.
SM 5-131 B156/B220
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
USING THE DEBUG LOG
6. Next, select the one or more memory modules for reading and recording debug
information. Touch 5859.
Under 5859 press the appropriate key item for the module that you want to
record.
Enter the appropriate 4-digit number, then press .
NOTE: Refer to the two tables below for the 4-digit numbers to enter for each
key.
The example below shows Key 1 with 2222 entered.
COPY : SP-5-859-001
Debug Save Key No.
Key 1
___2222
The following keys can be set with the corresponding numbers. (The initials in
parentheses indicate the names of the modules.)
4-Digit Entries for Keys 1 to 10

KEY NO. COPY PRINTER SCANNER WEB
1 2222 (SCS)
2 2223 (SRM)
3 256 (IMH)
4 1000 (ECS)
5 1025 (MCS)
6 4848 (COPY) 4400 (GPS) 5375 (Scan) 5682 (NFA)
7 2224 (BCU) 4500 (PDL) 5682 (NFA) 6600 (WebDB)
8 4600 (GPS-PM) 3000 (NCS) 3300 (PTS)
9 2000 (NCS) 2000 (NCS) 6666 (WebSys)
10 2224 (BCU) 2000 (NCS)
NOTE: The default settings for Keys 1 to 10 are all zero (0).
Key to Acronyms
Acronym Meaning Acronym Meaning
ECS Engine Control Service NFA Net File Application
GPS GW Print Service PDL Printer Design Language
GSP-PM GW Print Service Print Module PTS Print Server
IMH Image Memory Handler SCS System Control Service
MCS Memory Control Service SRM System Resource
Management
NCS Network Control Service WebDB Web Document Box
(Document Server)
The machine is now set to record the debugging information automatically on

the HDD (the target selected with SP5857-002) for the events that you selected
SP5858 and the memory modules selected with SP5859.
B156/B220 5-132 SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
USING THE DEBUG LOG
Please keep the following important points in mind when you are doing this setting:
Note that the number entries for Keys 1 to 5 are the same for the Copy, Printer,
Scanner, and Web memory modules.
The initial settings are all zero.
These settings remain in effect until you change them. Be sure to check all the
settings, especially the settings for Keys 6 to 10. To switch off a key setting,
enter a zero for that key.
You can select any number of keys from 1 to 10 (or all) by entering the
corresponding 4-digit numbers from the table.
You cannot mix settings for the groups (COPY, PRINTER, etc.) for 006~010. For
example, if you want to create a PRINTER debug log you must select the
settings from the 9 available selections for the PRINTER column only.
One area of the disk is reserved to store the debug log. The size of this area is
limited to 4 MB.
5.10.2 RETRIEVING THE DEBUG LOG FROM THE HDD

Retrieve the debug log by copying it from the hard disk to an SD card.
1. Insert the SD card into the service slot (slot 3 - lower slot) of the copier.
2. Enter the SP mode and execute SP5857-009 (Copy HDD to SD Card (Latest 4
MB)) to write the debugging data to the SD card.
3. Use a card reader to copy the file and send it for analysis to your local Ricoh
Service
Tables
representative by email, or just send the SD card by mail.
SM 5-133 B156/B220
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
USING THE DEBUG LOG
5.10.3 RECORDING ERRORS MANUALLY

Since only SC errors and jams are recorded to the debug log automatically, for any
other errors that occur while the customer engineer is not on site, please instruct
customers to perform the following immediately after occurrence to save the debug
data. Such problems would include a controller or panel freeze.
NOTE: In order to use this feature, the customer engineer must have previously
switched on the Save Debug Feature (SP5857-001) and selected the hard
disk as the save destination (SP5857-002).
1. When the error occurs, on the operation panel, press (Clear Modes).
2. On the control panel, enter 01 then hold down for at least 3 sec. until
the machine beeps then release. This saves the debug log to the hard disk for
later retrieval with an SD card by the service representatives.
3. Switch the machine off and on to resume operation.

The debug information for the error is saved on the hard disk so the service
representatives can retrieve it on their next visit by copying it from the HDD to
an SD card.
B156/B220 5-134 SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
USING THE DEBUG LOG
5.10.4 NEW DEBUG LOG CODES

SP5857-015 Copy SD Card-to-SD Card: Any Desired Key
This SP copies the log on an SD card (the file that contains the information written
directly from shared memory) to a log specified by key number. The copy operation
is executed in the log directory of the SD card inserted in the same slot. (This
function does not copy from one slot to another.) Each SD card can hold up to 4
MB of file data. Unique file names are created for the data during the copy
operation to prevent overwriting files of the same name. This means that log data
from more than one machine can be copied onto the same SC card. This
command does not execute if there is no log on the HDD for the name of the
specified key.
SP5857-016 Create a File on HDD to Store a Log

This SP creates a 32 MB file to store a log on the HDD. However, this is not a
completely empty file. The created file will hold the number 2225 as the SCS key
number and other non-volatile information. Even if this SP is not executed, a file is
created on the HDD when the first log is stored on the HDD, but this operation
takes time. This creates the possibility that the machine may be switched off and
on before the log can be created completely. If you execute this SP to create the
log file beforehand, this will greatly reduce the amount of time required to acquire
the log information and save onto the HDD. With the file already created on the
HDD for the log file, the data only needs to be recorded; a new log file does not
require creation. To create a new log file, execute SP5857-011 to delete the debug
Service
Tables
log data from the HDD and then execute this SP (SP5857-016).
SP5857-017 Create a File on SD Card to Store a Log

This SP creates a 4 MB file to store a log on an SD card. However, this is not a
completely empty file. The created file will hold the number 2225 as the SCS key
number and other non-volatile information. Even if this SP is not executed, a file is
created on the SD card when the first log is stored on the SD card, but this
operation takes time. This creates the possibility that the machine may be switched
off and on before the log can be created completely. If you execute this SP to
create the log file beforehand, this will greatly reduce the amount of time required
to acquire the log information and save onto the SD card. With the file already
created on the SD card for the log file, the data only needs to be recorded; a new
log file does not require creation. To create a new log file, execute SP5857-012 to
delete the debug log data from the SD card and then execute this SP (SP5857-
017).
SM 5-135 B156/B220
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
OVERVIEW
6. DETAILED SECTION DESCRIPTIONS

6.1 OVERVIEW
6.1.1 MECHANICAL COMPONENTS
2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1
9
22
10
21 11
20 12
19 13
14
18
15
Descriptions
17
Detailed
16
B156D001.WMF
1. Scanner HP sensor 12. Paper transfer roller unit

2. ADF exposure glass 13. Image transfer belt (T/B)waste toner
3. Exposure glass bottle
4. 2nd carriage 14. Image transfer belt unit
5. Scanner lamp 15. OPC belt (O/B) cleaning unit
6. 1st carriage 16. OPC belt waste toner bottle
7. Original width sensor 17. Paper tray 2
8. Scanner motor 18. Paper tray 1
9. Sensor board unit 19. Laser unit
10. Original length sensors 20. Development unit
11. Fusing unit 21. OPC belt unit
22. Image transfer belt cleaning unit
SM 6-1 B156/B200
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
OVERVIEW
6.1.2 PAPER PATH

3 4 5 6 7 8
9
2
1 10
11
29
12
13
14
15
16
17
28
18
19
27
21
20
26 22
23
25
24
B156V101.WMF
1. Registration sensor (ARDF) 17. Transfer belt sensor

2. Original exit sensor (ARDF) 18. Registration sensor
3. Original set sensor (ARDF) 19. Exit sensor (Duplex unit)
4. Original trailing edge sensor (ARDF) 20. Paper feed sensor
5. Original width sensor board (ARDF) 21. Paper end sensor (By-pass tray)
6. Original length sensor 1 (ARDF) 22. Paper feed sensor
7. Original length sensor 2 (ARDF) 23. Relay sensor (Paper tray 3)
8. Relay sensor (Bridge unit) 24. Relay sensor (Paper tray 4)
9. Tray exit sensor (Bridge unit) 25. Stapler tray entrance sensor
10. Paper sensor (1-bin tray) (Finisher)
11. Paper overflow sensor 26. Stack feed-out belt HP sensor
12. Exit sensor (Interchange unit) (Finisher)
13. Entrance sensor (Duplex unit) 27. Lower tray exit sensor (Finisher)
14. Paper exit sensor 28. Paper limit sensor (Finisher)
15. Fusing exit sensor 29. Entrance sensor (Finisher)
16. Fusing entrance sensor
B156/B220 6-2 SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
OVERVIEW
6.1.3 DRIVE COMPONENTS

Layout
3 4
2
5
1
6
21 10
20
11
19
18 12
13
17
14 B156D002.WMF
16 15
Descriptions
Detailed
1. Fusing unit motor 11. Paper size switch 1
2. Image transfer belt cleaning clutch 12. Paper size switch 2
3. Image transfer belt cleaning contact 13. Development clutch - M
solenoid 14. OPC belt cleaning clutch
4. Scanner motor 15. Paper feed motor
5. Main motor 16. Paper feed clutch 2
6. Development clutch - K 17. Vertical transport clutch 2
7. Development clutch - C 18. Paper feed clutch 1
8. Development motor 2 - K and C 19. Vertical transport clutch 1
9. Development motor 1 - Y and N 20. Registration clutch
10. Development clutch - Y 21. Paper transfer solenoid
SM 6-3 B156/B200
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
OVERVIEW
Drive Power Path

[A] [B] [C] [D] [E] [F] [G]
[HK]
[HC]
[S] [IK, C]
[R]
[IY, M]
[Q]
2 [HY]
[P ]
[HM]
[O1]
[J]
[P2]
B156V108.WMF
[O2] [N] [M] [L] [K]
Motor (Type) Drives ...

Scanner [B] Scanner motor gear [C]
(Stepper)
Development [IK&C] Development clutches [HK, C] Development unit for K and C
(DC brushless)
Development [IY&M] Development clutches [HY, M] Development unit for Y and M
(DC brushless) OPC belt cleaning clutch [L] OPC belt cleaning unit
Main [G] OPC belt [K] with the flywheel [J]
(DC brushless) Image transfer belt [M]
Fusing unit [S]
Paper exit unit [A]
Image transfer belt cleaning clutch [E] Image transfer belt
cleaning unit
Registration clutch [Q] Registration roller
Fusing Unit [D]
(DC brushless) Paper transfer roller
Belt cleaning contact solenoid [F] Image transfer belt cleaning
unit contact mechanism
Paper transfer solenoid [R] Paper transfer roller contact
mechanism
Interchange unit and one-bin tray
Paper Feed [N] Paper feed clutch [O1,2] Paper pick-up roller
(Stepper) Vertical transport clutch [P1,2]
B156/B220 6-4 SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
OVERVIEW
6.1.4 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS

Scanner Unit
1 2
3
4
6
10
7
8
B156D003.WMF
1. Anti-condensation heater 6. Original length sensor 2

2. Scanner HP sensor 7. SBU (sensor board unit)
3. Platen cover sensor 8. Original width sensor
4. Lamp stabilizer 9. Operation panel
Descriptions
5. Original length sensor 1 10. Exposure lamp
Detailed
SM 6-5 B156/B200
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
OVERVIEW
Image Transfer
2 4
1 5
8
18
17 9
16
10
15
11
14
13 12
B156D004.WMF
1. Charge corona wire cleaner motor 10. Transfer belt sensor

2. Quenching lamp 11. Pressure roller thermofuse
3. ID sensor 12. Pressure roller thermistor
4. Belt mark sensor 13. Heating roller thermistor
5. T/B waste toner bottle switch 14. Pressure roller fusing lamp
6. T/B waste toner sensor 15. Heating roller fusing lamp
7. O/B waste toner sensor 16. Oil overflow sensor
8. Fusing entrance sensor 17. Heating roller thermostat
9. O/B waste toner bottle switch 18. Oil end sensor
T/B: Image transfer belt

O/B: OPC belt
B156/B220 6-6 SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
OVERVIEW
Paper Path
2
1 3
19
6
18
7
17
16 8
15
14 9
13
12
11 10
B156D005.WMF
1. Right cover switch 11. Paper end sensor 2
Descriptions
2. Interlock switch 12. Paper end sensor 1
Detailed
3. Paper overflow sensor 13. Tray heater (optional)
4. Fusing exit sensor 14. Mechanical counter 2
5. Registration sensor 15. Mechanical counter 1
6. Paper feed sensor 1 16. Exit cover switch
7. Paper near-end sensor 1 17. Paper exit sensor
8. Right lower cover switch 18. Main power switch
9. Paper near-end sensor 2 19. Front cover switch
10. Paper feed sensor 2
SM 6-7 B156/B200
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
OVERVIEW
Development Units
2
10
7
3
6 5 4 B156D006.WMF
1. Rear development board 6. Memory chip I/F Board

2. Laser synch. detection board 7. Memory chip M
3. Front development board 8. Memory chip Y
4. Polygonal mirror motor 9. Memory chip C
5. LD unit 10. Memory chip K
B156/B220 6-8 SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
OVERVIEW
Boards
1
2
3
17
4
16
15
5
14
6
13
7
12 11 10 9 8
B156D007.WMF
Descriptions
Detailed
1. Scanner I/O board 9. PSU fan 1
2. CSS board 10. Breaker
3. Development fan 11. Controller fan
4. I/O board 12. Temperature/humidity sensor
5. BICU board 13. Controller board
6. Power supply unit 14. High voltage supply board
7. PSU fan 2 15. Oil pump
8. Ozone fan 16. Fusing unit fan
17. Paper exit fan
SM 6-9 B156/B200
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
BOARD STRUCTURE
6.2 BOARD STRUCTURE

6.2.1 BLOCK DIAGRAM
Printer
Memory Options
: Standard
: Option Printer/
NIB Controller Scanner
Fax Options Fax Unit

Xenon Lamp
HDD
Lamp Operation Scanner

Stabilizer Panel Motor
Polygon
Motor
ARDF Scanner IOB
BICU Thermistors
APS SBU
LD Units
PSU
Fusing Lamps
Paper Inter-
Tray Unit/ 1-Bin Tray change LSD
LCT
IOB
Bridge High Clutches/

By-pass Duplex Unit Voltage Sensors Solenoids Motors
P.P
Finisher
B156D511.WMF
B156/B220 6-10 SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
BOARD STRUCTURE
1. Controller (Main Board)

Controls the memory and the fax/scanner/printer options.
2. BICU (Base Engine and Image Control Unit)

This is the scanner and engine control board. It controls the following functions:
Engine sequence
Timing control for peripherals
Image processing control and video control
Operation control
Drive control for the sensors, motors, and solenoids of the printer and
scanner
High voltage supply board control
Fusing control
3. IOB (Input/Output Board)
Controls the sensors, motors, clutches, and solenoids of the main unit.
4. Scanner IOB (Scanner Input/Output Board)

Handles the following functions.
Serial interfaces with ARDF and operation panel
Scanner motor control
5. SBU (Sensor Board Unit)
The SBU converts the analog signals from the CCD into digital signals.
Descriptions
Detailed
SM 6-11 B156/B200
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
BOARD STRUCTURE
6.2.2 CONTROLLER
OPTION
2.5" HDD PS3/

Printer/ DATA RAM
USB (40 GB) SD Card NIB
Scanner Overwite (256 MB)
Security Unit
SDRAM
IDE SD Slot 1 SD Slot 2 SD Slot 3
DIMM
Local BUS
System On-board
NVRAM
Flash ROM SDRAM ASIC CPU
(128 kB)
(16 MB) (512 MB)
PCI BUS
CONTROLLER PCI PCI PCI PCI
IEEE1394/
Wireless LAN/ File Format
BICU Bluetooth/
FCU G3
Converter
IEEE1284
OPTION OPTION OPTION OPTION
B156D510.WMF
The controller uses RC2K architecture, which allows the board to control all
applications (copier, printer, scanner, and fax).
The fax option requires FCU installation also.
Systems and application software can be downloaded from the controllers SD
Card slot. For details about how to download software from an SD card ( 5.4).
1. CPU:
PMC RM7035C-466MHz
2. ASIC:
This is a dedicated chip developed for use with RC2K architecture. It controls
the following functions: memory, local bus, interrupts, PCI bus, video data,
HDD, network, operation panel, and image processing.
3. Flash ROM:
16MB Flash ROM for the system program
B156/B220 6-12 SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
BOARD STRUCTURE
4. SDRAM (on-board):
768 MB SDRAM (512MB + 256MB)
5. SD Card Slots:
Three slots are provided for three SD cards. Slot 1 is for the printer and
scanner applications (standard). Slot 2 is for the PostScript 3 or the Data
Overwrite Security applications (optional). Slot 3 is for service purposes, such
as firmware updates.
6. NVRAM:
Stores the engine and controller settings
7. PCI Interface:
For installing the FCU board, File Format Converter, IEEE1394, Bluetooth,
IEEE1284 and wireless LAN. The IEEE1394, wireless LAN, Bluetooth and
IEEE1284 cannot both be installed on the same machine at the same time.
8. HDD:
Used for the document server. Also used for collation, locked print, sample
print, form overlay, and font storage. The hard disk is partitioned as shown
below.
Partition 40GB HDD Function Comment

Image Local Remains stored even after cycling
15,000 MB Document server
Storage power off/on.
Downloaded fonts, Remains stored even after cycling
File System 1 500 MB
forms. power off/on.
File System 2 1,000 MB Job spooling area Erased after power off.
Remains stored even after cycling
File System 3 2,400 MB Work data area
power off/on.
Temporary print image
File System 4 500 MB Erase after power off.
file
Commonly used area for
Erased after power off.
applications
Image TMP 16,800 MB Copier application Erased after power off.
Descriptions
Printer application Erased after power off.
Detailed
Scanner application Erased after power off.
Remains stored even after cycling
Job Log 10 MB Job log
power off/on.
Remains stored even after power
Swap 406 MB Debug, Swap
is turned off/on.
Remains stored even after power
SDK 1,200 MB SDK application
is turned off/on.
Address book/ Address book/ Mail box/ Remains stored even after power
2,000 MB
Mil data Net files is turned off/on.
Stamps/ SAF thumbnail Remains stored even after power
Others 1,276 MB
etc. is turned off/on.
Total 41,092 MB
SM 6-13 B156/B200
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
COPY PROCESS
6.3 COPY PROCESS
1 2
3
6
9 8 7
B156D008.WMF
1. Development unit 6. Quenching lamp

2. OPC belt 7. OPC belt cleaning unit
3. Image transfer belt cleaning unit 8. Charge corona unit
4. Image transfer belt 9. Polygonal mirror
5. Paper transfer roller unit
B156/B220 6-14 SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
COPY PROCESS
1. Drum Charge
The corona wire gives the drum a negative charge.
2. Black (K) Image Creation

a) Laser Exposure
The laser diode (LD) emits two laser beams. The laser beams create a latent
image on the OPC surface.
b) Development
The development roller transfers negatively charged toner to the latent
image. The OPC belt surface holds only one toner color at one time.
c) Image Transfer
The OPC belt transfers the single-color toner image to the image transfer
belt.
d) Cleaning
The OPC belt cleaning unit cleans the image transfer belt.
3. Magenta (M) Image Creation

Same as 2 a) through 2 d) above.
4. Cyan (C) Image Creation

5. Yellow (Y) Image Creation

6. Paper Transfer
The paper transfer roller transfers the combined CMYK toner image to the
paper.
The OPC belt and the image transfer belt can hold two A4-size LEF images on
their surfaces. When printing on A4 LEF or smaller paper, the OPC and image
transfer belts process two images in one cycle. At this time, two sheets of
paper are consecutively output with little interval between them. This speeds up
Descriptions
Detailed
color print output.
7. Separation
The paper is separated from the image transfer belt when the belt curves away
from it. A discharge plate assists this process.
8. Fusing
The fusing unit fuses the image to the paper.
9. Cleaning
The image transfer belt cleaning unit cleans the belt.
10. Quenching
The quenching lamp erases any remaining charge on the OPC belt.
SM 6-15 B156/B200
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PROCESS CONTROL
6.4 PROCESS CONTROL

6.4.1 OVERVIEW
The copier adjusts the following process control parameters:
Development bias (VB)
Charge corona grid voltage (VG)
These 2 parameters maintain a consistent gamma for the engine.
NOTE: This copier uses only the ID sensor. (There is no TD or potential sensor.)
6.4.2 PROCESS CONTROL STEPS

Six Steps
Depending on the machines condition, some or all of the following steps may
occur:
: ID sensor calibration
: Color development bias initialization (M, then C, then Y)
: K development bias initialization
: M, C, Y, and K bias fine adjustment
: Charge grid bias voltage adjustment
: Process control interval counter reset
If the main power is turned off (or the cover opened) during a process control
session, the session is aborted. Turning the power on (or closing the cover)
restarts the process control session.
When is Process Control Done?
When an event arises, the specified steps are performed.
Event Condition Steps
Forced process When forced process control is done (engine SP mode
control 3-001-1)
Process control End of job: When more than 200 sheets have been , , ,
regular interval printed upon completion of a job. (The interval can be
changed with engine SP3-003-1.) Black-and-white
outputs are not included in this count.
During a job: If the number of prints since process
control gets to 700, printing stops and process control is
done. The interval can be changed with engine SP 3-
003-1 [default: 200] and engine SP 3-003-2 [default:
500]. Change only SP 3-003-2 if you do not wish to
change the end-of-job interval.
Power on When the fusing pressure roller temperature is 60C or , , ,
lower immediately after the power is turned on.
Environmental When the change in the temperature/humidity sensor , , ,
change output since the previous process control exceeds a
certain value. SP3-004 can be used to change the
threshold temperature and humidity values.
B156/B220 6-16 SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PROCESS CONTROL
Event Condition Steps

K toner cartridge This is done after clearing the K toner near-end state , , , g
or K development (i.e., when a new K development unit is added). The
unit replacement machine idles and when the development roller stops for
10 seconds, indicating that idling is over, process control
occurs.
Color After the color toner end or near-end state is reset, the
development unit machine idles to transfer color toner to the development
replacement unit. After idling, process control occurs.
Color toner After the color toner end or near-end state is reset, the , , ,
cartridge machine idles to transfer color toner to the development
replacement unit. After idling, process control occurs.
24 hours after Same as power on process control , , ,
previous process
control
PCU replacement After the PCU counter is reset, it is lubricated (new OPC
belt lubricant application mode). Then process control
occurs.
After charge The wire is cleaned at these times, if a set number of
corona wire developments were done since the last cleaning:
cleaning In the middle of a job
At the end of a job
Immediately before the machine goes to low power
mode
For more information: 6.7.2
ACC Process control is done just before ACC is done (this
process control can be enabled/disabled with SP 3-125).
Supplementary Information on Process Control

The following is a brief explanation of process control. This is for your reference. If
the information is helpful for understanding the machine in the field, read the
following explanation.
Descriptions
Step 1. ID Sensor Calibration
Detailed
This calibration compensates for changes in the condition of the OPC belt or the ID
sensor. The ID sensor detects the light reflected from the bare OPC belt. The LED
current is adjusted until the sensor output is correct. The LED current for the color
toner detection circuit is adjusted based on the adjustment made for the black toner
detection circuit.
Step 2. Initializing Color Development Bias

For each color, the machine makes a solid patch (20x25) of toner on the OPC belt.
The ID sensor detects the density of the patch. The laser power for the patch of
toner is constant at about 210/255. Each color is calibrated separately (this step
has three stages - one for each color). M/A must be the following for areas of
maximum image density: 0.65 mg/cm2, Range:0.40 to 0.90 mg/cm2. If the detected
M/A is different from the target M/A, the development bias is adjusted.
Colour development bias initialisation is not always done. This is to reduce the
amount of time taken for process control. Also, in step 4, the current colour
SM 6-17 B156/B200
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PROCESS CONTROL
development bias values are fine-tuned to correct for any changes in the machine
or temperature/humidity since the last full process control.
This step always has to be done when installing a new development unit. The toner
amount carried by a development roller varies with each unit. (The toner amount
used for a certain development bias is not the same.) Black development bias
initialization (step 3) has to be done more often, because tests have shown that
process control errors occur more often if this is not done.
Step 3. Initializing K Development Bias

Similar to the process for color development bias. M/A must be 0.65 mg/cm2 for
areas of maximum image density. Range: 0.40 to 2.0 mg/cm2
Step 4. Fine-tuning the YMCK Development Biases

The machine makes another solid pattern
Steps 2 and 3 for determining VB (development bias) are not done every process
control (see the table: When is the process control done?). Because of this, the
solid area density, based on the VB obtained during initialization, may change as a
result of changes inside the machine after a period of use, or because of
environmental changes. To suppress these fluctuations, this step fine-tunes VB at
regular intervals, or if the environmental conditions change.
The machine adjusts the development bias based on these results.
Step 5. Charge Grid Voltage Adjustment

The machine makes a very low image density pattern (20x25 mm), which consists
of a replacing 3 x 3 matrix of pixels on the OPC belt. Two of these pixels are of
high intensity (dark), and the others are at zero intensity (LD off, white). The two
high intensity pixels are close together.
0 0 0
240 240 0
0 0 0
This is only to give you a rough idea - the exact pixel densities used by this
machine are not shown here.
The net effect is to have two dark pixels surrounded by white pixels on all sides,
repeated all over the paper.
If there is a difference between the target M/A and the detected M/A, the grid
voltage is adjusted.
Step 6. Resetting the Process Control Interval Counter

The counter is in the NVRAM on the controller board, and is reset after process
control. The counter is not reset after black development unit or black toner
cartridge replacement. This is because only a few of the process control steps are
done after replacing these components.
B156/B220 6-18 SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SCANNING
6.5 SCANNING
6.5.1 OVERVIEW
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
B156D009.WMF
10 9 8
1. Scanner HP sensor 6. 1st scanner (1st carriage)

2. ADF exposure glass 7. Scanner motor
3. Exposure glass 8. Sensor board unit (SBU)
4. 2nd scanner (2nd carriage) 9. Original length sensors
5. Scanner lamp 10. Original width sensor
( Digital Processes Digital scanning Basic concepts)

Book mode: The scanner motor drives the 1st and 2nd scanners. The original is
scanned from left to right.
ADF mode: The ADF feeds the original past the ADF exposure glass. The 1st
Descriptions
scanner moves under the ADF exposure glass. The original does not stay on the
Detailed
glass, but keeps going to the ADF exit.
SM 6-19 B156/B200
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SCANNING
6.5.2 SCANNER DRIVE
[H]
[G]
[C]
[A]
[F]
[E]
[D]
[B]
B156D010.WMF
Scanner drive: Scanner motor [A] Scanner drive pulley [B and C], and scanner
drive shaft [D] Scanner wires [E and F] 1st [G] and 2nd [H] scanners
Book Mode
The scanner I/O board controls the scanner motor.
The 1st scanner moves twice as fast as the 2nd scanner.
For reduction/enlargement, the scanning speed depends on the magnification ratio.
The returning speed is always the same, regardless of magnification ratio.
Sub-scan magnification is controlled by the scanner motor speed. Main-scan
magnification is controlled by image processing on the BICU board.
NOTE: Sub-scan magnification errors can be corrected by changing the scanner-
motor speed ( SP4-008).
ARDF Mode
The 1st and 2nd scanners stay at their home positions; the scanner HP sensor
detects the 1st scanner position, and the 2nd scanner position is linked with that of
the 1st scanner.
Sub-scan magnification is controlled by the ADF feed speed. Main-scan
magnification is controlled by image processing on the BICU board.
NOTE: Sub-scan magnification errors can be corrected by changing the ADF feed-
speed ( SP6-006-5).
B156/B220 6-20 SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SCANNING
6.5.3 ORIGINAL SIZE DETECTION
[A] [B]
B156D011.WMF
The original width sensors [A] detect the original width, and the original length
sensors [B] detect the original length.
The on/off signals received from the sensors are used to detect the original size.
The SBU board checks each sensor signal at the following times:
As the platen cover is closed
When the start key is pushed, if the platen cover stays open.
When the by-pass tray is used, the machine assumes that the paper is set
lengthwise. So, if A4 paper is set sideways on the by-pass tray, the machine
assumes it is A3 paper (set lengthwise) and scans the whole A3 area, disregarding
the original size sensors. However, when the registration sensor detects that the
paper is not A3 but only A4 sideways, paper feed stops and a jam occurs. This is to
Descriptions
Detailed
prevent large amounts of toner transferring from the transfer belt to the transfer
roller. (Also see SP 1-940.)
NOTE: Original size detection using the ARDF is described in the manual for the
ARDF.
The table (next page) shows the sizes that are detected for various sensor outputs.
SM 6-21 B156/B200
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SCANNING
L1 L2 L3
W1
W2
B156D012.WMF
Width
Original Size Length Sensor SP4-301
Sensor
display
Metric Inch L3 L2 L1 W2 W1
A3 11" x 17" O O O O O 132
B4 10" x 14" O O O X O 141
F4 8.5" x 14" (8" x 13") O O O X X 165
A4-L 8.5" x 11" X O O X X 133
B5-L X X O X X 142
A4-S 11" x 8.5" X X X O O 5
B5-S X X X X O 14
A5-L, A5-S 5.5" x 8.5", 8.5" x 5.5" X X X X X 128
NOTE: L: Lengthwise, S: Sideways, O: Paper present, X: Paper not present

For other combinations, Cannot detect original size. is displayed on the operation
panel.
B156/B220 6-22 SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
IMAGE PROCESSING
6.6 IMAGE PROCESSING

6.6.1 OVERVIEW
CCD SBU
BICU LD Board
Fax
HDD (Option)
Controller Printer
Memory
Scanner
Descriptions
Detailed
B156D512.WMF
The CCD (Charge-Coupled Device) generates three analog video signals. The
SBU (Sensor Board Unit) converts the three analog signals to 10-bit digital signals.
It sends these signals to the BICU board. The BICU board processes the image,
then the image data is sent to the LD unit.
SM 6-23 B156/B200
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
IMAGE PROCESSING
6.6.2 SBU BLOCK DIAGRAM
O R(B)
Analog Amplifier 10 bit R 10 bit Field 8 bit
E A/D Converter Memory
O G
Analog Amplifier 10 bit SBU G 10 bit Field 8 bit
CCD E ASIC
A/D Converter Controller Memory
O B(R)
Analog Amplifier 10 bit B 10 bit 8 bit
E A/D Converter
SBU BICU
B156D013.WMF
Signal Processing
1. Signal Amplification
Odd-pixel and even-pixel RGB analog signals from the CCD are amplified.
2. Signal Composition
The amplified signals are combined after A/D conversion.
A/D Conversion
The analog signals (CCD output) are converted to 10-bit (1,024 gradations)
digital signals.
White Level Correction

A white reference plate is scanned before the original is scanned.
Data is updated before the original is scanned.
The differences in the white level across the page, including irregularities in the
CCD and the optical parts across the main scan, are corrected.
Others
The SBU controller exchanges the R and B signals if originals are scanned through
the ARDF.
B156/B220 6-24 SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
IMAGE PROCESSING
Black Level Correction

Improves image reproduction for high-density areas.
Reads the black video level at black elements on the CCD. These pixels are
masked off, and should produce a pure black signal.
This is subtracted from the value of each pixel.
Calculated for each scan line.
Corrects the image data for any changes in black level with time, as the machine
scans down the page.
VPU Test Mode

To make sure the scanner VPU control is functioning, output the VPU test pattern
with SP4-907 (for more details, see chapter 4, Troubleshooting).
Descriptions
Detailed
SM 6-25 B156/B200
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
IMAGE PROCESSING
6.6.3 IMAGE PROCESSING
SBU
Shading correction Color conversion Image rotation

Picture element correction Main scan magnification Image sort
Scanner line correction Printer gamma correction
Scanner gamma correction Error diffusion HDD
Filters
ADS ASIC 1 ASIC 2 Controller
Image Separation Gradation processing

ACS LD Unit
ASIC 3 ASIC 4
BICU
B156D014.WMF
Shading Correction
Auto shading compensates for the possible differences in the light emission level at
the edge and center of a scanned image caused by the scanner lens, or the
differences among the CCD pixels.
Picture Element (Dot Position) Correction

Picture element correction includes
1) the completion of the scan line correction process
2) the correction of the time when the CCD is not perpendicular to the light
The green CCD line is taken as the standard.
Both ends of the red and blue lines are adjusted to match the standard.
NOTE: To adjust the vertical line correction level, use SP4-932.
Scan Line Correction

R, G, and B CCD lines are spaced 4 scan lines apart (8 lines total) when 100%
magnification is used.
Scan line correction synchronizes these signals by storing each line in memory.
The difference between the R, G and B signals depends on the magnification
ratio.
If this calculation does not result in an integer, the corrected data is set to the
closest integer, but further correction is needed ( Picture Element
Correction).
B156/B220 6-26 SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
IMAGE PROCESSING
Scanner Gamma Correction (RGB Gamma Correction)
The RGB video signals from the CCD are sent

255
to the ASIC1 chip on the BICU board. This
signal is proportional to the intensity of light
reflected from the original image (Fig. 1).
Scanner gamma correction inverts the video
signals. The shading circuit converts the signal
from 10-bit to 8-bit.
The ASIC1 chip converts the signal levels as
shown in Fig. 2. 0
This improves the accuracy of RGB to CMY 1023
Dark Light
color conversion (conversion is done later in
the image process). Fig. 1 B156D015.WMF
The same table is used for R, G, and B

signals.
255
Filtering
Appropriate software filters are applied to the
RGB video signals.
Varies depending on the results of auto
text/photo separation (or on the selected
original mode). 0
RGB smoothing is applied to photo areas 255
Dark Light
Edge emphasis applied to text areas.
Fig. 2 B156D016.WMF
Background Density Control

Removes low ID image signals (background) that are less than a certain
threshold.
The threshold depends on the color mode (single color or full color).
Descriptions
Detailed
Users can select a different threshold for each mode.
ADS (Auto Image Density Selection)

Full color mode
1) Refers to the RGB data taken from the entire original.
2) Calculates a threshold for removing the background based on this data.
Black and white mode
1) Determines the peak white level.
2) Peak level data is taken for each scan line.
3) Removes the peak white level from the image. This produces a white
background.
4) Also uses the peak white level to determine the white reference value for
A/D conversion.
5) Background density is adjusted before data is input to the A/D converter.
SM 6-27 B156/B200
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
IMAGE PROCESSING
Image Separation
The original image is classified into the text and photo (dot screen) areas.
Edge Separation
Used to locate text and line diagrams
Locates areas of strong contrast.
Looks for continuity of black or colored pixels.
Looks for continuity of white pixels around black or colored pixels.
Only uses data from the green CCD.
Dot Screen Separation

If white pixels are not detected around non-white pixels, it is a dot screen area.
Colored Text Separation

Identifies whether the text areas pixels are black or color.
Based on:
1) Differences among the RGB maximum signal levels.
2) Output levels of the RGB video signals.
ACS (Auto Color Selection)
Black and white first
255
Signal Level
204 (50% UCR rate)
153 (50% UCR rate)
Color first
RGB common data

R G B 0 102 128 255
RGB signal after scanner correction (40% UCR rate) (50% UCR rate)
B156D017.WMF B156D018.WMF
The auto color selection function determines if an original is black/white or color.

Black copy mode or full color mode is automatically selected.
Selection is made based on the difference between the RGB signal levels.
RGB video signals are compared.
If the maximum difference among RGB signals is within a certain range, the
original is considered black and white.
B156/B220 6-28 SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
IMAGE PROCESSING
Color Conversion
Transparency for each color toner is not ideal. Color conversion compensates for
the differences between the ideal and actual characteristics. A matrix converts the
RGB video signals into CMYK video signals while the original is scanned once.
Conversion Matrix
The following color conversion table is an example of the results from the matrix
operation.
Simple color copying.
No special modes applied.
To represent green, the yellow and cyan toners are used in a 1:1 ratio.
Color Conversion Table
Original Color
K R Y G C B M W
Toner
Y 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0
M 1 1 0 0 0 1 1 0
C 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 0
K 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Main Scan Magnification

While the machine changes the scanner speed to reduce or enlarge the original in
the sub-scan direction, the ASIC2 chip on the BICU board handles reduction and
enlargement in the main scan direction.
Scanning and laser writing are done at a fixed pitch (CCD elements cannot be
squeezed or expanded).
Imaginary points are calculated, corresponding to a physical enlargement or
reduction.
Image density is then calculated for each of the imaginary points based on the
image data for the nearest two true points.
Descriptions
Detailed
The calculated data then becomes the new (reduced or enlarged) image data.
NOTE: The actual calculations for main scan magnification use the polynomial
convolution method. This mathematical process is beyond the scope of a
service manual and will not be covered here.
SM 6-29 B156/B200
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
IMAGE PROCESSING
Printer Gamma Correction
Fig. 1 Fig. 2
B156D020.WMF
B156D019.WMF
Ideally, the gamma curves for Yellow, Magenta, Cyan, and Black should be
identical, as shown in figure 1. However, slight variations in the electrical
components can result in varying gamma curves, as shown in figure 2.
Printer characteristics are much more variable than the scanner. Printer gamma
needs re-calibration and adjustment from time to time.
The Auto Color Calibration (ACC) procedure compensates for any discrepancies
in color reproduction.
ACC makes new gamma curves for each color in each mode (text, photo, and
black text).
After ACC, the gamma curve for each color can be adjusted with service
programs (SP4-918).
4 different modes:
1) ID max.
2) Shadow (High ID)
3) Middle (Middle ID)
4) Highlight (Low ID)
If the previous gamma curve was better, it can be recalled.
Factory settings can be loaded using SP5-610-4.
NOTE: If the factory settings have been overwritten, this will return the new
values, not the actual settings made in the factory. This is deliberate,
since some drift is expected. After a time, the original factory settings
may no longer be suitable.
Factory settings can be overwritten by the current gamma settings using SP5-
610-5.
B156/B220 6-30 SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
IMAGE PROCESSING
ID Max.
This mode adjusts the total image density
as shown in figure 3.
Fig. 3 B156D021.WMF
Shadow (High ID)

The High ID mode adjusts the image
density between Level 6 and Level 9 of the
color gradation scale on the C-4 test chart
(figure 4).
Fig. 4
B156D022.WMF
Middle (Middle ID)

The Middle ID mode adjusts the image
density between Level 3 and Level 7 of the
color gradation scale on the C-4 test chart
(figure 5).
Descriptions
Detailed
Fig. 5 B156D023.WMF
Highlight (Low ID)

The Low ID mode adjusts the image density
between Level 2 and Level 5 of the color
gradation scale on the C-4 test chart (figure
6).
Fig. 6
B156D024.WMF
SM 6-31 B156/B200
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
IMAGE PROCESSING
Auto Color Calibration Test Pattern

The test pattern has eight 17-step
gradation scales for each color (CMYK),
including background white, for Text and
Photo modes.
ACC automatically calibrates the printer Dark Light

gamma curve. The user starts the ACC
process. K
C
1. The user prints an ACC Test
Pattern. M
2. The user places the test pattern on Y

the exposure glass. K
3. The copier makes 8 scans to read C
each color scale.
M
4. The copier corrects the printer
gamma by comparing the ideal Y
settings with the current image
density.
5. The copier combines the corrected
gamma curve with the Shadow, B156D025.WMF
Middle, and Highlight values

currently in memory.
6. The copier then calculates the ID max (amplitude of the gamma curve) based
on data from the ACC scan.
7. The corrected printer gamma curves can be adjusted further using SP modes
(SP4-918).
Error Diffusion
Error diffusion reduces the difference in contrast between light and dark areas of a
halftone image. Each pixel is corrected using the difference between it and the
surrounding pixels. The corrected pixels are then compared with an error diffusion
matrix.
B156/B220 6-32 SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
6.7 PHOTOCONDUCTOR UNIT (PCU)

6.7.1 OVERVIEW
2 3 4
1 5
6 31
7
8
9
10
30
29 11
28 12
27 13
26 14
15
16
25 17
18
19
24 20
23 22 21 B156D352.WMF
1. Ground brush 16. Image transfer belt cleaning unit

2. ID sensor 17. Image transfer belt mark sensor
Descriptions
3. OPC belt 18. OPC belt cleaning brush
Detailed
4. Bias brush 19. O/B waste toner sensor feeler
5. Image transfer belt cleaning blade 20. O/B waste toner bottle full sensor
6. Image transfer belt cleaning unit 21. O/B waste toner bottle switch
7. T/B toner collection auger 1 22. O/B toner collection auger 1
8. T/B toner collection auger 2 23. OPC belt cleaning unit
9. T/B waste toner sensor feeler 24. Charge corona unit
10. Waste toner bottle switch 25. Laser unit
11. Paper transfer roller 26. M development unit
12. Paper transfer roller unit 27. Y development unit
13. T/B waste toner bottle full sensor 28. OPC belt support
14. Registration roller 29. C development unit
15. Image transfer belt 30. K development unit
31. T/B cleaning blade (additional)
SM 6-33 B156/B200
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
6.7.2 CHARGE CORONA UNIT

Power Supply
[C]
[A]
[A]: High voltage supply
[B]: Charge corona unit
[C]: Harness
[B]
B156D026.WMF
High voltage supply [A] Harness [C] Charge corona unit [B] (negative charge)
( Photocopying Processes Charge Corona Charge Scorotron Method)
Grid and Wire Cleaning

[E]
[D]
[C]
[A]: Motor [A]
[B]: Screw
[C]: Wire cleaner
[D]: Corona wire
[E]: Grid [B]
B156D027.WMF
The motor [A] drives the bottom screw [B], which moves the wire cleaner [C]
forward or backward. The cleaner cleans the grid [E] and corona wire [D].
The wire is cleaned at these times:
Immediately before the machine goes to low power mode, if there was between
200 and 600 development counts since the last cleaning.
Between 600 (SP2-801-1) and 1200 (= the sum of the settings in SP2-801-1 and
3 plus 200) development counts at job end.
If the count gets to 1200 in the middle of a job (= the sum of the settings in SP2-
801-1 and -3 plus 200) development counts (stops in the middle of the job).
B156/B220 6-34 SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
The counter for development counts counts up as shown in the table.
Black & White Color

A4 (LT) LEF (or smaller) 1 count 4 counts
Others 2 counts 8 counts
NOTE: 1) The counter always increases as shown in the table. These values are
not adjustable.
2) To change the cleaning interval, use SP2-801 ( 5.1.2).
Quenching
[C]
[A]: Quenching lamp

[B]: Charge corona unit
[C]: OPC belt
[A]
[B]
B156D028.WMF
( Photocopying Processes Quenching)
Descriptions
Detailed
SM 6-35 B156/B200
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
6.7.3 OPC BELT DRIVE

[B]
[A]
[A]: OPC belt

[B]: Main motor
[C]: Fly wheels [C]
[D]: Bottom shaft
[D]
B156D309.WMF
Main motor [B] Gear Bottom shaft [D] OPC belt [A]
The flywheels [C] ensure that the OPC belt moves smoothly.
NOTE: The OPC belt and transfer belt contact each other. If you wish to inspect
the OPC belt by turning it, you must also turn the transfer belt at the same
time to avoid damaging the surfaces of the belts.
6.7.4 OPC BELT CLEANING UNIT
[A]: Lubricant bar [A]

[B]: Cleaning brush [K]
[C]: Feeler link (on the frame) [B]
[D]: Waste toner bottle full sensor
(on the frame) [C]
[E]: Waste toner feeler
[F]: Waste toner bottle switch
[D]
(on the frame)
[G]: Toner collection auger 1
[H]: Toner collection auger 2 [E]
[I]: Waste toner bottle [J]
[J]: Cleaning blade [F]
[K]: OPC belt [G]
[I] [H]
B156D029.WMF
Bottle Detection
The waste toner bottle switch [F] is on the frame, behind the OPC belt cleaning unit.
When the unit is installed, it pushes the switch, which indicates the bottle is in place.
B156/B220 6-36 SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Waste Toner Collection

The cleaning brush [B] and the cleaning blade [J] removes the toner remaining on
the OPC belt [K] surface. ( Photocopying Processes Cleaning Counter
Blade + Brush)
Toner collection auger 1 [G] moves this toner to the front side, where it is collected
in the waste toner bottle [I].
Toner collection auger 2 [H] levels the toner in the bottle.
The waste toner feeler [E] at the rear of the bottle is gradually lifted as the toner
level in the bottle rises. When the feeler pushes the feeler link [C], the waste toner
full sensor [D] is activated and the machine detects that the bottle is full.
When the bottle becomes full, a message appears on the operation panel. The
machine can make 100 more prints, then further printing is disabled.
The bottle has a cap on the waste toner outlet. Empty the bottle when you visit the
customer.
Drive
[B] [C] [D]
[E]
[A]
[F]
[A]: Development motor for Y,
M
[B]: OPC belt cleaning clutch
[C]: Gear
[D]: Gear
[E]: Cleaning brush
[F]: Toner collection auger 1
[G]: Opening for waste toner [H]
[H]: Toner collection auger 2
[G]
Descriptions
B156D312.WMF
Development motor [A] Gear Timing belt OPC belt cleaning clutch [B] Detailed
Gears [C, D] OPC belt cleaning unit (including the brush and toner collection
augers)
The clutch cuts the drive to the cleaning unit when the development motor reverses
(this is done each development to prevent toner blockages in the development unit).
SM 6-37 B156/B200
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
6.7.5 IMAGE TRANSFER BELT UNIT

Drive
[A]
[B]
[A]: Main motor

[B]: Image transfer belt
[C]: Bottom shaft (rubber
coated)
[C]
B156D314.WMF
Main motor [A] Gears Bottom shaft [C]

The bottom shaft can drive the transfer belt because of the friction between the belt
[B] and the rubber coating on the shaft [C].
NOTE: The transfer belt and OPC belt contact each other. If you wish to inspect
the transfer belt by turning it, you must also turn the OPC belt at the same
time to avoid damaging the surfaces of the belts.
Belt Mark Detection
[B]
[A]: Belt mark sensor

[B]: Mark
[A]
B156D030.WMF
The belt mark sensor is a reflective photosensor.

To exactly synchronize the four mono-color toner images on the image transfer
belt, the belt mark sensor [A] monitors the belt speed. The sensor detects the light
reflected by the marks [B] at the rear end of the belt (25 marks per rotation; mark
frequency: 21 mm). The sensor output is used to control the belt speed.
B156/B220 6-38 SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Transfer Roller
[A]
[B]
[A]: Transfer roller
[B]: High voltage supply board
[C]: Terminal plates
[C] B156D031.WMF
The transfer roller [A] attracts toner from the OPC belt to the image transfer belt by
using a positive charge.
The terminal in the middle of the PCU contacts the terminal on the transfer roller
shaft when the image transfer belt unit is installed in the PCU.
The current is adjusted based on environmental temperature and humidity.
Descriptions
Detailed
SM 6-39 B156/B200
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
6.7.6 IMAGE TRANSFER BELT CLEANING UNIT

[N]
[A]
[M]
[A]: Cleaning blade [B]
[B]: Toner collection auger 1
[C]: Image transfer belt [L] [C]
[D]: Toner conduit
[E]: Waste toner sensor feeler
[F]: Waste toner bottle switch [E]
[G]: Actuator [D]
[H]: Waste toner full sensor
[I]: Waste toner bottle [K]
[J]: Transfer roller
[K]: Toner collection auger 2
[L]: Cleaning brush
[M]: Lubricant bar [F]
[N]: Cleaning roller [J]
[I] [H] [G]
B156D032.WMF
Image Transfer Belt Cleaning

Cleaning roller [N] is positively charged, and transfers this charge to the cleaning
brush [L].
The cleaning brush attracts residual toner from the image transfer belt [C]. This
toner is attracted to the cleaning roller, where it is removed by the cleaning blade
[A].
Waste Toner Collection

The toner removed by the cleaning blade is transported by the toner collection
auger 1 [B] to the rear, where it falls into the toner bottle [I] through the toner
conduit [D].
Toner collection auger 2 [K] levels the toner in the bottle.
There is a shutter on the top of the waste toner bottle. While out of the unit, the
shutter is kept closed by a spring attached to it. When it is put back in the unit, a
hook on top of the shutter is caught by the image transfer belt unit, and the shutter
opens.
Set Switch and Full Sensor

When the bottle is full, a message appears on the operation panel. After this, 100
more prints can be output. Then the machine stops and printing is disabled.
B156/B220 6-40 SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Contact Mechanism
[A] [C] [E]
[D]
[B] REAR VIEW

B156D034.WMF
B156D033.WMF
[A]: Image transfer belt cleaning contact solenoid

[B]: Half-turn clutch
[C]: Lever
[D]: Cam
[E]: Fusing unit motor
The fusing unit motor [E] drives the image transfer belt cleaning unit and the
contact mechanism.
When the toner images are being transferred from the OPC belt to the image
transfer belt, the image transfer belt cleaning unit must be kept away from the belt.
The unit contacts the belt only while cleaning the belt.
NOTE: During standby mode, the cleaning unit is away from the image transfer
Descriptions
belt.
Detailed
When the image transfer belt cleaning contact solenoid [A] is off, it catches a hook
on the surface of the half-turn clutch [B]. As a result, the high point of the cam
pushes the lever [C], and the cleaning unit is away from the transfer belt.
When the solenoid activates, the hook is released, drive from the motor is
transferred from the gear to the clutch, the cam [D] makes half a turn, the lever
drops, and the cleaning unit contacts the transfer belt
SM 6-41 B156/B200
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Power Supply
[B]
[A]
[A]: Cleaning brush
[C]
[B]: Cleaning roller
[C]: High voltage supply [F]
[D]: Contact spring
[E]: Contact spring
[F]: Contact spring
[E] [D]
B156D035.WMF
The cleaning roller [B] charges the cleaning brush, and attracts toner from it.
The high voltage supply [C] supplies positive charge to the cleaning roller via the
harness and contact springs (leaf springs) [D, E, and F].
[A] [B]
Drive [C]
[A]: Gear 1
[B]: Image transfer belt cleaning [J]
clutch
[C]: Fusing unit motor [D]
[D]: Drive gear [F]
[E]
[E]: Gear 2
[F]: Toner path
[G]: Image transfer belt
[H]: Toner collection auger 1
[I]: Toner collection auger 2 [I] [G]
[J]: Turning direction of the [H]
cleaning brush
Fusing unit motor [C] drive gear [D] gears [A] and [E] cleaning brush [J]
and toner collection augers [H and I]
The clutch [B] controls the on/off timing of the mechanism.
B156/B220 6-42 SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
LASER EXPOSURE
6.8 LASER EXPOSURE

6.8.1 OVERVIEW
3
2
11
10
9
4
5
8 7 6
B156D037.WMF
1. LD Unit 7. W-Toroidal lens (WTL)

2. Synchronization Detector 8. F Lens
3. Synchronization Detector Mirror 9. 1st Mirror
Descriptions
Detailed
4. Dust Shield Glass 10. 2nd Mirror
5. 3rd Mirror 11. Cylindrical Lens
6. Polygon Mirror Motor Unit
SM 6-43 B156/B200
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
LASER EXPOSURE
6.8.2 POLYGON MIRROR MOTOR UNIT

Speed
The polygon mirror motor rotates at about 21,024 rpm.
6.8.3 SYNCHRONIZATION DETECTOR

The synchronization detector is on the rear side of the laser unit.
The synchronization detector simultaneously checks 2 laser beams.
6.8.4 LD UNIT
Two laser diodes in the LD unit emit 2 main-scan laser-beams. Having two lasers
speeds up image creation. It also allows the polygon motor to operate at a lower
speed, which cuts down noise emission and makes the motor last longer.
The LD unit does not need any adjustment when replaced.
B156/B220 6-44 SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
LASER EXPOSURE
6.8.5 LD SAFETY SWITCH

Front Door
The LD safety switch is on the upper end of the front door. This switch is linked to
the following covers:
Front door
Right cover
The switch prevents laser emission if any of the above covers is opened (when, for
example, you remove jammed paper or replace a consumable).
Circuit
The LD safety switch is on the 5V circuit leading to the LD unit. Between the switch
and the unit, the line has 2 contacts on the front door and on the right door (series
circuit). When either of the covers is opened, the power supply is interrupted,
preventing laser emission.
PSU BICU LDDR

+5V +5V
5VLD 5VLDS
LD
Control
IC
Door SW
Descriptions
Detailed
B156D500A.WMF
SM 6-45 B156/B200
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
LASER EXPOSURE
Operation Panel Display and Switch Mechanism

The front cover switch [A], right cover switch [B], and interlock switch [C] detect the
positions of the front and right covers. When either or both covers are open, the
message, Open Cover, appears with an illustration indicating which covers are
open.
The tables show the switch patterns and detected cover positions.
[A] [B] [C]
Front cover switch Off

Right cover switch On
Interlock switch Off
Front cover open
Front cover switch Off

Right cover switch Off
Front and right covers open [D] B156D038.WMF
Front cover switch On [E]

Right cover switch Off
Right cover open
B156D039.WMF
[A]: Front cover switch

[B]: Right cover switch
[C]: Interlock switch
[D]: Actuator (front cover)
[E]: Actuator (right cover)
B156/B220 6-46 SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
DEVELOPMENT
6.9 DEVELOPMENT
6.9.1 OVERVIEW
3 4 5 6
2 7
1
8
B156D351.WMF
K: black, Y: yellow, C: cyan, M: magenta
1. Memory chip 6. Toner supply roller

2. Toner cartridge 7. Development roller
Descriptions
3. Toner cartridge agitators 8. Doctor roller
Detailed
4. Development agitator 9. OPC belt
5. Development unit
: Development Mono-component Development Double Development

Roller Process
The development units operate in the following order: K M C Y
SM 6-47 B156/B200
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
DEVELOPMENT
6.9.2 DEVELOPMENT UNIT

Replacing Units
Each new development-unit spare part contains an empty dummy toner cartridge.
The dummy toner cartridge does not have a memory chip.
When you replace the development unit with a new spare part development unit,
the machine cannot detect the toner cartridge because the dummy toner cartridge
does not contain a memory chip. But the toner cartridge in the used development
unit may still be usable. Because of this, remove the dummy toner cartridge from
the new development unit. Then install the toner cartridge from the old
development unit.
After you install the new development unit, do the SP mode for development
initialization (toner supply & process control) (SP3-929-001 to 004: Development
unit Replace).
Distinguishing the development unit with the one for the B051 series
This model B051 series
Top line of caution decal on Black words on a white White words on a black
the toner cartridge background background
Indication on the toner B154 (BK only) B051 (BK, C, M, and Y)
cartridge holder CMY development units have
(development unit side) the same indication as the
previous model (B051)
Caution decal
Shows B154 for BK

dev units for this model
Shows B051 for a)

CMYK dev units for the
B051 series, and b)
CMY dev units for this
model)
B156R301.JPG
NOTE: B051 is shown on CMY development units for both models. But the units
are not interchangeable.
Memory chip
Each toner cartridge contains a memory chip, which contains information about
which machine it can be used in. If a toner cartridge for the B051 series is installed
in this machine, the machine will not detect the toner cartridge.
B156/B220 6-48 SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
DEVELOPMENT
6.9.3 TONER SUPPLY MECHANISM
[A]
[C]
[F]
[G]
[B]
[H]
[I]
[E]
[J]
[D]
[N]
[M]
[L]
B156D301.WMF
[K]
[A]: Development motor for K, C [I]: Toner supply roller

[B]: Development motor for Y, M [J]: Development roller
[C]: Development clutch [K]: Toner cartridge agitators
[D]: Lever [L]: Mylar sheet
[E]: Cam (built into the gear) [M]: Toner cartridge
[F]: Development roller gear [N]: Toner cartridge agitator gear
Descriptions
[G]: Development unit agitator
Detailed
[H]: Doctor roller
Drive
Development motor [A, B] development clutch [C] development roller [F]
cam [E] lever [D] agitators [K].
Development motor [A, B] development clutch [C] development roller gear [F]
development roller [J]
SM 6-49 B156/B200
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
DEVELOPMENT
Rollers and Agitators

Each toner cartridge contains two toner cartridge agitators [K]. They are equipped
with several mylar sheets [L], which agitate the toner and send it to the
development unit agitator [G]. The development unit agitator agitates the toner and
sends it to the toner supply roller [I].
Toner cartridge agitators [K]: Evenly mixes the toner in the cartridge, and
sends it to the development unit
Development agitator [G]: Evenly mixes the toner in the development
unit, and sends it to the toner supply roller
Toner supply roller [I]: Supplies the development roller with toner
Development roller [J]: Transfers the toner to the OPC
Doctor roller [H]: Regulates the amount of the toner on the
development roller
Shutter
Each toner cartridge has a shutter on its right side. The shutter is pushed open
when the cartridge is installed in the development unit, and closed when removed
from the unit.
B156/B220 6-50 SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
DEVELOPMENT
6.9.4 TONER END DETECTION

Mechanism
[A]
[A]: Optic fiber [B] [C]
[B]: Light emission
[C]: Gap
An optic fiber [A] in each development unit

except the one for black detects toner
end. Light is emitted from the rear end [B]
of the unit. There is a gap [C] in the optic
fiber.
When the development unit is filled with
toner, the toner breaks the light path
through the gap. When the unit is running
out of toner, the light path is not broken. B156D303.WMF
Toner Near-End Detection

The machine uses two methods simultaneously: pixel count, and toner end sensor.
If either of these methods detects near-end, the machine indicates near-end.
Near-End by Pixel Count (K, C, M, and Y)

The machine counts how many pixels have been printed with each toner cartridge.
When there are 500 prints remaining until the estimated toner end condition, toner
near-end is indicated.
Near-End by Toner End Sensor (C, M, Y only)

If the toner end sensor output drops to toner end level, counter 1 is set to 1.
Descriptions
If the above condition (counter 1 is 1) is detected twice accumulated 14 seconds
Detailed
while the development clutch is activated, counter 2 is set to 1.
If the above condition (counter 2 is 1) is detected twice continuously, the
machine enters the toner supply mode after the job.
The above detection is carried out while the development clutch is activated.
Toner supply mode after the job:
The development unit with the almost-empty cartridge idles for 40 s.
Then, it idles again for another 20 s.
During this 20 s period, the toner end sensor is checked every 10 ms. If a low
toner condition is detected twice or less during this 20 s period, the machine
returns to standby mode after idling all development units for 90 s.
However, if a low toner condition was detected third times or less during that 20 s
period, the machine indicates toner near-end.
SM 6-51 B156/B200
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
DEVELOPMENT
Toner End Detection

When any one of the following conditions occurs, toner end is indicated.
1. If near-end was detected by pixel count:
The remaining pixel count reaches 0.
2. If near-end was detected by toner end sensor:
Either 100 developments or 100 prints at 5% coverage are made since near-
end was detected.
3. If near-end was detected by pixel count, and later it was detected by toner end
sensor again before toner end:
Either the remaining pixel count reaches 0, or 100 developments or 100 prints
at 5% coverage are made since near-end by toner end sensor was detected.
Toner End Recovery

CMY
When the machine detects a new toner cartridge, it drives the development unit for
that cartridge for about 3 minutes.
During this time, the development clutch is repeatedly activated for 5 s and
deactivated for 1 s.
The machine checks the toner end condition every 20 s. The end and near-end
conditions are cleared if the sensor detects sufficient toner. However, if the sensor
does not detect sufficient toner after 5 minutes of development unit drive, the toner
end condition remains and a new cartridge must be added.
Bk
When the machine detects a new toner cartridge, it operates the development unit
as shown below. (This is the default setting. You can change it with SP 2-964.)
The development clutch is repeatedly turned on for 5 s and off for 1 s. This is
done for approximately 30 seconds.
Then, the development clutch is repeatedly turned on for 0.8 s and off for 0.8 s.
This is done for approximately 70 seconds.
Then, again, the development clutch is repeatedly turned on for 5 s and off for 1
s. This is done for approximately 30 seconds.
The second step (0.8 s on/0.8 s off) loads toner into the hopper quickly, but it
makes a lot of noise. Because of this, some customers could complain. Then, you
can change SP 2-964 from Quick mode (default setting) to Long mode (quiet).
SP 2-964 also has a Medium mode. This loads toner into the hopper more quickly.
It is also better than Quick Mode and Long mode to prevent dirty background that
occurs immediately after toner replacement. But it is estimated that Quick Mode
and Long mode will not cause this symptom often.
B156/B220 6-52 SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
DEVELOPMENT
The three toner-end-recovery modes operate as shown in this table.

Toner End Recovery Procedure Total Time
Quick (default) 5s on/1s off, for 30s 0.8s on/0.8s off, for 5s on/1s off, for 30s Approx. 3
70s minutes
Long (quiet) On/off timing same as for normal printing 5s on/1s off, for 15s Approx. 7
mode, for 360 s minutes
Medium 0.8s on/0.8s off, for 285 s 5s on/1s off, for 50s Approx. 6
minutes
The Total time column includes process control after cartridge replacement.
If you change SP 2-964, the settings of SP 2-960-1 to -016 will change
automatically. Do not adjust SP 2-960 in the field. Only use SP 2-964.
Descriptions
Detailed
SM 6-53 B156/B200
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
DEVELOPMENT
6.9.5 DEVELOPMENT UNIT CONTACT MECHANISM

Mechanism
Each development unit has an independent clutch. When a development clutch
turns on, a gear under the development unit moves the development unit into
contact with the OPC belt. When the clutch turns off, two springs (one at the front
and one at the rear) detach the development unit from the OPC belt.
Color Processes Color Development Fixed Position Development

Systems Similar to Example 2: Model G033
[B] [A]
[A]: OPC belt

[B]: Development clutch
B156D040.WMF
B156/B220 6-54 SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
DEVELOPMENT
Reverse Rotation
The gears reverse every development to prevent toner from clumping. There are
two development motors in this model. While one motor is used to develop a color,
the other is used to clean another development unit. This parallel action reduces
the idle time.
ON ON
OFF OFF
OFF
ON
OFF OFF
ON ON
OFF ON
ON OFF
Descriptions
ON
Detailed
OFF
ON
OFF
B156D300.WMF
SM 6-55 B156/B200
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
DEVELOPMENT
6.9.6 POWER SOURCE

[B] [C]
[D]
[E]
[A]: Development unit [F]

[B]: Rear-side terminal
[C]: Development roller
[D]: Bias terminal
[E]: Harness terminal
[F]: High voltage supply
[G]: Doctor roller
[A]
B156D041.WMF
[G]
Development, Toner Supply, and Doctor Rollers

When a development unit [A] comes into contact with the OPC belt, the bias
terminal [D] comes into contact with the harness terminal [E]. Then, a negative
charge is supplied to the unit.
The negative charge on the doctor roller is the same size as the charge on the
development roller and toner supply roller.
Doctor Roller
The doctor roller [G] restricts the amount of toner on the development roller [C].
The high voltage supply [F] applies a charge to the doctor roller through the rear-
side terminal cable [B]. This charge is the same as the charge applied to the
development roller. However, the development roller charge is applied through a
different terminal [E].
Mono-component Development Toner Metering Blade (similar principle)
B156/B220 6-56 SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PAPER FEED
6.10 PAPER FEED

6.10.1 OVERVIEW
13 4
12
5
11
10 B156D042.WMF
7
9 8
1. Registration roller 8. Base plate (Tray 1)

2. Path from duplex unit 9. Base plate (Tray 2)
3. Vertical transport roller 10. Paper end fence (Tray 2)
Descriptions
Detailed
4. By-pass tray 11. Tray 2
5. Friction pad with spring (Tray 1) 12. Tray 1
6. Friction pad with spring (Tray 2) 13. Paper end fence (Tray 1)
7. Path from optional paper tray
The table lists the main and optional paper stations.
Tray Number Main/Optional

Standard tray 2 Main unit
By-pass tray 1
Paper tray unit 2 Optional unit
LCT 1
SM 6-57 B156/B200
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PAPER FEED
Transport Speed
Until the registration roller, the paper travels at 240 mm/s. This high initial speed
ensures that the first output time is as short as possible.
From the registration roller to the exit, the paper travels at the following speeds:
178 mm/s (plain paper)
89 mm/s (thick paper or OHP films)
Friction Pad
Handling Paper Paper Feed Paper Feed Methods Friction Pad
NOTE: Replace the roller and pad as a unit (not separately).
[A]
6.10.2 DRIVE MECHANISM [B]
[A]: Fusing unit motor

[I]
[B]: Registration clutch [C]
[C]: Feed motor
[D]: Feed clutch
[E]: Feed roller [H]
[F]: Vertical transport roller [D]
[G]: Idle roller
[H]: Registration roller
[I]: Paper [G]
[E]
[F]
B156D043.WMF
Feed and Vertical Transport

The feed motor [C] drives the feed roller [E] and the vertical transport roller [F].
The action of the feed roller is controlled by the feed clutch [D].
Registration
The fusing unit motor [A] drives the registration roller [H], under the control of the
registration clutch [B].
The idle roller [G] facing the registration roller does not have any drive gears. It
turns with the paper [I].
B156/B220 6-58 SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PAPER FEED
6.10.3 PAPER LIFT

Lift Mechanism
The spring under the bottom plate [A] presses the plate upward. When you press
the bottom plate as far down as possible, the hook on lever [C] holds the plate. The
lever releases the bottom plate when it is pressed by the protruding part on the
right tray rail; this happens when the tray [B] is completely pushed into the machine.
[A]
[A]: Bottom plate

[B]: Tray
[C]: Lever
[C]
[B]
B156D044.WMF
Paper End/Near-End Detection

[B]
[A] [C]
[A]: Paper near-end sensor

[B]: Paper near-end sensor feeler
[C]: Paper end sensor
Descriptions
[D]: Paper end sensor feeler
[D] Detailed
B156D045.WMF
The bottom plate gradually rises as paper is fed. The bottom plate position is
checked with the near-end sensor feeler [B]. The sensor [A] is actuated when
about 50 sheets are left in the tray, and the paper near-end message appears on
the operation panel.
When paper runs out, the paper end sensor feeler [D] drops into the cutout in the
bottom plate. This actuates the sensor [C], and the paper end message appears on
the operation panel.
SM 6-59 B156/B200
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PAPER FEED
6.10.4 PAPER SIZE DETECTION

Mechanism [D] [E]
[F]
[C]
[B]
[A]: Tray set switch [A]

[B]: Paper size switch
[C]: Paper size switch
[D]: Paper size switch
[E]: Actuator [G]
[F]: Lever
[G]: End fence
B156D046.WMF
The end fence [G] moves the lever [F], which moves a different set of notches on
the actuator [E] into contact with the paper size switches [B][D].
When you put the tray in the main unit, the rear fence of the tray and the actuator
activate the switches; from this the machine detects the presence of the tray, and
the paper size.
Switch Pattern
When the tray is pushed into the machine, the leftmost switch [A] is always
activated by the rear fence of the tray; this switch detects the presence of the tray.
The combination of the other 3 switches [B][D] detects the paper size.
Auto Detection Switch*

North America Europe/Asia [A] [B] [C] [D]
DLT SEF A3 SEF On Off On On
LG SEF B4 SEF On On On On
A4 SEF On On Off Off
LT SEF On Off Off Off
B5 SEF 10.5" x 7.25" SEF On Off Off On
LT LEF A4 LEF On On On Off
B5 LEF On On Off On
A5 LEF On Off On Off
(No tray) Off Off Off Off
* On: Pushed Off: Not pushed
NOTE: 1) For the input check table, 5.1.4.
2) Other paper sizes are not detected. Use the System Settings - Tray
Paper Settings - Tray Paper Size user tool to set paper sizes.
B156/B220 6-60 SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PAPER TRANSFER AND SEPARATION
6.11 PAPER TRANSFER AND SEPARATION

6.11.1 OVERVIEW
2
3
1
4
8
7
5
6
B156D401.WMF
1. Image transfer belt 5. Paper transfer roller

2. Discharge plate 6. Registration roller
3. Separation lever 7. Transfer belt sensor
4. Spring 8. Fusing entrance sensor
Jammed Paper Release
Descriptions
Detailed
When you open the right cover, the units release the paper. This mechanism helps
quickly clear paper jams.
Image Transfer and Paper Separation

Photocopying Processes Image Transfer and Paper Separation Transfer
Roller + Discharger Example 2: Models A172/A199
The current is adjusted for paper weight and environmental temperature/humidity.
A user tool (User Tools - System Settings - Tray Paper Settings - Paper Type)
specifies the paper weights. If Plain is selected, then another user tool (User
Tools - Maintenance - Plain Paper Type) defines when the paper is normal or >
90 g/m2, 24lb.
Plain means normal or > 90 g/m2, 24lb.
Thick means paper heavier than 105 g/m2 (28 lb).
SM 6-61 B156/B200
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
6.11.2 CONTACT/SEPARATION MECHANISM
[A]
[D]
[B]
[C]
[E]
FRONT VIEW REAR VIEW

B156D047.WMF B156D048.WMF
[A]: Fusing unit motor

[B]: Half-turn clutch
[C]: Paper transfer solenoid
[D]: Contact/separation lever
[E]: Cam
Timing
When transferring toner to paper, the paper transfer roller unit contacts the image
transfer belt. At other times during printing, the unit stays away from the image
transfer belt. After printing, the unit contacts the belt and stays there.
NOTE: During standby mode, the unit stays away from the image transfer belt.
Mechanism
Fusing unit motor [A] Gear Paper transfer solenoid [C] Cam [E]
Contact/separation lever [D] Paper transfer roller unit movement
The fusing unit motor [A] drives the mechanism. (It also drives the paper transfer
roller).
The cam [E] is controlled by the half-turn clutch [B] and the paper transfer solenoid
[C].
When the solenoid is off, it catches a hook on the surface of the half-turn clutch [B].
As a result, the high point of the cam pushes the contact/separation lever [D], and
the paper transfer roller unit is away from the belt.
When the solenoid is activated, the hook is released, so the half-turn clutch makes
a half-turnthe unit moves to the right and contacts the image transfer belt.
B156/B220 6-62 SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
6.11.3 POWER SUPPLY

Circuit
High voltage supply [A] Terminal [B] Paper transfer roller shaft [C]
[C]
[B]
[A]: High voltage supply [E]

[B]: Terminal
[D]
[C]: Paper transfer roller shaft
[D]: Temperature-humidity sensor
(inside the rear-right cover)
[E]: Discharge plate (negative
charge)
[A]
B156D049.WMF
Paper Transfer Roller Bias

Normally, a constant current is applied to the paper transfer roller shaft [C].
The current varies with paper type, size, and thickness as well as humidity.
Discharge Plate
Descriptions
The discharge plate [E] discharges the remaining charge on the paper going past
Detailed
the paper transfer roller. This helps the paper separate from the image transfer belt.
Temperature/Humidity Control
The temperature-humidity sensor [D] is inside the rear-right cover. The sensor
output is used to control the current for the paper transfer roller.
The temperature and humidity can be read with SP2-912.
SM 6-63 B156/B200
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Roller Cleaning
The paper transfer roller is cleaned at the following times:
After the user clears a paper jam
After the user closes the front cover
Just after the main power has been switched on
After paper passes the paper transfer roller, the paper transfer solenoid releases
the paper transfer roller from the image transfer belt.
Then, a certain time after the trailing edge of the paper passes the registration
sensor, the following steps occur:
1) The paper transfer solenoid turns on again, and the paper transfer roller
contacts the image transfer belt.
2) A negative charge is applied to remove toner stuck to the paper transfer
roller.
3) Positive and negative charge is applied alternately to remove any toner that
is still stuck to the paper transfer roller.
Toner removed from the paper transfer roller goes back to the image transfer belt,
where it is removed by the image transfer belt cleaning unit.
B156/B220 6-64 SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
IMAGE FUSING AND PAPER EXIT
6.12 IMAGE FUSING AND PAPER EXIT

6.12.1 OVERVIEW
16
15
14
2
13
12
3
11
5
10
9 7 6
8
B156D050.WMF
1. Hot roller 9. Heating roller
Descriptions
Detailed
2. Metal cleaning roller 10. Fusing belt
3. Pressure roller 11. Oil overflow sensor
4. Pressure roller fusing lamp (350W) 12. Oiling roller
5. Pressure roller thermistor 13. Oil supply roller
6. Heating roller thermistor 14. Fusing sponge roller
7. Thermostat 15. Spring roller
8. Heating roller fusing lamp (770W) 16. Metal cleaning roller
The fusing unit divides into two subunits: the fusing subunit and the oil supply
subunit.
SM 6-65 B156/B200
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
6.12.2 DRIVE
[A]
[B]
[C]
[I]
[D]
[H]
[E]
[G] [F]
B156D051.WMF
[A]: Hot roller

[B]: Pressure roller gear
[C]: Cover disengagement gear
[D]: Fusing unit motor
[E]: Drive gear
[F]: Fusing belt
[G]: Heating roller
[H]: Oil supply roller
[I]: Oiling roller
The fusing unit motor [D] drives the fusing unit through gears [C] and [E].
The hot roller [A] turns the fusing belt [F] as a result of the friction between the two.
When the right cover is open, gear [C] moves away, which allows jammed paper to
be removed from the fusing unit and exit easily.
B156/B220 6-66 SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
6.12.3 FUSING UNIT COMPONENTS

[A]
[E] [J]
[A]: Fusing belt [D]
[B]: Heating roller
[C]: Lamp (770 W)
[D]: Thermostat
[E]: Thermistor
[F]: Pressure roller
[G]: Lamp (350 W)
[H]: Thermistor [I]
[I]: Thermofuse
[J]: Pawl [H]
[C] [F]
[B] [G] B156D052.WMF
Fusing Belt
This machine uses a fusing belt [A]. The paper goes between the fusing belt and
the pressure roller [F].
Heating Roller Lamp and Pressure Roller Lamp

The heating roller lamp (770W) [C] and pressure roller lamp (350W) [G] give more
heat to the front and rear edge of the fusing belt and pressure roller. The lamps
give more heat to the front edge than the rear edge. This makes fusing better for
large paper (larger than B4). If the lamp is installed in the orientation, unsatisfactory
fusing and/or paper creasing can occur.
Descriptions
Detailed
SM 6-67 B156/B200
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
[B]
[G]
[A]: High voltage supply

[B]: Terminal [C]
[C]: Fusing belt
[D]: Hot roller
[E]: Heating roller
[F]: Pressure roller
[G]: Oiling roller
[D]
[E] [A]
[F]
B156D053.WMF
Fusing Bias
The high voltage supply [A] provides the fusing bias in a new fusing unit until 2K
prints are made. The fusing bias is a negative voltage that quenches static
electricity created on the belt [C] and rollers [D][F] in a new fusing unit by the
paper. This prevents the belt and rollers from attracting dust and dirt, which can
cause offset image in black areas and/or white spots in half tone images because
of toner attracted to the fusing belt.
After 2K prints, the static electricity is not very high. If the bias is applied to the
oiling roller, this can attract dust and dirt to the oil supply felt area. Because of this,
the bias is turned off after 2K prints.
With SP2-503, you can select the status of bias control (Always off, Always on, or
Auto [turns off after 2k prints]). After a new fusing unit is installed, fusing bias must
be applied during the first 2K prints. To do this, you must reset the PM counter of
the fusing unit with SP7-804-7, and fusing bias control will automatically switch on
(the machine uses the Auto setting).
SP2-501 shows the current status of fusing bias control. The setting is changed
from 1 (ON) to 0 (OFF) when 2K prints from the new unit are made or when SC420
is detected. At this time, the fusing bias is stopped.
Fusing Unit SCs

If a thermistor/thermostat problem occurs, a fusing unit SC may be displayed on
the operation panel. Fusing unit SCs disable the machine ( 4.1.1). To reset
fusing unit SCs, use SP5-810 ( 5.1.2).
B156/B220 6-68 SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
6.12.4 OIL SUPPLY

Oil Supply
Photocopying Processes Fusing Oil Supply
[C]
[B] [E]
[A]: Oil tank [A]

[B]: Air inlet
[C]: Oil pump
[D]: Oil pipe
[E]: Fusing unit
[D] [F]
B156D054.WMF
[I] [J] [K] [L]

[H]
[D]
[F]: Oil reservoir
[G]: Felt [F]
[H]: Oil supply unit
[I]: Oil supply roller
[J]: Oiling roller
[K]: Fusing sponge roller
[L]: Metal cleaning roller [G]
Descriptions
Detailed
B156D055.WMF
The technician adds oil to the oil tank [A] in the bottom-left corner inside the rear
cover.
The oil pump [C] pumps oil along the oil pipe [D] to the oil reservoir [F] in the oil
supply unit.
The air inlet [B] equalizes the pressure inside the oil tank [A].
The oil goes to the fusing belt as follows:
Oil tank [A] Oil pipe [D] (oil pump [C]) Oil reservoir [F] Felt [G] Oil
supply roller [I] Oiling roller [J]
The fusing sponge roller [K] removes excess oil from the fusing belt. The metal
cleaning roller [L] removes foreign substances from the belt.
SM 6-69 B156/B200
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Oil Supply
[C]
[A]: Oil end sensor [B]

[B]: Oil overflow sensor
[A]
B156D056.WMF
The oil end sensor [A] controls the supply of oil from the oil tank in the bottom of
the machine, via the oil pump, to the reservoir in the oil supply unit.
The oil end sensor detects oil by emitting a beam through the protruding part of the
tank bottom (the bottom is transparent).
When oil is detected, the pump does not supply oil up from the lower tank. So, the
reservoir is normally less than half full (maximum capacity: 70 grams).
When oil has been used up so that the level in the reservoir falls below the sensor,
the sensor detects oil end. Then, the oil pump turns on to pump oil up from the oil
tank, until the oil end sensor detects oil.
If the oil end sensor fails, the oil overflow sensor [B] detects when the reservoir is
full [C], and the pump stops (SC571 will be generated, and the machine must be
repaired). This failsafe measure prevents oil flooding inside the machine.
B156/B220 6-70 SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Oil End Detection and Recovery

If the oil tank at the bottom of the machine has no oil in it, the following occurs:
1) The oil pump operates for 50 milliseconds and waits for 150 milliseconds. If
the oil end condition still exists, this step is repeated. If the sensor still does
not detect oil, this step can be repeated up to 150 times (total maximum time
taken: 30 seconds).
2) If oil is still not detected, the pump stops for 30 seconds.
3) The oil pump repeats steps 1 and 2 until oil is detected. The pump can
repeat these steps up to 9 times. So, the machine can pump for up to 9
minutes if oil is not detected ([30 seconds + 30 seconds] x 9).
4) If oil is still not detected, the oil end counter starts. This counts the pages fed
through the fusing unit. Every 100 pages, the oil pump operates again for 50
seconds to try to get oil into the fusing unit.
5) When the counter goes up to 50, the operation panel indicates oil near end
(the counter is not reset).
6) When the counter goes up to 500, the code SC 570 appears on the display,
and printing stops.
7) To clear the oil end condition, a technician adds some oil to the oil tank in
the bottom of the machine and clears the SC code (this is a Level A code).
Then, the oil pump resumes steps 1 through 3.
NOTE: Do not switch the machine on with the fusing unit out of the machine
if an oil end condition exists. This will clear the oil end counter, and
the machine incorrectly detects oil.
8) If the oil end condition is cleared, the procedure ends. If not, the code SC
570 appears again.
Descriptions
Detailed
SM 6-71 B156/B200
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
6.12.5 TEMPERATURE CONTROL

The table lists default settings and variable ranges for temperature control.
More than 15C ~

External temperature (*1) 15C or lower 30C or higher
less than 30C
Roller Heating Press. Heat. Press. Heat. Press.
Fusing idling start (*2) 145 10 150 10 140 10
Print ready (*3) 155 65
Ready (standby mode) 160 115
Panel off 1 175 120
Panel off 2 165 115
Energy saver Low power
140 100
mode
Auto off Room Room Heat.: +5 Heat.: 5
mode temp. temp. Adjustable with Adjustable with
Normal Mono color 155 Lamp off SP1-105-27 SP1-105-29
paper Full color 160 Lamp off Press.: +0 Press.: +0
>90 g/m2, Mono color 165 Lamp off Adjustable with Adjustable with
24 lb (*4) Full color 170 Lamp off SP1-105-28 SP1-105-30
Mono color 165 Lamp off
Printing Thick
Full color 170 Lamp off
OHP
Duplex (*5)
100 ~
Variable range (*6) 30 ~ 200 0 ~ +20 0 ~ 20
190
*1: External temperature is measured (temperature/humidity sensor) when the main switch is
turned on and when a job start signal is received.
*2: The pressure and heating rollers start idling.
*3: Fusing idling stops when both roller temperatures reach the print ready condition. The
printer can process jobs when the rollers reach this temperature during warm-up.
*4: A user tool (User Tools - System Settings - Tray Paper Settings - Paper Type) specifies the
paper type in each tray (plain, thick, or OHP). If plain is selected, then another user tool
(User Tools - Maintenance - Plain Paper Type) defines whether the paper in the tray is
normal or >90 g/m2, 24 lb. ( 5.1.2). >90 g/m2, 24 lb means greater than or equal to
90 g/m2, 24 lb.
Thick means paper heavier than 105 g/m2 (28 lb).
*5: Both sides of the paper are processed with the same roller temperatures.
*6: Use SP1-105 to adjust the default fusing temperatures ( 5.1.2).
B156/B220 6-72 SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
6.12.6 ENERGY SAVER MODES

Overview
Stand-by Mode
Operation Sw. Off
-or-
Auto Off Timer
(1 min. to 240 min. / Default: 45 min.) Energy Saver Key ON
-or-
Panel Off Timer (10 s to 999 s / Default: 60 s)
Key Operation
Operation Sw. Off Panel-Off Mode
-or- Return Time Less Than 10s
Auto Off Timer
(1 min. to 240 min. / Default: 45 min.)
Energy Saver Timer
(1min. to 240 min. / Default: 15 min.)
Key Operation
Operation Sw. Off Low Power Mode Return Time Less Than 30 s
-or-
Auto Off Timer
(1 min. to 240 min. / Default: 45 min.)
Operation Sw. On
Auto Off Mode Platen Cover Open / Close
Original Set ADF
Off Mode
Return Time Less Than 99 s
FAX: RX, etc.

After Printing
Printer Data in
Off Stand-by Mode
B156D903.WMF
When the machine is not being used, the energy saver function reduces power
consumption by decreasing the fusing temperature.
This machine has three types of energy saver mode as follows.
Descriptions
1) Panel-off mode
Detailed
2) Low power mode
3) Auto Off mode
These modes are controlled by the following UP and SP modes.
Panel off timer: User Tools System Settings Timer Settings Panel Off
Timer
Energy saver timer: User Tools System Settings Timer Settings
Energy Saver Timer
Auto off timer: User Tools System Settings Timer Settings Auto Off
Timer
SM 6-73 B156/B200
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Panel Off Mode

Entering the panel off mode
The machine enters the panel off mode when one of the following is done.
The panel off timer runs out.
The Clear Mode/Energy Saver Key is held down for one second.
If the value specified in the panel off timer is larger than the value specified in the
energy saver timer, the machine goes into the low power mode without going into
the panel off mode. A similar thing happens when the value in the panel off timer is
larger than that in the auto off timer. To make the panel off mode effective, specify
a value smaller than the values in the energy saver timer and auto off timer.
What happens in panel off mode

When the machine is in the panel off mode, each of the fusing lamps are kept at
the temperatures indicated in the table at the bottom of the page, and the operation
panel indicators are turned off except for the Energy Saver LED and the Power
LED.
If the controller receives an image print out command from an application program
(e.g. to print incoming fax data or to print data from a PC), the temperature of each
fusing lamp rises to print the data.
Return to stand-by mode

If one of the following is done, the machine returns to stand-by mode:
The Clear Mode/Energy Saver Mode key is pressed
Any key on the operation panel or touch panel screen is pressed
An original is placed in the ADF
The ADF is lifted
A sheet of paper is placed in the by-pass feed table
The return time from the panel off mode is about 10 seconds.
Operation Energy
Mode Fusing Temperature +24V System +5V
Switch Saver LED
o
Heating roller: 165 C
Panel off On On On On
Pressure roller: 115oC
B156/B220 6-74 SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Low Power Mode

Entering the low power mode
The machine enters the low power mode when the energy saver timer runs out.
What happens in low power mode

When the machine enters the low power mode, the fusing lamps are kept at the
temperatures indicated in the table, and the operation panel indicators are turned
off except for the Energy Saver LED and the Power LED.
If the controller receives an image print out command from an application program
(e.g. to print incoming fax data or to print data from a PC), the temperature of each
fusing lamp rises to print the data.
Return to stand-by mode

If one of the following is done, the machine returns to stand-by mode:
The Clear Mode/Energy Saver Mode key is pressed
Any key on the operation panel or touch panel screen is pressed
An original is placed in the ADF
The ADF is lifted
A sheet of paper is placed in the by-pass feed table
The return time from the low power mode is about 30 seconds.
Operation Energy
Mode Fusing Temperature +24V System +5V
Switch Saver LED
o
Heating roller: 140 C
Low power On On On On
Pressure roller: 100oC
Descriptions
Detailed
SM 6-75 B156/B200
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Auto Off Mode

There are two Auto Off modes: Off Stand-by mode and Off mode. The difference
between Off Stand-by mode and Off mode is the machines condition when it
enters the Auto Off mode.
Entering off stand-by and off modes

The machine enters the Off Stand-by mode or Off Mode when one of the following
is done.
The auto off timer runs out.
The operation switch is pressed to turn the power off.
If one or more of the following conditions exists, the machine enters Off Stand-by
mode. If none of these conditions exist, the machine enters the Off Mode.
Error or SC condition
Image data is stored in the memory
During memory TX or polling RX
The handset is off hook
An original is in the ADF
The ADF is open
Off Stand-by mode

The system +5V is still supplied to all components. When the machine detects a
ringing signal or receives a stream of data for a print job, the +24V supply is
activated and the machine automatically prints the incoming message or executes
the print job.
Off Mode
The system +5V supply also turns off. However, +5VE (+5V for energy saver
mode) is still activated. When the machine detects a ringing signal, off-hook signal,
or receives a print job, the machine returns to the Off Stand-by mode and the
system +5V and +24V supplies are activated.
Returning to stand-by mode

The machine returns to stand-by mode when the operation switch is pressed. The
return time is about 99 seconds.
Operation Energy
Mode Fusing Lamp +24V System +5V Note
Switch Saver LED
Off Off
Off Off On On
Stand-by (On when printing)
+5VE is
Off Off Off Off Off Off
supplied
B156/B220 6-76 SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
6.12.7 PAPER EXIT
[A]: Interface gear

[B]: Pressure roller gear [A]
[C]: Drive gear (fusing unit) [K]
[L]
[D]: Cover disengagement gear [B]
[E]: Fusing unit motor
[F]: Fusing exit sensor feeler
[G]: Turning direction of the [C]
fusing exit sensor feeler [J]
[G]
[H]: Fusing exit sensor [I] [D]
[I]: Paper exit sensor
[J]: Turning direction of the
paper exit sensor feeler [E]
[K]: Paper exit sensor feeler [F]
B156D057.WMF
[L]: Paper [H]
Drive
Fusing unit motor [E] gear [D] fusing unit drive gear [C] pressure roller
gear [B] gear [A] exit rollers.
Paper Jam Detection

The fusing exit sensor [H] and the paper exit sensor [I] detect paper jams.
6.12.8 PAPER OVERFLOW DETECTION
[A]
Descriptions
Detailed
[D] [B]
[A]: Feeler
[B]: Paper overflow sensor [C]
[C]: Paper
[D]: Tray
B156D058.WMF
When the paper overflow sensor [B] is deactivated, the machine detects that the
paper stack height exceeded the limit and stops printing.
SM 6-77 B156/B200
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PRINT DATA PROCESSING
6.13 PRINT DATA PROCESSING

6.13.1 RPCS DRIVER
Host Controller Printer

Engine
ICM Engine/
ICMprofile
ICM Profile
CMYK
RGB Gray
Correction
RPCS Driver RGB
OR
Matching
Corrected UCR/BG
RGB
RCM profile
Correction
CMYK
Toner Limitation
CMYK
8 bits CMYK
1 bit or 2 bits
Dithering & ROP
B156D562.WMF
6.13.2 PCL5C DRIVER
Host Controller Printer

Engine
(Matching by Host)
RGB
PCL Driver RGB 8 bits
Decode
ICM Engine/ RGB & RGB
ICM profile Scale 8 bits Color
8 bits Matching
CMY
8 bits
CMY Negative Correction
BG/UCR,
8 bits Correction
Toner Limitation
CMY
1 bit
Dithering CMYK
1 bit
&
ROP
B156D563.WMF
B156/B220 6-78 SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
6.13.3 PS3 DRIVER
Color CMYK
CIE ABC CIE XYZ 8 bit
Matching
to
XYZ CRD
Toner Limitation
Gray Correction
Dither and RIP

XYZ
PS Driver CMYK
Gamma
CMYK CMYK CMYK 1 bit
RGB
Fine
to
Fine Super
XYZ
CMYK
RGB BG/UCR 8 bit
Vivid
Super Vivid
(RGB
None Correction)
CMM/
ICC/ICM
Profile
B529D564.WMF
CMS (Color Management System)

CMS optimizes the color print quality using a color profile that is based on the
characteristics of the printer. With RPCS, the color profile is applied by the driver.
With PS3 and PCL5e, the color profile is applied in the matching/CRD module on
the controller except when using CMM/ICC/ICM profiles.
CMS is not used when the color profile setting in the printer driver is set to Off.
Gray Correction
Gray correction processes gray with K or CMYK toner depending on the driver
settings.
Descriptions
BG/UCR (Black Generation/Under Color Removal)
Detailed
The RGB data is converted to CMYK data with BG/UCR. During CMYK conversion,
some CMY data is replaced with K data by the BG/UCR algorithm.
Gamma Correction
The printer gamma can be adjusted with controller SP mode (Gamma Adj.). For
CMYK, there are15 points between 0 and 100%. The corrected gamma data is
stored in NVRAM.
SM 6-79 B156/B200
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Toner Limitation
Toner limitation prevents toner from being scattered around text or printed lines.
Maximum values have been prepared independently for text and photo. They can
be adjusted with controller SP mode (Toner Limit).
Default: 180% for text, 250% for photo
Adjustable range: 100% to 400%
Dither Processing and ROP/RIP

Dither patterns have been prepared for photo and text independently. Dithering
converts the 8-bit data to 1-bit data. However, these dither patterns create the
illusion of 256 gradations for high quality prints. The optimum dither pattern is
selected depending on the selected resolution.
RIP: Raster Image Processing
ROP: Raster Operation
B156/B220 6-80 SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
FILE FORMAT CONVERTER (MLB)
6.14 FILE FORMAT CONVERTER (MLB)

In previous models, DeskTopBinder V2 could retrieve copy and print jobs from the
document server and convert them to TIFF. However, this software-based
conversion was slow for many users.
So, for this machine, this conversion has been made hardware-based, using the
optional File Format Converter. Without the File Format Converter, copy and print
jobs cannot be downloaded to a PC (or e-Cabinet) from the document server.
Two common target formats are provided for conversion to files that can be
selected by the SP modes: JPEG, and TIFF.
In scanner mode, users can select file format from TIFF, JPEG, or PDF. The time
to create TIFF and JPEG files will be shortened with the File Format Converter,
especially for high scanning resolution and large image size. When the customer
selects PDF, the machine creates a TIFF or JPEG file from the scanned image first
then converts it to PDF. Therefore, the total time to create a PDF is also shortened
with the File Format Converter.
Descriptions
Detailed
SM 6-81 B156/B200
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
DATA OVERWRITE SECURITY UNIT (B735)
6.15 DATA OVERWRITE SECURITY UNIT (B735)

6.15.1 AUTO ERASE MEMORY
A document scanned in the copier or scanner mode, or data sent from a printer
driver for printing, is stored temporarily on the hard disk of the machine. Even after
the copy or print job is completed, it remains in the hard disk as temporary data.
Auto Erase Memory erases the temporary data on the hard disk by writing over it.
Types of Data Overwritten and Not Overwritten
The following table shows the types of data that can or cannot be overwritten by
Auto Erase Memory.
Data overwritten by Copier Copy jobs
Auto Erase Memory Printer 1) Print jobs
2) Sample Print/Locked Print jobs(*1)
3) Spool Printing jobs
Scanner(*2) 1) Scanned files sent by e-mail
2) Files sent by Scan to Folder
3) Documents sent or retrieved by using Web
Image Monitor, Desk Top Binder, Scan Router
Fax PC fax print jobs, Internet fax transmission jobs
Document Server Temporary data that still remains in the
Document Server even after user erases the
data in the Document Server.
Data not overwritten by 1) Documents stored by the user in the Document Server using the
Auto Erase Memory Copier, Printer or Scanner functions
2) Information registered in the Address Book (*3)
3) Counters stored under each user code
4) Network setting
NOTE: *1: A Sample Print or Locked Print job can only be overwritten after it has
been executed.
*2: Temporary data via TWAIN scanner function are not originally stored in
HDD, so TWAIN scanner functions can be used together with DOS
unit.
*3: Data stored in the Address Book can be encrypted for security.
Overwrite timing
Overwriting starts automatically once a copy, print and scanner job is completed.
Copier, printer and scanner functions take priority over the Data Overwrite function.
If a copier, printer or scanner job comes while a previous job is beign overwritten,
the overwrite process is automatically interrupted until the next job is completed.
B156/B220 6-82 SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SPECIFICATIONS
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SPECIFICATIONS
SPECIFICATIONS
1. GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS (MAIN UNIT)
Configuration: Desktop
Print Process: 2 laser beam & dry electrostatic transfer system
Original Type: Sheet/Book/object
Original Size: Max: A3/11"x17"
Copy Paper Size: Max: A3/11" x 17"
Min: A6 SEF (100 x 148 mm)/8.5" x 5.5"
Width: 100 ~ 297 mm (3.9" ~ 11.5")
Custom size:
Length: 148 ~ 432 mm (5.8" ~ 17")
*Printable area is 297 x 432 mm (11.7" x 17").
Paper Weight 64 to 163 g/m2, 16 lb. to 44 lb.

(excluding by-pass tray):
Printing Speed Plain
Model Thick OHP
(A4/8.5" x 11" LEF): Paper
Color 10 cpm 4 cpm 2 cpm
TH-C1b
Black & White 24 cpm 6.5 cpm 3.2 cpm
Color 10 cpm 4 cpm 2 cpm
TH-C1c
Black & White 32 cpm 6.5 cpm 3.2 cpm
Paper Capacity: Main 250 sheets x 2 tray

Paper tray unit (Option) 500 sheets x 2 trays
By-pass (Option) 100 sheets
LCT (Option) 1,000 sheets x 2
*Maximum capacity is 2,600 sheets.
Copy Tray Capacity: A4/LT or smaller: Up to 500 sheets

B4 or larger: Up to 250 sheets
First Copy Time Color: 18 seconds or less

(A4/8.5" x 11" LEF): Black & White: 7.8 seconds or less
Warming-up Time: Approx. 99 seconds or less
No. of Continuous Copies: 1 to 100
Specifications
Memory: 768 MB
Hard Disk: 40 GB
Reproduction Ratios: 5 Enlargement & 7 Reduction
A4/A3 version LT/DLT Version
400, 200, 141, 122, 400, 200 155, 129,
Enlargement
115% 121%
Full Size 100% 100%
93, 82, 75, 71, 65, 93, 85, 78, 73, 65,
Reduction
50, 25% 50, 25%
SM 7-1 B156/B220
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SPECIFICATIONS
Zoom: 25% to 400% in 1% steps (Platen mode)

25% to 200% in 1% steps (ADF mode)
Scanning System: 3-line 1-chip CCD sensor (600 dpi)
Light Source: 1 xenon lamp
Photoconductor: OPC belt
Charging: Corona wire with grid plate
Print System: Two laser beam, 600 dpi
Development System: Mono component toner
Transfer: Image transfer: Transfer belt with bias roller
Paper transfer: Roller
Separation: Discharge pin
Fusing: Heating rollers and fusing belt
Cleaning: OPC belt: Blade
Image transfer belt: Cleaning brush
Quenching: Lamp
Toner Supply: Cartridge
Power Source: Voltage Frequency Amperage

NA 100 to 120 V 50/60 Hz 12 A
EU & Asia 220 to 240 V 50/60 Hz 8A
Power Consumption: Mainframe only Full System

Maximum: Less than 1.5 kW Less than 1.5 kW
Copying: Less than 1.2 kW Less than 1.3 kW
Stand-by: Less than 200 W Less than 200 W
Auto Off: 5.7 W 15.5 W
NOTE: Full system: ARDF + 1 bin tray + Paper Tray Unit + Duplex Unit + Bridge
Unit +1000-sheet Finisher
Noise Emission: Mainframe only Full System
Stand-by: Less than 40 dB (A) Less than 40 dB (A)
Copying: Less than 65 dB (A) Less than 70 dB (A)
NOTE: Full system: ARDF + 1 bin tray + Paper Tray Unit + Duplex Unit + Bridge
Unit +1000-sheet Finisher
Dimensions (W x D x H): NA: 640 x 682 x 945 mm (25.2 x 26.85 x 37.2)
EU/CHN: 550 x 682 x 781 mm (21.65" x 26.85" x 30.74")
ASIA: 550 x 682 x 945 mm (21.65" x 26.85" x 37.2)
Weight: NA: Less than 106 kg (234 lb)

EU/CHN: Less than 88 kg (197 lb)
ASIA: Less than 98 kg (220 lb)
B156/B220 7-2 SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SPECIFICATIONS
2. MACHINE CONFIGURATION
2.1 SYSTEM COMPONENTS
13 14 1 2
12 3
5
11
10
9
8 7
B156V500.WMF
Specifications
SM 7-3 B156/B220
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SPECIFICATIONS
Machine Common
Version Item No.
Code with
Copier Base Machine B156 14
Base Machine B220 14
ARDF (Optional NOTE 1)) B810 2 NOTE 2)
Platen Cover (Optional) B484 1
Paper Tray Unit (Optional) B456 8
LCT (Optional) B457 7
1-bin Tray (Optional) B480 3 NOTE 2)
Shift Tray (Optional) B510 13 NOTE 2)
Duplex Unit (Optional NOTE 1)) B509 5
By-pass Tray (Optional NOTE B490 6
1))
Interchange Unit B481 4
(Optional NOTE 1))
Bridge Unit (Optional) B482 12 NOTE 2)
1000-sheet Finisher (Optional) B408 10
Adjustment Table (Optional) B488 9
500-sheet Finisher (Optional) B458 11
Key Counter Bracket (Optional) B508
Fax Fax Option (Optional) B750
G3 Interface Unit (Optional) B751
Memory Unit (Optional) G578
Handset (Optional) B433
Printer/ PS3 (Optional) B769
Scanner IEEE1394 (Optional) B581
IEEE1284 (Optional) B679
Wireless LAN (Optional) G813
Bluetooth B736
Media Link Board (Optional) B609
Data Overwrite Security Unit B735
(Optional)
NOTE: 1) N. America: ARDF, Duplex Unit, By-pass Tray and Interchange Unit are
standard.
Asia (except China): ARDF is standard.
2) The color of the exterior is changed to blue.
B156/B220 7-4 SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SPECIFICATIONS
[F]
[A]
I/F Card Slot
A File Format
Converter
B Option
SD Card Slot
1 Option
[B] 2 Option
3 Service
[D]
[E]
[C]
B156I402.WMF
Machine
Item Remarks
Code
USB 2.0: Standard
Ethernet: Standard
File Format Converter: [A] B609
IEEE 802.11b: [B] G813
Bluetooth: [C] B736 You can only install one of these at
IEEE 1284: [D] B679 the same time.
IEEE 1394: [E] B581

Hard Disk Drive Standard
Specifications
PostScript 3: [F] B769

Data overwrite security unit: [F] B735
SM 7-5 B156/B220
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SPECIFICATIONS
2.2 OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT

ARDF
Original Size: Standard sizes

Single-sided mode: A3 to A5, DLT to HLT
Double-sided mode: A3 to A4, DLT to LT
Non-standard sizes (Single-sided mode only)
Max. width 297 mm
Min. width 105 mm
Max. length 1,260 mm
Min. length 128 mm
Original Weight: Single-sided mode: 52 to 128 g/m2, 14 to 34 lb
Double-sided mode: 52 to 105 g/m2, 14 to 28 lb
Table Capacity: 30 sheets (80 g/m2)
Original Position: Center
Separation: FRR with feed belt
Original Transport: Roller transport
Original Feed Order: From the top original
Reproduction Range: 25 to 200 % (Sub scan direction only)
Power Source: DC 24 V, 5 V (from the copier)
Power Consumption: 50 W
Dimensions (W x D x H): 550 x 470 x 110 mm
Weight: 10 kg
Bridge Unit
Paper Size: Standard sizes

A6 lengthwise to A3
HLT to DLT
Non-standard sizes
Width: 100 to 305 mm
Length: 148 to 432 mm
Paper Weight: 52 g/m2 to 135 g/m2, 16 lb to 42 lb
Power Source: DC 24 V, 5 V (form the copier/printer)
Weight 3.0 kg (6.6 lbs)
B156/B220 7-6 SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SPECIFICATIONS
By-pass Tray Unit

A6 lengthwise to A3
HLT to DLT
Non-standard sizes
Width: 90 to 305 mm (3" to 12")
Length: 148 to 457.2 mm (5.83" to 18")
Paper Weight: 60 g/m2 to 163 g/m2, 16 lb to 43.6 lb
Weight: 3 kg (6.6 lbs)
Duplex Unit

A5 lengthwise to A3
HLT to DLT
Non-standard sizes
Tray Capacity: 1 sheet
Power Source: DC 24 V, 5 V
Weight: 6 kg
Interchange Unit

A6 lengthwise to A3
HLT to DLT
Non-standard sizes
Specifications

Weight: 1.6 kg
SM 7-7 B156/B220
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SPECIFICATIONS
LCT
Paper Size: A4 sideways/LT sideways

Tray Capacity: 2,000 sheets (80 g/m2, 20lb)
Remaining Paper Detection: 5 steps (100%, 75%, 50%, 25%, Near end)
Power Source: DC 24 V, 5 V (from copier/printer)
Power Consumption: 30 W (Max.)/25 W (Ave.)
Weight: 25 kg (55 lbs)
Size (W x D x H): 540 x 600 x 270 mm
Paper Tray Unit
Paper Feed System: FRR

Paper Height Detection: 4 steps (100%, 50%, Near End, and Empty)
Capacity: 500 sheets x 2 trays
Paper Weight: 60 to 128 g/m2 (16 to 34 lb.)
Paper Size: A3 SEF to A5, DLT SEF to HLT
Power Source: DC 24V, 5V (from the main frame)
Power Consumption: Less than 30 W
Weight: 25 kg (33 lb.)
Shift Tray Unit
Paper Size: Standard Size:

A5 lengthwise to A3
HLT lengthwise to DLT
Non-standard Size:
Paper Width: 90 to 297 mm
Paper Length: 148 to 432 mm
Paper Weight: 60 to 105 g/m, 16 to 28 lbs.
Tray Capacity: 125 sheets (80 g/m, 20 lbs.): B4 or larger
250 sheets (80 g/m, 20 lbs.): A4 or smaller
Weight: 1.1 kg
Size (W x D x H): 530 mm x 410 mm x 120 mm
B156/B220 7-8 SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SPECIFICATIONS
1-Bin Tray Unit
Paper Size: Standard Size:

A5 Lengthwise to A3
HLT Lengthwise to DLT
Non-standard Size:
Paper Width: 90 to 297 mm
Paper Length: 148 to 432 mm
Paper Weight: 60 ~ 105 g/m, 16 ~ 28 lbs.
Tray Capacity: 125 sheets (80 g/m, 20 lbs.)
Power Consumption: 0.5 W
Weight: 1.1 kg
Size (W x D x H): 530 mm x 435 mm x 120 mm
500-Sheet Finisher
Paper Size: A3, B4, A4, B5 sideways (Metric)

DLT, LG, LT (Inch)
Paper Weight 52 to 128 g/m2, 14 to 34 lb.
Staple Capacity: 30 sheets (80 g/m2, 20 lb)
Stack Capacity 500 sheets (A4/LT or smaller: 80 g/m2, 20 lb.)
(Maximum): 250 sheets (A3, B4, DLT and LG: 80 g/m2, 20 lb.)
Stapling Positions: 1
Staple Replenishment: Cartridge (3,000 staples/cartridge)
Power Source: DC 24 V, 5 V (from the copier/printer)
Weight: 8.3 kg (18.4 lbs.)
Specifications
SM 7-9 B156/B220
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SPECIFICATIONS
1000-sheet Finisher
Upper Tray
Paper Size: A3 to A6
DLT to HLT
Paper Weight: 60 to 157 g/m2 (16 to 42 lb)
Paper Capacity: 250 sheets (A4 sideways/LT sideways or smaller: 80
g/m2, 20lb)
50 sheets (A3, B4, DLT, LG: 80 g/m2, 20 lb)
Lower Tray
Paper Size: No staple mode:
A3 to B5
DLT to HLT
Staple mode:
A3, B4, A4, B5
DLT to LT
Paper Weight: No staple mode: 60 to 157 g/m2 (16 ~ 42 lb)
Staple mode: 64 to 90 g/m2 (17 ~ 24 lb)
Stapler Capacity: 30 sheets (A3, B4, DLT, LG)
50 sheets (A4, B5 sideways, LT)
Paper Capacity: No staple mode:
1,000 sheets (A4/LT or smaller: 80 g/m2, 20 lb)
500 sheets (A3, B4, DLT, LG: 80 g/m2, 20 lb)
Staple mode:
(80 g/m2, 20 lb, number of sets)
Set Size 10 to 50
2 to 9
Size 10 to 30 31 to 50
A4/LT sideways
100 100 to 20 100 to 20
B5 sideways
A4/LT Lengthwise 100 50 to 10 50 to 10
A3, B4, DLT, LG 50 50 to 10
Staple positions: 1 Staple: 2 positions (Front, Rear)

2 Staples: 2 positions (Upper, Left)
Staple Replenishment: Cartridge (5,000 staples/cartridge)
Power Source: DC 24 V, 5 V (from the copier/printer)
Weight: 25 kg (55.2 lbs)
Dimensions (W x D x H): 527 x 520 x 790 mm (20.8" x 20.5" x 31.1")
B156/B220 7-10 SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
1000-SHEET FINISHER
B408
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA

TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT............................................1

1.1 MAIN PCB .................................................................................................... 1
1.2 STAPLER UNIT............................................................................................ 2
1.3 MOTORS...................................................................................................... 3
1.3.1 SHIFT MOTOR.................................................................................... 3
1.3.2 STAPLER MOTOR .............................................................................. 3
1.3.3 UPPER TRANSPORT MOTOR AND EXIT MOTOR ........................... 4
1.3.4 LOWER TRANSPORT MOTOR .......................................................... 4
1.4 MOTORS AND SENSORS........................................................................... 5
1.4.1 PREPARATION................................................................................... 5
1.4.2 STACK HEIGHT SENSOR .................................................................. 6
1.4.3 STAPLER TRAY PAPER SENSOR..................................................... 6
1.4.4 LOWER TRAY LIFT MOTOR .............................................................. 7
1.4.5 STACK FEED-OUT MOTOR ............................................................... 7
2. TROUBLESHOOTING ....................................................................8
2.1 JAM DETECTION......................................................................................... 8
3. SERVICE TABLES..........................................................................9
3.1 DIP SWITCH SETTINGS ............................................................................. 9
4. DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS .........................................................10

4.1 GENERAL LAYOUT ................................................................................... 10
4.2 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT...................................................... 11
4.3 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DESCRIPTION............................................ 13
4.4 DRIVE LAYOUT ......................................................................................... 15
4.5 JUNCTION GATES .................................................................................... 16
Upper Tray Mode ................................................................................... 16
Sort/Stack Mode .................................................................................... 16
Staple Mode........................................................................................... 16
4.6 UPPER TRAY............................................................................................. 17
4.7 LOWER TRAY UP/DOWN MECHANISMS ................................................ 18
4.8 PAPER SHIFT MECHANISM ..................................................................... 19
4.9 JOGGER UNIT PAPER POSITIONING MECHANISM............................... 20
4.10 EXIT GUIDE PLATE................................................................................. 21
4.11 STAPLER MECHANISM .......................................................................... 22
4.12 STAPLER UNIT MOVEMENT MECHANISM ........................................... 23
4.13 PAPER FEED-OUT MECHANISM ........................................................... 24
SM i B408
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
MAIN PCB
CAUTION

: E-ring
1.1 MAIN PCB
[A]
[B]
1000-Sheet
Finisher
B408
B408R109.WMF B408R110.WMF
1. Rear cover [A] ( x 2)

2. Main PCB [B] ( x 4, All )
SM 1 B408
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
STAPLER UNIT
1.2 STAPLER UNIT

1. Side cover [A] ( x 2) [B]
[C]
2. Open exit guide plate [B]
3. Upper side cover [C] ( x 2)
[A]
B408R102.WMF
[D]
4. Front cover support plate [D] ( x 1)
[E]
5. Front cover [E]
[F]
6. Front inner cover [F] ( x 2)
B408R113.WMF
7. Harness [G]
8. Unhook the spring [H]
9. Turn the stapler unit [I] and take it
out. [J]
10. Bracket [J] ( x 2)
[H]
[G] [I]
B408R114.WMF
B408 2 SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
MOTORS
1.3 MOTORS
1.3.1 SHIFT MOTOR
1. Rear cover (1.1)
2. Shift motor [A] ( x 2, x 1) [A]
B408R123.WMF
1.3.2 STAPLER MOTOR
1000-Sheet
Finisher
B408
1. Rear cover (1.1)
2. Stapler motor [A] ( x 2, x 1)
[A]
B408R124.WMF
SM 3 B408
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
MOTORS
1.3.3 UPPER TRANSPORT MOTOR AND EXIT MOTOR
1. Rear cover (1.1)

2. Motor assembly [A] ( x 4, x 2)
[A]
3. Upper transport motor [B] ( x 4)
4. Exit motor [C] ( x 4)
[B]
[C]
B408R112.WMF
1.3.4 LOWER TRANSPORT MOTOR
1. Main PCB (1.1)

2. Lower transport motor [A] ( x 2, x
1)
[A]
B408R111.WMF
B408 4 SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
MOTORS AND SENSORS
1.4 MOTORS AND SENSORS

[A]
1.4.1 PREPARATION
1. Front cover and inner cover (1.2) [B]

2. Upper side cover [A] ( x 2)
3. Upper tray [B] ( x 1)
[C]
B408R116.WMF
[E]
4. Lower side cover [C] ( x 2)
1000-Sheet
Finisher
5. Loosen the 2 screws [D]. [D]
B408
6. Lower the lower tray guide plate [E].
B408R117.WMF
7. Guide plate [F] ( x 4)
[F]
B408R118.WMF
SM 5 B408
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
MOTORS AND SENSORS
1.4.2 STACK HEIGHT SENSOR
1. Stack height sensor assembly [A] ( x

1) [A]
2. Stack height sensor [B] ( x 1)
[B]
B408R121.WMF
1.4.3 STAPLER TRAY PAPER SENSOR
1. Stapler tray paper sensor [A] ( x 1)
B408R120.WMF
[A]
B408 6 SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
MOTORS AND SENSORS
1.4.4 LOWER TRAY LIFT MOTOR
1. Lower tray lift motor [A] ( x 2, x 1)
[A]
B408R119.WMF
1.4.5 STACK FEED-OUT MOTOR
1000-Sheet
Finisher
B408
1. Stack feed-out motor [A] ( x 2, x 1)
[A]
B408R122.WMF
SM 7 B408
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
JAM DETECTION
2. TROUBLESHOOTING
2.1 JAM DETECTION
Mode
Jam Content
Shift Staple
Entrance sensor: The entrance sensor does not turn on
On check within the normal time after the main
machine exit sensor turns on
Entrance sensor: The entrance sensor does not turn off

Off check within the normal time after it turns on.
Lower tray exit sensor: The lower tray exit sensor does not turn
On check on within the normal time after the
entrance sensor turns off.
Tray exit sensor: The tray exit sensor does not turn off

Off check within the normal time after it turns on.
Stapler tray entrance sensor: The stapler tray entrance sensor does
On check not switch on within the normal time
after the entrance sensor switched on.
Stapler tray entrance sensor: The staple tray entrance sensor does
Off check not turn off within the normal time after it
turns on.
Lower tray exit sensor: The lower exit sensor does not turn on
On check after the feed-out pawl feeds out the
outputs.
Lower tray exit sensor: The lower exit sensor turns on when the
Off check feed-out pawl returns to its home
position after feeding out the outputs.
B408 8 SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
DIP SWITCH SETTINGS
3. SERVICE TABLES
3.1 DIP SWITCH SETTINGS
The DIP switches should not be set to any combination other than those listed in
the table below.
SW100
Description
1 2
0 0 Normal operation mode (Default)
1 0 Packing mode.
Before packing the machine, do the following: Set switch 1 to 1 then back to
zero. The lower tray moves to the lowest position. Then turn off the main switch.
After unpacking the machine, do the following: After turning the main switch back
on, the lower tray returns to home position automatically.
1000-Sheet
Finisher
B408
SM 9 B408
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
GENERAL LAYOUT
4. DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS
4.1 GENERAL LAYOUT
2 3
1
13 4
5
6
12
7
11
10
8
9
B408D101.WMF
1. Upper Tray 8. Stapler

2. Upper Tray Exit Roller 9. Stack Feed-out Belt
3. Entrance Roller 10. Positioning Roller
4. Tray Junction Gate 11. Shift Roller
5. Upper Transport Roller 12. Lower Tray
6. Stapler Junction Gate 13. Lower Tray Exit Roller
7. Lower Transport Rollers
B408 10 SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
ELECTRICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT
4.2 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT
1 2 3
11
4
5
10
9 7
8 6 12
B408D102.WMF
1000-Sheet
Finisher
B408
19
13
18 14
20
15
16
21 17
B408D103.WMF
1. Upper Cover Switch 12. Jogger Fence HP Sensor

2. Paper Limit Sensor 13. Positioning Roller Solenoid
3. Entrance Sensor 14. Stapler HP Sensor
4. Exit Guide Plate Motor 15. Stapler Tray Entrance Sensor
5. Exit Guide Plate HP Sensor 16. Stapler Tray Paper Sensor
6. Front Door Safety Switch 17. Stapler Hammer Motor
7. Stack Height Sensor 18. Staple Sheet Sensor
8. Lower Tray Exit Sensor 19. Stack Feed-out Belt HP Sensor
9. Lower Tray Upper Limit Switch 20. Stapler Rotation HP Sensor
10. Shift HP Sensor 21. Staple Sensor
11. Shift Motor
SM 11 B408
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
22
32
31
30
29
28
27 23
26
25
24 B408D104.WMF
22. Tray Junction Gate Solenoid

23. Lower Tray Lift Motor
24. Lower Tray Lower Limit Sensor
25. Stapler Motor
26. Jogger Fence Motor
27. Stack Feed-out Motor
28. Main Board
29. Lower Transport Motor
30. Stapler Junction Gate Solenoid
31. Exit Motor
32. Upper Transport Motor
B408 12 SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
4.3 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DESCRIPTION

Symbol Name Function Index No.
Motors
Upper Drives the entrance roller and upper transport
M1 32
Transport rollers.
Lower Drives the lower transport rollers and the
M2 29
Transport positioning roller.
M3 Jogger Fence Drives the jogger fences. 26
M4 Staple Hammer Drives the staple hammer. 17
M5 Stack Feed-out Drives the stack feed-out belt. 27
M6 Exit Guide Plate Opens and closes the exit guide plate. 4
M7 Exit Drives the exit roller. 31
M8 Lower Tray Lift Moves the lower tray up or down. 23
M9 Shift Moves the shift roller from side to side. 11
M10 Stapler Moves the stapler unit from side to side. 25
Sensors
Entrance Detects copy paper entering the finisher and
S1 3
checks for misfeeds.
1000-Sheet
Paper Limit Detects when the paper stack height in the
Finisher
S2 2
B408
upper tray is at its limit.
Jogger Fence Detects when the jogger fence is at home
S3 12
HP position.
S4 Shift HP Detects when the shift roller is at home position. 10
Stack Feed-out Detects when the stack feed-out belt is at home
S5 19
Belt HP position.
S6 Stapler HP Detects when the stapler is at home position. 14
Exit Guide Plate Detects when the exit guide plate is at home
S7 5
HP position.
Stapler Tray Detects copy paper entering the stapler tray and
S8 15
Entrance checks for misfeeds.
S9 Lower Tray Exit Checks for misfeeds. 8
S10 Stack Height Detects the top of the copy paper stack. 7
Lower Tray Detects when the lower tray is at its lower limit
S11 24
Lower Limit position.
Stapler Tray Detects when there is copy paper in the stapler
S12 16
Paper tray.
S13 Staple Sheet Detects the leading edge of the staple sheet. 18
Stapler Rotation Detects when the staple hammer is at home
S14 20
HP position.
Staple Detects whether there are staples in the staple
S15 21
cartridge.
Solenoids
Tray Junction Drives the tray junction gate.
SOL1 22
Gate
Stapler Junction Drives the stapler junction gate.
SOL2 30
Gate
SM 13 B408
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA

Positioning Moves the positioning roller.
SOL3 13
Roller
Switches
Lower Tray Detects when the lower tray is at its upper limit
SW1 9
Upper Limit position.
Front Door Cuts the dc power when the front door is
SW2 6
Safety opened.
Upper Cover Cuts the dc power when the upper cover is
SW3 1
opened.
PCBs
Main Controls the finisher and communicates with the
PCB1 28
copier/printer.
B408 14 SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
DRIVE LAYOUT
4.4 DRIVE LAYOUT
1
2 4 5
B408D106.WMF
B408D105.WMF
1000-Sheet
Finisher
B408
7
B408D107.WMF
1. Exit Motor 6. Lower Tray Lift Motor

2. Upper Transport Motor 7. Stack Feed-out Motor
3. Lower Transport Motor 8. Jogger Motor
4. Shift Motor 9. Stapler Motor
5. Exit Guide Plate Motor
SM 15 B408
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
JUNCTION GATES
4.5 JUNCTION GATES
[A]
[C]
[B]
[D]
B408D108.WMF
Depending on the finishing mode, the copies are directed up, straight through, or
down by the combination of the tray junction gate [A] and stapler junction gate [B].
These gates are controlled by the tray junction gate solenoid [C] and stapler
junction gate solenoid [D].
Upper Tray Mode

The tray junction gate solenoid remains off. The copies go up to the upper tray.
Sort/Stack Mode
The tray junction gate solenoid turns on and the stapler junction gate solenoid
remains off. The copies are sent to the lower tray directly.
Staple Mode
The tray junction gate solenoid and the stapler junction gate solenoid both turn on.
The copies go down to the jogger unit.
B408 16 SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
UPPER TRAY
4.6 UPPER TRAY
[A]
B408D109.WMF
When the paper limit sensor [A] switches on during feed-out for each of three
1000-Sheet
Finisher
consecutive sheets of paper, paper overflow is detected.
B408
SM 17 B408
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
LOWER TRAY UP/DOWN MECHANISMS
4.7 LOWER TRAY UP/DOWN MECHANISMS
[G]
[B] [F]
[A]
[D]
[E]
[C]
B408D112.WMF
The vertical position of the lower tray [A] depends on the height of the copied paper
stack on the lower tray. The stack height sensor feeler [B] contacts the top of the
stack, and the lower tray lift motor [C] controls the tray height.
When the lower tray reaches its lowest possible position, the actuator [D] turns on
the lower tray lower limit sensor [E], and copying stops.
Tray Up
When the copy paper on the tray is removed, the stack height sensor [F] turns off
and the tray lifts up. Then, the tray stops when the sensor turns on again (the tray
pushes up the feeler).
If the stack height sensor fails, the lower tray upper limit switch [G] detects the tray
and stops the motor. This is a safety measure against stack height sensor failure.
Sort/Stack Mode (Tray Down)

Every five sheets of paper, the tray goes down until the sensor turns off again.
Then, it goes up until the sensor is on again.
Staple Mode (Tray Down)

After a stapled copy is fed out, the tray goes up for 220 ms and stops for 300 ms.
Then, it goes down for 1 second, waits for 500 ms, then goes up until the sensor
turns on.
B408 18 SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PAPER SHIFT MECHANISM
4.8 PAPER SHIFT MECHANISM
[F] [C]
[B]
[A]
[D]
[E]
1000-Sheet
Finisher
B408D110.WMF
B408
In the sort/stack mode, the shift roller [A] moves from side to side to separate the
sets of copies.
The horizontal position of the shift roller is controlled by the shift motor [B] and the
shift gear disk [C]. After the trailing edge of the copy passes the upper transport
roller, the shift motor turns on, driving the shift gear disk and the link [D].
After the paper is delivered to the lower tray [E], the shift roller moves to its home
position, which is detected by the shift HP sensor [F]. Then, when the trailing edge
of the next copy passes the upper transport roller, the shift roller shifts again. This
operation is done every sheet.
When the trailing edge of each page in the next set of copies passes the upper
transport roller, the shift roller shifts in the opposite direction.
SM 19 B408
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
JOGGER UNIT PAPER POSITIONING MECHANISM
4.9 JOGGER UNIT PAPER POSITIONING MECHANISM
B408D113.WMF [B] [F]
[E]
[A]
[C]
B408D114.WMF
[D]
In staple mode, each sheet of copy paper is vertically and horizontally aligned
when it arrives in the jogger unit.
For the vertical paper alignment, the positioning roller solenoid [A] turns on shortly
after the stapler tray entrance sensor [B] turns off, and the positioning roller [C]
pushes the copy against the bottom of the stack stopper [D].
For the horizontal paper alignment, the jogger front fence [E] and the rear fence [F]
move to the waiting position, which is 18 mm away from the side of the paper.
When aligning the paper vertically, the jogger fence moves in 14 mm from the
waiting position. After the vertical position has been aligned, the jogger fence
pushes the paper 4 mm against the rear fence to align the paper horizontally. Then
the jogger fence moves back to the previous position.
B408 20 SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
EXIT GUIDE PLATE
4.10 EXIT GUIDE PLATE
[B] [C] [A]

[D]
1000-Sheet
B408D111.WMF
Finisher
B408
When stacking a large size of paper (such as A3, DLT) in the jogger unit, the
leading edge of the paper reaches the exit rollers. To prevent the paper from
running into the exit rollers and not being aligned correctly, the exit guide plate [A]
is moved up to make a gap between the exit rollers. This operation is done for all
paper sizes, but is only needed for the larger sizes.
The exit guide plate motor [B] and exit roller release cam [C] control the exit guide
plate movement. When the exit guide plate motor starts, the cam turns and the exit
guide plate moves up. When stapling is finished, the exit guide plate motor turns on
again to close the exit guide plate. When the exit guide plate HP sensor [D] turns
on, the motor stops.
SM 21 B408
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
STAPLER MECHANISM
4.11 STAPLER MECHANISM
[E] [B]
[D]
[C]
[A]
B408D116.WMF
The staple hammer motor [A] drives the staple hammer.

The staple sheet sensor [B] detects the leading edge of the staple sheet at the
stapling position to prevent the hammer from operating if there are no staples at
the stapling position.
If there is no staple cartridge in the stapler unit or no staples in the staple cartridge,
staple end is indicated on the operation panel. The stapler sensor [C] detects this.
The stapler rotation HP sensor [D] checks whether the staple hammer mechanism
returns to home position after each stack has been stapled.
When excessive load is applied to the staple hammer motor, the copier detects a
staple jam. When a staple jam has occurred, the jammed staple is inside the staple
cartridge [E]. Therefore, the jammed staple can be removed easily after pulling out
the staple cartridge.
B408 22 SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
STAPLER UNIT MOVEMENT MECHANISM
4.12 STAPLER UNIT MOVEMENT MECHANISM
[B]
[A]
B408D117.WMF
The stapler motor moves the stapler [A] from side to side. After the start key is
pressed, the stapler moves from its home position to the stapling position.
1000-Sheet
Finisher
B408
If two-staple-position mode is selected, the stapler moves to the front stapling
position first, then moves to the rear stapling position. However, for the next copy
set, it staples in the reverse order (at the rear side first, then at the front side).
After the job is completed, the stapler moves back to its home position. The stapler
HP sensor [B] detects this.
SM 23 B408
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PAPER FEED-OUT MECHANISM
4.13 PAPER FEED-OUT MECHANISM
[A]
[B]
[C]
[D]
B408D118.WMF
After the copies have been stapled, the stack feed-out motor [A] starts. The pawl
[B] on the stack feed-out belt [C] transports the set of stapled copies up and feeds
it to the shift roller. The shift roller takes over stack feed-out after the leading edge
reaches this roller.
Just before the stapled stack passes through the lower tray exit sensor, the stack-
feed-out motor turns off until the shift rollers have completely fed the stack out to
the lower tray. Then, the stack-feed-out motor turns on again until the pawl [B]
actuates the stack feed-out belt home position sensor [D].
B408 24 SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B456
PAPER TRAY UNIT
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA

TABLE OF CONTENTS

1.1 REAR COVER.............................................................................................. 1
1.2 PAPER FEED CLUTCHES........................................................................... 1
1.3 LIFT MOTORS ............................................................................................. 2
1.4 PAPER FEED MOTOR ................................................................................ 2
1.5 CONTROLLER BOARD ............................................................................... 2
1.6 PAPER FEED UNIT ..................................................................................... 3
1.7 PICKUP, FEED, AND SEPARATION ROLLERS ......................................... 4
1.8 UPPER LIMIT, PAPER END, AND RELAY SENSORS................................ 4
2. DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS ...........................................................5

2.1 MECHANICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT ...................................................... 5
2.2 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT........................................................ 6
2.3 PAPER FEED............................................................................................... 7
Paper Feed Mechanism........................................................................... 7
Drive Path ................................................................................................ 7
2.4 PAPER SIZE DETECTION........................................................................... 8
2.5 REVERSE ROLLER AND PICK-UP ROLLER RELEASE ............................ 9
2.6 PAPER LIFT ............................................................................................... 10
2.7 PAPER HEIGHT AND END DETECTION .................................................. 11
Paper Height Detection.......................................................................... 11
Paper End and Bottom Plate ................................................................. 12
SM i B456
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
REAR COVER
CAUTION
Paper Tray
B456
Unit
: E-ring
1.1 REAR COVER

1. Joint brackets [A] ( x 1 each)
[A]
[B]
B456R002.WMF
[A]
1.2 PAPER FEED CLUTCHES
1. Rear cover ( 1.1)
2. Brackets [A][B] ( x 1)
[A]
3. Clutches [C][D] (1 bearing, x 1)
[C]
[B]
[D]
B456R008.WMF
SM 1 B456
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
LIFT MOTORS
1.3 LIFT MOTORS

1. Rear cover ( 1.1) [A]
2. Lift motors [A][B] ( x 2, x 1)
[B]
B456R005.WMF
1.4 PAPER FEED MOTOR

2. Paper feed motor [A] ( x 1,
x 3)
NOTE: Remove the motor with
its bracket, then
separate the motor from
the bracket.
[A]
B456R007.WMF
1.5 CONTROLLER BOARD

2. Controller board [A] ( x 7, x 2)
[A]
B456R006.WMF
B456 2 SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PAPER FEED UNIT
1.6 PAPER FEED UNIT

1. Vertical transport guide plate of the
copier [A] ( x 1)
2. Vertical transport guide plate of the
paper feed unit [B]
Paper Tray
[A]
B456
Unit
[B]
B456R001.WMF
3. Paper feed clutch ( 1.2)

4. Gears [C], [D]
5. x 1 [E]
[C]
[E]
[C]
B456R003.WMF
6. Paper feed unit [F] ( x 2)
[F]
B456R004.WMF
SM 3 B456
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PICKUP, FEED, AND SEPARATION ROLLERS
1.7 PICKUP, FEED, AND SEPARATION ROLLERS

1. Paper tray [A] [B]
2. Pickup roller [B] (1 hook)
3. Paper feed roller [C] ( x 1) [C]
4. Separation roller [D] ( x 1)
[D]
[A]
B456R009.WMF
1.8 UPPER LIMIT, PAPER END, AND RELAY SENSORS

1. Paper feed unit ( 1.6)
[D] [E] [B]
2. Relay sensor bracket [A] ( x 1) [A]
3. Relay sensor [B]
4. While pushing the release lever
[C], remove the following:
Upper limit sensor [D]
Paper end sensor [E].
[C]
B456R113.WMF
B456 4 SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
MECHANICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT
2.1 MECHANICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Paper Tray
B456
Unit
10
21
11
20
12
19
13
18
17 16 15 14
B456D001.WMF
1. Paper size switch 1 12. Reverse roller

2. Paper size switch 3 13. Paper guide
3. Paper height sensor 1 14. Tray lift arm
4. Paper height sensor 2 15. Lift arm shaft
5. Pickup roller 16. Bottom plate
6. Paper end sensor 17. Paper size switch 4
7. Feed roller 18. Paper size switch 2
8. Relay sensor 19. End plate
9. Relay roller 20. Tray
10. Idle roller 21. Copier
11. Right cover
NOTE: Listed above are the components of tray 1 (upper tray). Tray 2 (lower tray)
has the same components as tray 1.
SM 5 B456
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
3
4
2 5
1 6
7
15
9
14
10
11
13
12 B456D002.WMF
1. Paper size switch 2 9. Paper feed clutch

2. Paper size switch 1 10. Tray lift motor
3. Paper size switch 3 11. Right cover switch
4. Paper size switch 4 12. Relay sensor
5. Main board 13. Anti-condensation heater (Optional)
6. Paper feed motor 14. Paper height sensor 2
7. Paper end sensor 15. Paper height sensor 1
8. Upper limit sensor
NOTE: Listed above are the components of tray 1 (upper tray), except for the right
cover switch and anti-condensation heater (there is only one each of these
for the entire unit). Tray 2 (lower tray) has the same components as tray 1.
B456 6 SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PAPER FEED
2.3 PAPER FEED

[A]
[B]
Paper Tray
B456
[E]
Unit
[C]
[D]
B456D004.WMF
Paper Feed Mechanism

An FRR (feed and reverse roller) feed mechanism is used ( Paper Feed
Methods).
Drive Path
Tray 1 (upper tray) and tray 2 (lower tray) have identical paper feed systems. The
paper feed motor [A] drives all the rollers in the unit. The paper feed clutches [B]
control the pickup roller [E], paper feed roller [C], and reverse roller [D].
SM 7 B456
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PAPER SIZE DETECTION
2.4 PAPER SIZE DETECTION
[C]
[D] [E]
[F]
[A]
[B]
B456D007.WMF
Four paper size switches [C to F] detect paper size. They use the paper tray
actuator [A], which is linked with the end plate [B]. The table lists the combinations
of switch status and detected paper size.
Models Switch Location

North America Europe/Asia 1 [C] 2 [D] 3 [E] 4 [F]
11" x 17" SEF 11" x 17" SEF 0 0 1 0
A3 SEF A3 SEF 0 1 0 1
81/2" x 14" SEF B4 SEF 1 0 1 1
81/2" x 11" SEF A4 SEF 0 1 1 0
81/2" x 11" LEF 81/2" x 11" LEF 1 1 0 1
A4 LEF A4 LEF 1 0 1 0
B5 LEF B5 LEF 0 1 0 0
51/2" x 81/2" LEF 51/2" x 81/2" LEF 1 0 0 0
1: Pushed, 0: Not pushed
NOTE: 1) Other paper sizes cannot be automatically detected. The user must
select them at the operation panel with a user tool.
2) The machine disables feed from a tray if the paper size cannot be
detected (when the paper size actuator is broken or no tray is installed).
B456 8 SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
REVERSE ROLLER AND PICK-UP ROLLER RELEASE
2.5 REVERSE ROLLER AND PICK-UP ROLLER RELEASE
[E] [C]
Paper Tray
B456
Unit
[A]
[B]
B456D108.WMF
[E]
[A]
[D] B456D109.WMF
The pickup roller and separation roller release the paper when it is not being fed.
This helps remove jammed paper easily.
When the paper tray [A] is not in the machine, the separation roller [B] is away from
the paper feed roller [C] and the pickup roller stays in its upper position.
When the paper tray is pushed into the machine, it pushes the release lever [E].
This causes the pickup roller [D] to go down into contact with the top sheet of
paper, and causes the reverse roller [B] to move up and contact the paper feed
roller.
SM 9 B456
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PAPER LIFT
2.6 PAPER LIFT

[B]
[A]
[C]
B456D005.WMF
The tray lift motor [C] raises/lowers the tray bottom plate [A] (via the coupling gear
[B]), based on the signals from the paper size switches, paper end sensor, and
upper limit sensor.
The motor starts to lift the plate when all of the following three conditions exist: any
of the paper size switches is pushed, the paper end sensor actuator is in the
sensor, and the upper limit sensor actuator is out of the sensor. The motor stops
lifting the plate when the upper limit sensor actuator enters the sensor.
B456 10 SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PAPER HEIGHT AND END DETECTION
2.7 PAPER HEIGHT AND END DETECTION

Paper Height Detection [B]
[A] [C]
Paper Tray
B456
Unit
[D]
B456D006.WMF
Two paper height sensors detect the amount of paper in the tray. The actuator [A]
on the lift arm shaft [D] turns counterclockwise, passing through the paper height
sensor 2 [C] and the paper height sensor 1 [B].
Remaining paper Paper height sensor 2 [C] Paper height sensor 1 [B]
Full ON ON
Nearly full OFF ON
Near end OFF OFF
On: Actuator inside sensor, Off: Actuator not inside sensor
SM 11 B456
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PAPER HEIGHT AND END DETECTION
Paper End and Bottom Plate
[A]
[B]
[C]
B456D106.WMF
The paper end sensor [A] detects paper end. When the paper is all used, the paper
end sensor feeler [B] drops into the cutout [C] in the tray bottom plate.
When paper end is detected, the tray lift motor ( 2.6) lowers the bottom plate.
B456 12 SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B457
LARGE CAPACITY TRAY
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA

TABLE OF CONTENTS

1.1 TRAY............................................................................................................ 1
1.2 SENSORS .................................................................................................... 2
Paper Height Sensors of Paper Storage Side.......................................... 2
Left Fence HP Sensor/Paper End Sensor 2 ............................................ 2
1.3 CHANGING THE TRAY SIZE....................................................................... 3
1.4 TRAY LIFT MOTOR ..................................................................................... 3
1.5 TRAY MOTOR.............................................................................................. 4
1.6 MAIN BOARD............................................................................................... 4
1.7 STACK TRANSPORT CLUTCH ................................................................... 5
1.8 PAPER FEED CLUTCH ............................................................................... 5
1.9 PAPER FEED UNIT ..................................................................................... 6
1.10 PICKUP, FEED, AND SEPARATION ROLLERS ....................................... 7
1.11 UPPER LIMIT, PAPER END 1, AND RELAY SENSORS.......................... 7

2.3 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DESCRIPTIONS ......................................... 10
2.4 PAPER FEED............................................................................................. 11
2.5 SEPARATION ROLLER AND PICKUP ROLLER RELEASE...................... 12
2.6 TRAY LIFT.................................................................................................. 13
2.7 PAPER AMOUNT DETECTION ................................................................. 14
2.8 PAPER END DETECTION OF PAPER FEED SIDE .................................. 15
2.9 PAPER STACK TRANSPORT ................................................................... 16
SM i B457
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
TRAY
CAUTION

: E-ring
Capacity Tray
1.1 TRAY
Large
B457
While pressing the stopper [A]
attached to the guide rail, pull out the
large capacity tray.
NOTE: When reinstalling the tray, set
the tray on the guide rail and
carefully push the tray in,
making sure to keep the tray
level.
[A]
B457R001.WMF
SM 1 B457
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SENSORS
1.2 SENSORS
[B]
Paper Height Sensors of Paper
Storage Side [A]
[C]
1. Tray ( 1.1)
2. Rear fence [A] ( x 2)
3. Rear fence bracket [B] ( x 2)
4. Paper height sensors [C] ( x 2)
B457R002.WMF
Left Fence HP Sensor/Paper End Sensor 2

5. Bottom cover [D] ( x 1) [E]
[F]
6. Left fence HP sensor [E] [D]
7. Paper end sensor 2 (paper
storage side) [F]
B457R003.WMF
B457 2 SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CHANGING THE TRAY SIZE
1.3 CHANGING THE TRAY SIZE

[A]
1. Fence screws [A through D] [B]
[C]
2. Change the position of the fences.
[D]
NOTE: Before fastening the screws,
set paper in the tray.
Capacity Tray
Large
B457
B457R004.WMF
1.4 TRAY LIFT MOTOR

2. Right cover [B] ( x 2)
[B] [A]
B457R105.WMF
3. Tray lift motor [C] ( x 1 , x 3)
[C]
B457R005.WMF
SM 3 B457
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
TRAY MOTOR
1.5 TRAY MOTOR

2. Tray motor [A] ( x 1, x 3)
[A]
B457R006.WMF
1.6 MAIN BOARD

2. Main board [A] ( x #, x 1)
[A]
B457R007.WMF
B457 4 SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
STACK TRANSPORT CLUTCH
1.7 STACK TRANSPORT CLUTCH

2. Clutch bracket [A] ( x 1) [D]
[C]
3. Bushing [B]
[B]
4. Gear [C] [A]
5. Stack transport clutch [D]
( x 1)
Capacity Tray
Large
B457
B457R008.WMF
1.8 PAPER FEED CLUTCH

2. Paper feed clutch bracket [A]
( x 1)
3. Bushing [B] [A]
4. Paper feed clutch [C] ( x 1)
[C]
[B]
B457R009.WMF
SM 5 B457
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PAPER FEED UNIT
1.9 PAPER FEED UNIT

1. Paper feed clutch ( 1.8)
2. Gears [A][B]
3. x 1 [C]
[A]
[C]
[B]
B457R010.WMF
4. Open the vertical transport guide

plate [D].
5. Paper feed unit [E] ( x 2)
[E]
[D] B457R011.WMF
B457 6 SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PICKUP, FEED, AND SEPARATION ROLLERS
1.10 PICKUP, FEED, AND SEPARATION ROLLERS

1. Tray ( 1.1) [C]
[B]
2. Separation roller [A] ( x 1)
3. Feed roller [B] ( x 1)
4. Pickup roller [C]
[A]
Capacity Tray
Large
B457
B457R012.WMF
1.11 UPPER LIMIT, PAPER END 1, AND RELAY

SENSORS
[D] [E] [B]
1. Paper feed unit ( 1.9) [A]
2. Relay sensor bracket [A] ( x 1)
3. Relay sensor [B]
4. While pushing the release lever
[C], remove the following:
Upper limit sensor [D]
Paper end sensor 1 [E] (paper
feed side)
[C]
B457R013.WMF
SM 7 B457
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
1 2 3
4
10 7
B457D001.WMF
9 8
1. Pickup Roller 7. Paper Height Sensors 1, 2, 3

2. Upper Limit Sensor 8. Lower Limit Sensor
3. Paper Feed Roller 9. Paper End Sensor 2
4. Relay Sensor 10. Paper Height Sensors 4,5
5. Relay Roller
6. Separation Roller
B457 8 SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
1 2 3
4
5
6
7
Capacity Tray
Large
B457
8
9
B457D002.WMF
17
10
11
12
16 13
15
14
B457D003.WMF
1. Main board 10. Paper height sensors 1, 2, 3

2. Tray sensor 11. Lower limit sensor
3. Stack transport clutch 12. Upper limit sensor
4. Tray motor 13. Paper end sensor 1
5. Paper feed clutch 14. Relay sensor
6. Tray lift motor 15. Paper end sensor 2
7. Right cover switch 16. Left fence HP sensor
8. Paper size sensor 17. Paper height sensors 4, 5
9. Side fence sensor
SM 9 B457
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DESCRIPTIONS
2.3 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DESCRIPTIONS

Motors
M1 Tray Drives all rollers. 4
M2 Tray Lift Drives the paper tray up or down. 6
Sensors
Paper End 1 Informs the copier/printer when the paper in
(paper feed side) the right side (paper feed side) of the tray has
been used up. If there is a paper stack in the
S1 13
left side (paper storage side), this is moved
into the paper feed side. If there is no paper
stack in the left side, paper end is indicated.
Relay Detects the copy paper coming to the relay
S2 14
roller and checks for misfeeds.
Upper Limit Detects when the paper is at the correct paper
S3 12
feed height.
Lower Limit Detects when the tray is completely lowered,
S4 11
to stop the LCT motor.
Paper Height 1, 2, 3 Detects the amount of paper remaining in the
S5 10
right side of the tray.
Paper Height 4, 5 Detects the amount of paper remaining in the
S6 17
left side of the tray.
Left Fence HP Detects when the left fence is at its home
S7 16
position
S8 Tray Detects whether the tray is correctly set. 2
Side Fence Detects whether the side fence is open or
S9 closed. (The fence opens when the left-tray 9
paper stack is moving to the paper feed side.)
Paper Size Detects whether the side fence is at the LT or
S10 8
A4 position.
Paper End 2 Informs the copier/printer when there is no
S11 (paper storage side) paper in the left side (paper storage side) of 15
the tray.
Switches
SW1 Right Cover Detects whether the right cover is open. 7
Magnetic Clutches
MC1 Paper Feed Drives the paper feed roller. 5
Stack Transport Drives the rear fence of the paper storage
MC2 3
side.
PCBs
Main Controls the LCT and communicates with the
PCB1 1
copier/printer.
B457 10 SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PAPER FEED
2.4 PAPER FEED
[A]
Capacity Tray
Large
B457
[B]
[C]
B457D005.WMF
This products uses an FRR type paper feed mechanism.

The paper feed unit consists of the pickup roller [A], paper feed roller [B],
separation roller [C], and relay rollers.
There is a torque limiter in the back of the separation roller (ferrite powder type).
SM 11 B457
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SEPARATION ROLLER AND PICKUP ROLLER RELEASE
2.5 SEPARATION ROLLER AND PICKUP ROLLER

RELEASE
[E] [C]
[A]
[B]
B457D008.WMF
[E]
[A]
[D]
B457D009.WMF
To prevent the paper from being torn when pulling out the paper feed tray, the
separation and pickup rollers release automatically.
When the paper tray [A] is not inside the machine, the separation roller [B] is away
from the paper feed roller [C], and the pickup roller [D] stays in the upper position.
When the paper tray is set into the machine, it pushes the release lever [E]. This
causes the pickup roller [D] to go down into contact with the top sheet of paper and
the separation roller [B] to move up and contact the paper feed roller.
B457 12 SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
TRAY LIFT
2.6 TRAY LIFT
[B]
Capacity Tray
Large
[D]
B457
[A]
[E]
[C]
B457D010.WMF
[F]
B457D009.WMF
When the paper feed tray is put in the machine, the tray switch on the back turns
on and the tray lift motor [B] starts. The base plate lift shaft [C] is coupled to the lift
motor at the shaft [D], so the base plate [A] of the tray is lifted. After a short while,
the top of the paper stack contacts the pickup roller and lifts it up. Then the motor
stops lifting the plate when the upper limit sensor actuator enters the sensor (
2.2).
When paper in the tray is used up, the pick-up roller is gradually lowered, and the
actuator leaves the upper limit sensor [F]. When this happens, the lift motor begins
turning again. The tray will then be lifted until the actuator enters the upper limit
sensor again).
When the tray is removed from the copier, the coupling between the lift motor [B]
and base plate lift shaft [C] is broken and the base plate goes into a controlled free
fall (using a damper [E] to slow the fall and prevent damage).
SM 13 B457
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PAPER AMOUNT DETECTION
2.7 PAPER AMOUNT DETECTION

The table lists the sensors that are used to detect Paper Storage Side Paper Feed Side
Paper End
the amount of remaining paper. Paper Height

Sensor 1
Sensor 1
Paper feed side Paper end sensor 1 Paper Height

Sensor 5
Paper Height
Sensor 2
Paper height sensors 1 to 3
Paper storage side Paper height sensors 4 and 5 Paper Height
Sensor 4
Paper Height
Sensor 3
Paper end sensor 2
Paper End
Sensor 2
The table shows the change of sensor patterns B457D112.WMF

after the storage side and the feed side are fully
loaded.
Storage Feed
S F S F S F S F S F S F S F S F S F S F
side side
PE1
H1
H4 H2
H5 H3
PE2
Indication
^ >
When the paper
in the feed side is
The all used, the base
base As the paper in the feed plate returns to As the paper in the feed The LCT
Remarks plate is side is used, the base plate the bottom. The side is used, the base plate is
at the is lifted. paper in the is lifted. empty.
bottom. storage side is
carried to the feed
side.
PE12: Paper end sensor 12, H15: Paper height sensor 15, : Actuated, :Not actuated
The table shows the change of sensor patterns after the storage side is half loaded
and the feed side is fully loaded.
Storage Feed
S F S F S F S F S F S F S F S F S F
side side
PE1
H1
H4 H2
H5 H3
PE2
Indication
^ >
When the paper in the feed
side is all used, the base
The
plate returns to the bottom. As the paper in
base As the paper in the feed The LCT
The paper in the storage the feed side is
Remarks plate is side is used, the base plate is
side is carried to the feed used, the base
at the is lifted. empty.
side. The bottom plate is plate is lifted.
bottom.
lifted until paper end
sensor 1 detects the paper.
PE12: Paper end sensor 12, H15: Paper height sensor 15, : Actuated, :Not actuated
B457 14 SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PAPER END DETECTION OF PAPER FEED SIDE
2.8 PAPER END DETECTION OF PAPER FEED SIDE
[A]
[B]
Capacity Tray
Large
B457
[C]
B457D006.WMF
[E]
[D]
B457D007.WMF
The paper end sensor 1[A] detects when copy paper in the paper feed side runs
out.
When there is paper in the tray, the paper pushes up the feeler [B] and the actuator
enters the sensor. When paper runs out, the feeler drops and the actuator leaves
the sensor, and the machine detects that there is no paper in the tray.
When the user puts back the tray, the lever [E] lowers the pickup roller and the
feeler. When, on the other hand, the tray is pulled out, the lever lifts the roller and
feeler.
SM 15 B457
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PAPER STACK TRANSPORT
2.9 PAPER STACK TRANSPORT
[F] [D]
[E]
[C]
[A]
[B]
B457D004.WMF
When the paper in the paper feed side is used up, the tray motor [A] and stack
transport clutch [B] turn on. Then the rear fence [C] moves the stack of paper from
the paper storage side to the paper feed side.
NOTE: During paper feed, the stack transport clutch ( 2.2) does not switch on,
so drive from the tray motor only transfers to the relay roller and not to the
fence mechanism.
While the stack is in motion, it pushes the side fence [D] aside, and the side fence
sensor [E] detects that the fence is open.
After the stack has been moved all the way across, a spring in the side fence
moves the side fence back, and the side fence sensor detects that the fence is
closed. Then, the tray motor reverses until end fence home position sensor [F] is
deactivated.
B457 16 SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B458
500-SHEET FINISHER
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA

TABLE OF CONTENTS

1.1 EXTERIOR ................................................................................................... 1
Front Cover.............................................................................................. 2
1.2 ENTRANCE UPPER GUIDE/PAPER EXIT UNIT......................................... 4
1.3 ENTRANCE LOWER GUIDE ....................................................................... 5
1.4 PAPER EXIT UNIT GEAR/PADDLE ROLLER SOLENOID.......................... 5
1.5 STAPLER UNIT............................................................................................ 6
1.6 JOGGER TRAY UNIT .................................................................................. 6
1.7 PAPER EXIT SENSOR FEELER ................................................................. 7
1.8 MAIN MOTOR .............................................................................................. 7
1.9 JOGGER MOTOR ........................................................................................ 8
1.10 CONTROL BOARD .................................................................................... 8
1.11 OUTPUT TRAY UNIT................................................................................. 9
2. DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS .........................................................10

2.1 OVERALL MACHINE INFORMATION ....................................................... 10
2.1.1 COMPONENT LAYOUT .................................................................... 10
Mechanical Component Layout ............................................................. 10
Drive Layout........................................................................................... 11
2.1.2 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT ............................................. 12
2.1.3 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DESCRIPTIONS................................. 13
2.2 DETAILED SECTION DESCRIPTIONS ..................................................... 14
2.2.1 OUTPUT TRAY MECHANISM........................................................... 14
Stack Height Detection .......................................................................... 14
Output Tray Up/Down Mechanism ......................................................... 15
2.2.2 PAPER FEED.................................................................................... 16
Straight Feed Out Mode......................................................................... 16
Shift Sorting Mode ................................................................................. 17
Stapling Mode........................................................................................ 19
2.2.3 JAM CONDITIONS ............................................................................ 20
2.2.4 ERROR DETECTION......................................................................... 20
SM i B458
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
EXTERIOR
CAUTION

: E-ring
1.1 EXTERIOR
500-Sheet
Finisher
B458
[A]
B458R156.WMF
Pull out the lever [A] under the finisher while lifting the finisher off the machine.
SM 1 B458
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
EXTERIOR
Front Cover
[A]: : Front cover ( x 1)
[A]
B458R101.WMF
Rear Cover
[B]: Rear cover ( x 1)
[B] B458R102.WMF
Top Cover
[C]: Top cover (2 links)
[C]
B458R105.WMF
B458 2 SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
EXTERIOR
Front Lower Guide
[A]
B458R116.WMF
500-Sheet
Finisher
B458
[B]
B458R104.WMF
[A]: Output tray ( x 2)

[B]: Front lower guide ( x 2)
NOTE: 1) When re-attaching the lower guide, be sure that it is not in contact with
the exit lower guide and that the exit lower guide moves smoothly.
2) Make sure that the blue and black cables are in the correct position, as
engraved on the inside of the front lower guide.
Right Cover
[C]: Grounding plate ( x 1)
[D]: Right cover ( x 2)
[C] [D]
B458R103.WMF
SM 3 B458
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
ENTRANCE UPPER GUIDE/PAPER EXIT UNIT
1.2 ENTRANCE UPPER GUIDE/PAPER EXIT UNIT
[H]
[A]
[G]
[F]
[D]
[B]
[E]
[C] B458R106.WMF
Front, rear, and top covers and front lower guide ( 1.1 Exterior)
[A]: Entrance upper guide ( x 2, x 1)
[B]: Paddle gear spring
[C]: Paddle gear ( x 1)
[D]: Paddle gear holder
[E]: Bushing ( x 1)
[F]: Paper exit unit holder ( x 1)
[G]: Rear paper exit unit holder ( x 1)
[H]: Exit unit
NOTE: Keep the paper exit unit stays in
the upper position. Rotate the
paddle roller into the position
shown in the illustration [a]. Then,
insert the paddle gear, making
sure that the pawl on the gears [a]
outer frame is resting on the
clutch link [b].
[b] B458R107.WMF
B458 4 SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
ENTRANCE LOWER GUIDE
1.3 ENTRANCE LOWER GUIDE

Entrance upper guide ( 1.2 Entrance [D]
upper guide/Exit unit)
Exit unit (1.2 Entrance upper guide/
Exit unit)
[A]: Release tension bracket ( x 1)
[A]
[B]: Reverse roller gear bracket ( x 2)
[C]: Timing belt
[D]: Entrance lower guide
NOTE: When re-attaching the tension
bracket, rotate the main motor
counterclockwise to tighten the
timing belt. [B]
[C]
B458R108.WMF
500-Sheet
Finisher
B458
1.4 PAPER EXIT UNIT GEAR/PADDLE ROLLER
SOLENOID
Front cover ( 1.1 Exterior)
[A]: Gear bracket ( x 3)
[B]: Paper exit unit gear [C]
[C]: Paddle roller solenoid ( x 1)
[B]
B458R109.WMF
[A]
SM 5 B458
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
STAPLER UNIT
1.5 STAPLER UNIT

Rear cover ( 1.1 Exterior)
[A]: Stapler unit bracket ( x 2, x 1)
[B]: Stapler unit ( x 3)
[A]
[B]
B458R115.WMF
1.6 JOGGER TRAY UNIT

Entrance upper guide and paper exit
unit ( 1.2 Entrance upper guide / [B]
paper exit unit)
Entrance lower guide ( 1.2 Entrance
lower guide)
Paper exit unit gear and Paddle roller
solenoid ( 1.4 Paper exit unit gear/
Paddle roller solenoid)
Stapler unit ( 1.5 Stapler unit)
[A]: Jogger tray unit holders ( x 2) [A]
[B]: Jogger tray unit ( x 1, x 3)
NOTE: Be sure to connect the black cable
to the paper exit sensor and the
blue one to the jogger home
position sensor. B458R110.WMF
B458 6 SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PAPER EXIT SENSOR FEELER
1.7 PAPER EXIT SENSOR FEELER

Jogger tray unit ( 1.6 Jogger tray unit)
Jogger motor ( 1.9 Jogger motor)
[A]: Paper exit sensor feeler
[A]
B458R121.WMF
1.8 MAIN MOTOR

Right cover ( 1.1 Exterior)
[A]: Release tension bracket ( x 1) [A]
500-Sheet
Finisher
[B]: Main motor ( x 2, x 1)
B458
[B]
B458R113.WMF
SM 7 B458
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
JOGGER MOTOR
1.9 JOGGER MOTOR

Front lower guide ( 1.1 Exterior)
[A]: Jogger motor ( x 2, x 3)
[A]
B458R114.WMF
1.10 CONTROL BOARD

Front lower guide ( 1.1 Exterior)
[A]: Control board ( x 1, x 12)
B458R112.WMF
[A]
B458 8 SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
OUTPUT TRAY UNIT
1.11 OUTPUT TRAY UNIT
[D]
[A]
[E]
[B] [C]
B458R117.WMF B458R118.WMF
500-Sheet
Finisher
[G]
B458
[F]
B458R119.WMF
[A]: Output tray cover ( x 2)

[B]: Tray holder ( x 1)
[C]: Links
[D]: Connector cover
[E]: Output tray motor link unit ( x 1)
[F]: Rear cover ( x 1)
[G]: Output tray motor ( x 1)
NOTE: When re-attaching the motor link
unit, the arrows on each of the
gears need to face each other as
shown in the illustration.
B458R120.WMF
SM 9 B458
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
OVERALL MACHINE INFORMATION
2.1 OVERALL MACHINE INFORMATION
2.1.1 COMPONENT LAYOUT
Mechanical Component Layout
9 8
10 7
6
1
5
B458D101.WMF
2
3 4
1. Output tray 6. Lower entrance guide

2. Stack height detection lever 7. Upper entrance guide
3. Paper exit roller 8. Paper exit unit
4. Jogger tray 9. Paddle roller
5. Reverse roller 10. Lower exit guide
B458 10 SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Drive Layout
500-Sheet
Finisher
B458
4 1
B458D103.WMF
5 6
1. Main motor 5. Output tray link gears

2. Exit roller timing belt 6. Paper exit unit drive gear
3. Main motor timing belt 7. Reverse roller
4. Output tray motor 8. Paper exit roller
SM 11 B458
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
2.1.2 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT
1
2
18 3
17
4
16
5
15
14
13 6
12
7
11
10 9 8 B458D102.WMF
See the next page for the component description table.
B458 12 SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
2.1.3 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DESCRIPTIONS

Symbols Name Function Index No.
Motors
M1 Main Drives all the rollers 6
M2 Jogger Drives the jogger fence 9
M3 Output Tray Drives the tray up and down 12
M4 Stapler Drives the stapler 16
Sensors
S1 Entrance Detects paper at the entrance 3
S2 Exit Detects paper at the exit 15
S3 Stack height Detects the top of the paper stack 13
S4 Lever Detects the position of stack height lever 14
Jogger home Detects the position of the jogger fence
S5 2
position
S6 Top cover Detects if the top cover is open 1
Tray upper limit Detects when the tray is lifted to the upper
S7 11
limit
Stack near-limit Detects when the tray is at its lowest limit
S8 10
(almost full)
500-Sheet
Finisher
B458
Solenoids
SOL1 Exit unit gear Moves the paper exit unit up and down 7
SOL2 Paddle roller Switches paddle roller rotation on and off. 5
Stack height lever Moves the stack height lever into contact
SOL3 8
with the top of the stack.
Switches
SW1 Paper exit unit Switches DC for the stapler unit on and off. 18
SW2 Staple unit cover Cuts DC when staple unit cover is open. 17
PCBs
PCB1 Main control Controls all finisher functions 4
SM 13 B458
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
DETAILED SECTION DESCRIPTIONS
2.2 DETAILED SECTION DESCRIPTIONS

2.2.1 OUTPUT TRAY MECHANISM
Stack Height Detection
[D]
[C]
[A] [B]
B458D104.WMF
Stack height detection lever [A]: Driven by stack height lever solenoid [B].
Two sensors detect the height of the stack in the output tray: the stack height [C]
and lever [D] sensors.
Stack height
Lever sensor Status
sensor
The stack height is below the target. The output tray is
Off Off
then lifted to the target position.
Off On Target stack height position
The stack height is above the target. The output tray is
On On
then lowered to the target position.
On Off The stack height detection lever is at home position.
Off: Actuator not in sensor
At the start of a print job, the solenoid turns off. The stack height detection lever
comes down, to detect the current stack level.
When a sheet of paper is being fed out, the solenoid turns on and the lever goes
back up to home position (inside the unit).
After paper has been fed out, the solenoid turns on again, and the lever detects the
level of the stack.
B458 14 SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Output Tray Up/Down Mechanism
[D]
[E]
[B]
500-Sheet
Finisher
B458
[A]
[C]
B458D105.WMF
Overview
The output tray motor gear [A] lifts/lowers the tray if the stack height is not at the
target position.
Gears [B] and [C] keep the angle of the tray constant at any tray position.
Output Tray Downward Movement

The top of the paper stack is checked after every page (or set of pages) has been
fed out. If the top of the stack is higher than the target level, the output tray motor
moves the tray down.
When the stack near-limit sensor [D] detects the actuator on gear [C], a stack near-
limit signal is transferred to the main frame. The tray cannot move any lower. The
next time the top of the stack height is above the target level, printing stops.
Output Tray Upward Movement

If paper is removed from the stack, the top of the stack will be lower than the target
level, and the output tray motor moves the tray up.
When the tray upper limit sensor [E] detects the actuator on gear [B], the tray
cannot be moved up any more, so the motor stops.
SM 15 B458
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
2.2.2 PAPER FEED

Straight Feed Out Mode
[A]
[F]
[J]
[E]
[H] [I]
[G] [D]
[B]
[C] [C]
B458D109.WMF
B458D106.WMF
Before the job, the exit unit [A] is up, and the exit unit gear solenoid [B] is on,
pulling lever [C] away from the exit unit gear [D].
At the start of the job, the stack height detection lever detects the top of the stack.
The tray moves up or down if the top of the stack is not at the correct level.
When the paper exit sensor in the main frame turns on, the finisher main motor
starts. It drives the exit unit gear [D] through idle gear [E]. The gear pulls paper exit
unit [A] down, using the paper exit link [F]. The link also moves the paper exit roller
[H] up through the exit roller drive gear [G].
When the motor starts, the solenoid switches off and a spring pushes lever [C] into
contact with the exit unit gear [D].
When a part of the exit unit gear without threads [I] faces the idle gear, the gear
stops turning (see the left-hand diagram). The lever [C] catches a peg on the exit
unit gear, to make sure that it stops at the correct position. The paper exit rollers
[H] now contact each other and the main motor feeds out the paper.
When the last page has been fed out, the solenoid turns on to pull the lever away
from the gear. The gear starts turning, to lift the exit unit to the standby position.
When the other part of the exit unit gear without threads [J] faces the idle gear, the
exit unit gear stops. Then, the main motor stops and the solenoid turns off.
B458 16 SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Shift Sorting Mode

[D]
[C]
[B]
[A]
B458D111.WMF
500-Sheet
Finisher
B458
[E] [F]
B458D113.WMF
At the start of the job, and for odd numbered sets of copies, the mechanism is the
same as the straight feed out mode. However, even numbered sets are fed back to
the jogger tray, which shifts the sets to one side before feeding them out.
This section describes what happens for even-numbered sets (sets 2, 4, 6 etc) of
the job.
A short time after the entrance sensor [A] detects the first page of the set, the
paper exit unit solenoid turns on to restart the rotation of the paper exit unit gear,
raising the paper exit unit to the standby position. It stays there until after the last
page of the set.
The paper cannot feed out (because the feed rollers are not contacting each other),
so it drops into the jogger tray [B]. The paddle roller solenoid [C] turns on and the
paddle roller [D] feeds the paper to the reverse roller [E]. The reverse roller feeds
the paper to the end fence [F] of the jogger tray.
SM 17 B458
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
[B]
[A]
[C]
[D]
B458D107.WMF
After the paper reaches the end fence [A], the jogger fence [B] shifts the paper
across. The jogger motor [C] drives the jogger fence. The home position sensor [D]
detects when the jogger fence has returned to home position.
When the next set begins, the paper exit unit moves down, and the machine
operates the same way as straight feed out mode. At this time, the entire set in the
jogger tray is fed out at the same time as the first page of the next set. However,
the set coming from the jogger tray has been shifted to one side.
If the last set is an even-numbered set, the paper exit unit must be pulled down to
feed the final set out of the jogger tray. Then the exit unit moves back up to the
standby position.
The capacity of the jogger tray is 30 sheets. If the set contains more than 30 sheets,
the machine feeds out the first 30 from the jogger tray, then continues with the rest
of the set, using the jogger tray.
B458 18 SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Stapling Mode
[B]
[D]
[F]
[E]
[C]
B458D112.WMF
[B]
500-Sheet
Finisher
B458D114.WMF
B458
[A]
[G]
B458D106.WMF
The stapler is attached to the jogger tray, so all sets go to the jogger tray.
After all pages of a set have entered the jogger tray and been shifted across, the
paper exit link [A] pulls the paper exit unit [B] down until knob [C] on the exit unit
pushes the link lever [D] for the exit unit switch [E]. This turns on the exit unit switch.
When this switch is on, dc is supplied to the stapler unit [F] and the main motor is
turned off.
The exit unit switch is activated when the exit unit is pulled part-way down. After
stapling the set of prints, the paper exit unit is pulled down again until the unit
comes in contact with the paper exit roller [G], and the stapled set is fed out.
SM 19 B458
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
2.2.3 JAM CONDITIONS

Sensors Conditions
Remaining paper detection Entrance Either the entrance or exit sensor detects
Exit paper just after the unit is initialized.
Non-feed at the entrance The entrance sensor is not activated within a
Entrance certain period after the paper exit sensor
detects paper.
Jamming at the entrance The entrance sensor is not de-activated after
Entrance paper is fed 1.3 times the length of the
paper.
Non-feed inside the unit The exit sensor is not activated within a
(Straight feed out mode only) Exit certain period after the entrance sensor
detects paper.
Jamming at the exit The exit sensor is not de-activated after
Exit
paper is fed for a certain period.
Jogger tray The exit sensor is de-activated during paper
Exit
shifting or stapling.
2.2.4 ERROR DETECTION

Conditions
Jogger motor error The jogger home position sensor does not shut off after the
jogger motor starts.
Jogger motor home position The jogger home position sensor does not turn on after
detection error paper shifting.
Stapler error The stapler home position sensor (inside the stapler unit)
does not turn on after stapling.
Output tray upper limit error The tray upper limit sensor is activated.
Output tray motor error The output tray is away from the target position for more
than 10 seconds.
Stack height detection error The stack height detection lever does not return to its home
position before going to detect the stack height.
NOTE: The above errors are indicated as Finisher jam at the first occurrence.
If the same error happens again in the next job, finisher error is indicated.
B458 20 SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B480
1-BIN TRAY UNIT
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA

TABLE OF CONTENTS

1.1 PAPER SENSOR REMOVAL....................................................................... 1
2. DETAILED DESCRIPTION .............................................................2

2.3 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DESCRIPTION.............................................. 3
2.4 BASIC OPERATION..................................................................................... 4
SM i B480
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PAPER SENSOR REMOVAL
CAUTION

: E-ring
1.1 PAPER SENSOR REMOVAL
[A]
[B] B480R101.WMF
1-Bin Tray
B480
Unit
1. 1-bin tray
2. 1-bin sorter unit [A]
3. Paper sensor [B] ( x 1)
SM 1 B480
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
2. DETAILED DESCRIPTION
1 1
B480D500.WMF
6
5
B480D501.WMF
1. Exit Rollers
2. Junction Gate Gear
3. Drive Gear
4. Paper Tray
5. Paper Sensor
6. Junction Gate (Interchange Unit)
B480 2 SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
1
2
B480D004.WMF
1. Paper Sensor
2. 1-bin Sorter Exit Tray LED
(located in the copier)

Sensors
S1 Paper Detects whether there is paper on the tray. 1
LEDs
1-Bin Tray
B480
1 Bin Exit Tray Indicates when there is paper in the tray. This is
Unit
LED1 2
located in the copier.
SM 3 B480
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
BASIC OPERATION
2.4 BASIC OPERATION
[B]
[C]
[A]
B480D502.WMF
[C]
[D] B480D004.WMF
At the appropriate time after the leading edge of the first sheet of copy paper
reaches the copiers registration roller, the junction gate solenoid [A] in the
interchange unit turns on to switch the junction gate to direct the paper to the tray
[B].
The junction gate solenoid turns off at the appropriate time after the paper is
directed to the tray. The main motor in the copier stops after the final sheet passes
the paper sensor [C] and arrives on the tray.
The paper sensor [C] turns on when there is paper in the tray, and the paper
indicator [D] turns on.
The tray can be opened for easier jam removal by swinging the tray to the left.
B480 4 SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B481
INTERCHANGE UNIT
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA

TABLE OF CONTENTS

1.1 EXIT SENSOR REPLACEMENT.................................................................. 1
2. DETAILED DESCRIPTION .............................................................2

2.2 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT AND DRIVE LAYOUT ................................... 3
2.3 JUNCTION GATE MECHANISM.................................................................. 4
To the Exit Tray or Bridge Unit (for the Upper Tray on top of the Bridge
Unit, or the Finisher) ................................................................................ 4
To the 1-bin Tray...................................................................................... 4
To the Duplex Unit ................................................................................... 4
SM i B481
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
EXIT SENSOR REPLACEMENT
CAUTION

: E-ring
1.1 EXIT SENSOR REPLACEMENT
[A]
Interchange
B481
Unit
[B]
B481R001.WMF
1. Interchange unit
2. Upper cover [A] of the interchange unit
3. Exit sensor [B] ( x 1)
SM 1 B481
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
2. DETAILED DESCRIPTION
2
3
1
4
B481D001.WMF
1. 1-bin Tray (Option)

2. Exit Sensor
3. Duplex Junction Gate
4. Duplex Unit (Option)
5. Exit Junction Gate
6. Fusing Unit (Inside the Copier)
7. Exit Roller
8. Bridge Unit
B481 2 SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
ELECTRICAL COMPONENT AND DRIVE LAYOUT
2.2 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT AND DRIVE LAYOUT

2 3
B481D503.WMF
5
4
Interchange
B481
Unit
B481R554.WMF
1. Exit Junction Gate Solenoid 4. Exit Roller

2. Exit Sensor 5. Drive Gear
3. Duplex Junction Gate Solenoid
SM 3 B481
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
JUNCTION GATE MECHANISM
2.3 JUNCTION GATE MECHANISM
[D]
[B]
[C]
[A]
B481D504.WMF
[F] [E] [A]
[B] [G]
B481D003.WMF
[A]
B481D002.WMF
Depending on the selected mode, the copies are directed up, left, or right by the
exit junction gate [A] and the duplex junction gate [B]. These are controlled by the
exit junction gate solenoid [C] and the duplex junction gate solenoid [D].
To the Exit Tray or Bridge Unit (for the Upper Tray on top of the Bridge
Unit, or the Finisher)
The exit junction gate solenoid stays off and the paper is directed to the copier exit
or bridge unit [E].
To the 1-bin Tray

The exit junction gate solenoid turns on and the duplex junction gate solenoid stays
off. The paper is directed to the 1-bin tray [F].
To the Duplex Unit

The exit junction gate solenoid and the duplex junction gate solenoid both turn on
and the paper is directed to the duplex unit [G].
B481 4 SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B482
BRIDGE UNIT
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
BRIDGE UNIT B482

TABLE OF CONTENTS

1.1 BRIDGE UNIT DRIVE MOTOR REPLACEMENT ........................................ 1
1.2 TRAY EXIT SENSOR REPLACEMENT ....................................................... 2
1.3 RELAY SENSOR REPLACEMENT.............................................................. 2

2.2 DRIVE LAYOUT ........................................................................................... 4
2.4 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DESCRIPTION.............................................. 6
2.5 JUNCTION GATE MECHANISM.................................................................. 7
SM i B482
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
BRIDGE UNIT DRIVE MOTOR REPLACEMENT
CAUTION

: E-ring
1.1 BRIDGE UNIT DRIVE MOTOR REPLACEMENT
[B]
[A]
B482R103.WMF
NOTE: When taking apart the bridge unit, first take the unit out of the copier.
1. Bridge unit ( Installation Procedure in the base copier manual)
3. Bridge unit drive motor [B] ( x 2, x 1)
Bridge Unit
B482
SM 1 B482
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
TRAY EXIT SENSOR REPLACEMENT
1.2 TRAY EXIT SENSOR REPLACEMENT

[A]
[C]
[B]
B482R104.WMF

3. Paper tray [A]
4. Exit guide [B] ( x 2)
5. Tray exit sensor [C] ( x 1)
1.3 RELAY SENSOR REPLACEMENT
[A]
B482R102.WMF

2. Stand the bridge unit up as shown in the illustration and remove the sensor [A].
B482 2 SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
8 9 10 1
2
7 6 5 4
B482D500.WMF
1. Upper Exit Roller 6. 2nd Transport Roller

2. Tray Exit Sensor 7. 3rd Transport Roller
3. Junction Gate 8. Left Exit Roller
4. Cooling Fan 9. Relay Sensor
5. 1st Transport Roller 10. Paper Tray
Bridge Unit
B482
SM 3 B482
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
DRIVE LAYOUT
2.2 DRIVE LAYOUT
5
4
6
1 2
B482D502.WMF
1. Left Exit Roller

2. 2nd Transport Roller
3. 1st Transport Roller
4. Upper Exit Roller
5. 3rd Transport Roller
Bridge Unit Drive Motor
B482 4 SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA

6 5
7 4
8
1
B482D501.WMF
1. Left Guide Switch 5. Cooling Fan Motor

2. Right Guide Switch 6. Relay Sensor
3. Junction Gate Solenoid 7. Bridge Unit Drive Motor
4. Tray Exit Sensor 8. Bridge Unit Control Board
Bridge Unit
B482
SM 5 B482
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA

Motors
M1 Cooling Fan Cools the transport unit. 5
M2 Drive Motor Drives the bridge unit. 7
Sensors
S1 Tray Exit Checks for misfeeds. 4
S2 Relay Checks for misfeeds. 6
Switches
SW2 Right Guide Detects when the right guide is opened. 2
SW3 Left Guide Detects when the left guide is opened. 1
Solenoids
Junction Gate Moves the junction gate to direct the paper
SOL1 to the upper tray (on top of the bridge unit) 3
or to the finisher.
PCBs
Bridge Unit Control Controls the bridge unit.
PCB1 8
Board
B482 6 SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
JUNCTION GATE MECHANISM
2.5 JUNCTION GATE MECHANISM
[A]
[D]
[B]
[C]
B482D104.WMF
The junction gate [B] directs any paper reaching the bridge unit to either the upper
tray (on top of the bridge unit) or to the finisher, depending on which has been
selected.
If the junction gate solenoid [A] has been activated, the junction gate [B] points
downward and directs the paper to the upper tray [D] (dotted line path in
illustration). When the solenoid is off, the junction gate points upward and the
paper is fed out to the finisher [C] by the transport and left exit rollers (solid line).
Bridge Unit
B482
SM 7 B482
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B490
BY-PASS TRAY UNIT
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
BY-PASS TRAY UNIT B490

TABLE OF CONTENTS

1.1 PICKUP/FEED ROLLER .............................................................................. 1
1.2 PAPER FEED CLUTCH ............................................................................... 2
1.3 REVERSE ROLLER ..................................................................................... 2
1.4 PAPER SIZE SENSOR BOARD................................................................... 3

2.2 PAPER FEED............................................................................................... 5
2.2.1 DRIVE.................................................................................................. 5
Power Source .......................................................................................... 5
Rollers...................................................................................................... 5
2.2.2 PAPER FEED MECHANISM ............................................................... 6
Pickup Roller Mechanism ........................................................................ 6
Paper End Detection................................................................................ 6
2.3 PAPER SIZE DETECTION........................................................................... 7
SM i B490
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PICKUP/FEED ROLLER
CAUTION

: E-ring
1.1 PICKUP/FEED ROLLER

1. Bypass tray ( x 3)
[A]
2. Upper cover [A] ( x 3)
B490R101.WMF
By-Pass Tray
3. Lift the paper end sensor feeler [C]
B490
[B].
Unit
4. Pick-up roller [C] (1 hook)
5. Paper feed roller [D] ( x 1)
[D]
[B]
B490R102.WMF
SM 1 B490
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PAPER FEED CLUTCH
1.2 PAPER FEED CLUTCH

1. Upper cover ( 1.1)
2. Rear cover [A] ( x 1) [D]
3. Gear holder [B] ( x 3)
[B]
4. Gears [C][D]
[C]
[A] B490R153.WMF
5. Clutch [E] ( x 1)
[E]
B490R104.WMF
1.3 REVERSE ROLLER

1. Bypass tray ( 1.1)
[A]
2. Turn the unit upside down.
3. Bottom cover [A] ( x 3)
4. Reverse roller [B] ( x 1)
Bottom of unit
Top of unit
[B]
B490R105.WMF
B490 2 SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PAPER SIZE SENSOR BOARD
1.4 PAPER SIZE SENSOR BOARD
1. Paper tray [A] ( x 2)

[A]
[B]
B490R001.WMF
3. Paper size sensor board [C] [F]

[D]
[E]
[C]
By-Pass Tray
B490R002.WMF
B490
Reassembling Unit
1. Move the side fences to the centermost positions [D].

2. Align the sensor-board position mark [E] with the side-fence position mark [F]
and install the sensor board.
SM 3 B490
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
1 2
3
15 4
5
6
14
13
12 7
11 8
10 9 B490D101.WMF
1. Registration roller (copier) 9. Reverse roller

2. Registration guide 10. Paper path (optional paper tray)
3. Paper end sensor 11. Paper path (bypass tray)
4. Feeler link 12. Friction pad (copier)
5. Pickup roller 13. Feed roller (copier)
6. Side fence 14. Vertical transport roller (copier)
7. Bypass tray 15. Registration sensor (copier)
8. Feed roller
B490 4 SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PAPER FEED
2.2 PAPER FEED

2.2.1 DRIVE
[A]
[B]
[F]
[C]
[E]
[D] B490D103.WMF
Power Source
The paper feed motor [A] inside the copier drives all the rollers and gears in the
bypass tray unit by way of a timing belt and gears. The transport roller gear [F] (in
the copier) contacts the leftmost gear [B] (in the bypass unit).
Rollers
An FRR (feed and reverse roller) feed mechanism is used ( Paper Feed
By-Pass Tray
Methods). The pickup roller [D] and feed roller [E] turn only when the clutch [C]
transmits the drive power.
B490
Unit
SM 5 B490
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PAPER FEED
2.2.2 PAPER FEED MECHANISM
[A]
[B]
[D]
[C] B490D104.WMF
Pickup Roller Mechanism

When paper is not being fed, the pickup roller [B] stays away from the paper stack.
When paper feed starts, the pickup solenoid [A] turns on and lowers the pickup
roller by way of a mechanical link.
Paper End Detection

When the paper on the tray is all used, the feeler [C] falls into the cutout. This
action is detected by the paper end sensor [D] by way of a mechanical link.
The paper end sensor also functions as a paper set sensor.
B490 6 SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PAPER SIZE DETECTION
2.3 PAPER SIZE DETECTION
[A]
[B]
B490D554.WMF
The side fences [A] are mechanically linked with the gear on the paper size sensor
board [B]. The gear turns when the fences are moved. The gear has terminals
which make different electric circuits when the gear is turned, so the machine
determines the width of the paper in the by-pass tray by the signals from the paper
size sensor board.
The paper length is not detected by this sensor (see Original Size Detection in the
manual for the base copier).
By-Pass Tray
B490
Unit
SM 7 B490
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B509
DUPLEX UNIT
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
DUPLEX UNIT B509

TABLE OF CONTENTS

1.1 EXTERIOR COVER ..................................................................................... 1
1.2 ENTRANCE/EXIT SENSORS ...................................................................... 1
1.3 INVERTER MOTOR ..................................................................................... 2
1.4 CONTROLLER BOARD ............................................................................... 2
1.5 TRANSPORT MOTOR ................................................................................. 2

2.1 OVERVIEW .................................................................................................. 3
2.3 DRIVE LAYOUT ........................................................................................... 5
2.4 DUPLEX PAPER FEED ORDER.................................................................. 6
2.4.1 LONGER THAN A4/LT LEF................................................................. 6
2.4.2 UP TO A4/LT LEF................................................................................ 7
2.5 REVERSE MECHANISM ............................................................................. 8
SM i B509
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
EXTERIOR COVER
CAUTION

: E-ring
1.1 EXTERIOR COVER

1. Exterior cover [A] ( x 4)
Duplex Unit
B509
[A]
B509R101.WMF
1.2 ENTRANCE/EXIT SENSORS

1. Exterior cover ( 1.1)
[B] [A]
Entrance Sensor
2. Sensor bracket [A] ( x 1)
3. Entrance sensor [B] ( x 1, x [C]
1)
Exit Sensor
4. Exit sensor [C] ( x 1)
B509R102.WMF
SM 1 B509
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
INVERTER MOTOR
1.3 INVERTER MOTOR

2. Inverter motor [A] ( x 1, x 3)
[A]
B509R103.WMF
1.4 CONTROLLER BOARD

2. Controller board [A] ( x 5, x 3)
[A] B509R104.WMF
1.5 TRANSPORT MOTOR

2. Controller board ( 1.4)
3. Transport motor [A] (1 spring, x 1, x 2)
[A]
B509R105.WMF
B509 2 SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
OVERVIEW
2.1 OVERVIEW
2 3 4
1
Duplex Unit
7
B509
B509D101.WMF
1. Interchange unit 5. Inverter roller

2. Paper entrance 6. Inverter section
3. Inverter gate 7. Exit sensor
4. Entrance sensor 8. Paper exit path
SM 3 B509
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
2
1
3
B509D102.WMF
1. Entrance sensor 5. Inverter motor

2. Duplex unit open switch 6. Controller board
3. Inverter gate solenoid 7. Transport motor
4. Cover sensor 8. Exit sensor
B509 4 SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
DRIVE LAYOUT
2.3 DRIVE LAYOUT
B509D103.WMF
Duplex Unit
B509
1. Inverter motor
2. Transport motor
SM 5 B509
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
DUPLEX PAPER FEED ORDER
2.4 DUPLEX PAPER FEED ORDER

2.4.1 LONGER THAN A4/LT LEF
The feed path through the duplex unit can only hold one sheet of paper.
The example below shows how the paper is handled to print out 8 pages in mono
color mode: The number [A] in the illustration shows the order of pages. The
number [B] in the illustration shows the order of sheets of paper (if shaded, this
indicates the second side).
[A]
2 1 4 3 6 5 8 7
1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4
[B] B509D519.WMF
B509D518.WMF
B509 6 SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
DUPLEX PAPER FEED ORDER
2.4.2 UP TO A4/LT LEF

The feed path through the duplex unit can hold 2 sheets of paper
The example below shows how the paper is handled to print out 8 pages in mono
color mode: The number [A] in the illustration shows the order of pages. The
number [B] in the illustration shows the order of sheets of print paper (if shaded,
this indicates the second side).
[A]
2 4 1 6 3 8 5 7
1 2 1 3 2 4 3 4
[B] B509D520.WMF
Duplex Unit
B509
B509D517.WMF
SM 7 B509
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
REVERSE MECHANISM
2.5 REVERSE MECHANISM
[B] [D] [E]
[F]
[A]
[G]
[C]
[H]
B509D104.WMF
The duplex unit starts when the entrance sensor [E] detects paper coming in.
1. Duplex junction gate [A] in the interchange unit
Directs the paper to the duplex unit (up to A3 SEF)
2. Inverter roller [B]
Sends the paper to the inverter section [C]
3. Entrance sensor [E]
Detects the trailing edge of the paper
4. Inverter gate solenoid (behind [D])
Activates the inverter gate [D]
5. Inverter gate [D]
Switches the paper path
6. Inverter roller [F]
Changes its rotation direction (sends the paper to the exit path [G])
7. Transport roller [H]
Sends the paper to the main unit registration roller
B509 8 SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B510
SHIFT TRAY UNIT
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA

TABLE OF CONTENTS

1.1 TRAY COVER REPLACEMENT .................................................................. 1
1.1.1 TRAY COVER REMOVAL................................................................... 1
1.1.2 TRAY COVER ATTACHMENT............................................................ 1
1.2 TRAY MOTOR AND HALF TURN SENSOR REPLACEMENT .................... 2
1.2.1 REPLACING THE TRAY MOTOR ....................................................... 2
1.2.2 REPLACING THE HALF TURN SENSOR........................................... 2

2.1 COMPONENT LAYOUT ............................................................................... 3
2.2 BASIC OPERATION..................................................................................... 4
2.3 PRIMARY MECHANISMS ............................................................................ 5
2.3.1 TRAY SHIFT........................................................................................ 5
2.3.2 HALF TURN DETECTION................................................................... 6
SM i B510
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
TRAY COVER REPLACEMENT
CAUTION

: E-ring
1.1 TRAY COVER REPLACEMENT

[A]
[C]
[B]
[D]
[E]
B510R151.WMF
1.1.1 TRAY COVER REMOVAL
1. Remove the tray cover [A] by pressing on the two pawls [B] on the left side of
the cover.
1.1.2 TRAY COVER ATTACHMENT

NOTE: The right side of the tray cover should be attached first.
1. Fit the pawls [C] (just below the cover fin) around the thin bar [D] on the shift
tray.
2. Align the square [E] so that it fits into the groove in the underside of the tray
Shift Tray
cover and does not interfere with the attachment of the cover.
B510
Unit
3. Complete the attachment by inserting the left side pawls [B] into place.
SM 1 B510
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
TRAY MOTOR AND HALF TURN SENSOR REPLACEMENT
1.2 TRAY MOTOR AND HALF TURN SENSOR

REPLACEMENT
[A]
[B]
[C]
B510R101.WMF
1.2.1 REPLACING THE TRAY MOTOR
1. Slip disc [A]

2. Tray motor [B] ( x 1)
1.2.2 REPLACING THE HALF TURN SENSOR
1. Half turn sensor [C] ( x 1).
B510 2 SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
COMPONENT LAYOUT
2.1 COMPONENT LAYOUT
3 2
1
4
B510D151.WMF
1
5
4
B510D102.WMF
1. Half Turn Sensor

2. Tray Cover
3. Slip Disc
4. Tray Motor
5. Driver PCB
Shift Tray
B510
Unit
SM 3 B510
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
BASIC OPERATION
2.2 BASIC OPERATION
[A]
B510D500.WMF
The shift tray allows copies to be sorted into separate piles on one tray.
From the left-right movement of the tray cover [A], the piles of copies are offset into
two positions, slightly overlapping one another.
B510 4 SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PRIMARY MECHANISMS
2.3 PRIMARY MECHANISMS

2.3.1 TRAY SHIFT
[A]
[C]
[B]
[D]
B510D101.WMF
As stated above, the shift tray [A] moves from left to right to create two possible
positions for the copies to stack up. This motion is driven by the tray motor [B],
which connects to the slip disc [C] via a small shaft. The shaft is connected at the
rotational center of the disc. However, there is an off-centered white square
attached to the top surface of the disc. When the tray cover is attached to the unit,
this square fits into a groove [D] (approximately equal to its width) that runs
lengthwise along the underside of the tray.
When the motor is running, the disc rotation causes the off-centered white square
to change position. The square only has freedom of movement along the groove
[D], so the only net motion of the tray is from left to right.
Shift Tray
B510
Unit
SM 5 B510
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PRIMARY MECHANISMS
2.3.2 HALF TURN DETECTION
[C]
[A]
[B]
B510D101.WMF
Half turn detection is performed through a combination of two components: the slip
disc [A] and half turn sensor [C].
The slip disc has a rim extending below the top surface. However, the rim only
extends 180 around the disc. The half turn sensor is below the edge of the disc,
opposite the tray motor. The sensor is positioned so that the rim of the disc passes
between the LED and the photodiode when the disc turns.
While the motor [B] is rotating the disc and moving the tray cover, the disc rim is
not between the diode and LED. After the disc has turned its maximum 180, the
rim passes between these two parts and blocks the signal to the LED, stopping the
motor. The tray stays in place until the motor is activated again to move the tray
across to receive another copy of the original.
B510 6 SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B750
FAX OPTION TYPE 3232
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
FAX OPTION B750

TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. INSTALLATION................................................................................1
1.1 FAX UNIT (B750) ......................................................................................... 1
Accessory Check ..................................................................................... 1
Installation Procedure .............................................................................. 2
1.2 FAX UNIT OPTIONS .................................................................................... 7
1.2.1 G3 INTERFACE UNIT ......................................................................... 7
Accessory check ...................................................................................... 7
Installation Procedure .............................................................................. 8
1.2.2 EXPANSION MEMORY..................................................................... 15
1.2.3 HANDSET ......................................................................................... 16
2. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT ..........................................17

2.1 NOTES FOR FCU BOARD REPLACEMENT............................................. 17
3. TROUBLESHOOTING ...................................................................18
3.1 ERROR CODES......................................................................................... 18
3.2 IP-FAX TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURES......................................... 30
3.3 FAX SC CODES......................................................................................... 33
3.3.1 OVERVIEW ....................................................................................... 33
3.3.2 SC1201.............................................................................................. 33
3.3.3 FAX SC CODE TABLE ...................................................................... 34
4. SERVICE TABLES.........................................................................35
4.1 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE..................................................................... 35
4.1.1 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE OPERATION...................................... 35
Entering and Exiting SP Mode ............................................................... 35
SP Mode Button Summary .................................................................... 36
Switching Between SP Mode and Copy Mode for Test Printing ............ 37
Selecting the Program Number.............................................................. 37
4.1.2 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE TABLES ............................................. 38
4.2 BIT SWITCHES .......................................................................................... 44
4.2.1 SYSTEM SWITCHES ........................................................................ 44
4.2.2 I-FAX SWITCHES.............................................................................. 54
4.2.3 PRINTER SWITCHES ....................................................................... 60
4.2.4 COMMUNICATION SWITCHES........................................................ 66
4.2.5 G3 SWITCHES .................................................................................. 74
4.2.6 G3-2/3 SWITCHES............................................................................ 81
4.2.7 G4 INTERNAL SWITCHES ............................................................... 87
4.2.8 G4 PARAMETER SWITCHES........................................................... 87
4.2.9 IP FAX SWITCHES ........................................................................... 87
4.3 NCU PARAMETERS .................................................................................. 93
4.4 DEDICATED TRANSMISSION PARAMETERS ....................................... 102
SM i B750
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
4.4.1 PROGRAMMING PROCEDURE ..................................................... 102

4.4.2 PARAMETERS ................................................................................ 103
4.5 SERVICE RAM ADDRESSES.................................................................. 106
5. DETAILED SECTION DESCRIPTIONS .......................................115

5.1 OVERVIEW .............................................................................................. 115
5.2 BOARDS .................................................................................................. 116
5.2.1 FCU ................................................................................................. 116
5.2.2 MBU................................................................................................. 117
5.2.3 SG3 BOARD.................................................................................... 118
5.3 VIDEO DATA PATH ................................................................................. 119
5.3.1 TRANSMISSION ............................................................................. 119
Memory Transmission and Parallel Memory Transmission.................. 120
Immediate Transmission...................................................................... 120
JBIG Transmission............................................................................... 120
Adjustments ......................................................................................... 120
5.3.2 RECEPTION.................................................................................... 121
5.4 FAX COMMUNICATION FEATURES ...................................................... 122
5.4.1 MULTI-PORT................................................................................... 122
5.4.2 DOCUMENT SERVER .................................................................... 123
5.4.3 INTERNET MAIL COMMUNICATION ............................................. 124
Mail Transmission ................................................................................ 124
Mail Reception ..................................................................................... 125
Handling Mail Reception Errors ........................................................... 127
Secure Internet Reception ................................................................... 127
Transfer Request ................................................................................. 128
E-Mail Options (Sub TX Mode) ............................................................ 129
Subject and Level of Importance ......................................................... 129
How the Subject Differs According to Mail Type .................................. 129
Subjects Displayed on the PC ............................................................. 129
E-mail Messages ................................................................................. 130
Message Disposition Notification (MDN).............................................. 131
Handling Reports ................................................................................. 132
5.5 IP-FAX ...................................................................................................... 133
What is IP-FAX? .................................................................................. 133
T.38 Packet Format ............................................................................. 133
SPECIFICATIONS.............................................................................134
1. GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS.................................................................... 134
2. CAPABILITIES OF PROGRAMMABLE ITEMS .......................................... 135
3. IFAX SPECIFICATIONS............................................................................. 136
4. IP-FAX SPECIFICATIONS ......................................................................... 137
MACHINE CONFIGURATION ............................................................. 138
B750 ii SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Rev. 06/2005 FAX UNIT (B750)
1. INSTALLATION
Fax Option
Type 3232
B750
1.1 FAX UNIT (B750)
Accessory Check
Check the quantity and condition of the accessories against this list.
No. Description Qty
1 Fax key 2
2 Fax panel 1
3 Jack cover 1
4 G3 decal 1
5 Screws 6
6 Stamp 1
7 FCU 1
8 Speaker assembly 1
9 Operating Instructions Fax Basic 1
Features (Except EU model)
10 Operating Instructions Fax Advanced 1
Features (Except EU model)
11 Handset Bracket (NA only) (not shown) 1
12 Telephone Line (NA only) 1
13 FCC Decal (NA only) 1
14 Serial Number Decal 1
1 2 3 4 5 6
8 7
B750I100.WMF
SM 1 B750
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
FAX UNIT (B750)
CAUTION
Before installing this fax unit,
1) Print out all data in the printer buffer.
2) Turn off the main switch and disconnect the power cord and the
network cable.

[B]
[A] B750I102.WMF
3. Remove the connector cover [C].

[C]
4. Install the jack cover [D].
[D] B750I106.WMF
B750 2 SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
FAX UNIT (B750)
Fax Option
Type 3232
[A]
B750
[B]
[C]
[B] B750I103.WMF
[B] [D]
[E]
B750I104.WMF
5. Remove the screw [A] ( x 1) and loosen the eight screws [B] ( x 8).
6. Move the controller box cover [C] to the right side and remove it.
7. Attach the FCU [D] to the BICU ( x 4).
8. Change the MBU battery jumper switch connector [E] from the "OFF" position
to the "ON" position.
9. Carefully push down the MBU.
NOTE: Make sure that the MBU is installed in the correct position. If not, an SC
occurs (SC819, SC672 etc.).
SM 3 B750
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
FAX UNIT (B750)
[A]
[E]
B750I105.WMF
[B]
[C]
[D]
[F]
B750I101.WMF
10. Install the speaker assembly [A] ( x 2, x 2).

11. Reattach the controller box cover.
NOTE: When reassembling, use caution not to damage harnesses and
electrical circuits.
12. Replace the dummy keypad [B] with the fax keypad [C].
13. Replace the third key-slot cover [D] with the fax key [E].
14. Attach the decal (SUPER G3) [F] to the front cover.
B750 4 SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
FAX UNIT (B750)
15. Install the stamp cartridge [A] if the [B]
Fax Option
ARDF [B] has been installed.
Type 3232
B750
[A]
B502I006.WMF
16. Reattach the rear cover ( x 2).

17. Attach the FCC decal [C] and serial
number decal [D].
NOTE: The FCC decal is for the
U.S. and Canada only.
[C]
[D]
B750I501.WMF
SM 5 B750
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
FAX UNIT (B750) Rev. 06/2005
[A]
B750I107.WMF
18. Connect the telephone line to the LINE jack [A].

19. Put the power plug into the outlet and turn the main switch ON.
NOTE: Make sure that the outlet is grounded.
NOTE: SRAM has been formatted is displayed after you turn ON the main
switch. Turn the main switch OFF and ON to use the machine. If the
display reoccurs, check the battery on the MBU board (step 8) is in the
ON position and the MBU is seated correctly on the FCU board.
20. Make sure that the date and time are correctly set.
B750 6 SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Rev. 06/2005 FAX UNIT OPTIONS
1.2 FAX UNIT OPTIONS
Fax Option
Type 3232
B750
1.2.1 G3 INTERFACE UNIT
Accessory check
Check the quantity and condition of the accessories against this list.
No. Description Qty
1 Flat cable 1
2 Harness 1
3 Screws 7
4 Clamps 2
5 CCU drive board 1
6 Telephone line (NA only) 1
7 SG3 board unit 1
8 FCC Decal (NA only) 1

1 2 3 4
5
6
7 B751I106.WMF
SM 7 B750
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
FAX UNIT OPTIONS
CAUTION
Before installing this optional unit,
1) Print out all data in the printer buffer.
2) Turn off the main switch and disconnect the power cord and the
network cable.

[B]
B751I102A.WMF
[A]
3. Remove the left connector shield [C]
(LINE 2). Then use a file to make the
edge smooth.
If you install one more G3 interface unit, [D]

also remove the right connector shield
[D] (LINE 3). Then use a file to make the
edge smooth.
[C]
B751I107.WMF
B750 8 SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
FAX UNIT OPTIONS
[A]
Fax Option
Type 3232
B750
[B]
[D]
[C]
B751I501.WMF
[B]
[B] B751I103A.WMF
[F]
[H]
[G]
[E]
B751I101.WMF [I]
4. Remove the screw [A] and loosen eight screws [B].

5. Move the controller box cover [C] to the right side and remove it.
6. Remove the FCU [D] ( x 2, x 4) if the fax unit was installed.
7. Connect the flat cable [E] with blue side outside and the harness [F] to the CCU
drive board [G].
NOTE: Connect the end that is near the binding [H] to the CCU drive board.
8. Connect the flat cable [B], with the blue side out, to the FCU as shown.
9. Attach the CCU drive board [G] to the FCU bracket [I] ( x 4).
NOTE: The G3 Interface Unit Type 3232 package contains one CCU drive
board. When installing the two optional units at once, only one of the
two interfaces is necessary.
SM 9 B750
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
FAX UNIT OPTIONS Rev. 06/2005
10. Install the clamps [A] and hold the

cable with them. [A]
IMPORTANT: Make sure to attach

the clamps in the two positions as
shown in the illustration. If you do not
do this, you cannot attach the flat
cable.
1 2
Clamp Positions
[B]
B751I102.WMF
11. Attach the FCU [C] to the BICU ( x 4).

NOTE: Make sure that the jumper
switch on the MBU is set to [C]
"On".
12. Carefully push down the MBU.
NOTE: Make sure that the MBU is
installed in the correct position.
If not, an SC occurs (SC819,
SC672 etc.).
B751I103.WMF
13. Remove the speaker assembly [D]

( x 2) if the speaker assembly was
installed.
14. Power ON. If the machine displays

SRAM has been formatted due to [D]
problem with SRAM, power OFF/ON
again.
B751I502.WMF
B750 10 SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
FAX UNIT OPTIONS
From this point, the procedure for installation of one G3 port is different from
Fax Option
Type 3232
the installation of two G3 ports.
B750
To install one G3 port: First do the For Single G3 Port Installation
procedure. Then do the For Single or Dual G3 Port Installation procedure.
To install two G3 ports: First do the For Dual G3 Port Installation procedure.
Then do the For Single or Dual G3 Port Installation procedure.
For Single G3 Port Installation
[A]
B751I104.WMF
1. Attach the SG3 board unit [A] to the I/O board cover bracket ( x 3, x 1).
SM 11 B750
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
FAX UNIT OPTIONS
For Dual G3 Port Installation

Two G3 interface units (Type 3232) are necessary when you install two G3 ports.
[D] [C]
[B]
[A]
B751I151.WMF
1. From the second G3 interface unit, remove the telephone jack bracket [A]
( x 2), then remove the telephone jack [B].
2. Remove the G3 interface unit cover bracket [C] ( x 4).
3. Remove the G3 interface board [D] ( x 2).
B750 12 SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
FAX UNIT OPTIONS
Fax Option
Type 3232
[B]
B750
[A]
[C]
[E]
[F]
[D]
[G]
B751I152.WMF
[H]
B751I104.WMF
4. From the first G3 interface unit, remove the telephone jack bracket, telephone
jack, and G3 interface unit cover bracket as shown in steps 1 and 2.
5. Attach the second G3 interface board [A] to the right-hand connector on the G3
interface unit bracket [B] ( x 2).
6. Install the telephone jack harnesses [C, D] as shown. Then attach the G3
interface unit cover bracket [E] ( x 4).
7. Attach the telephone jack [F] to the telephone jack bracket [G].
8. Attach the telephone jack bracket [G] to the G3 interface unit cover bracket [E]
( x 2).
9. Attach the dual-SG3-board unit [H] to the I/O board cover bracket
( x 2, x 1).
SM 13 B750
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
FAX UNIT OPTIONS
For Single or Dual G3 Port Installation

[B]
[A]
B751I105.WMF
1. Attach the speaker assembly [A] to the I/O board cover bracket ( x 3, x 2).
2. Hold the harnesses with clamps [B].
3. Reattach the controller box cover.
NOTE: When reassembling, use caution not to damage harnesses and
electrical circuits.
4. Reattach the rear cover ( x 2).
[C]
5. Connect the telephone line/s to the
jack/s [C]
For a single G3 interface unit: LINE 2
For a dual G3 interface unit:
LINE 2 and 3
6. Put the power plug into the outlet and
turn the main switch on.
NOTE: Make sure that the outlet is
grounded.
7. Start the service mode and set bit 1 of
communication switch 16 to 1
(Fax SP1-104-023).
8. If you install two G3 interface units, also
set bit 3 of communication switch 16
to "1" (Fax SP1-104-023). B751I107A.WMF
9. Turn the main switch off and on.

10. Print out the system parameter list and check that G3-2 (single port) and G3-3
(dual ports) is listed as an option (Fax SP6-101).
11. Set up and program the items required for PSTN-2/PSTN-3 communications.
12. Turn the main switch off and on.
B750 14 SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Rev. 06/2005 FAX UNIT OPTIONS

12. Attach the FCC decal [A].
NOTE: The FCC decal is for U.S.
Fax Option
Type 3232
B750
and Canada only.
13. Attach the FCC decal [B] if you
have installed the dual G3 ports.
14. Turn the main switch OFF and
ON.
[B]
[A]
1.2.2 EXPANSION MEMORY
1. Remove the rear cover ( x 2). [A]

2. Remove the controller box cover
( 1.2.1).
3. Install an expansion memory [A].
4. Check if the MBU battery jumper
switch is at "ON".
NOTE: The MBU battery jumper
switch has been already
at "ON" if the fax unit has
been correctly installed.
6. Install the controller box cover
and the rear cover.
7. Print out the system parameter
list, and check that the correct
memory size is shown (Fax SP6- B750I109.WMF
101).
SM 15 B750
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
FAX UNIT OPTIONS
1.2.3 HANDSET
NOTE: The optional handset is available for the U.S. version only.
[E]
[A] [D]
[C]
[B]
[F]
B750I108.WMF
1. Make two holes [A] in the scanner left cover.

2. Attach the bracket [B] enclosed with the fax unit ( x 2) as shown.
3. Remove the label [C] from the handset cradle [D]. Attach the cradle [D] to the
bracket [B] ( x 2), then replace the label [C].
4. Install the handset [E] on the cradle [D].
5. Connect the cable [F] to the TEL jack at the rear of the machine.
B750 16 SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
NOTES FOR FCU BOARD REPLACEMENT
Fax Option
Type 3232
B750
2.1 NOTES FOR FCU BOARD REPLACEMENT
1. When replacing the FCU board, remove the MBU board from the old FCU
board and install it on the new FCU board.
2. Adjust the date and time (UP System Settings Timer Setting Set
Date/Set Time).
NOTE: 1) Do not turn off the battery switch (SW1).
2) Print out the system parameter list (SP6-101) to check the settings.
SM 17 B750
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
ERROR CODES
3. TROUBLESHOOTING
3.1 ERROR CODES
If an error code occurs, retry the communication. If the same problem occurs, try to
fix the problem as suggested below. Note that some error codes appear only in the
error code display and on the service report.
Code Meaning Suggested Cause/Action

0-00 DIS/NSF not detected within Check the line connection.
40 s of Start being pressed Check the NCU - FCU connectors.
The machine at the other end may be
incompatible.
Replace the NCU or FCU.
Check for DIS/NSF with an oscilloscope.
If the rx signal is weak, there may be a bad line.
0-01 DCN received unexpectedly The other party is out of paper or has a jammed
printer.
The other party pressed Stop during
communication.
0-03 Incompatible modem at the The other terminal is incompatible.
other end
0-04 CFR or FTT not received Check the line connection.
after modem training Check the NCU - FCU connectors.
Try changing the tx level and/or cable equalizer
settings.
Replace the FCU or NCU.
The other terminal may be faulty; try sending to
another machine.
If the rx signal is weak or defective, there may be
a bad line.
Cross reference
Tx level - NCU Parameter 01 (PSTN)
Cable equalizer - G3 Switch 07 (PSTN)
Dedicated Tx parameters - Section 4
0-05 Unsuccessful after modem Check the line connection.
training at 2400 bps Check the NCU - FCU connectors.
Try adjusting the tx level and/or cable equalizer.
Check for line problems.
Cross reference
See error code 0-04.
B750 18 SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
ERROR CODES
Fax Option
Type 3232
0-06 The other terminal did not Check the line connection.
B750
reply to DCS Check the FCU - NCU connectors.
Try adjusting the tx level and/or cable equalizer
settings.
The other end may be defective or incompatible;
try sending to another machine.
Cross reference
0-07 No post-message response Check the line connection.
from the other end after a Check the FCU - NCU connectors.
page was sent Replace the NCU or FCU.
The other end may have jammed or run out of
paper.
The other end user may have disconnected the
call.
Check for a bad line.
The other end may be defective; try sending to
another machine.
0-08 The other end sent RTN or Check the line connection.
PIN after receiving a page, Check the FCU - NCU connectors.
because there were too Replace the NCU or FCU.
many errors
The other end may have jammed, or run out of
paper or memory space.
settings.
The other end may have a defective
modem/NCU/FCU; try sending to another
machine.
Check for line problems and noise.
Cross reference
Tx level - NCU Parameter 01 (PSTN)
Cable equalizer - G3 Switch 07 (PSTN)
Dedicated Tx parameters - Section 4
0-14 Non-standard post message Check the FCU - NCU connectors.
response code received Incompatible or defective remote terminal; try
sending to another machine.
Noisy line: resend.
settings.
Cross reference
SM 19 B750
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
ERROR CODES

0-15 The other terminal is not The other terminal is not capable of accepting the
capable of specific following functions, or the other terminals memory
functions. is full.
Confidential rx
Transfer function
SEP/SUB/PWD/SID
0-16 CFR or FTT not detected Check the line connection.
after modem training in Check the FCU - NCU connectors.
confidential or transfer mode Replace the NCU or FCU.
settings.
The other end may have disconnected, or it may
be defective; try calling another machine.
If the rx signal level is too low, there may be a line
problem.
Cross reference
0-20 Facsimile data not received Check the line connection.
within 6 s of retraining Check the FCU - NCU connectors.
Try calling another fax machine.
Try adjusting the reconstruction time for the first
line and/or rx cable equalizer setting.
Cross reference
Reconstruction time - G3 Switch 0A, bit 6
Rx cable equalizer - G3 Switch 07 (PSTN)
0-21 EOL signal (end-of-line) Check the connections between the FCU, NCU, &
from the other end not line.
received within 5 s of the Check for line noise or other line problems.
previous EOL signal Replace the NCU or FCU.
The remote machine may be defective or may
have disconnected.
Cross reference
Maximum interval between EOLs and between
ECM frames - G3 Bit Switch 0A, bit 4
0-22 The signal from the other Check the line connection.
end was interrupted for Check the FCU - NCU connectors.
more than the acceptable Replace the NCU or FCU.
modem carrier drop time
Defective remote terminal.
(default: 200 ms)
Check for line noise or other line problems.
Try adjusting the acceptable modem carrier drop
time.
Cross reference
Acceptable modem carrier drop time - G3 Switch
0A, bits 0 and 1
B750 20 SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
ERROR CODES
Fax Option
Type 3232
0-23 Too many errors during Check the line connection.
B750
reception Check the FCU - NCU connectors.
Try asking the other end to adjust their tx level.
Try adjusting the rx cable equalizer setting and/or
rx error criteria.
Cross reference
Rx error criteria - Communication Switch 02, bits 0
and 1
0-30 The other terminal did not Check the line connection.
reply to NSS(A) in AI short Check the FCU - NCU connectors.
protocol mode Try adjusting the tx level and/or cable equalizer
settings.
The other terminal may not be compatible.
Cross reference
Dedicated tx parameters - Section 4
0-32 The other terminal sent a Check the protocol dump list.
DCS, which contained Ask the other party to contact the manufacturer.
functions that the receiving
machine cannot handle.
0-52 Polarity changed during Check the line connection.
communication Retry communication.
0-55 FCE does not detect the FCU firmware or board defective.
SG3-V34. SG3-V34 firmware or board defective.
0-56 The stored message data SG3-V34 firmware or board defective.
exceeds the capacity of the
mailbox in the SG3-V34.
0-70 The communication mode The other terminal did not have a compatible
specified in CM/JM was not communication mode (e.g., the other terminal was
available a V.34 data modem and not a fax modem.)
(V.8 calling and called A polling tx file was not ready at the other terminal
terminal) when polling rx was initiated from the calling
terminal.
0-74 The calling terminal fell back The calling terminal could not detect ANSam due
to T.30 mode, because it to noise, etc.
could not detect ANSam ANSam was too short to detect.
after sending CI. Check the line connection and condition.
Try making a call to another V.8/V.34 fax.
0-75 The called terminal fell back The terminal could not detect ANSam.
to T.30 mode, because it Check the line connection and condition.
could not detect a CM in Try receiving a call from another V.8/V.34 fax.
response to ANSam
(ANSam timeout).
SM 21 B750
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
ERROR CODES

0-76 The calling terminal fell back The called terminal could not detect a CM due to
to T.30 mode, because it noise, etc.
could not detect a JM in Check the line connection and condition.
response to a CM Try making a call to another V.8/V.34 fax.
(CM timeout).
0-77 The called terminal fell back The calling terminal could not detect a JM due to
to T.30 mode, because it noise, etc.
could not detect a CJ in A network that has narrow bandwidth cannot pass
response to JM JM to the other end.
(JM timeout). Check the line connection and condition.
Try receiving a call from another V.8/V.34 fax.
0-79 The called terminal detected Check for line noise or other line problems.
CI while waiting for a V.21 If this error occurs, the called terminal falls back to
signal. T.30 mode.
0-80 The line was disconnected The guard timer expired while starting these
due to a timeout in V.34 phases. Serious noise, narrow bandwidth, or low
phase 2 line probing. signal level can cause these errors.
0-81 The line was disconnected If these errors happen at the transmitting terminal:
due to a timeout in V.34 Try making a call at a later time.
phase 3 equalizer training. Try using V.17 or a slower modem using
0-82 The line was disconnected dedicated tx parameters.
due to a timeout in the V.34 Try increasing the tx level.
phase 4 control channel
Try adjusting the tx cable equalizer setting.
start-up.
If these errors happen at the receiving terminal:
0-83 The line was disconnected
Try adjusting the rx cable equalizer setting.
due to a timeout in the V.34
control channel restart Try increasing the tx level.
sequence. Try using V.17 or a slower modem if the same
error is frequent when receiving from multiple
senders.
0-84 The line was disconnected The signal did not stop within 10 s.
due to abnormal signaling in Turn off the machine, then turn it back on.
V.34 phase 4 control If the same error is frequent, replace the FCU.
channel start-up.
0-85 The line was disconnected The signal did not stop within 10 s.
due to abnormal signaling in Turn off the machine, then turn it back on.
V.34 control channel restart. If the same error is frequent, replace the FCU.
0-86 The line was disconnected The other terminal was incompatible.
because the other terminal Ask the other party to contact the manufacturer.
requested a data rate using
MPh that was not available
in the currently selected
symbol rate.
0-87 The control channel started The receiving terminal restarted the control
after an unsuccessful channel because data reception in the primary
primary channel. channel was not successful.
This does not result in an error communication.
0-88 The line was disconnected Try using a lower data rate at the start.
because PPR was Try adjusting the cable equalizer setting.
transmitted/received 9
(default) times within the
same ECM frame.
B750 22 SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
ERROR CODES
Fax Option
Type 3232
2-11 Only one V.21 connection Replace the FCU.
B750
flag was received
2-12 Modem clock irregularity Replace the FCU.
2-13 Modem initialization error Turn off the machine, then turn it back on.
Update the modem ROM.
Replace the FCU.
2-23 JBIG compression or Turn off the machine, then turn it back on.
reconstruction error Replace the EXFUNC board if the error is
frequent.
2-24 JBIG ASIC error Turn off the machine, then turn it back on.
Replace the EXFUNC board if the error is
frequent.
2-25 JBIG data reconstruction JBIG data error
error (BIH error) Check the senders JBIG function.
2-26 JBIG data reconstruction Update the MBU ROM.
error (Float marker error)
2-27 JBIG data reconstruction
error (End marker error)
2-28 JBIG data reconstruction
error (Timeout)
2-29 JBIG trailing edge maker FCU defective
error Check the destination device.
2-50 The machine resets itself for If this is frequent, update the ROM, or replace the
a fatal FCU system error FCU.
2-51 The machine resets itself If this is frequent, update the ROM, or replace the
because of a fatal FCU.
communication error
2-53 Snd msg() in the manual The user did the same operation many times, and
task is an error because the this gave too much load to the machine.
mailbox for the operation
task is full.
4-01 Line current was cut Check the line connector.
Check the connection between FCU and NCU.
Replace the FCU or the NCU.
4-10 Communication failed Get the ID Codes the same and/or the CSIs
because of an ID Code programmed correctly, then resend.
mismatch (Closed Network) The machine at the other end may be defective.
or Tel. No./CSI mismatch
(Protection against Wrong
Connections)
5-10 DCR timer expired Replace the FCU.
5-20 Storage impossible because Temporary memory shortage.
of a lack of memory Test the SAF memory.
5-21 Memory overflow Replace the FCU or optional EXMEM board
5-23 Print data error when Test the SAF memory.
printing a substitute rx or Ask the other end to resend the message.
confidential rx message Replace the FCU or optional EXMEM board.
5-25 SAF file access error Replace the FCU or EXMEM board.
SM 23 B750
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
ERROR CODES

6-00 G3 ECM - T1 time out Try adjusting the rx cable equalizer.
during reception of facsimile Replace the FCU or NCU.
data
6-01 G3 ECM - no V.21 signal
was received
6-02 G3 ECM - EOR was
received
6-04 G3 ECM - RTC not detected Check the line connection.
Check connections from the NCU to the FCU.
Check for a bad line or defective remote terminal.
6-05 G3 ECM - facsimile data Check the line connection.
frame not received within 18 Check connections from the NCU to the FCU.
s of CFR, but there was no Check for a bad line or defective remote terminal.
line fail
Try adjusting the rx cable equalizer
Cross reference
6-06 G3 ECM - coding/decoding Defective FCU.
error The other terminal may be defective.
6-08 G3 ECM - PIP/PIN received The other end pressed Stop during
in reply to PPS.NULL communication.
The other terminal may be defective.
6-09 G3 ECM - ERR received Check for a noisy line.
Adjust the tx levels of the communicating
machines.
See code 6-05.
6-10 G3 ECM - error frames still Check for line noise.
received at the other end Adjust the tx level (use NCU parameter 01 or the
after all communication dedicated tx parameter for that address).
attempts at 2400 bps Check the line connection.
6-21 V.21 flag detected during The other terminal may be defective or
high speed modem incompatible.
communication
6-22 The machine resets the Check for line noise.
sequence because of an If the same error occurs frequently, replace the
abnormal handshake in the FCU.
V.34 control channel Defective remote terminal.
6-99 V.21 signal not stopped Replace the FCU.
within 6 s
13-17 SIP user name registration Double registration of the SIP user name.
error Capacity for user-name registration in the SIP
server is not sufficient.
13-18 SIP server access error Incorrect initial setting for the SIP server.
Defective SIP server.
B750 24 SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
ERROR CODES
Fax Option
Type 3232
14-00 SMTP Send Error Error occurred during sending to the SMTP server.
B750
Occurs for any error other than 14-01 to 16. For
example, the mail address of the system
administrator is not registered.
14-01 SMTP Connection Failed Failed to connect to the SMTP server (timeout)
because the server could not be found.
The IP address for the SMTP server is not stored
in the machine.
The DNS IP address is not registered.
Network not operating correctly.
Defective PC that does file transfer
14-02 No Service by SMTP SMTP server operating incorrectly.
Service (421)
14-03 Access to SMTP Server Failed to access the SMTP server because the
Denied (450) access is denied.
SMTP server operating incorrectly
14-04 Access to SMTP Server SMTP server operating incorrectly
Denied (550)
14-05 SMTP Server HDD Full Failed to access the SMTP server because the HDD
(452) is full.
SMTP Server hard disk full.
Insufficient HDD space in the PC that does file
transfer
14-06 User Not Found on SMTP The user does not exist locally.
Server (551)
14-07 Data Send to SMTP Server Failed to access the SMTP server because the
Failed (4XX) transmission fails.
14-08 Data Send to SMTP Server Failed to access the SMTP server because the
Failed (5XX) transmission fails.
14-09 Authorization Failed for POP-Before-SMTP or SMTP authorization failed.
Sending to SMTP Server Incorrect setting for file transfer
14-10 Addresses Exceeded Number of broadcast addresses exceeded the limit
for the SMTP server.
14-11 Buffer Full The send buffer is full so the transmission could not
be completed. Buffer is full due to using Scan-to-
Email while the buffer is being used send mail at the
same time.
14-12 Data Size Too Large Transmission was cancelled because the detected
size of the file was too large.
14-13 Send Cancelled Processing is interrupted because the user pressed
Stop.
SM 25 B750
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
ERROR CODES

14-30 MCS File Creation Failed Failed to create the MCS file because:
The number of files created with other
applications on the Document Server has
exceeded the limit.
HDD is full or not operating correctly.
Software error.
14-31 UFS File Creation Failed UFS file could not be created:
Not enough space in UFS area to handle both
Scan-to-Email and IFAX transmission.
HDD full or not operating correctly.
Software error.
14-32 Cancelled the Mail Due to Error detected with NFAX and send was cancelled
Error Detected by NFAX due to a software error.
14-33 No Mail Address For the Neither the mail address of the machine nor the mail
Machine address of the network administrator is registered.
14-50 Mail Job Task Error Due to an FCU mail job task error, the send was
cancelled:
Address book was being edited during creation of
the notification mail.
Software error.
14-51 UCS Destination Download Not even one return notification can be downloaded:
Error The address book was being edited.
The number for the specified destination does not
exist (it was deleted or edited after the job was
created).
14-60 Send Cancel Failed The cancel operation by the user failed to cancel the
send operation.
14-61 Notification Mail Send Failed All addresses for return notification mail failed.
for All Destinations
15-01 POP3/IMAP4 Server Not At startup, the system detected that the IP address
Registered of the POP3/IMAP4 server has not been registered
in the machine.
15-02 POP3/IMAP4 Mail Account The POP3/IMAP4 mail account has not been
Information Not Registered registered.
15-03 Mail Address Not Registered The mail address has not been registered.
15-10 DCS Mail Receive Error Error other than 15-11 to 15-18.
15-11 Connection Error The DNS or POP3/IMAP4 server could not be
found:
The IP address for DNS or POP3/IMAP4 server is
not stored in the machine.
The DNS IP address is not registered.
Network not operating correctly.
15-12 Authorization Error POP3/IMAP4 send authorization failed:
Incorrect IFAX user name or password.
Access was attempted by another device, such as
the PC.
POP3/IMAP4 settings incorrect.
B750 26 SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
ERROR CODES
Fax Option
Type 3232
15-13 Receive Buffer Full Occurs only during manual reception. Transmission
B750
cannot be received due to insufficient buffer space.
The buffer is being used for mail send or Scan-to-
Email.
15-14 Mail Header Format Error The mail header is not standard format. For
example, the Date line description is incorrect.
15-15 Mail Divide Error The e-mail is not in standard format. There is no
boundary between parts of the e-mail, including the
header.
15-16 Mail Size Receive Error The mail cannot be received because it is too large.
15-17 Receive Timeout May occur during manual receiving only because
the network is not operating correctly.
15-18 Incomplete Mail Received Only one portion of the mail was received.
15-31 Final Destination for The format of the final destination for the transfer
Transfer Request Reception request was incorrect.
Format Error
15-39 Send/Delivery Destination The transmission cannot be delivered to the final
Error destination:
Destination file format is incorrect.
Could not create the destination for the file
transmission.
15-41 SMTP Receive Error Reception rejected because the transaction
exceeded the limit for the Auth. E-mail RX setting.
15-42 Off Ramp Gateway Error The delivery destination address was specified with
Off Ramp Gateway OFF.
15-43 Address Format Error Format error in the address of the Off Ramp
Gateway.
15-44 Addresses Over The number of addresses for the Off Ramp
Gateway exceeded the limit of 30.
15-61 Attachment File Format The attached file is not TIFF format.
Error
15-62 TIFF File Compatibility Error Could not receive transmission due to:
Resolution error
Image of resolution greater than 200 dpi without
extended memory.
Resolution is not supported.
Page size error
The page size was larger than A3.
Compression error
File was compressed with other than MH, MR, or
MMR.
15-63 TIFF Parameter Error The TIFF file sent as the attachment could not be
received because the TIFF header is incorrect:
The TIFF file attachment is a type not supported.
The TIFF file attachment is corrupted.
Software error.
15-64 TIFF Decompression Error The file received as an attachment caused the TIFF
decompression error:
The TIFF format of the attachment is corrupted.
Software error.
SM 27 B750
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
ERROR CODES

15-71 Not Binary Image Data The file could not be received because the
attachment was not binary image data.
15-73 MDN Status Error Could not find the Disposition line in the header of
the Return Receipt, or there is a problem with the
firmware.
15-74 MSDN Message ID Error Could not find the Original Message ID line in the
header of the Return Receipt, or there is a problem
with the firmware.
15-80 Mail Job Task Read Error Could not receive the transmission because the
destination buffer is full and the destination could
not be created (this error may occur when receiving
a transfer request or a request for notification of
reception).
15-81 Repeated Destination Could not repeat receive the transmission because
Registration Error the destination buffer is full and the destination
could not be created (this error may occur when
receiving a transfer request or a request for
notification of reception).
15-91 Send Registration Error Could not receive the file for transfer to the final
destination:
The format of the final destination or the transfer
destination is incorrect.
Destinations are full so the final and transfer
destinations could not be created.
15-92 Memory Overflow Transmission could not be received because
memory overflowed during the transaction.
15-93 Memory Access Error Transaction could not complete due to a malfunction
of SAF memory.
15-94 Incorrect ID Code The machine rejected an incoming e-mail for
transfer request, because the ID code in the
incoming e-mail did not match the ID code
registered in the machine.
15-95 Transfer Station Function The machine rejected an incoming e-mail for
transfer because the transfer function was
unavailable.
22-00 Original length exceeded the Divide the original into more than one page.
maximum scan length Check the resolution used for scanning. Lower the
scan resolution if possible.
Add optional page memory.
22-01 Memory overflow while Wait for the files in the queue to be sent.
receiving Delete unnecessary files from memory.
Transfer the substitute reception files to an another
fax machine, if the machines printer is busy or out
of order.
Add an optional SAF memory card or hard disk.
22-02 Tx or rx job stalled due to The job started normally but did not finish normally;
line disconnection at the data may or may not have been received fully.
other end Restart the machine.
22-04 The machine cannot store Update the ROM
received data in the SAF Replace the FCU.
B750 28 SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
ERROR CODES
Fax Option
Type 3232
22-05 No G3 parameter Defective FCU board or firmware.
B750
confirmation answer
23-00 Data read timeout during Restart the machine.
construction Replace the FCU
25-00 The machine software Update the ROM
resets itself after a fatal Replace the FCU.
transmission error occurred
F0-xx V.34 modem error Replace the FCU.
F6-xx SG3-V34 modem error Update the SG3-V34 modem ROM.
Replace the SG3-V34 board.
Try communicating another V.8/V.34 fax.
SM 29 B750
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
IP-FAX TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURES
3.2 IP-FAX TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURES

Use the following procedures to determine whether the machine or another part of
the network is causing the problem.
Communication
Item Action Remarks
Route
1. Connection with Check that the LAN
the LAN cable is connected to
the machine.
Check that the LEDs
on the hub are lit.
General LAN
2. LAN activity Check that other
devices connected to
the LAN can
communicate through
the LAN.
1. Network settings on Check the network Is the IP address
the PC settings on the PC. registered in the
TCP/IP properties in
the network setup
correct? Check the IP
address with the
administrator of the
network.
2. Check that PC can Use the ping At the MS-DOS
Between IFAX connect with the command on the PC prompt, type ping then
and PC machine to contact the the IP address of the
machine. machine, then press
Enter.
3. LAN settings in the Check the LAN Use the Network
machine parameters function in the User
Check if there is an IP Tools.
address conflict with If there is an IP
other PCs. address conflict,
inform the
administrator.
1. LAN settings in the Check the LAN Use the Network
machine parameters function in the User
Between Check if there is an IP Tools.
machine and e- address conflict with If there is an IP
mail server other PCs. address conflict,
inform the
administrator.
B750 30 SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Communication
Item Action Remarks
Fax Option
Route
Type 3232
B750
2. E-mail account on Make sure that the Ask the administrator
the server machine can log into to check.
the e-mail server.
Check that the
account and
password stored in
the server are the
same as in the
machine.
Between
machine and e- 3. E-mail server Make sure that the Ask the administrator
mail server client devices which to check.
have an account in Send a test e-mail
the server can with the machines
send/receive e-mail. own number as the
destination. The
machine receives the
returned e-mail if the
communication is
performed
successfully.
1. E-mail account on Make sure that the PC Ask the administrator
the Server can log into the e-mail to check.
server.
Check that the
account and
password stored in
the server are the
same as in the
machine.
2. E-mail server Make sure that the Ask the administrator
client devices which to check.
have an account in Send a test e-mail
Between e-mail the server can with the machines
server and send/receive e-mail. own number as the
internet destination. The
machine receives the
returned e-mail if the
communication is
performed
successfully.
3. Destination e-mail Make sure that the e-
address mail address is actually
used.
Check that the e-mail
address contains no
incorrect characters
such as spaces.
SM 31 B750
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Communication
Item Action Remarks
Route
4. Router settings Use the ping command Ask the administrator
to contact the router. of the server to check.
Between e-mail
Check that other devices
server and
connected to the router
internet
can sent data over the
router.
1. Error message by Check whether e-mail Inform the
e-mail from the can be sent to another administrator of the
network of the address on the same LAN.
Between e-mail destination. network, using the
server and
application e-mail
internet software.
Check the error e-mail
message.
B750 32 SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
FAX SC CODES
3.3 FAX SC CODES
Fax Option
Type 3232
B750
3.3.1 OVERVIEW
When the FCU detects a Fax SC Code condition, it resets itself automatically
(default setting). This initializes the FCU without erasing files in the SAF memory or
resetting the switches.
For details on Fax SC Codes 1201, refer to the following sections.
If bit 7 of System Switch 1F is changed to 1, when the FCU detects a Fax SC
Code condition, it displays the code on the display and stops working until the fax
unit is initialized using one of the following methods:
Hold down the 7 and 9 keys for more than 10 s.
Turn off the main power switch and turn it back on.
3.3.2 SC1201
When the FCU detects an unrecoverable error in the SRAM, which requires a
complete SRAM initialization, the fax unit displays this SC Code and stops.
There is no way to recover from this error condition without a complete SRAM
initialization (all the user and service programmed data will be erased).
The possible causes are:
SRAM backup battery defect, or SW1 on the MBU is at the OFF position.
The SRAM on the MBU has a physical defect.
SD card connection was loose.
SM 33 B750
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
FAX SC CODES
3.3.3 FAX SC CODE TABLE

Suggested Sys Switch Sys Switch
SC Code Description
Action 1F bit 7 = 0 1F bit 7 = 1
1001 FCU error Initialize the fax unit. Automatic SC Code
(See section 3.3.1.for reset display
the initialization
procedure)
1201 Unrecoverable FCU - Refer to section 3.3.2. Service Call
SRAM error display
1299 Software error Initialize the fax unit. Automatic
1305 reset
1310
1311
1312
1401
1405
B750 34 SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
4. SERVICE TABLES
Fax Option
Type 3232
B750
CAUTION
Never turn off the main power switch when the power LED is lit or flashing.
To avoid damaging the hard disk or memory, press the operation power
switch to switch the power off, wait for the power LED to go off, and then
switch the main power switch off.
NOTE: The main power LED ( ) lights or flashes while the platen cover or
ARDF is open, while the main machine is communicating with a facsimile
or the network server, or while the machine is accessing the hard disk or
memory for reading or writing data.
4.1 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE

4.1.1 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE OPERATION
The service program (SP) mode is used to check electrical data, change modes,
and adjust values.
Entering and Exiting SP Mode
1. Press the Clear Mode key.
2. Use the keypad to enter 107.

3. Hold down Clear/Stop for at least 3 seconds.
Fax SP 4. On the touch-panel, press Fax SP.
Exit 5. Press Exit twice to return to the copy window.
SM 35 B750
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SP Mode Button Summary

Here is a short summary of the touch-panel buttons.
B750S500.WMF
Opens all SP groups and sublevels.

Closes all open groups and sublevels and restores the initial SP mode display.
Not used for the Fax SP mode.
Enter the SP mode directly with the number keys if you know the SP number and then
press . (SP Mode must be highlighted before you can enter the number. Just press SP
Mode if it is not highlighted.)
Press twice to leave the SP mode return to the copy window to resume normal operation.
Press any Group number to open a list of SP modes and titles for that group. For
example, to open the SP mode list for SP1-nnn , press Group1. If an SP has sublevels,
click the appropriate button to expand the list.
Press to scroll the display to the previous or next group.
Press to scroll to the previous or next display in segments the size of the screen display
(page).
Press to scroll the display to the previous or next line, line by line.
Press to move to the highlight to the previous or next selection in the list on the left.
B750 36 SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Switching Between SP Mode and Copy Mode for Test Printing
Fax Option
Type 3232
1) In the SP mode, select the test print and then press Copy Window.
B750
2) Use the copy window (copier mode), to select the appropriate settings
(paper size, etc.) for the test print.
3) Press Start to execute the test print.
4) Press SP Mode (highlighted) to return to the SP mode screen and repeat
from step 1.
Selecting the Program Number

Program numbers have two or three levels.
1. Before you begin, refer to the Service Tables to find the SP that you want to
adjust. ( 4.1.2)
2. Click the Group number on the left side SP Mode window that contains the SP
that you want to adjust.
3. Use the scrolling buttons in the center of the SP mode window to display the
SP number that you want to open, and then press that number to expand the
list.
4. Use the center touch-panel buttons to scroll to the number and title of the item
that you want to set and press. The small entry box on the right is activated and
displays the default or the current setting below.
B750S501.WMF
NOTE: Refer to the Service Tables for the range of allowed settings. ( 4.1.2)
1. To enter a setting
Press to toggle between plus and minus and then use the keypad to enter
the appropriate number. The number you enter write over the previous
setting.
Press to enter the setting. (If you enter a number that is out of range, the
key pressed is ignored.)
When you are prompted to complete the selection, press Yes.
2. When you are finished, press Exit twice to return to the copy window.
SM 37 B750
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
4.1.2 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE TABLES
SP1-XXX (Bit Switches) Section 3.2 Bit Switches

1 Mode No. Function
101 System Switch
001 032 00 1F Change the bit switches for system settings
for the fax option
Section 4.2 Bit Switches
102 Ifax Switch
001 016 00 0F Change the bit switches for internet fax
settings for the fax option
103 Printer Switch
001 016 00 0F Change the bit switches for printer settings
for the fax option
104 Communication Switch
001 032 00 1F Change the bit switches for communication
settings for the fax option
105 G3-1 Switch
001 016 00 0F Change the bit switches for the protocol
settings of the standard G3 board
106 G3-2 Switch
settings of the optional G3 board
107 G3-3 Switch
settings of the optional G3 board
108 G4 Internal Switch
001 032 00 1F Not used (Do not change the bit switches)
109 G4 Parameter Switch
001 016 00 0F Not used (Do not change the bit switches)
111 IP fax Switch
001 016 00 0F Change the bit switches for optional IP fax
parameters
SP2-XXX (RAM Data)

2 Mode No. Function
101 RAM Read/Write
001 Change RAM data for the fax board directly.
Section 4.5 Service RAM Addresses
102 Memory Dump
001 G3-1 Memory Dump Print out RAM data for the fax board.
Section 4.5 Service RAM Addresses
B750 38 SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
2 Mode No. Function
Fax Option
Type 3232
102 002 G3-2 Memory Dump Print out RAM data for the optional SG3
B750
board.
003 G3-3 Memory Dump Print out RAM data for the optional SG3
board.
004 G4 Memory Dump Print out RAM data for the SiG4 board.
103 G3-1 NCU Parameters

001 023 CC, 01 22 NCU parameter settings for the standard
G3 board. Section 4.3 NCU Parameters
001 023 CC, 01 22 NCU parameter settings for the optional G3
board. Section 4.3 NCU Parameters
001 023 CC, 01 22 NCU parameter settings for the optional G3
board. Section 4.3 NCU Parameters
SP3-XXX (Tel Line Settings)

3 Mode No. Function
101 Service Station
001 Fax Number Enter the fax number of the service station.
002 Select Line Select the line type.
102 Serial Number
000 Enter the fax units serial number.
103 PSTN-1 Port Settings
001 Select Line Select the line type setting for the G3-1 line.
If the machine is installed on a PABX line,
select PABX, PABX(GND) or
PABX(FLASH).
002 PSTN Access Number Enter the PSTN access number for the
G3-1 line.
003 Memory Lock If the customer does not want to receive
Disabled transmissions using Memory Lock on this
line, turn this SP on.
001 Select Line Select the line setting for the G3-2 line. If
the machine is installed on a PABX line,
PABX(FLASH).
002 PSTN Access Number Enter the PSTN access number for the G3-
2 line.

line, change this SP to on.
004 Transmission If you turn this SP on, the machine does not
Disabled send any fax messages on the G3-2 line.
SM 39 B750
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
3 Mode No. Function

001 Select Line Select the line setting for the G3-3 line. If
the machine is installed on a PABX line,
PABX(FLASH).
002 PSTN Access Number Enter the PSTN access number for the G3-
3 line.
line, change this SP to on.
004 Transmission If you turn this SP on, the machine does not
Disabled send any fax messages on the G3-3 line.
106 ISDN Port Settings
001 Select Line Not used (Do not change the bit switches)
002 PSTN Access Number
003 Memory Lock
Disabled
004 Transmission
Disabled
107 IPFAX Port Settings
001 H323 Port
002 SIP Port
003 RAS Port
004 Gatekeeper port
005 T.38 Port
006 SIP Server Port
007 IPFAX Protocol Select "H323" or "SAP".
Priority
201 FAX SW
001 032 00 1F
SP4-XXX (ROM Versions)

4 Mode No. Function
101 001 FCU ROM Version Displays the FCU ROM version.
102 001 Error Codes Displays the latest 64 fax error codes.
103 001 G3-1 ROM Version Displays the G3-1 modem version.
106 001 G4 ROM Version Not used (Do not change the bit switches)
107 001 Charge ROM Version Not used (Do not change the bit switches)
B750 40 SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SP5-XXX (Initializing)
Fax Option
Type 3232
5 Mode No. Function
B750
101 Initialize SRAM
000 Initializes the bit switches and user
parameters, user data in the SRAM, files in
the SAF memory, and clock.
102 Erase All Files
000 Erases all files stored in the SAF memory.
103 Reset Bit Switches
000 Resets the bit switches and user
parameters.
104 Factory setting
000 Resets the bit switches and user
parameters, user data in the SRAM and
files in the SAF memory.
SP6-XXX (Reports)
6 Mode No. Function
101 System Parameter List
000 Touch the ON button to print the system
parameter list.
102 Service Monitor Report
000 Touch the ON button to print the service
monitor report.
103 G3 Protocol Dump List
001 G3 All Prints the protocol dump list of all
Communications communications for all G3 lines.
002 G3-1 (All Prints the protocol dump list of all
Communications) communications for the G3-1 line.
103 003 G3-1 Prints the protocol dump list of the last
(1 Communication) communication for the G3-1 line.
004 G3-2 Prints the protocol dump list of all
(All Communications) communications for the G3-2 line.
005 G3-2 Prints the protocol dump list of the last
006 G3-3 Prints the protocol dump list of all
(All Communications) communications for the G3-3 line.
007 G3-3 Prints the protocol dump list of the last
104 G4 Protocol Dump List
001 Dch + Bch 1 Not used (Do not change the bit switches)
002 Dch
003 Bch 1 Link Layer
004 Dch Link Layer
005 Dch +Bch 2
006 Bch 2 Link Layer
SM 41 B750
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
6 Mode No. Function

105 All Files print out
000 Prints out all the user files in the SAF
memory, including confidential messages.
NOTE: Do not use this function, unless the
customer is having trouble printing
confidential messages or recovering
files stored using the memory lock
feature.
106 Journal Print out
001 All Journals The machine prints all the communication
records on the report.
002 Specified Date The machine prints all communication
records after the specified date.
107 Log List Print out
001 All log files These log print out functions are for
002 Printer designer use only.
003 SC/TRAP Stored
004 Decompression
005 Scanner
006 JOB/SAF
007 Reconstruction
008 JBIG
009 Fax Driver
010 G3CCU
011 Fax Job
012 CCU
013 Scanner Condition
108 IP Protocol Dump List
001 All Communications Prints the protocol dump list of all
communications for the IP fax line.
002 1 Communication Prints the protocol dump list of the last
communication for the IP fax line.
B750 42 SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SP7-XXX (Test Modes)
Fax Option
Type 3232
These are the test modes for PTT approval.
B750
7 Function
101 G3-1 Modem Tests
102 G3-1 DTMF Tests
103 Ringer Test
104 G3-1 V34 (S2400baud)
105 G3-1 V34 (S2800baud)
106 G3-1 V34 (S3000baud)
107 G3-1 V34 (S3200baud)
108 G3-1 V34 (S3429baud)
109 Recorded Message Test
111 G3-2 DTMF Tests
112 G3-2 V34 (S2400baud)
113 G3-2 V34 (S2800baud)
114 G3-2 V34 (S3000baud)
115 G3-2 V34 (S3200baud)
116 G3-2 V34 (S3429baud)
118 G3-3 DTMF Tests
119 G3-3 V34 (S2400baud)
120 G3-3 V34 (S2800baud)
121 G3-3 V34 (S3000baud)
122 G3-3 V34 (S3200baud)
123 G3-3 V34 (S3429baud)
124 IG3-1 Modem Tests - Not used
125 IG3-1 DTMF Tests - Not used
126 IG3-1 V34 (S2400baud) - Not used
131 IG3-2 Modem Tests - Not used
132 IG3-2 DTMF Tests - Not used
SP9-XXX (Design Switch Mode)

9 Mode No. Function
702 Design Switch DFU
SM 43 B750
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
BIT SWITCHES
4.2 BIT SWITCHES
WARNING
Do not adjust a bit switch or use a setting that is described as Not used,
as this may cause the machine to malfunction or to operate in a manner
that is not accepted by local regulations. Such bits are for use only in other
areas, such as Japan.
NOTE: Default settings for bit switches are not listed in this manual. Refer to the
System Parameter List printed by the machine.
4.2.1 SYSTEM SWITCHES

System Switch 00 SP No. 1-101-001
No FUNCTION COMMENTS
0 Dedicated transmission Set this bit to 1 before changing any dedicated
parameter programming transmission parameters.
0: Disabled 1: Enabled Reset this bit to 0 after programming dedicated
transmission parameters.
1 Confidential RX message print 1: Confidential RX messages can be printed out
out without the password. without the password. Use this bit if the customer
0: Disabled 1: Enabled forgot the password for the confidential messages.
Reset this bit to 0 after printing confidential RX
messages.
2 Technical data printout on the 1: Instead of the personal name, the following data
Journal are listed on the Journal for each G3
0: Disabled communication.
1: Enabled
e.g. 0000 32V34 288/264 L0100 03 04
(1) (2)(3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8)
(1): EQM value (Line quality data). A larger number means more errors.
(2): Symbol rate (V.34 only)
(3): Final modem type used
(4): Starting data rate (for example, 288 means 28.8 kbps)
(5): Final data rate
(6): Rx revel (refer to the note after this table for how to read the rx level)
(7): Total number of error lines that occurred during non-ECM reception.
(8): Total number of burst error lines that occurred during non-ECM reception.
Note:
EQM and rx level are fixed at FFFF in tx mode.
The seventh and eighth numbers are fixed at 00 for transmission records and
ECM reception records.
B750 44 SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
BIT SWITCHES
Fax Option
Type 3232
B750
2 Rx level calculation
Example: 0000 32 V34 288/264 L 01 00 03 04
The four-digit hexadecimal value (N) after L indicates the rx level.

The high byte is given first, followed by the low byte. Divide the decimal value of N by -
16 to get the rx level.
In the above example, the decimal value of N (= 0100 [H]) is 256.

So, the actual rx level is 256/-16 = -16 dB
3 Not used Do not change this setting.
4 Line error mark print When "1" is selected, a line error mark is printed on
0: OFF, 1: ON (print) the printout if a line error occurs during reception.
5 G3/G4 communication This is a fault-finding aid. The LCD shows the key
parameter display parameters (see below). This is normally disabled
0: Disabled because it cancels the CSI display for the user.
1: Enabled Be sure to reset this bit to 0 after testing.
6 Protocol dump list output after This is only used for communication
each communication troubleshooting. It shows the content of the
0: Off transmitted facsimile protocol signals. Always reset
1: On this bit to 0 after finishing testing.
If system switch 09 bit 6 is at 1, the list is only
printed if there was an error during the
communication.
7 Not used Do not change the setting.
G3 Communication Parameters
Modem rate 336: 33600 bps 168: 16800 bps
312: 31200 bps 144: 14400 bps
288: 28800 bps 120: 12000 bps
264: 26400 bps 96: 9600 bps
240: 24000 bps 72: 7200 bps
216: 21600 bps 48: 4800 bps
192: 19200 bps 24: 2400 bps
Resolution S: Standard (8 x 3.85 dots/mm)
D: Detail (8 x 7.7 dots/mm)
F: Fine (8 x 15.4 dots/mm)
SF: Superfine (16 x 15.4 dots/mm)
21: Standard (200 x 100 dpi)
22: Detail (200 x 200 dpi)
44: Superfine (400 x 400 dpi)
Compression mode MMR: MMR compression
MR: MR compression
MH: MH compression
JBO: JBIG compression (Optional mode)
JBB: JBIG compression (Basic mode)
Communication ECM: With ECM
mode NML: With no ECM
SM 45 B750
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
BIT SWITCHES
Width and A4: A4 (8.3"), no reduction

reduction B4: B4 (10.1"), no reduction
A3: A3 (11.7"), no reduction
I/O rate 0: 0 ms/line 10: 10 ms/line
25: 2.5 ms/line 20: 20 ms/line
5: 5 ms/line 40: 40 ms/line
Note:
40 is displayed while receiving a fax message using AI short
protocol.
System Switch 01 - Not used (Do not change the factory settings.)

0-3 Not used Do not change these settings.
4 File retention time 1: A file that had a communication error will not be
0: Depends on User Parameter erased unless the communication is successful.
24 [18(H)]
1: No limit
6-7 Memory read/write by RDS (0,0): All RDS systems are always locked out.
Bit 7 6 Setting (0,1), (1,0): Normally, RDS systems are locked out,
0 0 Always disabled but the user can temporarily switch RDS on to allow
0 1 User selectable RDS operations to take place. RDS will
1 0 User selectable automatically be locked out again after a certain
1 1 Always enabled time, which is stored in System Switch 03. Note that
if an RDS operation takes place, RDS will not switch
off until this time limit has expired.
(1,1): At any time, an RDS system can access the
machine.

0 Length of time that RDS is 00 - 99 hours (BCD).
to temporarily switched on when
7 bits 6 and 7 of System Switch This setting is only valid if bits 6 and 7 of System
02 are set to User selectable Switch 02 are set to User selectable.
The default setting is 24 hours.

3 Printing dedicated tx 1: Each Quick/Speed dial number on the list is
parameters on Quick/Speed printed with the dedicated tx parameters (10 bytes
Dial Lists each).
0: Disabled The first 10 bytes of data are the programmed
1: Enabled dedicated tx parameters; 34 bytes of data are
printed (the other 24 bytes have no use for service
technicians).
B750 46 SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
BIT SWITCHES
Fax Option
Type 3232
B750

0 Margin setting for Create 71 to 99 (BCD) %. This setting determines the
to Margin Transmission reduction ratio when the user uses the Create
7 Margin Transmission feature.
Default setting:1001 0011 (93%)

0 Addition of image data from If this feature is enabled, the top half of the first
confidential transmissions on page of confidential messages will be printed on
the transmission result report transmission result reports.
0: Disabled 1: Enabled
1 Inclusion of communications on 0: Communications that reached phase C (message
the Journal when no image tx/rx) of the T.30 protocol are listed on the Journal.
data was exchanged. 1: Communications that reached phase A (call
0: Disabled 1: Enabled setup) of T.30 protocol are listed on the Journal.
This will include telephone calls.
2 Automatic error report printout 0: Error reports will not be printed.
0: Disabled 1: Enabled 1: Error reports will be printed automatically after
failed communications.
3 Printing of the error code on the 1: Error codes are printed on the error reports.
error report
0: No 1: Yes
5 Power failure report 1: A power failure report will be automatically printed
0: Disabled 1: Enabled after the power is switched on if a fax message
disappeared from the memory when the power was
turned off last.
6 Conditions for printing the This switch becomes effective only when system
protocol dump list switch 00 bit 6 is set to 1.
0: Print for all communications 1: Set this bit to 1 when you wish to print a protocol
1: Print only when there is a dump list only for communications with errors.
communication error
SM 47 B750
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
BIT SWITCHES

7 Priority given to various types This bit determines which set of priorities the
of remote terminal ID when machine uses when listing remote terminal names
printing reports on reports.
0: RTI > CSI > Dial label > Tel.
number Dial Label: The name stored, by the user, for the
1: Dial label > Tel. number > Quick/Speed Dial number.
RTI > CSI
System Switch 0A SP No. 1-101-011

0 Automatic port selection When "1" is selected, a suitable port is automatically
0: Disabled, 1: Enabled selected if the selected port is not used.
3 Continuous polling reception This feature allows a series of stations to be polled
0: Disabled 1: Enabled in a continuous cycle. This will continue until the
polling reception file is erased.
The dialing interval is the same as memory
transmission.
4 Dialing on the ten-key pad 0: Prevents dialing from the ten-key pad while the
when the external telephone is external telephone is off-hook. Use this setting when
off-hook the external telephone is not by the machine, or if a
0: Disabled 1: Enabled wireless telephone is connected as an external
telephone.
1: The user can dial on the machines ten-key pad
when the handset is off-hook.
5 On hook dial 0: On hook dial is disabled.
6-7 Not used Do not change the factory settings
System Switch 0B - Not used (Do not change the factory settings.)
System Switch 0C - Not used (Do not change the factory settings.)
System Switch 0D - Not used (Do not change the factory settings.)
System Switch 0E SP No. 1-101-015

0-2 Not used Do not change the settings.
3 Action when the external 0: Manual tx and rx are possible while the external
handset goes off-hook handset is off-hook. However, memory tx is not
0: Manual tx and rx operation possible.
1: Memory tx and rx operation 1: The display stays in standby mode even when
(the display remains the same) the external handset is used, so that other people
can use the machine for memory tx operation.
Note that manual tx and rx are not possible with this
setting.
B750 48 SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
BIT SWITCHES
Fax Option
Type 3232
System Switch 0F SP No. 1-101-016
B750
0 Country/area code for This country/area code determines the factory
to functional settings (Hex) settings of bit switches and RAM addresses.
7 However, it has no effect on the NCU parameter
00: France 11: USA settings and communication parameter RAM
01: Germany 12: Asia addresses.
02: UK 13: Japan
03: Italy 14: Hong Kong Cross reference
04: Austria 15: South Africa NCU country code:
05: Belgium 16: Australia SP No. 2-103-001 for G3-1
06: Denmark 17: New Zealand SP No. 2-104-001 for G3-2
07: Finland 18: Singapore SP No. 2-105-001 for G3-3
08: Ireland 19: Malaysia
09: Norway 1A: China
0A: Sweden 1B: Taiwan
0B: Switz. 1C: Korea
0C: Portugal 20: Turkey
0D: Holland 21: Greece
0E: Spain 22: Hungary
0F: Israel 23: Czech
10: Canada 24: Poland

0 Threshold memory level for Threshold = N x 128 KB + 256 KB
to parallel memory transmission N can be between 00 - FF(H)
7 Default setting: 02(H) = 512 KB

0 TTI printing position Change this bit to 1 if the TTI overprints information
0: Superimposed on the page that the customer considers to be important (G3
data transmissions).
1: Printed before the data
leading edge
1 TSI (G3) printing position Change this bit to 1 if the TSI (G3) overprints
0: Superimposed on the page information that the customer considers to be
data important.
1: Printed before the data
leading edge
2 Not used Do not change the factory settings.
3 TTI used for broadcasting 1: The TTI (TTI_1 or TTI_2) which is selected for all
0: The TTIs selected for each destinations during broadcasting.
Quick/Speed dial are used
1: The same TTI is used for all
destinations
SM 49 B750
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
BIT SWITCHES

4 Type of TTI used for 1: The machine uses TTI_2 when the user dials the
transmission using the ten-key destination using the ten-key pad. It is also used for
pad polling transmission and manual transmission using
0: TTI_1 the handset.
1: TTI_2
5-7 Not used Do not change the factory settings.

0 TTI printing position in the main TTI: 08 to 92 (BCD) mm
to scan direction Input even numbers only.
7 This setting determines the print start position for
the TTI from the left edge of the paper. If the TTI is
moved too far to the right, it may overwrite the file
number which is on the top right of the page. On an
A4 page, if the TTI is moved over by more than 50
mm, it may overwrite the page number.
System Switch 13 - Not used (do not change these settings)


0 Not used Do not change the settings.
1 Going into the Energy Saver 1: The machine will restart from the Energy Saver
mode automatically mode quickly, because the +5V power supply is
0: Enabled active even in the Energy Saver mode.
1: Disabled
4-5 Interval for preventing the If there is a file waiting for transmission, the machine
machine from entering Energy does not go to Energy Saver mode during the
Saver mode if there is a selected period.
pending transmission file. After transmitting the file, if there is no file waiting for
Bit 5 4 Setting transmission, the machine goes to the Energy Saver
0 0 1 min mode.
0 1 30 min
1 0 1 hour
1 1 24 hours
6 Print user codes on reports. 1: User codes are printed out on the Journal or
0: Disabled 1: Enabled other reports.
B750 50 SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
BIT SWITCHES
Fax Option
Type 3232
B750
0 Parallel Broadcasting 1: The machine sends messages simultaneously
0: Disabled using all available ports during broadcasting.
1: Enabled
1 Priority setting for the G3 line. This function allows the user to select the default G3
0: PSTN-1 > PSTN-2 or 3 line type. The optional SG3 unit(s) are required to
1: PSTN-2 or 3 > PSTN-1 use the PSTN-2 or 3 setting.


6 Extended scanner page 0: After installing the memory expansion option, the
memory after memory option scanner page memory is extended to 4 MB from 2
is installed MB.
0: Disabled 1: If this bit is set to 1 after installing the memory
1: Enabled expansion option, the scanner page memory is
extended to 12 MB. But the SAF memory decreases
to 18 MB.
7 Special Original mode 1: If the customer frequently wishes to transmit a form
0: Disabled or letterhead which has a colored or printed
1: Enabled background, change this bit to 1. Original 1 and
Original 2 can be selected in addition to the Text,
Text/Photo and Photo modes.
System Switch 1A - Not used (do not change these settings)

System Switch 1B - Not used (do not change these settings)
System Switch 1C - Not used (do not change these settings)
System Switch 1D SP No. 1-101-030

0 RTI/CSI/CPS display 1: RTI/CSI/CPS is displayed on the top line of the
0: Disabled LCD panel during communication.
1: Enabled
2 Destination telephone number When "1" is selected, the destination telephone
display limitation number display is limited and redial is disabled.
0: OFF, 1: ON
SM 51 B750
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
BIT SWITCHES
System Switch 1E SP No. 1-101-031

0 Communication after the This setting is effective only when Automatic Journal
Journal data storage area has printout is enabled but the machine cannot print the
become full report (e.g., no paper).
0: Impossible 0: If the buffer memory of the communication
1: Possible records for the Journal has become full, fax
communications will become impossible, to prevent
overwriting the communication records before the
machine prints them out.
1: If the buffer memory of the communication
records for the Journal is full, fax communications
are still possible. But the machine will overwrite the
oldest communication records.
Cross Reference
Automatic Journal output - User switch 03 bit 7
Number of communication records for the
Journal:
200 records (standard)
1000 records (with the Function Upgrade unit
installed)
1 Action when the SAF memory 0: If the SAF memory becomes full during scanning,
has become full during the successfully scanned pages are transmitted.
scanning 1: If the SAF memory becomes full during scanning,
0: The current page is erased. the file is erased and no pages are transmitted.
1: The entire file is erased.
This bit switch is ignored for parallel memory
transmission.
2 RTI/CSI display priority This bit determines which identifier, RTI or CSI, is
0: RTI 1: CSI displayed on the LCD while the machine is
communicating in G3 non-standard mode.
3 File No. printing 1: File numbers are not printed on any reports.
0: Enabled
1: Disabled
4 Action when authorized If authorized reception is enabled but the user has
reception is enabled but stored no acceptable sender RTIs or CSIs, the
authorized RTIs/CSIs are not machine will not be able to receive any fax
yet programmed messages.
If the customer wishes to receive messages from
0: All fax reception is disabled any sender that includes an RTI or CSI, and to block
1: Faxes can be received if the messages from senders that do not include an RTI
sender has an RTI or CSI or CSI, change this bit to 1, then enable
Authorized Reception.
Otherwise, keep this bit at 0 (default setting).
5 Address display priority in the 0: When the machine has both RTI/CSI and the
AI redial mode telephone number information, the machine displays
0: RTI/CSI RTI/CSI.
1: Telephone number 1: The machine always displays the telephone
number.
6-7 Not used Do not change the settings
B750 52 SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
BIT SWITCHES
Fax Option
Type 3232
System Switch 1F SP No. 1-101-032
B750
1 Report printout after an original 0: When an original jams, or the SAF memory
jam during SAF storage or if overflows during scanning, a report will be printed.
the SAF memory fills up Change this bit to 1 if the customer does not want
0: Enabled to have a report in these cases.
1: Disabled Memory tx Memory storage report
Parallel memory tx Transmission result report
3 Received fax print start timing 0: The machine prints each page immediately after
(G3 reception) the machine receives it.
0: After receiving each page 1: The machine prints the complete message after
1: After receiving all pages the machine receives all the pages in the memory.

7 Action when a fax SC has 0: When the fax unit detects a fax SC code other
occurred than SC1201 and SC1207, the fax unit automatically
0: Automatic reset resets itself.
1: Fax unit stops 1: When the fax unit detects any fax SC code, the
fax unit stops.
Cross Reference
Fax SC codes - See Troubleshooting
SM 53 B750
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
BIT SWITCHES
4.2.2 I-FAX SWITCHES

I-fax Switch 00 SP No. 1-102-001
Original Width of TX This setting sets the maximum size of the original
Attachment File that the destination can receive. (Bits 3~7 are
reserved for future use or not used.)
0 A4 0: On, 1: Off
1 B4 NOTE: If more than one of these three bits is set to
2 A3 1, the larger size has priority. For example,
3-6 Reserved if both Bit 2 and Bit 1 are set to 1 then the
maximum size is A3 (Bit 2).
7 Not used
When mail is sent, there is no negotiation with the
receiving machine at the destination, so the sending
machine cannot make a selection for the receiving
capabilities (original width setting) of the receiving
machine. The original width selected with this switch
is used as the RX machines original width setting,
and the original is reduced to this size before
sending. The default is A4.
If the width selected with this switch is higher than
the receiving machine can accept, the machine
detects this and this causes an error.

Original Line Resolution of TX This setting sets the maximum resolution of the
Attachment File original that the destination can receive.
0 200x100 Standard
1 200x200 Detail
2 200x400 Fine
3 Reserved
4 400 x 400 Super Fine
5-6 Reserved
0: Not selected, 1: Selected
NOTE: If more than one of these three bits is set to 1, the higher resolution has priority.
For example, if both Bit 3 and Bit 2 are set to 1 then the resolution is set for
"Reserve (300 x 300)" (Bit 3).
B750 54 SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
BIT SWITCHES
Fax Option
Type 3232
7 mm/inch
B750
This setting selects mm/inch conversion for mail transmission.
0: Off (No conversion), 1: On (Conversion)
When on (set to 1), the machine converts millimeters to inches for sending mail.
There is no switch for converting inches to millimeters.
NOTE: Unlike G3 fax transmissions which can negotiate between sender and receiver
to determine the setting, mail cannot negotiate between terminals; the
mm/inch selection is determined by the sender fax.
When this switch is Off (0):

Images scanned in inches are sent in inches.
Images scanned in mm are sent in mm.
Images received in inches are transmitted in inches.
Images received in mm are transmitted in mm.
When this switch is On (1):
Images scanned in inches are sent in inches.
Images scanned in mm are converted to inches.
Images received in inches are transmitted in inches.
Images received in mm are converted to inches.

0 RX Text Mail Header Processing
This setting determines whether the header information is printed with text e-mails
when they are received.
0: Prints only text mail.
1: Prints mail header information attached to text mail.
When a text mail is received with this switch On (1), the From address and
Subject address are printed as header information.
When a mail with only binary data is received (a TIFF-F file, for example), this
setting is ignored and no header is printed.
1 Output from Attached Document at E-mail TX Error

This setting determines whether only the first page or all pages of an e-mail
attachment are printed at the sending station when a transmission error occurs. This
allows the customer to see which documents have not reached their intended
destinations if sent to the wrong e-mail addresses, for example.
0: Prints 1st page only.
1: Prints all pages.
SM 55 B750
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
BIT SWITCHES

2-3 Text String for Return Receipt
This setting determines the text string output for the Return Receipt that confirms the
transmission was received normally at the destination.
00: Dispatched
Sends from PC mail a request for a Return Receipt. Receives the Return Receipt with
dispatched in the 2nd part:
Disposition: Automatic-action/MDN-send automatically; dispatched
The dispatched string is included in the Subject string.
01: Displayed
Sends from PC mail a request for a Return Receipt. Receives the Return Receipt with
displayed in the 2nd part:
Disposition: Automatic-action/MDN-send automatically; displayed
The displayed string is included in the Subject string.
10: Reserved
11: Reserved
NOTE: A mail requesting a Return Receipt sent from an IFAX with this switch set to
00 (for dispatched) received by Microsoft Outlook 2000 may cause an error.
If any setting other than displayed (01) causes a problem, change the setting
to 01 to enable normal sending of the Return Receipt.
4 Media accept feature
This setting adds or does not add the media accept feature to the answer mail to
confirm a reception.
0: Does not add the media accept feature to the answer mail
1: Adds the media accept feature to the answer mail.
NOTE: Use this bit switch if a problem occurs when the machine receives an answer
mail, which contains the media accept feature field.
5-6 Not Used
7 Image Resolution of RX Text Mail
This setting determines the image resolution of the received mail.
0: 200 x 200
1: 400 x 400
NOTE: The 1 setting requires installation of the Function Upgrade Card in order to
have enough SAF (Store and Forward) memory to receive images at 400 x
400 resolution.
B750 56 SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
BIT SWITCHES
Fax Option
Type 3232
B750
0 Original Output at Transfer Station
This setting determines whether the original is output at the transfer station when it is
received from the sender that initiated the transfer transmission. This feature is the
same as for G3 transfer transmissions.
0: Received original not output at the transfer station.
1: Received original output. The original is printed after the transfer station has
transferred it to the destinations, so its output confirms that the original has been
transferred.
1 Transfer Result Report
This setting determines when a Transfer Result Report is generated and returned to
the transfer requestor.
0: Returns the report after each transfer.
1: Returns the report only if an error occurred during transfer.
2 Destination Error Handling for Reception Transfer Request

This setting restricts transfer transmission based on whether the final destinations are
correct or not.
0: The transfer station transmits to correct destinations only (addresses with no errors
in them).
1: If any address has an error in it, the transfer station transfers no transmissions and
returns a transfer transmission failure report to the requestor that initiated the
transfer.
There is no negotiation between the transfer initiator and the transfer station to
determine whether the final destination addresses are correct or not. This setting
determines whether or not the transfer station transfers the transmissions if there is a
mistake in even one of the final destination addresses.
3 Polling ID Check for Reception of Transfer Request
This setting determines whether the polling IDs of incoming transmissions are checked
to ensure that the polling IDs match.
0: Receives and transfers only messages that have matching polling IDs.
1: Receives and transfers all messages, even if the polling IDs do not match.
4-7 Not Used
SM 57 B750
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
BIT SWITCHES

0 Subject for Delivery TX/Memory Transfer
This setting determines whether the RTI/CSI registered on this machine or the RTI/CSI
of the originator is used in the subject lines of transferred documents.
0: Puts the RTI/CSI of the originator in the Subject line. If this is used, either the RTI
or CSI is used. Only one of these can be received for use in the subject line.
1: Puts the RTI/CSI registered on this machine in the Subject line.
When this switch is used to transfer and deliver mail to a PC, the information in the
Subject line that indicates where the transmission originated can be used to determine
automatically the destination folder for each e-mail.
1-7 Not Used

0 Mail Addresses of SMTP Broadcast Recipients
Determines whether the e-mail addresses of the destinations that receive
transmissions broadcasted using SMTP protocol are recorded in the Journal.
For example:
"1st destination + Total number of destinations: 9" in the Journal indicates a broadcast
to 9 destinations.
0: Not recorded
1: Recorded
1-7 Not Used
I-fax Switch 06 - Not used (do not change the settings) SP No. 1-102-007
I-fax Switch 07 - Not used (do not change the settings) SP No. 1-102-008

0-7 Memory Threshold for POP Mail Reception
This setting determines the amount of SAF (Store and Forward) memory. (SAF stores
fax messages to send later for transmission to more than one location, and also holds
incoming messages if they cannot be printed.) When the amount of SAF memory
available falls below this setting, mail can no longer be received; received mail is then
stored on the mail server.
00-FF (0 to 1024 KB: HEX)
NOTE: The hexadecimal number you enter is multiplied by 4 KB to determine the
amount of memory.
B750 58 SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
BIT SWITCHES
Fax Option
Type 3232
B750
4-7 Restrict TX Retries This setting determines the number of retries when
connection and transmission fails due to errors.
01-F (1-15 Hex)
I-fax Switch 0A - Not used (do not change the settings) SP No. 1-102-011
I-fax Switch 0B - Not used (do not change the settings) SP No. 1-102-012
I-fax Switch 0C - Not used (do not change the settings) SP No. 1-102-013
I-fax Switch 0D - Not used (do not change the settings) SP No. 1-102-014
I-fax Switch 0E - Not used (do not change the settings) SP No. 1-102-015
I-fax Switch 0F SP No. 1-102-016

0 Delivery Method for SMTP RX Files
This setting determines whether files received with SMTP protocol are delivered or
output immediately.
0: Off. Files received via SMTP are output immediately without delivery.
1: On. Files received via SMTP are delivered immediately to their destinations.
1-7 Not used
SM 59 B750
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
BIT SWITCHES
4.2.3 PRINTER SWITCHES

Printer Switch 00 SP No. 1-103-001
0 Page separation mark 0: No marks are printed.
0: Disabled 1: If a received page has to be printed out on two
1: Enabled sheets, an asterisk inside square brackets is printed
at the bottom right hand corner of the first sheet,
and a 2 inside a small box is printed at the top right
hand corner of the second sheet. This helps the
user to identify pages that have been split.
1 Repetition of data when the 0: The next page continues from where the previous
received page is longer than page left off.
the printer paper 1: The final few mm of the previous page are
0: Disabled repeated at the top of the next page. The amount of
1: Enabled repeated data depends on printer switch 04, bits 5
and 6.
2 Prints the date and time on This switch is only effective when user parameter 02
received fax messages - bit 2 (printing the received date and time on
0: Disabled received fax messages) is enabled.
1: Enabled 1: The machine prints the received and printed date
and time at the bottom of each received page.

3-4 Maximum print width used in These bits are only effective when bit 7 of printer
the setup protocol switch 01 is 1.
Bit 4 3 Setting
0 0 Not used
0 1 A3
1 0 B4
1 1 A4
7 Received message width 0: The machine informs the transmitting machine of
restriction in the protocol signal the print width depending on the paper size
to the sender available from the paper feed stations.
0: Disabled Refer to the table on the next page for how the
1: Enabled machine chooses the paper width used in the setup
protocol (NSF/DIS).
1: The machine informs the transmitting machine of
the fixed paper width which is specified by bits 3 and
4 above.
B750 60 SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
BIT SWITCHES
Relationship between available paper sizes and printer width used in the
Fax Option
Type 3232
setup protocol
B750
Available Paper Size Printer width used in the Protocol (NSF/DIS)
A4 or 8.5" x 11" 297 mm width
B5 256 mm width
A5 or 8.5" x 5.5" 216 mm width
No paper available (Paper end) 216 mm width

0 1st paper feed station usage for 0: The paper feed station can be used to print fax
fax printing messages and reports.
0: Enabled
1: Disabled 1: The specified paper feed station will not be used
1 2nd paper feed station usage for printing fax messages and reports.
for fax printing
0: Enabled Note: Do not disable usage for a paper feed station
1: Disabled which has been specified by User Parameter Switch
2 3rd paper feed station usage 0F (15), or which is used for the Specified Cassette
for fax printing Selection feature.
0: Enabled
1: Disabled
3 4th paper feed station usage
for fax printing
0: Enabled
1: Disabled
4 LCT usage for fax printing
0: Enabled
1: Disabled
SM 61 B750
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
BIT SWITCHES

0 Length reduction of received 0: Incoming pages are printed without length
data reduction.
0: Disabled (Page separation threshold: Printer Switch 03, bits 4
1: Enabled to 7)
1: Incoming page length is reduced when printing.
(Maximum reducible length: Printer Switches 04,
bits 0 to 4)
4 Page separation threshold (with reduction disabled with switch 03-0 above)
to
7 If the incoming page is up to x mm longer than the length of copy paper, the excess
portion will not be printed. If the incoming page is more than x mm longer than the
length of copy paper, the excess portion will be printed on the next page.
The value of x is determined by these four bits.
Hex value of bits 4 to 7 x (mm)

0 0
1 1
and so on until
F 15
Default setting: 6 mm
Cross reference
Length reduction On/Off: Printer Switch 03, Bit 0

0 Maximum reducible length when length reduction is enabled with switch 03-0 above.
to <Maximum reducible length> = <Paper length> + (N x 5mm)
4 N is the decimal value of the binary setting of bits 0 to 4.
Bit 4 3 2 1 0 Setting
0 0 0 0 0 0 mm
0 0 0 0 1 5 mm
0 0 1 0 0 20 mm (default setting)
1 1 1 1 1 155 mm
For A5 sideways and B5 sideways paper

<Maximum reducible length> = <Paper length> + 0.75 x (N x 5mm)
5 Length of the duplicated image on the next page, when page separation has taken
6 place.
0 1 0 1
=4 mm, =10 mm, =15 mm, = Not used
0 0 1 1
7 Not used. Do not change the setting.
B750 62 SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
BIT SWITCHES
Fax Option
Type 3232
Printer Switch 05 - Not used (do not change the settings)
B750
0 Printing while a paper cassette
is pulled out, when the Just
Size Printing feature is Cross reference
enabled. Just size printing on/off User switch 05, bit 5
0: Printing will not start
1: Printing will start if another
cassette has a suitable size of
paper, based on the paper size
selection priority tables.
1-7 Not used. Do not change the settings.

0 Reduction for Journal printing 1: The Journal is reduced to 91% to ensure that
0: Off there is enough space in the left margin for punch
1: On holes or staples.
4 List of destinations in the 1: Only destinations where communication failure
Communication Failure Report occurred are printed on the Communication Failure
for broadcasting Report.
0: All destinations
1: Only destinations where
communication failure occurred

Printer Switch 0A - Not used (do not change the settings)
Printer Switch 0B - Not used (do not change the settings)
Printer Switch 0C - Not used (do not change the settings)
Printer Switch 0D - Not used (do not change the settings)
SM 63 B750
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
BIT SWITCHES
Printer Switch 0E SP No. 1-103-015

0 Paper size selection priority 0: A paper size that has the same width as the
0: Width received data is selected first.
1: Length 1: A paper size which has enough length to print all
the received lines without reduction is selected first.
1 Paper size selected for This switch determines which paper size is selected
printing A4 width fax data for printing A4 width fax data, when the machine has
0: 8.5" x 11" size both A4 and 8.5" x 11" size paper.
1: A4 size
2 Page separation 1: If all paper sizes in the machine require page
0: Enabled separation to print a received fax message, the
1: Disabled machine does not print the message (Substitute
Reception is used).
After a larger size of paper is set in a cassette, the
machine automatically prints the fax message.
3 Printing the sample image on Same size means the sample image is printed at
to reports 100%, even if page separation occurs.
4 Bit 4 Bit 3 Setting User Parameter Switch 19 (13H) bit 4 must be set to
0 0 The upper half 0 to enable this switch.
only Refer to Detailed Section Descriptions for more on
0 1 50% reduction this feature.
in sub-scan only
1 0 Same size
1 1 Not used
7 Equalizing the reduction ratio 0: When page separation has taken place, all the
among separated pages pages are reduced with the same reduction ratio.
(Page Separation) 1: Only the last page is reduced to fit the selected
0: Enabled paper size when page separation has taken place.
1: Disabled Other pages are printed without reduction.
B750 64 SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
BIT SWITCHES
Fax Option
Type 3232
Printer Switch 0F SP No. 1-103-016
B750
0 Smoothing feature (0, 0) (0, 1): Disable smoothing if the machine
to Bit 1 Bit 0 Setting receives halftone images from other manufacturers
1 0 0 Disabled fax machines frequently.
0 1 Disabled
1 0 Enabled
1 1 Not used
2 Duplex printing 1: The machine always prints received fax
0: Disabled messages in duplex printing mode:
1: Enabled
3 Binding direction for Duplex
printing
0: Left binding
1: Top binding
4 Printing fax messages in user 1: The machine holds the received fax messages
code mode until the machine exits the restricted access mode
0: Enabled (user code or key counter).
1: Disabled If the machine enters the restricted access mode
again while printing fax messages, the machine
stops printing the machine exits the mode again.
SM 65 B750
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
BIT SWITCHES
4.2.4 COMMUNICATION SWITCHES

Communication Switch 00 SP No. 1-104-001
0 Compression modes available These bits determine the compression capabilities
to in receive mode to be declared in phase B (handshaking) of the T.30
1 Bit 1 0 Modes protocol.
0 0 MH only
0 1 MH/MR
1 0 MH/MR/MMR
1 1 MH/MR/MMR/
JBIG
2 Compression modes available These bits determine the compression capabilities
to in transmit mode to be used in the transmission and to be declared in
3 Bit 3 2 Modes phase B (handshaking) of the T.30 protocol.
0 0 MH only
0 1 MH/MR
1 0 MH/MR/MMR
1 1 MH/MR/MMR/
JBIG
5 JBIG compression method: Change the setting when communication problems
Reception occur using JBIG compression.
0: Only basic supported
1: Basic and optional both
supported
6 JBIG compression method: Change the setting when communication problems
Transmission occur using JBIG compression.
0: Basic mode priority
1: Optional mode priority
7 Closed network (reception) 1: Reception will not go ahead if the ID code of the
0: Disabled other terminal does not match the ID code of this
1: Enabled terminal. This function is only available in NSF/NSS
mode.
B750 66 SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
BIT SWITCHES
Fax Option
Type 3232
B750
0 ECM If this bit is set to 0, ECM is switched off for all
0: Off 1: On communications.
In addition, V.8 protocol and JBIG compression are
switched off automatically.
2 Wrong connection prevention (0,1) - The machine will disconnect the line without
to method sending a fax message, if the last 8 digits of the
3 Bit 3 Bit 2 Setting received CSI do not match the last 8 digits of the
0 0 None dialed telephone number. This does not work when
0 1 8 digit CSI manually dialed.
1 0 4 digit CSI (1,0) - The same as above, except that only the last
1 1 CSI/RTI 4 digits are compared.
(1,1) - The machine will disconnect the line without
sending a fax message, if the other end does not
identify itself with an RTI or CSI.
(0,0) - Nothing is checked; transmission will always
go ahead.
Note: This function does not work when dialing is

done from the external telephone.
4-5 Not used Do not change the setting.
6 Maximum printable page length The setting determined by these bits is informed to
to available the transmitting terminal in the pre-message
7 Bit 7 6 Setting protocol exchange (in the DIS/NSF frames).
0 0 No limit
0 1 B4 (364 mm)
1 0 A4 (297 mm)
1 1 Not used

0 Burst error threshold If there are more consecutive error lines in the
0: Low 1: High received page than the threshold, the machine will
send a negative response.
The Low and High threshold values depend on the
sub-scan resolution, and are as follows.
Resolution 100 dpi200 dpi 400 dpi
3.85 l/mm 7.7 l/mm 15.4 l/mm
Low settings 6 12 24
High settings 12 24 48
1 Acceptable total error line ratio If the error line ratio for a page exceeds the
0: 5% 1: 10% acceptable ratio, RTN will be sent to the other end.
2 Treatment of pages received 0: Pages received with errors are not printed.
with errors during G3 reception
0: Deleted from memory
without printing
1: Printed
SM 67 B750
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
BIT SWITCHES

3 Hang-up decision when a 0: The next page will be sent even if RTN or PIN is
negative code (RTN or PIN) is received.
received during G3 immediate 1: The machine will send DCN and hang up if it
transmission receives RTN or PIN.
0: No hang-up, 1: Hang-up
This bit is ignored for memory transmissions or if
ECM is being used.

0 Maximum number of page 00 - FF (Hex) times.
to retransmissions in a G3 This setting is not used if ECM is switched on.
7 memory transmission Default setting - 03(H)
Communication Switch 04 - Not used (do not change the settings)

Communication Switch 0A SP No. 1-104-011

0 Point of resumption of memory 0: The transmission begins from the page where
transmission upon redialing transmission failed the previous time.
0: From the error page 1: Transmission begins from the first page, using
1: From page 1 normal memory transmission.
7 Emergency calls using 999 If this bit is at 1, the machine will not allow you to
0: Enabled 1: Disabled dial 999 at the auto-dialer. This is a PTT
requirement in the Hong Kong.
B750 68 SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
BIT SWITCHES
Fax Option
Type 3232
Communication Switch 0B SP No. 1-104-012
B750
0 Use of Economy Transmission These bits determine whether the machine uses the
during a Transfer operation to Economy Transmission feature when it is carrying
end receivers out a Transfer operation as a Transfer Station.
1 Use of Economy Transmission
during a Transfer operation to
the Next Transfer Stations
2 Use of Label Insertion for the This bit determines whether the machine uses the
End Receivers in a Transfer Label Insertion feature when it is carrying out a
operation Transfer operation as a Transfer Station.
3 Conditions required for 0: When acting as a Transfer Station, the machine
Transfer Result Report will always send a Transfer Result Report back to
transmission the Requesting Station after completing the Transfer
0: Always transmitted Request, even if there were no problems.
1: Only transmitted if there was 1: The machine will only send back a Transfer
an error Result Report if there were errors during
communication, meaning one or more of the End
Receivers could not be contacted.
4 Printout of the message when When the machine is acting as a Transfer Station,
acting as a Transfer Station this bit determines whether the machine prints the
0: Disabled 1: Enabled fax message coming in from the Requesting
Terminal.
5 Action when there is no fax After the machine receives a transfer request, the
number in the programmed machine compares the last N digits of the
Quick/Speed dials which meets requesting terminals own fax number with all the
the requesting terminals own Quick/Speed dials programmed in the machine. (N
fax number is the number programmed in communication switch
0: Transfer is disabled 0C.)
1: Transfer is enabled 0: If there is no matching number programmed in
the machine, the machine rejects the transfer
request.
1: Even if there is no matching number programmed
in the machine, the machine accepts the transfer
request. The result report will be printed at the
transfer terminal, but will not be sent back to the
requesting terminal.
SM 69 B750
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
BIT SWITCHES
Communication Switch 0C SP No. 1-104-013

0 Number of digits compared to 00 - 1F (0 to 31 digits)
to find the requesters fax number After the machine receives a transfer request, the
4 from the programmed machine compares the own telephone number sent
Quick/Speed Dials when acting from the Requesting Terminal with all Quick/Speed
as a Transfer Station Dials programmed in the machine, starting from
Quick Dial 01 to the end of the Speed Dials.
This number determines how many digits from the
end of the telephone numbers the machine
compares.
If it is set to 00, the machine will send the report to
the first Quick/Speed Dial that the machine
compared. If Quick Dial 01 is programmed, the
machine will send the report to Quick 01. If Quick
Dial 01 through 04 are not programmed and Quick
Dial 05 is programmed, the machine will send the
report to Quick 05.
Default setting - 05(H) = 5 digits
Communication Switch 0D SP No. 1-104-014

0 The available memory 00 to FF (Hex), unit = 4 kbytes
to threshold, below which ringing (e.g., 06(H) = 24 kbytes)
7 detection (and therefore One page is about 24 kbytes.
reception into memory) is
disabled The machine refers to this setting before each fax
reception. If the amount of remaining memory is
below this threshold, the machine cannot receive
any fax messages.
If this setting is kept at 0, the machine will detect
ringing signals and go into receive mode even if
there is no memory available. This will result in
communication failure.
Communication Switch 0E SP No. 1-104-015

0 Minimum interval between 06 to FF (Hex), unit = 2 s
to automatic dialing attempts (e.g., 06(H) = 12 s)
7 This value is the minimum time that the machine
waits before it dials the next destination.
Communication Switch 0F - Not used (do not change the settings.)
B750 70 SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
BIT SWITCHES
Fax Option
Type 3232
B750
0 Memory transmission: 01 - FE (Hex) times
to Maximum number of dialing
7 attempts to the same
destination
Communication Switch 11 - Not used (do not change the settings.)

0 Memory transmission: Interval 01 - FF (Hex) minutes
to between dialing attempts to the
7 same destination
Communication Switch 13 - Not used (do not change the settings.)

0 Inch-to-mm conversion during 0: In immediate transmission, data scanned in inch
transmission format are transmitted without conversion.
0: Disabled 1: Enabled In memory transmission, data stored in the SAF
memory in mm format are transmitted without
conversion.
Note: When storing the scanned data into SAF
memory, the fax unit always converts the data into
mm format.
1: The machine converts the scanned data or stored

data in the SAF memory to the format which was
specified in the set-up protocol (DIS/NSF) before
transmission.
6 Available unit of resolution in For the best performance, do not change the factory
to which fax messages are settings.
7 received
Bit 7 Bit 6 Unit The setting determined by these bits is informed to
0 0 mm the transmitting terminal in the pre-message
0 1 inch protocol exchange (in the DIS/NSF frames).
1 0 mm and inch
(default)
1 1 Not used
SM 71 B750
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
BIT SWITCHES

0 Standard G3 unit Set this bit to 0 if the user wants to use only the
0: Disabled ISDN line (option G4 unit), even for G3
1: Enabled (Japan Only) communications. However, for ISDN on hook
dialing, bit 7 of user parameter 30 must be set to 1.
Note: If the optional G4 unit is not installed, but this
bit is changed to disabled, no document can be
transmitted.
1 Optional G3 unit (G3-2) Change this bit to 1 when installing the first optional
0: Not installed G3 unit.
1: Installed
2 Optional ISDN unit Change this bit to 1 when installing the optional
0: Not installed ISDN unit.
1: Installed
3 Optional G3 unit (G3-3) Change this bit to 1 when installing the second
0: Not installed optional G3 unit.
1: Installed
6 Use of the I-G3 line Change this bit to 1 when the customer requires.
0: Tx or rx
1: Tx only
7 G4 Dual communication 1: The machine uses only one B channel for
0: Enabled communication. This enables a customer to occupy
1: Disabled (Japan Only) another B channel for other purposes such as
internet communication.

0 SEP reception 0: Polling transmission to another makers machine
0: Disabled using the SEP (Selective Polling) signal is disabled.
1: Enabled
1 SUB reception 0: Confidential reception to another makers
0: Disabled machine using the SUB (Sub-address) signal is
1: Enabled disabled.
2 PWD reception 0: Disables features that require PWD (Password)
0: Disabled signal reception.
1: Enabled
7 Action when there is no box Change this setting when the customer requires.
with an F-code that matches
the received SUB code
0: Disconnect the line
1: Receive the message
(using normal reception mode)

Communication Switch 1A - Not used (do not change the settings)
B750 72 SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
BIT SWITCHES
Fax Option
Type 3232
Communication Switch 1B SP No. 1-104-028
B750
0 Extension access code (0 to 7) If the PABX does not support V.8/V.34 protocol
to to turn V.8 protocol On/Off procedure, set this bit to 1 to disable V.8.
7 0: On Example: If 0 is the PSTN access code, set bit 0
1: Off to 1. When the machine detects 0 as the first
dialed number, it automatically disables V.8
protocol. (Alternatively, if 3 is the PSTN access
code, set bit 3 to 1.)
Communication Switch 1C SP No. 1-104-029

0 Extension access code (8 and Refer to communication switch 1B.
to 9) to turn V.8 protocol On/Off Example: If 8 is the PSTN access code, set bit 0
1 0: On to 1. When the machine detects 8 as the first
1: Off dialed number, it automatically disables V.8
protocol. (If 9 is the PSTN access code, use bit 1.)
Communication Switch 1D - Not used (do not change the settings)

Communication Switch 1E - Not used (do not change the settings)
Communication Switch 1F - Not used (do not change the settings)
SM 73 B750
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
BIT SWITCHES
4.2.5 G3 SWITCHES
G3 Switch 00 SP No. 1-105-001
0 Monitor speaker during (0, 0): The monitor speaker is disabled all through
1 communication (tx and rx) the communication.
Bit 1 Bit 0 Setting (0, 1): The monitor speaker is on up to phase B in
0 0 Disabled the T.30 protocol.
0 1 Up to Phase B (1, 0): Used for testing. The monitor speaker is on
1 0 All the time all through the communication. Make sure that you
1 1 Not used reset these bits after testing.
2 Monitor speaker during 1: The monitor speaker is enabled during memory
memory transmission transmission.
G3 Switch 01 SP No. 1-105-002

4 DIS frame length 1: The bytes in the DIS frame after the 4th byte will
0: 10 bytes 1: 4 bytes not be transmitted (set to 1 if there are
communication problems with PC-based faxes
which cannot receive the extended DIS frames).
6 CED/ANSam transmission Do not change this setting, unless the
0: Disabled communication problem is caused by the
1: Enabled CED/ANSam transmission.
G3 Switch 02 SP No. 1-105-003

0 G3 protocol mode used Change this bit to 1 only when the other end can
0: Standard and non-standard only communicate with machines that send T.30-
1: Standard only standard frames only.
1: Disables NSF/NSS signals (these are used in
non-standard mode communication)
5 Use of modem rate history for 0: Communications using Quick/Speed Dials always
transmission using start from the highest modem rate.
Quick/Speed Dials 1: The machine refers to the modem rate history for
0: Disabled communications with the same machine when
1: Enabled determining the most suitable rate for the current
communication.
6 AI short protocol (transmission Refer to Appendix B in the Group 3 Facsimile
and reception) Manual for details about AI Short Protocol.
7 Short preamble Refer to Appendix B in the Group 3 Facsimile
0: Disabled 1: Enabled Manual for details about Short Preamble.
B750 74 SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
BIT SWITCHES
Fax Option
Type 3232
G3 Switch 03 SP No. 1-105-004
B750
0 DIS detection number 0: The machine will hang up if it receives the same
(Echo countermeasure) DIS frame twice.
0: 1 1: Before sending DCS, the machine will wait for the
1: 2 second DIS which is caused by echo on the line.
1 V.8 protocol in manual 0: The machine sends CED instead of ANSam
reception when starting a manual reception.
0: Disabled 1: The machine sends ANSam during manual
1: Enabled reception.
2 V.8 protocol 0: V.8/V.34 communications will not be possible.
0: Disabled Note:
1: Enabled Do not set to 0 unless the line condition is always
bad enough to slow down the data rate to 14.4 kbps
or lower.
3 ECM frame size Keep this bit at 0 in most cases.
0: 256 bytes
1: 64 bytes
4 CTC transmission conditions When using ECM, the machine will choose a slower
0: Ricoh mode (PPR x 1) modem rate after receiving PPR once (Ricoh mode)
1: ITU-T mode (PPR x 4) or four times (ITU-T mode).
This bit is ineffective in V.34 communications.
5 Modem rate used for the next 1: The machines tx modem rate will fall back before
page after receiving a negative sending the next page if a negative code is
code (RTN or PIN) received. This bit is ignored if ECM is being used.
0: No change 1: Fallback
6 V.8 protocol in manual 1: The machine detects either ANSam or CED
transmission during manual transmission.
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
G3 Switch 04 SP No. 1-105-005

0 Training error detection 0 - F (Hex); 0 - 15 bits
to threshold If the number of error bits in the received TCF is
3 below this threshold, the machine informs the
sender that training has succeeded.
SM 75 B750
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
BIT SWITCHES
G3 Switch 05 SP No. 1-105-006

0 Initial Tx modem rate These bits set the initial starting modem rate for
to Bit 3 2 1 0 Setting (bps) transmission.
3 0 0 0 1 2.4 k
0 0 1 0 4.8 k Use the dedicated transmission parameters if you
0 0 1 1 7.2 k need to change this for specific receivers.
0 1 0 0 9.6 k
0 1 0 1 12.0 k If a modem rate 14.4 kbps or slower is selected, V.8
0 1 1 0 14.4 k protocol should be disabled manually.
0 1 1 1 16.8 k
1 0 0 0 19.2 k Cross reference
1 0 0 1 21.6 k V.8 protocol on/off - G3 switch 03, bit2
1 0 1 0 24.0 k
1 0 1 1 26.4 k
1 1 0 0 28.8 k
1 1 0 1 31.2 k
1 1 1 0 33.6 k
Other settings - Not used
4 Initial modem type for 9.6 k or These bits set the initial modem type for 9.6 and 7.2
to 7.2 kbps. kbps, if the initial modem rate is set at these speeds.
5 Bit 5 Bit 4 Setting
0 0 V.29
0 1 V.17
1 0 V.34
1 1 Not used
G3 Switch 06 SP No. 1-105-007

0 Initial Rx modem rate These bits set the initial starting modem rate for
to Bit 3 2 1 0 Setting (bps) reception.
3 0 0 0 1 2.4 k
0 0 1 0 4.8 k Use a lower setting if high speeds pose problems
0 0 1 1 7.2 k during reception.
0 1 0 0 9.6 k
0 1 1 1 16.8 k
1 0 0 1 21.6 k V.8 protocol on/off - G3 switch 03, bit2
1 0 1 0 24.0 k
1 0 1 1 26.4 k
1 1 0 0 28.8 k
1 1 0 1 31.2 k
1 1 1 0 33.6 k
B750 76 SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
BIT SWITCHES
G3 Switch 06 SP No. 1-105-007
Fax Option
Type 3232
B750
4 Modem types available for The setting of these bits is used to inform the
to reception transmitting terminal of the available modem type for
7 Bit 7 6 5 4 Setting the machine in receive mode.
0 0 0 1 V.27ter
0 0 1 0 V.27ter, V.29 If V.34 is not selected, V.8 protocol must be
0 0 1 1 V.27ter, V.29 disabled manually.
V.33
0 1 0 0 V.27ter, V.29, Cross reference
V.17/V.33 V.8 protocol on/off - G3 switch 03, bit2
0 1 0 1 V.27ter, V.29,
V.17/V33,
V.34
G3 Switch 07 SP No. 1-105-008

0 PSTN cable equalizer Use a higher setting if there is signal loss at higher
to (tx mode: Internal) frequencies because of the length of wire between
1 Bit 1 Bit 0 Setting the modem and the telephone exchange.
0 0 None Use the dedicated transmission parameters for
0 1 Low specific receivers.
1 0 Medium
1 1 High Also, try using the cable equalizer if one or more of
the following symptoms occurs.
Communication error
Modem rate fallback occurs frequently.
Note: This setting is not effective in V.34

communications.
to (rx mode: Internal) frequencies because of the length of wire between
0 0 None
0 1 Low Also, try using the cable equalizer if one or more of
1 0 Medium the following symptoms occurs.
1 1 High Communication error with error codes such as
0-20, 0-23, etc.

communications.
4 PSTN cable equalizer Keep this bit at 1.
(V.8/V.17 rx mode: External)
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
(V.34 rx mode; External)
6- Not used Do not change the settings.
7
SM 77 B750
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
BIT SWITCHES
G3 Switch 08 - Not used (do not change the settings)

G3 Switch 09 - Not used (do not change the settings)
G3 Switch 0A SP No. 1-105-011

0 Maximum allowable carrier These bits set the acceptable modem carrier drop
1 drop during image data time.
reception Try using a longer setting if error code 0-22 is
Bit 1 Bit 0 Value (ms) frequent.
0 0 200
0 1 400
1 0 800
1 1 Not used
4 Maximum allowable frame This bit set the maximum interval between EOL
interval during image data (end-of-line) signals and the maximum interval
reception. between ECM frames from the other end.
0: 5 s 1: 13 s Try using a longer setting if error code 0-21 is
frequent.
6 Reconstruction time for the first When the sending terminal is controlled by a
line in receive mode computer, there may be a delay in receiving page
0: 6 s 1: 12 s data after the local machine accepts set-up data and
sends CFR. This is outside the T.30
recommendation. But, if this delay occurs, set this
bit to 1 to give the sending machine more time to
send data.
Refer to error code 0-20.
ITU-T T.30 recommendation: The first line should
come within 5 s of CFR.
B750 78 SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
BIT SWITCHES
Fax Option
Type 3232
G3 Switch 0B SP No. 1-105-012
B750
0 Protocol requirements: Europe The machine does not automatically reset these bits
0: Disabled 1: Enabled for each country after a country code (System
1 Protocol requirements: Spain Switch 0F) is programmed.
0: Disabled 1: Enabled Change the required bits manually at installation.
2 Protocol requirements:
Germany
3 Protocol requirements: France
4 PTT requirements: Germany
5 PTT requirements: France
7 DTS requirements : Germany Change this bit manually if required.
G3 Switch 0C SP No. 1-105-013

0 Pulse dialing method P = Number of pulses sent out, N = Number dialed.
0 0 Normal(P=N)
0 1 Oslo (P=10 - N)
1 0 Sweden
(N+1)
1 1 Not used
G3 Switch 0D SP No. 1-105-014

2 Data rate threshold during V.34 The machine changes the modulation parameters in
to reception the MPh signal to lower the initial modem rate
5 Bit 5 4 3 2 Setting during V.34 reception. If this switch is set to 0111,
0 0 0 0 Normal the machine lowers the initial speed one step, for
0 1 1 1 Lower by example, from 28,800 to 26,400 bps.
one step This switch reduces transmission time if the
1 1 1 1 Lower by machine frequently sends PPR signals during V.34
two steps reception.
7 B signal detection time for V.34 Change this switch only when there are
polling transmission communication errors during V.34 polling
0: 75 ms (default setting) transmission to a machine with a Panasonic
1: 65 ms modem.
G3 Switch 0E - Not used (do not change the settings)
SM 79 B750
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
BIT SWITCHES
G3 Switch 0F SP No. 1-105-016

0 Alarm when an error occurred If the customer wants to hear an alarm after each
in Phase C or later error communication, change this bit to 1.
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
1 Alarm when the handset is off- If the customer wants to hear an alarm if the
hook at the end of handset is off-hook at the end of fax communication,
communication change this bit to 1.
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
B750 80 SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
BIT SWITCHES
4.2.6 G3-2/3 SWITCHES
Fax Option
Type 3232
These switches require an optional G3 interface unit.
B750
G3-3 switches are the same as for G3-2 switches.
G3-2 Switch 00 SP No. 1-106-001
0-1 Monitor speaker during (0, 0): The monitor speaker is disabled all through
communication (tx and rx) the communication.
Bit 1 Bit 0 Setting (0, 1): The monitor speaker is on up to phase B in
0 0 Disabled the T.30 protocol.
0 1 Up to Phase B (1, 0): Used for testing. The monitor speaker is on
1 0 All the time all through the communication. Make sure that you
1 1 Not used reset these bits after testing.
2 Monitor speaker during 1: The monitor speaker is enabled during memory
memory transmission transmission.
G3-2 Switch 01 SP No. 1-106-002

4 DIS frame length 1: The bytes in the DIS frame after the 4th byte will
0: 10 bytes 1: 4 bytes not be transmitted (set to 1 if there are
communication problems with PC-based faxes
which cannot receive the extended DIS frames).
6 CED/ANSam transmission Do not change this setting, unless the
0: Disabled communication problem is caused by the
1: Enabled CED/ANSam transmission.
G3-2 Switch 02 SP No. 1-106-003

0 G3 protocol mode used Change this bit to 1 only when the other end can
0: Standard and non-standard only communicate with machines that send T.30-
1: Standard only standard frames only.
1: Disables NSF/NSS signals (these are used in
non-standard mode communication)
5 Use of modem rate history for 0: Communications using Quick/Speed Dials always
transmission using start from the highest modem rate.
Quick/Speed Dials 1: The machine refers to the modem rate history for
0: Disabled communications with the same machine when
1: Enabled determining the most suitable rate for the current
communication.
6 AI short protocol (transmission Refer to Appendix B in the Group 3 Facsimile
and reception) Manual for details about AI Short Protocol.
7 Short preamble Refer to Appendix B in the Group 3 Facsimile
0: Disabled 1: Enabled Manual for details about Short Preamble.
SM 81 B750
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
BIT SWITCHES
G3-2 Switch 03 SP No. 1-106-004

0 DIS detection number 0: The machine will hang up if it receives the same
(Echo countermeasure) DIS frame twice.
0: 1 1: Before sending DCS, the machine will wait for the
1: 2 second DIS which is caused by echo on the line.
2 V.8 protocol 0: V.8/V.34 communications will not be possible.
0: Disabled Note:
1: Enabled Do not set to 0 unless the line condition is always
bad enough to slow down the data rate to 14.4 kbps
or lower.
3 ECM frame size Keep this bit at 0 in most cases.
0: 256 bytes
1: 64 bytes
4 CTC transmission conditions 0: When using ECM in non-standard (NSF/NSS)
0: After one PPR signal mode, the machine sends a CTC to drop back the
received modem rate after receiving a PPR, if the following
1: After four PPR signals condition is met in communications at 14.4, 12.0,
received (ITU-T standard) 9.6, and 7.2 kbps.
N Transmit NRe send
NTransmit- Number of transmitted frames

NResend- Number of frames to be retransmitted
1: When using ECM, the machine sends a CTC to

drop back the modem rate after receiving four
PPRs.
PPR, CTC: These are ECM protocol signals.
This bit is not effective in V.34 communications.

5 Modem rate used for the next 1: The machines tx modem rate will fall back before
page after receiving a negative sending the next page if a negative code is
code (RTN or PIN) received. This bit is ignored if ECM is being used.
0: No change 1: Fallback
G3-2 Switch 04 SP No. 1-106-005

0 Training error detection 0 - F (Hex); 0 - 15 bits
to threshold If the number of error bits in the received TCF is
3 below this threshold, the machine informs the
sender that training has succeeded.
B750 82 SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
BIT SWITCHES
Fax Option
Type 3232
G3-2 Switch 05 SP No. 1-106-006
B750
0 Initial Tx modem rate These bits set the initial starting modem rate for
to Bit 3 2 1 0 Setting (bps) transmission.
3 0 0 0 1 2.4 k
0 0 1 0 4.8 k Use the dedicated transmission parameters if you
0 0 1 1 7.2 k need to change this for specific receivers.
0 1 0 0 9.6 k
0 1 1 1 16.8 k
1 0 0 1 21.6 k V.8 protocol on/off - SG3 switch 03, bit2
1 0 1 0 24.0 k
1 0 1 1 26.4 k
1 1 0 0 28.8 k
1 1 0 1 31.2 k
1 1 1 0 33.6 k
4 Initial modem type for 9.6 k or These bits set the initial modem type for 9.6 and 7.2
to 7.2 kbps. kbps, if the initial modem rate is set at these speeds.
0 0 V.29
0 1 V.17
1 0 V.34
1 1 Not used
G3-2 Switch 06 SP No. 1-106-007

0 Initial Rx modem rate These bits set the initial starting modem rate for
to Bit 3 2 1 0 Setting (bps) reception.
3 0 0 0 1 2.4 k
0 0 1 0 4.8 k Use a lower setting if high speeds pose problems
0 0 1 1 7.2 k during reception.
0 1 0 0 9.6 k
0 1 1 1 16.8 k
1 0 0 1 21.6 k V.8 protocol on/off - SG3 switch 03, bit2
1 0 1 0 24.0 k
1 0 1 1 26.4 k
1 1 0 0 28.8 k
1 1 0 1 31.2 k
1 1 1 0 33.6 k
SM 83 B750
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
BIT SWITCHES
G3-2 Switch 06 SP No. 1-106-007

4 Modem types available for The setting of these bits is used to inform the
to reception transmitting terminal of the available modem type for
7 Bit 7 6 5 4 Setting the machine in receive mode.
0 0 0 1 V.27ter
0 0 1 0 V.27ter, V.29 If V.34 is not selected, V.8 protocol must be
0 0 1 1 V.27ter, V.29 disabled manually.
V.33
0 1 0 0 V.27ter, V.29, Cross reference
V.17/V.33 V.8 protocol on/off - SG3 switch 03, bit2
0 1 0 1 V.27ter, V.29,
V.17/V33,
V.34
G3-2 Switch 07 SP No. 1-106-008

to (tx mode: Internal) frequencies because of the length of wire between
0 0 None Use the dedicated transmission parameters for
0 1 Low specific receivers.
1 0 Medium
1 1 High Also, try using the cable equalizer if one or more of
the following symptoms occurs.
Communication error

communications.
to (rx mode: Internal) frequencies because of the length of wire between
0 0 None
0 1 Low Also, try using the cable equalizer if one or more of
1 0 Medium the following symptoms occurs.
1 1 High Communication error with error codes such as
0-20, 0-23, etc.

communications.
(V.8/V.17 rx mode: External)
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
(V.34 rx mode; External)
B750 84 SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
BIT SWITCHES
Fax Option
Type 3232
G3-2 Switch 08 - Not used (do not change the settings)
B750
G3-2 Switch 09 - Not used (do not change the settings)
G3-2 Switch 0A SP No. 1-106-011

0 Maximum allowable carrier These bits set the acceptable modem carrier drop
1 drop during image data time.
reception Try using a longer setting if error code 0-22 is
Bit 1 Bit 0 Value (ms) frequent.
0 0 200
0 1 400
1 0 800
1 1 Not used
4 Maximum allowable frame This bit set the maximum interval between EOL
interval during image data (end-of-line) signals and the maximum interval
reception. between ECM frames from the other end.
0: 5 s 1: 13 s Try using a longer setting if error code 0-21 is
frequent.
6 Reconstruction time for the first When the sending terminal is controlled by a
line in receive mode computer, there may be a delay in receiving page
0: 6 s 1: 12 s data after the local machine accepts set-up data and
sends CFR. This is outside the T.30
recommendation. But, if this delay occurs, set this
bit to 1 to give the sending machine more time to
send data.
Refer to error code 0-20.
ITU-T T.30 recommendation: The first line should
come within 5 s of CFR.
SM 85 B750
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
BIT SWITCHES
G3-2 Switch 0B SP No. 1-106-012

0 Protocol requirements: Europe The machine does not automatically reset these bits
0: Disabled 1: Enabled for each country after a country code (System
1 Protocol requirements: Spain Switch 0F) is programmed.
0: Disabled 1: Enabled Change the required bits manually at installation.
2 Protocol requirements:
Germany
3 Protocol requirements: France
4 PTT requirements: Germany
5 PTT requirements: France
G3-2 Switch 0C SP No. 1-106-013

0 Pulse dialing method P = Number of pulses sent out, N = Number dialed.
0 0 Normal(P=N)
0 1 Oslo (P=10 - N)
1 0 Sweden
(N+1)
1 1 Not used
G3-2 Switch 0D - Not used (do not change the settings)

G3-2 Switch 0E - Not used (do not change the settings)
G3-2 Switch 0F - Not used (do not change the settings)
B750 86 SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
BIT SWITCHES
4.2.7 G4 INTERNAL SWITCHES
Fax Option
Type 3232
B750
The G4 internal switches (SW00 to 1F) are displayed but do not change these
settings.
4.2.8 G4 PARAMETER SWITCHES

The G4 parameter switches (SW00 to 0F) are displayed but do not change these
settings.
4.2.9 IP FAX SWITCHES

IP Fax Switch 00 SP No. 1-111-001
No. FUNCTION COMMENTS
IP Fax Transport
1
0: TCP, 1: UDP
IP Fax single port selection
2
0: OFF, 1: ON (enable)
IP Fax double ports (single data
3 port) selection
IP Fax Gatekeeper
4
IP Fax T30 bit signal reverse Reverses the T30 bit signal.
5
0: LSB first, 1: MSB first
IP Fax max bit rate setting When "0" is selected, the max bit rate does
0: Not affected, 1: Affected not affect the value of the DIS/DCS.
6
When "1" is selected, the max bit rate affects
the value of the DIS/DCS.
IP Fax received telephone number When "0" is selected, fax data is received
confirmation without checking the telephone number.
0: No confirmation, 1: Confirmation When "1" is selected, fax data is received only
7 when confirming that the telephone number
from the sender matches the registered
telephone number in this machine. If this
confirmation fails, the line is disconnected.
SM 87 B750
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
BIT SWITCHES

IP Fax delay level setting
Selects the acceptable delay level. Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
Level 0 is the highest quality 0 0 0 0 Level 0
0-3 Default is "0000" (level 0). 0 0 0 1 Level 1
0 0 1 0 Level 2
0 0 1 1 Level 3
IP Fax preamble wait time setting Selects the preamble wait time.
[00 to 0f]
There are 16 values in this 4-bit binary switch
4-7 combination.
Waiting time: set value level x 100 ms
Max: 0f (1500 ms) Min: 00 (No wait time)
The default is "0000" (00H).

0 IP Fax bit signal reverse setting When "0" is selected, the bit signal reverse
0: Maker code setting method is decided by the maker code.
1: Internal bit switch setting When "1" is selected, the bit signal reverse
method is decided by the internal bit switch.
NOTE: When communicating between IP Fax
devices, LSB first is selected.)
1 IP Fax transmission speed setting Selects the transmit speed for IP Fax
0: Modem speed communication.
1: No limitation
2 SIP transport setting This bit switch sets the transport that has
0: TCP priority for receiving IP Fax data.
1: UDP This function is activated only when the
sender has both TCP and UDP.
B750 88 SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
BIT SWITCHES
Fax Option
Type 3232
B750
0 Effective field limitation for G3
standard function information
0: OFF, 1: 4byte (DIS)
1 Switching between G3 standard
and G3 non standard
0: Enable switching
1: G3 standard only
2 AI modem rate function
3 ECM frame size selection at
transmitting
0: 256byte, 1: 64byte
4 DIS detection times for echo
prevention
0: 1 time, 1: 2 times
5 CTC transmission selection When "0" is selected, the transmission
0: PPRx1 condition is decided by error frame numbers.
1: PPRx4 When "1" is selected, the transmission
condition is based on the ITU-T method.
6 Shift down setting at receiving
negative code
0: OFF, 1: ON

0 TCF error threshold Sets the TCF error threshold level.
1 [00 to 0f]
2 The default is "1111" (0fH).
3
SM 89 B750
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
BIT SWITCHES

Modem bit rate setting for transmission
Sets the modem bit rate for transmission. The default is "0110" (14.4K bps).
Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
0 0 0 1 2400 bps
0 0 1 0 4800 bps
0 0 1 1 7200 bps
0 1 0 0 9600 bps
0 1 0 1 12.0K bps
0-3 0 1 1 0 14.4K bps
0 1 1 1 16.8K bps
1 0 0 0 19.2K bps
1 0 0 1 21.6K bps
1 0 1 0 24.0K bps
1 0 1 1 26.4K bps
1 1 0 0 28.8K bps
1 1 0 1 31.2K bps
1 1 1 0 33.6K bps
Modem setting for transmission

Sets the modem for transmission.
The default is "00" (V29). Bit 5 Bit 4
0 0 V29
4-5 0 1 V17
1 0 V34
1 1 Not used
B750 90 SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
BIT SWITCHES
Fax Option
Type 3232
B750
Modem bit rate setting for reception
Sets the modem bit rate for reception. The default is "0110" (14.4K bps).
0 0 0 1 2400 bps
0 0 1 0 4800 bps
0 0 1 1 7200 bps
0 1 0 0 9600 bps
0 1 0 1 12.0K bps
0-3 0 1 1 0 14.4K bps
0 1 1 1 16.8K bps
1 0 0 0 19.2K bps
1 0 0 1 21.6K bps
1 0 1 0 24.0K bps
1 0 1 1 26.4K bps
1 1 0 0 28.8K bps
1 1 0 1 31.2K bps
1 1 1 0 33.6K bps
Modem setting for reception

Sets the modem for reception. The default is "0010" (V27ter, V29).
0 0 0 1 V27ter
4-7 0 0 1 0 V27ter, V29
0 0 1 1 V27ter, V29, V33 (invalid)
0 1 0 0 V27ter, V29, V17
0 1 0 1 V27ter, V29, V17, V34

0 TSI information Adds or does not add TSI information to
0: Not added, 1: Added NSS(S).
1 DCN transmission setting at T1 Transmits or does not transmit DCN at T1
timeout timeout.
0: Not transmitted, 1: Transmitted
3 Hang up setting at DIS reception
disabled
0: No hang up
1: Hang up after transmitting DCN
4 Number of times for training Selects the number of times training is done at
0: 1 time, 1: 2 times the same bit rate.
5 Space CSI transmission setting at When "0" is selected, frame data is enabled.
no CSI registration When "1" is selected, the transmitted data is
0: Not transmitted, 1: Transmitted all spaces.
SM 91 B750
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
BIT SWITCHES

0-1 T1 timer adjustment
Adjusts the T1 timer.
The default is "00" (35 seconds). Bit 1 Bit 0
0 0 35 sec
0 1 40 sec
1 0 50 sec
1 1 60 sec

Adjust the T4 timer. Bit 3 Bit 2
The default is "00" (3 seconds). 0 0 3 sec
0 1 3.5 sec
1 0 4 sec
1 1 5 sec

Bit 5 Bit 4
0 0 75 sec
0 1 120 sec
1 0 180 sec
1 1 240 sec
Adjusts the fail safe timer. This timer sets the interval between "setup" data
transmission and T.38 phase decision.
If your destination return is late on the network or G3 fax return is late, adjust the
longer interval timer.
The default is "00" (75 seconds).
B750 92 SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
NCU PARAMETERS
4.3 NCU PARAMETERS
Fax Option
Type 3232
B750
The following tables give the RAM addresses and the parameter calculation units
that the machine uses for ringing signal detection and automatic dialing. The
factory settings for each country are also given. Most of these must be changed by
RAM read/write (SP2-102), but some can be changed using NCU Parameter
programming (SP2-103, 104 and 105); if SP2-103, 104 and 105 can be used, this
will be indicated in the Remarks column. The RAM is programmed in hex code
unless (BCD) is included in the Unit column.
NOTE: The following addresses describe settings for the standard NCU.
Change the fourth digit from 5 to 6 (e.g. 680500 to 680600) for the
settings for the first optional G3 interface unit and from 5 to 7 (e.g.
680700) for the settings for the second optional G3 interface unit.
SM 93 B750
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
NCU PARAMETERS
Address Function Unit Remarks

680500 Country/Area code for NCU
parameters
Use the Hex value to program the country/area code directly into this address, or
use the decimal value to program it using SP2-103-001
Country/Area Decimal Hex

France 00 00 Hong Kong 20 14
Germany 01 01 South Africa 21 15
UK 02 02 Australia 22 16
Italy 03 03 New Zealand 23 17
Austria 04 04 Singapore 24 18
Belgium 05 05 Malaysia 25 19
Denmark 06 06 China 26 1A
Finland 07 07 Taiwan 27 1B
Ireland 08 08 Korea 28 1C
Norway 09 09 Greece 33 21
Sweden 10 0A Hungary 34 22
Switzerland 11 0B Czech 35 23
Portugal 12 0C Poland 36 24
Holland 13 0D
Spain 14 0E
Israel 15 0F
USA 17 11
Asia 18 12
680501 Line current detection time 20 ms Line current detection is

680502 Line current wait time disabled.
680503 Line current drop detect time Line current is not
detected if 680501
contains FF.
680504 PSTN dial tone frequency upper limit Hz (BCD) If both addresses contain
(high byte) FF(H), tone detection is
680505 PSTN dial tone frequency upper limit disabled.
(low byte)
680506 PSTN dial tone frequency lower limit Hz (BCD) If both addresses contain
680507 PSTN dial tone frequency lower limit disabled.
(low byte)
680508 PSTN dial tone detection time 20 ms If 680508 contains FF(H),
680509 PSTN dial tone reset time (LOW) the machine pauses for
68050A PSTN dial tone reset time (HIGH) the pause time (address
68050B PSTN dial tone continuous tone time 68050D / 68050E).
68050C PSTN dial tone permissible drop time
Italy: See Note 2.
68050D PSTN wait interval (LOW)
68050E PSTN wait interval (HIGH)
68050F PSTN ring-back tone detection time 20 ms Detection is disabled if
this contains FF.
680510 PSTN ring-back tone off detection 20 ms
time
B750 94 SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
NCU PARAMETERS
Fax Option
Type 3232
680511 PSTN detection time for silent period 20 ms
B750
after ring-back tone detected (LOW)
680512 PSTN detection time for silent period 20 ms
after ring-back tone detected (HIGH)
680513 PSTN busy tone frequency upper Hz (BCD) If both addresses contain
limit (high byte) FF(H), tone detection is
680514 PSTN busy tone frequency upper disabled.
limit (low byte)
680515 PSTN busy tone frequency lower Hz (BCD) If both addresses contain
680516 PSTN busy tone frequency lower disabled.
limit (low byte)
680517 PABX dial tone frequency upper limit Hz (BCD) If both addresses contain
680518 PABX dial tone frequency upper limit disabled.
(low byte)
680519 PABX dial tone frequency lower limit Hz (BCD) If both addresses contain
disabled.
68051A PABX dial tone frequency lower limit
(low byte)
68051B PABX dial tone detection time 20 ms If 68051B contains FF,
68051C PABX dial tone reset time (LOW) the machine pauses for
68051D PABX dial tone reset time (HIGH) the pause time (680520 /
68051E PABX dial tone continuous tone time 680521).
68051F PABX dial tone permissible drop time
680520 PABX wait interval (LOW)
680521 PABX wait interval (HIGH)
680522 PABX ringback tone detection time 20 ms If both addresses contain
680523 PABX ringback tone off detection 20 ms FF(H), tone detection is
time disabled.
680524 PABX detection time for silent 20 ms If both addresses contain
period after ringback tone detected FF(H), tone detection is
(LOW) disabled.
680525 PABX detection time for silent 20 ms
period after ringback tone detected
(HIGH)
680526 PABX busy tone frequency upper Hz (BCD) If both addresses contain
680527 PABX busy tone frequency upper disabled.
limit (low byte)
680528 PABX busy tone frequency lower Hz (BCD) If both addresses contain
680529 PABX busy tone frequency lower disabled.
limit (low byte)
68052A Busy tone ON time: range 1 20 ms
68052B Busy tone OFF time: range 1
68052C Busy tone ON time: range 2
68052D Busy tone OFF time: range 2
68052E Busy tone ON time: range 3
SM 95 B750
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
NCU PARAMETERS

68052F Busy tone OFF time: range 3 20 ms
680530 Busy tone ON time: range 4
680531 Busy tone OFF time: range 4
680532 Busy tone continuous tone detection
time
680533 Busy tone signal state time tolerance for all ranges, and number of cycles
required for detection (a setting of 4 cycles means that ON-OFF-ON or OFF-ON-
OFF must be detected twice).
Tolerance ()
Bit 1 0
0 0 75% Bits 2 and 3 must always
0 1 50% be kept at 0.
1 0 25%
1 1 12.5%
Bits 7, 6, 5, 4 - number of cycles required for cadence detection

680534 International dial tone frequency Hz (BCD) If both addresses contain
upper limit (high byte) FF(H), tone detection is
680535 International dial tone frequency disabled.
upper limit (low byte)
680536 International dial tone frequency Hz (BCD) If both addresses contain
lower limit (high byte) FF(H), tone detection is
680537 International dial tone frequency disabled.
lower limit (low byte)
680538 International dial tone detection time 20 ms If 680538 contains FF,
680539 International dial tone reset time the machine pauses for
(LOW) the pause time (68053D /
68053A International dial tone reset time 68053E).
(HIGH)
68053B International dial tone continuous Belgium: See Note 2.
tone time
68053C International dial tone permissible
drop time
68053D International dial wait interval (LOW)
68053E International dial wait interval (HIGH)
68053F Country dial tone upper frequency Hz (BCD) If both addresses contain
limit (HIGH) FF(H), tone detection is
680540 Country dial tone upper frequency disabled.
limit (LOW)
680541 Country dial tone lower frequency If both addresses contain
limit (HIGH) FF(H), tone detection is
680542 Country dial tone lower frequency disabled.
limit (LOW)
680543 Country dial tone detection time 20 ms If 680543 contains FF,
680544 Country dial tone reset time (LOW) the machine pauses for
680545 Country dial tone reset time (HIGH) the pause time (680548 /
680549).
680546 Country dial tone continuous tone
time
B750 96 SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
NCU PARAMETERS
Fax Option
Type 3232
680547 Country dial tone permissible drop 20 ms
B750
time
680548 Country dial wait interval (LOW)
680549 Country dial wait interval (HIGH)
68054A Time between opening or closing the 1 ms See Notes 3, 6 and 8.
DO relay and opening the OHDI SP2-103-012 (parameter
relay 11).
68054B Break time for pulse dialing 1 ms See Note 3.
SP2-103-013 (parameter
12).
68054C Make time for pulse dialing 1 ms See Note 3.
SP2-103-014 (parameter
13).
68054D Time between final OHDI relay 1 ms See Notes 3, 6 and 8.
closure and DO relay opening or SP2-103-015 (parameter
closing 14).
This parameter is only
valid in Europe.
68054E Minimum pause between dialed 20 ms See Note 3 and 8. SP2-
digits (pulse dial mode) 103-016 (parameter 15).
68054F Time waited when a pause is SP2-103-017 (parameter
entered at the operation panel 16). See Note 3.
680550 DTMF tone on time 1 ms SP2-103-018 (parameter
17).
680551 DTMF tone off time SP2-103-019 (parameter
18).
680552 Tone attenuation level of DTMF -N x 0.5 3.5 SP2-103-020 (parameter
signals while dialing dBm 19).
See Note 5.
680553 Tone attenuation value difference -dBm x 0.5 SP2-103-021 (parameter
between high frequency tone and 20).
low frequency tone in DTMF signals The setting must be less
than 5dBm, and should
not exceed the setting at
680552h above.
See Note 5.
680554 PSTN: DTMF tone attenuation level -N x 0.5 3.5 SP2-103-022 (parameter
after dialing dBm 21). See Note 5.
680555 ISDN: DTMF tone attenuation level -dBm x 0.5 See Note 5
after dialing
680556 Not used Do not change the
settings.
680557 Time between 68054Dh (NCU 1 ms This parameter takes
parameter 14) and 68054Eh (NCU effect when the country
parameter 15) code is set to France.
setting.
680559 Grounding time (ground start mode) 20 ms The Gs relay is closed for
this interval.
68055A Break time (flash start mode) 1 ms The OHDI relay is open
for this interval.
SM 97 B750
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
NCU PARAMETERS

68055B International dial access code (High) BCD For a code of 100:
68055C International dial access code (Low) 68055B - F1
68055C - 00
68055D PSTN access pause time 20 ms This time is waited for
each pause input after
the PSTN access code. If
this address contains
FF[H], the pause time
stored in address 68054F
is used.
Do not set a number
more than 7 in the UK.
68055E Progress tone detection level, and Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 dBm
cadence detection enable flags 0 0 0 -25.0
0 0 1 -35.0
0 1 0 -30.0
1 0 0 -40.0
1 1 0 -49.0
Bits 2, 0 - See Note 2.

68055F Not used Do not change the
to settings.
680564
680565 Long distance call prefix (HIGH) BCD For a code of 0:
680566 Long distance call prefix (LOW) BCD 680565 - FF
680566 - F0
to settings.
680571
680572 Acceptable ringing signal frequency: 1000/ N SP2-103-003 (parameter
range 1, upper limit (Hz). 02).
680573 Acceptable ringing signal frequency: SP2-103-004 (parameter
range 1, lower limit 03).
range 2, upper limit 04).
range 2, lower limit 05).
680576 Number of rings until a call is 1 SP2-103-007 (parameter
detected 06).
The setting must not be
zero.
680577 Minimum required length of the first 20 ms See Note 4.
ring SP2-103-008 (parameter
07).
680578 Minimum required length of the 20 ms SP2-103-009 (parameter
second and subsequent rings 08).
680579 Ringing signal detection reset time 20 ms SP2-103-010 (parameter
(LOW) 09).
68057A Ringing signal detection reset time SP2-103-011 (parameter
(HIGH) 10).
B750 98 SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
NCU PARAMETERS
Fax Option
Type 3232
68057B Not used Do not change the
B750
to settings.
680580
680581 Interval between dialing the last digit 20 ms Factory setting: 500 ms
and switching the Oh relay over to
the external telephone when dialing
from the operation panel in handset
mode.
680582 Bits 0 and 1 - Handset off-hook detection time
Bit 1 0 Setting
0 0 200 ms
0 1 800 ms
Other Not used
Bits 2 and 3 - Handset on-hook detection time

Bit 3 2 Setting
0 0 200 ms
0 1 800 ms
Other Not used
Bits 4 to 7 - Not used

to settings.
6805A0
6805A1 Acceptable CED detection frequency BCD (Hz) If both addresses contain
6805A2 Acceptable CED detection frequency disabled.
6805A3 Acceptable CED detection frequency BCD (Hz) If both addresses contain
6805A4 Acceptable CED detection frequency disabled.
6805A5 CED detection time 20 ms Factory setting: 200 ms
20 ms
6805A6 Acceptable CNG detection frequency BCD (Hz) If both addresses contain
6805A7 Acceptable CNG detection frequency disabled.
6805A8 Acceptable CNG detection frequency BCD (Hz) If both addresses contain
6805A9 Acceptable CNG detection frequency disabled.
6805AA Not used Do not change the
setting.
6805AB CNG on time 20 ms Factory setting: 500 ms
6805AC CNG off time 20 ms Factory setting: 200 ms
6805AD Number of CNG cycles required for The data is coded in the
detection same way as address
680533.
6805AE Not used Do not change the
settings.
SM 99 B750
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
NCU PARAMETERS Rev. 03/2006

6805AF Acceptable AI short protocol tone Hz (BCD) If both addresses contain
(800Hz) detection frequency upper FF(H), tone detection is
limit (high byte) disabled.
6805B0 Acceptable AI short protocol tone
(800Hz) detection frequency upper
limit (low byte)
6805B1 Acceptable AI short protocol tone Hz(BCD) If both addresses contain
(800Hz) detection frequency lower FF(H), tone detection is
limit (high byte) disabled.
6805B2 Acceptable AI short protocol tone
(800Hz) detection frequency lower
limit (low byte)
6805B3 Detection time for 800 Hz AI short 20 ms Factory setting: 360 ms
protocol tone
6805B4 PSTN: Tx level from the modem -N 3 dBm SP2-103-002 (parameter
01).
6805B5 PSTN: 1100 Hz tone transmission - N 6805B4 - 0.5N 6805B5 3.5 (dB)
level See Note 7.
6805B6 PSTN: 2100 Hz tone transmission - N6805B4 - 0.5N 6805B6 3 (dB)
level See Note 7.
6805B7 PABX: Tx level from the modem - dBm
6805B8 PABX: 1100 Hz tone transmission - N 6805B7 - 0.5N 6805B8 (dB)
level
6805B9 PABX: 2100 Hz tone transmission - N 6805B7 - 0.5N 6805B9 (dB)
level
6805BD Modem turn-on level (incoming -37-0.5N
signal detection level) (dBm)
6805BE Not used Do not change the
to settings.
6805C6
6805C7 Bits 0 to 3 Not used.
Bit 4 V.34 protocol dump 0: Simple, 1: Detailed (default)
Bits 5 to 7 Not used.
6805C8 Not used Do not change the
to settings.
6805D9
6805DA T.30 T1 timer 1s
6805E0 Maximum wait time for post 0: 12 s 1: Maximum wait time for
bit 3 message 1: 30 s post message
(EOP/EOM/MPS) can be
changed to 30 s.
Change this bit to 1 if
communication errors
occur frequently during
V.17 reception.
6805E5 Signal Detection Method 80h: Auto
Edge
Signal detection method,
Auto Edge (80h) or Fixed
81h or 83h: Edge (81h or 83h).
Fixed Edge
B750 100 SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
NCU PARAMETERS
Fax Option
Type 3232
NOTES
B750
1. If a setting is not required, store FF in the address.
2. Italy and Belgium only
RAM address 68055E: the lower four bits have the following meaning.
Bit 2 - 1: International dial tone cadence detection enabled (Belgium)
Bit 1 - Not used
Bit 0 - 1: PSTN dial tone cadence detection enabled (Italy)
If bit 0 or bit 2 is set to 1, the functions of the following RAM addresses are
changed.
680508 (if bit 0 = 1) or 680538 (if bit 2 = 1): tolerance for on or off state
duration (%), and number of cycles required for detection, coded as in address
680533.
68050B (if bit 0 = 1) or 68053B (if bit 2 = 1): on time, hex code (unit = 20 ms)
68050C (if bit 0 = 1) or 68053C (if bit 2 = 1): off time, hex code (unit = 20 ms)
3. Pulse dial parameters (addresses 68054A to 68054F) are the values for 10
pps. If 20 pps is used, the machine automatically compensates.
4. The first ring may not be detected until 1 to 2.5 wavelengths after the time
specified by this parameter.
5. The calculated level must be between 0 and 10.
The attenuation levels calculated from RAM data are:
High frequency tone: 0.5 x N680552/6805543.5 dBm
0.5 x N680555 dBm
Low frequency tone: 0.5 x (N680552/680554 + N680553) 3.5 dBm
0.5 x (N680555 + N680553) dBm
NOTE: N680552, for example, means the value stored in address 680552(H)
6. 68054A: Europe - Between Ds opening and Di opening, France - Between Ds
closing and Di opening
68054D: Europe - Between Ds closing and Di closing, France - Between Ds
opening and Di closing
7. Tone signals which frequency is lower than 1500Hz (e.g., 800Hz tone for AI
short protocol) refer to the setting at 6805B5h. Tones which frequency is higher
than 1500Hz refer to the setting at 6805B6h.
8. 68054A, 68054D, 68054E: The actual inter-digit pause (pulse dial mode) is the
sum of the period specified by the RAM addresses 68054A, 68054D, and
68054E.
SM 101 B750
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
DEDICATED TRANSMISSION PARAMETERS
4.4 DEDICATED TRANSMISSION PARAMETERS

Each Quick Dial Key and Speed Dial Code has eight bytes of programmable
parameters allocated to it. If transmissions to a particular machine often experience
problems, store that terminals fax number as a Quick Dial or Speed Dial, and
adjust the parameters allocated to that number.
The programming procedure will be explained first. Then, the eight bytes will be
described.
4.4.1 PROGRAMMING PROCEDURE
1. Set the bit 0 of System Bit Switch 00 to 1.

2. Press "Dest. Management" in the facsimile standby mode.
3. Press "Program/Change/Delete Quick Dial".
4. Select the destination key you want to program.
5. When the programmed dial

number is displayed, press
Start.
Make sure that the LED of
the Start button is lit as
green.
B750S104.WMF
6. The settings for the switch

01 are now displayed.
Press the bit number that
you wish to change.
7. To scroll through the
parameter switches, either:
8. Select the next switch:
press Next
B750S105.WMF
or
Select the previous switch: Prev. until the correct switch is displayed.
Then go back to step 6.
9. After the setting is changed, press OK.
10. After finishing, reset bit 0 of System Bit Switch 00 to 0.
B750 102 SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
4.4.2 PARAMETERS
Fax Option
Type 3232
B750
The initial settings of the following parameters are all FF(H) - all the parameters are
disabled.
Switch 01
FUNCTION AND COMMENTS
ITU-T T1 time (for PSTN G3 mode)
If the connection time to a particular terminal is longer than the NCU parameter setting,
adjust this byte. The T1 time is the value stored in this byte (in hex code), multiplied by 1
second.
Range:
0 to 120 s (00h to 78h)
FFh - The local NCU parameter factory setting is used.
Do not program a value between 79h and FEh.
Switch 02
0 Tx level If communication with a particular remote terminal
to Bit 4 3 2 1 0 Setting often contains errors, the signal level may be
4 0 0 0 0 0 0 inappropriate. Adjust the Tx level for
0 0 0 0 1 -1 communications with that terminal until the results
0 0 0 1 0 -2 are better.
0 0 0 1 1 -3
0 0 1 0 0 -4 If the setting is Disabled, the NCU parameter 01
: setting is used.
:
0 1 1 1 1 -15 Note: Do not use settings other than listed on the
1 1 1 1 1 Disabled left.
5 Cable equalizer Use a higher setting if there is signal loss at higher
to Bit 7 6 5 Setting frequencies because of the length of wire between
7 0 0 0 None the modem and the telephone exchange when
0 0 1 Low calling the number stored in this Quick/Speed Dial.
0 1 0 Medium
0 1 1 High Also, try using the cable equalizer if one or more of
1 1 1 Disabled the following symptoms occurs.
Communication error with error codes such as
0-20, 0-23, etc.
Note: Do not use settings other than listed on the

left.
If the setting is Disabled, the bit switch setting is

used.
SM 103 B750
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Switch 03
0 Initial Tx modem rate If training with a particular remote terminal always
to Bit3 2 1 0 Setting (bps) takes too long, the initial modem rate may be too
3 0 0 0 0 Not used high. Reduce the initial Tx modem rate using these
0 0 0 1 2,400 bits.
0 0 1 0 4,800
0 0 1 1 7,200 For the settings 14.4 or kbps slower, Switch 04 bit 4
0 1 0 0 9,600 must be changed to 0.
0 1 0 1 12,000
0 1 1 0 14,400 Note: Do not use settings other than listed on the
0 1 1 1 16,800 left.
1 0 0 0 19,200
1 0 0 1 21,600 If the setting is Disabled, the bit switch setting is
1 0 1 0 24,000 used.
1 0 1 1 26,400
1 1 0 0 28,800
1 1 0 1 31,200
1 1 1 0 33,600
1 1 1 1 Disabled
Other settings: Not used

6 AI short protocol Refer to Appendix B in the Group 3 Facsimile
0: Off Manual for details about AI Short Protocol.
1: Disabled If the setting is Disabled, the bit switch setting is
used.
Switch 04
0 Inch-mm conversion before tx The machine uses inch-based resolutions for
1 Bit 1 Bit 0 Setting scanning. If inch only is selected, the printed copy
0 0 Inch-mm may be slightly distorted at the other end if that
conversion machine uses mm-based resolutions.
available
0 1 Inch only If the setting is Disabled, the bit switch setting is
1 0 Not used used.
1 1 Disabled
2 DIS/NSF detection method (0, 1): Use this setting if echoes on the line are
to Bit 3 Bit 2 Setting interfering with the set-up protocol at the start of
3 0 0 First DIS or transmission. The machine will then wait for the
NSF second DIS or NSF before sending DCS or NSS.
0 1 Second DIS or
NSF If the setting is Disabled, the bit switch setting is
1 0 Not used used.
1 1 Disabled
B750 104 SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Switch 04
Fax Option
Type 3232
B750
4 V.8 protocol If transmissions to a specific destination always end
0: Off at a lower modem rate (14,400 bps or lower),
1: Disabled disable V.8 protocol so as not to use V.34 protocol.
0: V.34 communication will not be possible.
If the setting is Disabled, the bit switch setting is
used.
5 Compression modes available This bit determines the capabilities that are informed
in transmit mode to the other terminal during transmission.
0: MH only If the setting is Disabled, the bit switch setting is
1: Disabled used.
6 ECM during transmission For example, if ECM is switched on but is not
7 Bit 7 Bit 6 Setting wanted when sending to a particular terminal, use
0 0 Off the (0, 0) setting.
0 1 On Note that V.8/V.34 protocol and JBIG compression
1 0 Not used are automatically disabled if ECM is disabled.
1 1 Disabled If the setting is Disabled, the bit switch setting is
used.
Switch 05 - Not used (do not change the settings)

SM 105 B750
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SERVICE RAM ADDRESSES
4.5 SERVICE RAM ADDRESSES

CAUTION
Do not change the settings which are marked as Not used or Read only.
680001 to 680004(H) - ROM version (Read only)

680001(H) - Revision number (BCD)
680002(H) - Year (BCD)
680003(H) - Month (BCD)
680004(H) - Day (BCD)
680006 to 680015(H) - Machines serial number (16 digits - ASCII)
680018(H) - Total program checksum (low)
680019(H) - Total program checksum (high)
680020 to 68003F(H) - System bit switches
680050 to 68005F(H) - Printer bit switches
680060 to 68007F(H) - Communication bit switches
680080 to 68008F(H) - G3 bit switches
680090 to 68009F(H) - G3-2 bit switches
6800A0 to 6800AF(H) - G3-3 bit switches
6800D0(H) - User parameter switch 00 (SWUER_00) : Not used
6800D1(H) - User parameter switch 01 (SWUSR_01) : Not used
6800D2(H) - User parameter switch 02 (SWUSR_02)
Bit 0: Forwarding mark printing on forwarded messages 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled
Bit 1: Center mark printing on received copies
(This switch is not printed on the user parameter list.)
Bit 2: Reception time printing
Bit 3: TSI print on received messages 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled
Bit 4: Checkered mark printing
Bit 5: Not used
Bit 6: Not used
Bit 7: Not used
6800D3(H) - User parameter switch 03 (SWUSR_03: Automatic report
printout)
Bit 0: Transmission result report (memory transmissions) 0: Off, 1: On
Bit 1: Not used
Bit 2: Memory storage report 0: Off, 1: On
Bit 3: Polling reserve report (polling reception) 0: Off, 1: On
Bit 4: Polling result report (polling reception) 0: Off, 1: On
Bit 5: Transmission result report (immediate transmissions) 0: Off, 1: On
Bit 6: Polling clear report 0: Off, 1: On
Bit 7: Journal 0: Off, 1: On
B750 106 SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
6800D4(H) - User parameter switch 04 (SWUSR_04: Automatic report
Fax Option
Type 3232
printout)
B750
Bit 0: Automatic confidential reception report output 0: Off, 1: On
Bit 1: Automatic communication failure report and transfer result report output
0: Off, 1: On
Bits 2 to 3: Not used
Bit 4: Indicates the parties 0: Not indicated, 1: Indicated
Bit 5: Include senders name on reports 0: Off, 1: On
Bit 6: Not used
Bit 7: Inclusion of a sample image on reports 0: Off, 1: On
Bit 0: Substitute reception when the base copier is in an SC condition
0: Enabled, 1: Disabled
Bits 1 and 2: Condition for substitute rx when the machine cannot print messages
(Paper end, toner end, jam, and during night mode)
Bit 2 1 Setting
0 0 The machine receives all the fax messages.
0 1 The machine receives the fax messages with RTI or CSI.
1 0 The machine receives the fax messages with the same ID code.
1 1 The machine does not receive anything.
Bit 3: Not used
Bit 4: Not used
Bit 5: Just size printing 0: Off, 1: On
Bit 6: Not used
Bit 7: Add paper display when a cassette is empty 0: Off, 1: On
Bit 6: Scan sequence in Book transmission
0: Left page then right page, 1: Right page then left page
Bit 7: Not used
Bits 0 and 1: Not used
Bit 2: Parallel memory transmission 0: Off, 1: On
Bits 0 and 1: Not used.
Bit 2: Authorized reception
0: Only faxes from senders whose RTIs/CSIs are specified for this feature
are accepted.
1: Only faxes from senders whose RTIs/CSIs are not specified for this feature
are accepted.
Bits 3 to 7: Not used.
6800D9(H) - User parameter switch 09 (SWUSR_09) : Not used
6800DA(H) - User parameter switch 10 (SWUSR_0A)
Bit 0: Not used
Bit 1: 2 into 1 0: Off, 1: On
SM 107 B750
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Bit 2: Not used

Bit 3: Page reduction 0: Off, 1: On
Bit 4: Not used
Bit 5: Reception file printout 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled
6800DB(H) - User parameter switch 11 (SWUSR_0B)
Bit 0: Not used
Bit 1: Not used
Bit 6: Printout of messages received while acting as a forwarding station
0: Off, 1: On
Bit 7: Polling Standby duration 0: Once, 1: No limit
6800DC(H) - User parameter switch 12 (SWUSR_0C): Not used
6800DD(H) - User parameter switch 13 (SWUSR_0D): Not used
6800DE(H) - User parameter switch 14 (SWUSR_0E)
Bit 0: Message printout while the machine is in Night Printing mode 0: On, 1: Off
Bit 1: Maximum document length detection
0: Double letter, 1: Longer than double-letter (well log) up to 1,200 mm
Bit 2: Batch transmission 0: Off, 1: On
Bit 3: Fax mode settings, such as resolution, before a mode key (Copy/Fax/Printer
/Scanner) is pressed
0: Not cleared, 1: Cleared
Bit 7: Manual service call (sends the system parameter list to the service station)
0: Off, 1: On
B750 108 SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
6800DF(H) - User parameter switch 15 (SWUSR_0F)
Fax Option
Type 3232
B750
Bits 0, 1 and 2: Cassette for fax printout
Bit 2 1 0 Setting
0 0 1 1st paper feed station
0 1 0 2nd paper feed station
0 1 1 3rd paper feed station
1 0 0 4th paper feed station
1 0 1 LCT
Other settings Not used
Bit 5: Using the cassette specified by bits 0, 1 and 2 above only 0: On, 1: Off
6800E0(H) User parameter switch 16 (SWUSR_10)
Bit 2: Paper size selection priority for an A4 size fax message when A4/LT size
paper is not available.
0: A3 has priority, 1: B4 has priority
6800E1(H) User parameter switch 17 (SWUSR_11)
Bit 2: Inclusion of the Add button when a sequence of Quick/Speed dials is
selected for broadcasting
0:Not needed, 1: Needed
Bit 7: Press Start key without an original when using the on hook dial or the
external telephone,
0: displays Cannot detect original size.
1: Receives fax messages.
6800E2(H) - User parameter switch 18 (SWUSR_12)
Bit 0: TTI date 0: Off, 1: On
Bit 1: TTI sender 0: Off, 1: On
Bit 2: TTI file number 0: Off, 1: On
Bit 3: TTI page number 0: Off, 1: On
Bit 4 to 7: Not used
SM 109 B750
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA

Bit 0: Offset sort function for the fax (only using the shift tray on the 1,000 sheet
finisher)
Bit 1: Journal format
0: The Journal is separated into transmissions and receptions
1: The Journal is separated into G3-1, G3-2, and G3-3 communications
Bit 2: Action when the paper cassette that was selected by the specified cassette
selection feature becomes empty.
0: The machine will not print any received files until paper is added.
1: The machine will use other cassettes to print received files that are not
specified by this feature.
Bit 3: 90 image rotation during B5 portrait Tx
0: Off, 1: On
Bit 4: Reduction of sample images on reports to 50% in the main scan and sub-
scan directions. (This switch is not printed on the user parameter list.)
0: Technician adjustment (printer switch 0E bits 3 and 4), 1: 50% reduction
Bit 5: Use of A5 size paper for reports
0: Off, 1: On
Bit 0: Automatic printing of the PC fax (LAN fax) error report
0: Off, 1: On
Bit 1: Reprint the documents fail to print from PC fax (LAN fax) driver
0: Off, 1: On
Bits 2 to 5: Store documents in memory which could not be printed from PC fax
(LAN fax) driver
Bit 5 4 3 2 Setting
0 0 0 0 0 min.
0 0 0 1 1 min.
1 1 1 0 14 min.
1 1 1 1 15 min.
Bits 6 and 7: Not used.
Bit 0: Print results of sending reception notice request message
0: Disabled (print only when error occurs), 1: Enabled
Bit 1: Respond to e-mail reception acknowledgment request
Bit 2: Not used
Bit 3: File format for forwarded folders 0: TIFF, 1:PDF
Bit 4: Transmit Journal by E-mail 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled
Bit 5: Not used
Bit 6: Network error display 0: Displayed, 1: Not displayed
Bit 7: Transmit error mail notification 0: Enabled, 1: Disabled
B750 110 SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Fax Option
Type 3232
B750
Bit 0: Dial tone detection (PSTN 1) 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled
6800E7(H) User parameter switch 23 (SWUSR_17) : Not used
Bits 0 and 1: File retention time (Cross reference: System switch 02 bit 4)
Bit 1 0 Setting
0 0 File retention impossible
0 1 24 hours
1 0 File retention impossible
1 1 72 hours
Bit 0 and 1: Not used
Bit 2: Auto switching 0: Fax, 1: Telephone
Bit 3: Not used
Bit 4: RDS operation
0: Not acceptable
1: Acceptable for the limit specified by system switch 03
NOTE: This bit is only effective when RDS operation can be selected by the user
(see system switch 02).
6800EA(H) to 6800EF(H) - User parameter switch 26 to 31 (SWUSR_1A to 1F)
: Not used
6800F0(H) - User parameter switch 32 (SWUSR_20)
Bit 0: Quotation priority for a destination when there is no destination of the
specified type
0: Paper output priority
Priority order
1. IP-fax destination, 2. Fax Number, 3. E-mail address, 4. Folder
1: Electric putout order
Priority order
1. E-mail address, 2. Folder, 3. IP-fax destination, 4. Fax number
6800F1(H) - User parameter switch 33 (SWUSR_21): Not used

6800F2(H) - User parameter switch 34 (SWUSR_22)
Bit 0: SIP server used with IP-Fax 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled
Bit 1: Gatekeeper server used with IP-Fax 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled
680100 to 68010F(H) - G4 Parameter Switches Not used
680110 to 68012F(H) - G4 Internal Switches Not used
SM 111 B750
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
680170 to 68017F(H) - IFAX Switches

680180 to 68018F(H) - IP-FAX Switches
680190 to 6801AF(H) - Service stations fax number (SP3-101)
6801B0 to 6801B0(H) - Own fax PABX extension number
6801BA to 6801C3(H) - Own fax number (PSTN)
6801C4 to 6801D7(H) - Own fax number (ISDN G4) Not used
6801D8 to 6801E3(H) - The first subscriber number (ISDN G3) Not used
6801E4 to 6801EF(H) - The second subscriber number (ISDN G3) Not used
6801F0 to 6801FB(H) - The first subscriber number (ISDN G4) Not used
6801FC to 680207(H) - The second subscriber number (ISDN G4) Not used
680208 to 68021B(H) - PSTN-1 RTI (Max. 20 characters - ASCII) - See the
following note.
68021C to 68022F(H) - PSTN-2 RTI (Max. 20 characters - ASCII) - See the
following note.
680230 to 680246(H) - PSTN-3 RTI (Max. 20 characters - ASCII) - See the
following note.
680247 to 680286(H) - TTI 1 (Max. 64 characters - ASCII) - See the following note.
680307 to 68031A(H) - PSTN-1 CSI (Max. 20 characters - ASCII)
68031B to 68032E(H) - PSTN-2 CSI (Max.20 characters - ASCII)
68032F to 680342(H) - PSTN-3 CSI (Max.20 characters - ASCII)
680343(H) - Number of PSTN-1 CSI characters (Hex)
680344(H) - Number of PSTN-2 CSI characters (Hex)
680345(H) Number of PSTN-3 CSI characters (Hex)-
NOTE: If the number of characters is less than the maximum (20 for RTI, 64 for
TTI), add a stop code (FF[H]) after the last character.
680380 to 680387(H) - Last power off time (Read only)
680380(H) - 01(H) - 24-hour clock, 00(H) - 12-hour clock (AM),
02(H) - 12-hour clock (PM)
680381(H) - Year (BCD)
680382(H) - Month (BCD)
680383(H) - Day (BCD)
680384(H) - Hour
680385(H) - Minute
680386(H) - Second
680387(H) - 00: Monday, 01: Tuesday, 02: Wednesday, ....... , 06: Sunday
680394(H) - Optional equipment (Read only Do not change the settings)
Bit 0: Page Memory 0: Not installed, 1: Installed
Bit 1: SAF Memory 0: Not installed, 1: Installed
Bits 2 to 7; Not used
680395(H) - Optional equipment (Read only Do not change the settings)
Bit 4: G3-2 0: Not installed, 1: Installed
Bit 5: G3-3 0: Not installed, 1: Installed
Bit 6 and 7: Not used
B750 112 SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
680406 to 68040A Option G3 board (G3-2) ROM information (Read only)
Fax Option
680406(H) - Suffix (BCD)
Type 3232
B750
680407(H) - Version (BCD)
680408(H) - Year (BCD)
680409(H) - Month (BCD)
68040A(H) - Day (BCD)
68040B to 68040F Option G3 board (G3-3) ROM information (Read only)
68040B(H) - Suffix (BCD)
68040C(H) - Version (BCD)
68040D(H) - Year (BCD)
68040E(H) - Month (BCD)
68040F(H) - Day (BCD)
680410(H) - G3-1 Modem ROM version (Read only)
680420(H) - Number of multiple sets print (Read only)
680476(H) - Time for economy transmission (hour in 24h clock format - BCD)
680477(H) - Time for economy transmission (minute - BCD)
680492(H) - Transmission monitor volume 00 - 07(H)
680493(H) - Reception monitor volume 00 - 07(H)
680494(H) - On-hook monitor volume 00 - 07(H)
680495(H) - Dialing monitor volume 00 - 07(H)
680496(H) - Buzzer volume 00 - 07(H)
680497(H) - Beeper volume 00 - 07(H)
69ED04 to 69F003(H) - SIP server address (Read only)
69ED04(H) - Proxy server - Main (Max. 128 characters - ASCII)
69ED84(H) - Proxy server - Sub (Max. 128 characters - ASCII)
69EE04(H) - Redirect server - Main (Max. 128 characters - ASCII)
69EE04(H) - Redirect server - Sub (Max. 128 characters - ASCII)
69EF04(H) - Registrar server - Main (Max. 128 characters - ASCII)
69EF04(H) - Registrar server - Sub (Max. 128 characters - ASCII)
69F004(H) - Gatekeeper server address - Main (Max. 128 characters - ASCII)
69F084(H) - Gatekeeper server address - Sub (Max. 128 characters - ASCII)
69F104(H) - Arias Number (Max. 128 characters - ASCII)
69F184(H) - SIP user name (Max. 128 characters - ASCII)
69F204(H) - Gateway address information (Max. 128 characters - ASCII)
6A0DC0(H) - Stand-by port number for H.232 connection
6A0DC2(H) - Stand-by port number for SIP connection
6A0DC4(H) - RAS port number
6A0DC6(H) - Gatekeeper port number
6A0DC8(H) - Port number of data waiting for T.38
6A0DCA(H) - Port number of SIP server
6A0DCC(H) - Priority for SIP and H.323 0: H.323, 1: SIP
6A0DCD(H) - SIP function 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled
6A0DCE(H) - H.323 function 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled
SM 113 B750
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
6A0DD0(H) - RAS/SIP back-up server: IP address (Max. 128 characters- ASCII)

6A0DD4(H) - SIP back-up server: Host name (Max. 128 characters- ASCII)
6A0E54(H) - RAS back-up server: gatekeeper address - Main
(Max. 128 characters- ASCII)
6A0ED4(H) - RAS back-up server: gatekeeper address - Sub
6A0F54(H) - SIP back-up server: registrar server address - Main
6A0FD4(H) - SIP back-up server: registrar server address - Sub
6A1054(H) - RAS back-up server: Arias number (Max. 128 characters- ASCII)
6A10D4(H) - RAS back-up server: Stand-by port number for H.232 connection
6A10D6(H) - RAS back-up server: RAS port number
B750 114 SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
OVERVIEW
5. DETAILED SECTION DESCRIPTIONS
Fax Option
Type 3232
B750
5.1 OVERVIEW
FCUIF
MBU
to BICU
Memory DIMM
CCUDRV
GWFCU3
CCUIF
SG3 SG3
B750D501.WMF
The basic fax unit consists of two PCBs: an FCU and an MBU.
The FCU controls all the fax communications and fax features, in cooperation with
the controller board. The MBU contains the ROM and SRAM. Also, the FCU has an
NCU circuit.
Fax Options:
1. Extra G3 Interface option: This provides one more analog line interface. This
allows full dual access. Two extra G3 interface options can be installed.
2. Memory Expansion: This expands the SAF memory and the page memory
(used for image rotation); without this expansion, the page memory is not big
enough for image rotation at 400 dpi, so transmission at 400 dpi is not possible.
SM 115 B750
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
BOARDS 10 February 2005
5.2 BOARDS
5.2.1 FCU
SAF SDRAM DIMM FCU

BACKUP (16MB) (32 MB)
FCUIF
DMA BUS
BICU
PCI BUS
FACE3
CPU BUS
v.34
SRAM FROM MODEM Line
(256kB) (3MB) NCU
Circuit
Speaker
TEL
BACKUP Drive
& RESET
MBU
CCUIF CCUDRV
G3 G3
Speaker
B750D502.WMF
The FCU (Facsimile Control Unit) controls fax communications, the video interface
to the base copiers engine, and all the fax options.
FACE3 (Fax Application Control Engine)

CPU
Data compression and reconstruction (DCR)
DMA control
Clock generation
DRAM backup control
Modem (FAME)
V.34, V33, V17, V.29, V.27ter, V.21, and V.8
B750 116 SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
BOARDS
DRAM
Fax Option
Type 3232
The 16 MB of DRAM is shared as follows.
B750
SAF memory : 4MB
Working memory : 8MB
Page memory : 4MB
The SAF memory is backed up by a rechargeable battery.
Memory back-up
A Rechargeable battery backs up the SAF memory (DRAM) for 1 hour.
5.2.2 MBU
On this board, the flash ROM contains the FCU firmware, and the SRAM contains
the system data and user parameters. Even if the FCU is changed, the system
data and user parameters are kept on the MBU board.
ROM
3MB flash ROMs for system software storage
2MB (16bit x 1MB) + 1MB (16bit x 512K)
SRAM
The 256 KB SRAM for system and user parameter storage is backed up by a
lithium battery.
Memory back-up
A lithium battery backs up the system parameters and programmed items in
the SRAM, in case the base copier's main switch is turned off.
Switches
Item Description
SW1 Switches the SRAM backup battery on/off.
SM 117 B750
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
BOARDS 10 February 2005
5.2.3 SG3 BOARD
G3 Board
SG3-D
SG3-D
NCCP
CPU FROM SDRAM
(Ru30) (1MB) (8MB)
DPRAM
DMAC
FCU DCR
JBIG Line
DSP
CODEC AFE NCU
(modem)
+5V +3.3V
REG
B750D902.WMF
The SG3 board allows up to three simultaneous communications when used in

combination with the FCU and optional G3 boards. The NCU is on the same board
as the common SG-3 board. This makes the total board structure smaller. But, the
specifications of the SG3 board do not change.
NCCP (New Communication Control Processor)
Controls the SG3 board.
CPU (RU30)
DPRAM (Dual Port RAM): Handshaking with the FCU is done through this block.
DMA controller
JBIG
DSP V34 modem (RL5T892): Includes the DTMF Receiver function
DCR for MH, MR, MMR, and JBIG compression and decompression
FROM
1Mbyte flash ROM for SG3 software storage and modem software storage
SDRAM
8Mbyte DRAM shared between ECM buffer, line buffer, and working memory
AFE (Analog Front End)
Analog processing
CODEC (COder-DECoder)
A/D & D/A conversions for modem
REG
Generates +3.3 V from the +5V from the FCU
B750 118 SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
VIDEO DATA PATH
5.3 VIDEO DATA PATH
Fax Option
Type 3232
B750
5.3.1 TRANSMISSION
SCANNER
BICU
FBI FCU
FACE3
Page Memory
DCR
SAF SG3
DCR QM-CODER DCR QM-CODER
Modem Modem NCCP
NCU NCU
Analog G3 Analog G3
B750D511.WMF
SM 119 B750
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
VIDEO DATA PATH 10 February 2005
Memory Transmission and Parallel Memory Transmission

The base copier's scanner scans the original at the selected resolution in inch
format. The BICU processes the data and transfers it to the FCU.
NOTE: When scanning a fax original, the BICU uses the MTF, independent dot
erase and thresholding parameter settings programmed in the fax units
scanner bit switches, not the copier's SP modes.
Then, the FCU converts the data to mm format, and compresses the data in MMR
or raw format to store it in the SAF memory. If image rotation will be done, the
image is rotated in page memory before compression.
At the time of transmission, the FCU decompresses the stored data, then re-
compresses and/or reduces the data if necessary for transmission. The NCU
transmits the data to the line.
Immediate Transmission
The base copier's scanner scans the original at the resolution agreed with the
receiving terminal. The BICU video processes the data and transfers it to the FCU.
NOTE: When scanning a fax original, the BICU uses the MTF, independent dot
erase and thresholding parameter settings programmed in the fax units
scanner bit switches, not the copier's SP modes.
Then the FCU stores the data in page memory, and compresses the data for
transmission. The NCU transmits the data to the line.
JBIG Transmission
Memory transmission: If the receiver has JBIG compression, the data goes
from the DCR to the QM-Coder. Then the NCU transmits the data to the line.
When an optional G3 unit (SG3) is installed and PSTN2 is selected as the line
type, JBIG compression is available, but only for the PSTN-2 line.
Immediate transmission: If the receiver has JBIG compression, the data goes
from the page memory to the QM-Coder. Then the NCU transmits the data to the
line. When an optional G3 unit (SG3) is installed and PSTN2 is selected as the
line type, JBIG compression is available, but only for the PSTN-2 line.
Adjustments
Priority for the line used for G3 transmissions (PSTN 1/PSTN 2 or 3): System
switch 16 bit 1
B750 120 SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
VIDEO DATA PATH
5.3.2 RECEPTION
Fax Option
Type 3232
B750
Analog G3 Analog G3
NCU NCU
Modem Modem
QM-CODER
SAF DCR
CCD (DCR) DCR QM-CODER

NCCP
Page Memory
FACE3
FBI
SG3 FCU
BICU
Printer
B750D512.WMF
First, the FCU stores the incoming data from either an analog line to the SAF
memory. (The data goes to the FACE3 at the same time, and is checked for error
lines/frames.)
The FCU then decompresses the data and transfers it to page memory. If image
rotation will be done, the image is rotated in the page memory. The data is
transferred to the BICU.
If the optional G3 unit is installed, the line that the message comes in on depends
on the telephone number dialled by the other party (the optional G3 unit has a
different telephone number from the main fax board).
JBIG Reception
When data compressed with JBIG comes in on PSTN-1 (the standard analog line),
the data is sent to the QM-CODER for decompression. Then the data is stored in
the page memory, and transferred to the BICU.
When data compressed with JBIG comes in on PSTN-2 (optional extra analog
line), the data is sent to the QM-CODER on the SG3 board for decompression.
SM 121 B750
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
FAX COMMUNICATION FEATURES 10 February 2005
5.4 FAX COMMUNICATION FEATURES

5.4.1 MULTI-PORT
When the optional extra G3 Interface Unit is installed, communication can take
place at the same time through the two or three lines at once.
Available protocol
Option Available Line Type
Combinations
Standard only PSTN G3
Extra G3 Interface Unit (single) PSTN + PSTN G3 + G3
Extra G3 Interface Unit (double) PSTN + PSTN +PSTN G3 + G3 +G3
B750 122 SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
FAX COMMUNICATION FEATURES
5.4.2 DOCUMENT SERVER
Fax Option
Type 3232
B750
Scanner Controller
Comoressed
MMR
Page
BICU
Memory
HDD
FCU
FBI
FACE3 DCR Modem NCU To

PSTN
DATA/ADDRESS BUS
B750D514.WMF
The base copier's scanner scans the original at the selected resolution. The BICU
video processes the data and transfers it to the controller board.
Then the controller stores the data in the page memory for the copier function, and
compresses the data in MMR (by software) to store it in the HDD. If image rotation
will be done, the image is rotated in the page memory before compression.
For transmission, the stored image data is transferred to the FCU. The FCU
decompresses the image data, then recompresses and/or reduces the data if
necessary for transmission. the NCU transmits the data to the line.
The documents can be stored in the HDD (Document Server) from the fax
application. The stored documents in the document sever can be used for the fax
transmission in many times. More than one document and the scanned document
can be combined into one file and then the file can be transmitted.
When using the document server, the SAF memory is not used.
The document is compressed with MMR and stored.
Up to 9,000 pages can be stored. (1 file: Up to 1,000 pages) from the fax
application.
Only stored documents from the fax application can be transmitted.
Scanned documents are given a name automatically, such as FAX001. But it is
possible to change the file name, user name and password.
Up to 30 files can be selected at once.
NOTE: 1) The compression method of the fax application is different from the copy
application. The storing time is longer than the copier storing.
2) When selecting Print 1st page, the stored document will be reduced to
A4 size.
SM 123 B750
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
5.4.3 INTERNET MAIL COMMUNICATION

Mail Transmission
For details: Core Technology Manual Facsimile Processes Faxing from a PC
Internet/LAN Fax Boards Mail Transmission
Data Formats
The scanned data is converted into a TIFF-F formatted file (only MH compression
can be used).
The fields of the e-mail and their contents are as follows:
Field Content
From Mail address of the sender
Reply To Destination requested for reply
To Mail address of the destination
Bcc Backup mail address
Subject From CSI or RTI (Fax Message No. xxxx)
Content Type Multipart/mixed
Attached files: image/tiff
Content Transfer Encoding Base 64, 7-bit, 8-bit, Quoted Printable
Message Body MIME-converted TIFF-F (MIME standards specify how files
are attached to e-mail messages)
Selectable Options
These options are available for selection:
With the default settings, the scan resolution can be either standard or detail.
Inch-mm conversion before TX depends on IFAX SW01 Bit 7. Detail resolution
will be used if Super Fine resolution is selected, unless Fine resolution is enabled
with IFAX SW01.
The requirements for originals (document size, scan width, and memory
capacity) are the same as for G3 fax memory tx.
The default compression is TIFF-F format.
IFAX SW00: Acceptable paper widths for sending
IFAX SW09: Maximum number of attempts to the same destination
Secure Internet Transmission

SMTP Authentication:
User Tools> System Settings> File Transfer> SMTP Authentication
POP Before SMTP:
User Tools> System Settings> File Transfer> POP Before SMTP
B750 124 SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Mail Reception
Fax Option
Type 3232
This machine supports three types of e-mail reception:
B750
POP3 (Post Office Protocol Ver. 3.)
IMAP4 (Internet Messaging Access Protocol)
SMTP (Simple Mail Transfer Protocol)
Internet/LAN Fax Boards Mail Reception
POP3/IMAP4 Mail Reception Procedure

The machine automatically picks up e-mail from the server at an interval which is
adjustable in the range 2 to 1440 min. in 1-minute steps:
User Tools> System Settings> File Transfer> E-mail Reception Interval
SMTP Reception
The IFAX must be registered as an SMTP server in the MX record of the DNS
server, and the address of the received mail must specify the IFAX.
Enable SMTP reception:
User Tools> System Settings> File Transfer> Reception Protocol
Even if the MX record on the DNS server includes the IFAX, mail cannot be
received with SMTP until SMTP reception is enabled:
However, if SMTP reception is selected and the machine is not registered in the
MX record of the DNS server, then either IMAP4 or POP3 is used, depending on
the setting:
User Tools> System Settings> File Transfer> Reception Protocol
Mail Delivery Conditions: Transferring Mail Received With SMTP
1) The machine must be set up for SMTP mail delivery:
User Tools> Facsimile Features> E-mail Settings> SMTP RX File Delivery
Settings
2) If the user wishes to limit this feature so that the machine will only deliver
mail from designated senders, the machines Auth. E-mail RX feature must
be set (User Tools> Facsimile Features> E-mail Settings> SMTP RX File
Delivery Settings).
3) If the SMTP RX File Delivery Setting is set to 0 to prohibit SMTP receiving,
and if there is mail designated for delivery, then the machine responds with
an error. (User Tools> Facsimile Features> E-mail Settings> SMTP RX File
Delivery Settings)
4) If the quick dial, speed dial, or group dial entry is incorrect, the mail
transmission is lost, and the IFAX issues an error to the SMTP server and
outputs an error report.
SM 125 B750
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Auth. E-mail RX
In order to limit access to mail delivery with IFAX, the addresses of senders must
be limited using the Access Limit Entry. Only one entry can be registered.
1) Access Limit Entry
For example, to limit access to @IFAX.ricoh.co.jp:
gts@IFAX.ricoh.co.jp Matches and is delivered.
gts@IFAX.abcde.co.jp Does not match and is not delivered.
IFAX@ricoh.co.jp Does not match and is not delivered.
2) Conditions
The length of the Access Limit Entry is limited to 127 characters.
If the Access Limit Entry address and the mail address of the incoming
mail do not match, the incoming mail is discarded and not delivered, and
the SMTP server responds with an error. However, in this case an error
report is not output.
If the Access Limit Entry address is not registered, and if the incoming
mail specifies a delivery destination, then the mail is delivered
unconditionally.
B750 126 SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Handling Mail Reception Errors
Fax Option
Type 3232
B750
Abnormal files
When an error of this type occurs, the machine stops receiving and commands the
server to erase the message. Then the machine prints an error report and sends
information about the error by e-mail to the sender address (specified in the From
or Reply-to field of the message). If there is an incomplete received message in
the machine memory, it will be erased.
The machine prints an error message when it fails to send the receive error
notification after a certain number of attempts.
The following types of files are judged to be abnormal if one or more of the
following are detected:
1. Unsupported MIME headers.
Supported types of MIME header
Header Supported Types
Content-Type Multipart/mixed, text/plain, message/rfc822 Image/tiff
Charset US-ASCII, ISO 8859 X. Other types cannot be handled,
and some garbage may appear in the data.
Content-Transfer-Encoding Base 64, 7-bit, 8-bit, Quoted Printable
2. MIME decoding errors

3. File format not recognized as TIFF-F format
4. Resolution, document size, or compression type cannot be accepted
Remaining SAF capacity error

The machine calls the server but does not receive e-mail if the remaining SAF
capacity is less than a certain value (the value depends on IFAX Switch 08. The e-
mail will be received when the SAF capacity increases (for example, after
substitute reception files have been printed). The error handling method for this
type of error is the same as for Abnormal files.
If the capacity of the SAF memory drops to zero during reception, the machine
operates in the same way as when receiving an abnormal file (refer to Abnormal
files above).
Secure Internet Reception

To enable password encryption and higher level security:
User Tools> System Settings> File Transfer> POP3/IMAP4 Settings> Encryption
(set to On)
SM 127 B750
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Transfer Request
Internet/LAN Fax Boards Transfer Request
Request by Mail
The fields of the e-mail and their contents are as follows:
Field Content
From E-mail address of the requesting terminal
To Destination address (Transfer Station address)
Bcc Backup mail address
Subject From TSI (Fax Message No. xxxx)
Content-Type Multipart/mixed
Text/Plain (for a text part), image/tiff (for attached files)
Content-Transfer-Encoding Base 64, 7-Bit, 8-bit, Quoted Printable
Mail body (text part) RELAY-ID-: xxxx (xxxx: 4 digits for an ID code)
RELAY: #01#*X#**01.
Message body MIME-converted TIFF-F.
B750 128 SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
E-Mail Options (Sub TX Mode)
Fax Option
Type 3232
The following features are available as options for mail sending: entering a subject,
B750
designating the level of importance, confirming reception of the mail.
Subject and Level of Importance

You can enter a subject message with: Sub TX Mode> E-mail Options
The Subject entry for the mail being sent is limited to 64 characters. The subject
can also be prefixed with an Urgent or High notation.
How the Subject Differs According to Mail Type
Mail Type
Subject Entry --- Entry Condition
1. CSI (RTI) Fax Message No.
No Subject 2. RTI CSI not registered +
Entry 3. CSI RTI not registered File No.
4. None CSI, RTI not registered
1. CSI (RTI) Normal:
Return Receipt
(dispatched).
2. RTI CSI not registered You can select
Confirmation
From displayed with IFAX
of Reception
SW02 Bits 2 and 3.
3. CSI RTI not registered Error:
Return Receipt
4. None CSI, RTI not registered (processed/error)
RTI or CSI of
the station
Mail delivery
designated for
Mail delivery, delivery
memory
RTI or CSI of Mail sending from G3
transfer, Fax Message No. + File
From sender memory
SMTP Number
receiving and Mail address
Memory sending
delivery of sender
SMTP receiving and
Mail address
delivery (Off Ramp
of sender
Gateway)
Mail error
--- Error Message No. xxxx From CSI (RTI)
notification
Items of the table above are in the Subject.
Subjects Displayed on the PC
IFAXD919.WMF
SM 129 B750
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
E-mail Messages
After entering the subject, you can enter a message with:
Sub TX Mode> E-mail Options
An e-mail message (up to 5 lines) can be pre-registered with:
User Tools> System Settings> File Transfer> Program/Change/Delete E-mail
Message
Limitations on Entries
Item Maximum
Number of Lines 5 lines
Line Length 80 characters
Name Length 20 characters
B750 130 SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Message Disposition Notification (MDN)
Fax Option
Type 3232
B750
Internet/LAN Fax Boards E-mail Options
The network system administrator can confirm whether a sent mail has been
received correctly or not. This confirmation is done in four steps.
1. Send request for confirmation of mail reception. To enable or disable this
request (known as MDN):
Sub TX Mode> E-mail Options
2. Mail reception (receive confirmation request)
3. Send confirmation of mail reception
4. Receive confirmation of mail reception
The other partys machine will not respond to the request unless the two conditions
below are met:
The other partys machine must be set up to respond to the confirmation request.
The other partys machine must support MDN (Message Disposition Notification).
- Setting up the Receiving Party -

The receiving party will respond to the confirmation request if:
1) The Disposition Notification To field is in the received mail header
(automatically inserted in the 4th line in the upper table on the previous page,
if MDN is enabled), and
2) Sending the disposition notification must be enabled (User Parameter
Setting SW21 (15 [H]) Bit 1 for this model). The content of the response is
as follows:
Normal reception: Return Receipt (dispatched) in the Subject line
IFAX SW02 (Bit 2, 3) Return Receipt (displayed) in the Subject line
Error: Return Receipt (processed/error) in the Subject line
SM 131 B750
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Handling Reports
1. Sending a Request for a Return Receipt by Mail
After the mail sender transmits a request for a return receipt, the mail senders
journal is annotated with two hyphens (--) in the Result column and a Q in the
Mode column.
2. Mail Receipt (Request for Receipt Confirmation) and Sending Mail Receipt
Response
After the mail receiver sends a response to the request for a return receipt, the
mail receivers journal is annotated with two hyphens (--) in the Result column
and an A in the Mode column.
3. Receiving the Return Receipt Mail
After the mail sender receives a return receipt, the information in the mail
senders journal about the receipt request is replaced, i.e. the journal is
annotated with OK in the Result column.
When the return receipt reports an error, the journal is annotated with an E
in the Result column.
The arrival of the return receipt is not recorded in the journal as a separate
communication. Its arrival is only reported by the presence of OK or E in
the Result column.
If the mail address used by the sender specifies a mailing list (i.e., a Group
destination; the machine sends the mail to more than one location. See How
to set up Mail Delivery), the Result column of the Journal is updated every
time a return receipt is received. For example, if the mailing list was to 5
destinations, the Result column indicates the result of the communication
with the 5th destination only. The results of the communications to the first 4
destinations are not shown.
Exceptions:
If one of the communications had an error, the Result column will indicate E,
even if subsequent communications were OK.
If two of the communications had an error, the Journal will indicate the
destination for the first error only.
Report Sample
DATE TIME ADDRESS MODE TIME PAGE RESULT
MAY. 5 10:15 fuser_01@dom1g. ricoh. co. Mail SM 0'09" 2 --

10:16 fuser_01@dom1g. ricoh. co. Mail SMQ 0'05" 1 --
10:17 s_tadashi@dom1g. ricoh. co. Mail SMQ 0'09" 2 OK
10:19 m_masataka@dom1g. ricoh. co. Mail SMA 0'05" 1 --
IFAXD921.WMF
B750 132 SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
IP-FAX
5.5 IP-FAX
Fax Option
Type 3232
B750
What is IP-FAX?
Internet/LAN Fax Boards IP-FAX
T.38 Packet Format
TCP is selected by default for NIC FAX; you can change this to UDP with LAN
switch 10 bit 1.
UDP Related Switches

IP-Fax Switch 01
0-3 Select IP FAX Delay Level Raise the level by selecting a higher setting if too
Bit 3 2 1 0 Setting many transmission errors are occurring on the
0 0 0 0 Level 0 network.
0 0 0 1 Level 1 If TCP/UDP is enabled on the network, raise this
0 0 1 0 Level 2 setting on the T.30 machine. Increasing the delay
0 0 1 1 Level 3 time allows the recovery of more lost packets.
If only UDP is enabled, increase the number of
redundant packets.
Level 1~2: 3 Redundant packets
Level 3: 4 Redundant packets
4-7 Not used. Do not change these settings.
Settings
User parameter switch 32 (20[H]), bit 0
IP-Fax Gate Keeper usage 0: No, 1: Yes
LAN switches 10 to 12: Various IP-FAX settings (see the bit switch table)
SM 133 B750
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SPECIFICATIONS
SPECIFICATIONS
1. GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
Type: Desktop type transceiver
Circuit: PSTN (max. 3ch.)
PABX
Connection: Direct couple
Original Size: Book (Face down)
Maximum Length: 432 mm [17 ins]
Maximum Width: 297 mm [11.7 ins]
ARDF (Face up)
(Single-sided document)
Length: 128 - 1200 mm [5.0 - 47.2 ins]
Width: 105 - 297 mm [4.1 - 11.7 inch]
(Double-sided document)
Length: 128 - 432 mm [5.0 - 17 inch]
Width: 105 - 297 mm [4.1 - 11.7 inch]
Scanning Method: Flat bed, with CCD
Resolution: G3
8 x 3.85 lines/mm (Standard)
8 x 7.7 lines/mm (Detail)
8 x 15.4 line/mm (Fine) Note1
16 x15.4 line/mm (Super Fine) See Note 1
200 x 100 dpi (Standard)
200 x 200 dpi (Detail)
400 x 400 dpi (Super Fine) See Note 1
NOTE: 1. Optional Expansion Memory required
Transmission Time: G3: 3 s at 28800 bps; Measured with G3 ECM using
memory for an ITU-T #1 test document (Slerexe letter) at
standard resolution
Data Compression: MH, MR, MMR
JBIG
Protocol: Group 3 with ECM
Modulation: V.34, V.33, V.17 (TCM), V.29 (QAM),

V.27ter (PHM), V.8, V.21 (FM)
Data Rate: G3: 33600/31200/28800/26400/24000/21600/
19200/16800/14400/12000/9600/7200/4800/2400 bps
Automatic fallback
I/O Rate: With ECM: 0 ms/line
Without ECM: 2.5, 5, 10, 20, or 40 ms/line
B750 134 SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SPECIFICATIONS
Memory Capacity: ECM: 128 KB
Fax Option
Type 3232
SAF
B750
Standard: 4 MB
With optional Expansion Memory: 28 MB (4 MB+ 24 MB)
Page Memory
Standard: 4 MB (Print: 2 MB + Scanner: 2 MB)
With optional Expansion Memory: 12 MB (4 MB + 8 MB)
(Print 8 MB + Scanner: 4 MB)
2. CAPABILITIES OF PROGRAMMABLE ITEMS

The following table shows how the capabilities of each programmable item will
change after the optional Fax Function Upgrade Unit is installed.
Item Standard
Quick Dial 2000
Groups 100
Destination per Group 500
Destinations dialed from the ten-key pad overall 100
Programs 100
Auto Document 6
Communication records for Journal stored in the 200
memory
Specific Senders 30
The following table shows how the capabilities of the document memory will
change after the optional Fax Function Upgrade Unit and the Expansion Memory
are installed.
Without the With the Expansion

Expansion Memory Memory
Memory Transmission
400 400
file
Maximum number of
page for memory 1000 1000
transmission
Memory capacity for
memory transmission 320 2240
( Note1)
NOTE: Measured using an ITU-T #1 test document (Slerexe letter) at the standard
resolution, the auto image density mode and the Text mode.
SM 135 B750
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SPECIFICATIONS
3. IFAX SPECIFICATIONS
Connectivity Protocol
Local area network Transmission:
Ethernet 100base-Tx/10base-T SMTP, TCP/IP
IEEE1394 (IP over 1394) Reception:
IEEE802.11b (wireless LAN) POP3, SMTP, IMAP4, TCP/IP
Resolution Data rate
Main scan: 400 dpi, 200 dpi 100 Mbps(100base-Tx)
Sub scan: 400 dpi, 200 dpi, 100 dpi 10 Mbps (10base-T)
NOTE: To use 400 dpi, IFAX SW01 Bit
Authentication method
4 must be set to 1.
SMTP-AUTH
Transmission Time POP before SMTP
1 s (through a LAN to the server) A-POP
Condition: ITU-T #1 test document Remark
(Selerexe Letter) The machine must be set up as an e-
MTF correction: OFF mail client before installation. Any
TTI: None client PCs connected to the machine
Resolution: 200 x 100 dpi through a LAN must also be e-mail
Communication speed: 10 Mbps clients, or some features will not work
Correspondent device: E-mail server (e.g. Autorouting).
Line conditions: No terminal access
Document Size
Maximum message width is A4/LT.
Note: To use B4 and A3 width, IFAX
SW00 Bit 1 (B4) and/or Bit 2 (A3)
must be set to 1.
E-mail File Format
Single/multi-part
MIME conversion
Image: TIFF-F (MH, MR, MMR)
B750 136 SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SPECIFICATIONS
4. IP-FAX SPECIFICATIONS
Fax Option
Type 3232
Network: LAN: Local Area Network
B750
Ethernet/10base-T, 100base-TX,
IEEE1394 (IP over 1394),
IEEE802.11b (wireless LAN)
Scan line density: 8 x 3.85 lines/mm, 200x100dpi (standard character),

8 x 7.7lines/mm, 200x200dpi (detail character),
8 x 15.4lines/mm (fine character: optional expansion
memory required),
16 x 15.4lines/mm, 400x400dpi (super fine
character: optional expansion memory required)
Original size: Maximum A3 or 11"x 17" (DLT)
Maximum scanning size: Standard: A3, 297mm x 432mm

Irregular: 297mm x 1200mm
Transmission protocol: Recommended: T.38 Annex protocol,

TCP, UDP/IP communication
Compatible machines: IP-Fax compatible machines
IP-Fax transmission Specify IP address and send fax to an IP-Fax

function: compatible fax through a network.
Also capable of sending fax from a G3 fax
connected to the public telephone lines via a VoIP
gateway.
IP-Fax reception function: Receive a fax sent from an IP-Fax compatible fax
through a network.
Also capable of receiving fax from a G3 fax
connected the public telephone lines via a VoIP
gateway.
SM 137 B750
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SPECIFICATIONS
MACHINE CONFIGURATION
1 2 3
13
5
6
12
11 10 9 B750V101.WMF
No. Description No. Description

1, 3 SG3-D board 9 FCU board
2, 4, 6 Modular jack 10 FCU interface board
5 CCU interface board 11 Controller board
7 Expansion memory 12 CCU drive board
8 MBU board 13 Speaker
Item Machine Code No. Remarks

Fax Option Type 3232 B750 6, 8, 9, 10, 13
G3 Interface Unit Type B751 1, 2, 5, 12 When using the dual G3 port
3232 unit, this has 3, 4, 5, 12.
Handset Type 1018 B433 USA only
Expansion Memory G578 7

Marker Type 30 H903 Refill ink for stamp
B750 138 SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B810
AUTO REVERSE DOCUMENT FEEDER
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
AUTO REVERSE DOCUMENT FEEDER

B810
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT ............................................1

1.1 DF EXIT TABLE AND COVERS................................................................... 1
1.2 ORIGINAL FEED UNIT ................................................................................ 2
1.3 LEFT COVER ............................................................................................... 2
1.4 PICK-UP ROLLER........................................................................................ 3
1.5 FEED BELT .................................................................................................. 3
1.6 SEPARATION ROLLER ............................................................................... 4
1.7 ORIGINAL SET/ORIGINAL REVERSE SENSORS...................................... 4
1.8 ORIGINAL SIZE SENSORS, TRAILING EDGE SENSOR ........................... 5
1.9 ORIGINAL FEED DRIVE .............................................................................. 6
DF Feed Clutch........................................................................................ 6
Pick-up Solenoid ...................................................................................... 6
Transport Motor ....................................................................................... 6
DF Feed Motor......................................................................................... 6
1.10 REGISTRATION SENSOR......................................................................... 7
1.11 STAMP SOLENOID AND ORIGINAL EXIT SENSOR ................................ 8
2. DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS ............................................................9

2.2 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT...................................................... 10
2.3 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DESCRIPTION............................................ 11
2.4 DRIVE LAYOUT ......................................................................................... 12
2.5 ORIGINAL SIZE DETECTION.................................................................... 13
2.6 MIXED ORIGINAL SIZE MODE ................................................................. 16
2.7 PICK-UP AND SEPARATION .................................................................... 17
2.8 ORIGINAL TRANSPORT AND EXIT.......................................................... 18
2.8.1 SINGLE-SIDED ORIGINALS............................................................. 18
2.8.2 DOUBLE-SIDED ORIGINALS ........................................................... 19
2.8.3 ORIGINAL TRAILING EDGE SENSOR............................................. 20
2.9 STAMP ....................................................................................................... 21
2.10 TIMING CHART........................................................................................ 22
2.11 CONDITION OF JAM DETECTION.......................................................... 23
2.12 OVERALL ELECTRICAL CIRCUIT .......................................................... 24
3. SERVICE TABLES.........................................................................25
3.1 DIP SWITCHES.......................................................................................... 25
SM i B810
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
DF EXIT TABLE AND COVERS
Auto Reverse
Document
Feeder
B810
CAUTION

: E-ring
1.1 DF EXIT TABLE AND COVERS
[B]
[C]
[D]
[A]
B386R506.WMF
1. Open the DF feed cover.

2. Front cover [A] ( x 3)
4. Open the reverse table [C].
5. Original exit table [D] ( x 3)
SM 1 B810
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
ORIGINAL FEED UNIT
1.2 ORIGINAL FEED UNIT
[A]
B386R500.WMF
1. Open the left cover.

2. Detach the paper feed unit by sliding it toward the front of the machine (spring-
loaded side) and then lifting the far side.
1.3 LEFT COVER
[B]
[A]
B386R507.WMF
1. Front and rear covers

2. Left cover [A] ( x 2)
3. Lower left stay unit [B] ( x 2)
B810 2 SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PICK-UP ROLLER
1.4 PICK-UP ROLLER
Auto Reverse
Document
[A]
Feeder
B810
1. Original feed unit.
2. Pick-up roller [A] ( x 1)
B386R501.WMF
1.5 FEED BELT

[A]
1. Original feed unit
2. Open the paper feed guide [A].
3. Belt holders [B]
4. Feed belt [C]
Push in on the bottom of the roller
and lift slightly to remove the belt.
B386R204.WMF
[C]
[B]
B386R205.WMF
SM 3 B810
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SEPARATION ROLLER
1.6 SEPARATION ROLLER
[A]
[C]
[B]
B386R502.WMF
1. Lift the original feed guide [A].

2. Separation roller cover [B]
3. Separation roller [C]
1.7 ORIGINAL SET/ORIGINAL REVERSE SENSORS
[A]
[B]
[C]
[D]
B386R201.WMF
1. Open the left cover.

2. While pushing the left and right pawls [A], open the original feed guide plate [B].
3. Original set sensor [C]
4. Original reverse sensor [D]
B810 4 SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
ORIGINAL SIZE SENSORS, TRAILING EDGE SENSOR
1.8 ORIGINAL SIZE SENSORS, TRAILING EDGE
Auto Reverse
Document
SENSOR
Feeder
B810
[A]
[B]
[C]
[E] [D]
B386R503.WMF
B386R504.WMF
1. Open the original table [A].

2. Upper part of the table ( x 3)
3. Replace the width sensor board [B], length sensor (-1 [C] and -2 [D]) and
trailing edge sensor [E].
[F]
NOTE: To ensure proper detection of paper
size, after wiping off the sensor
board and terminal plate with a dry
cloth (or cloth with alcohol), apply
silicone grease (KS-660) to the
terminal plate [F].
B386R505.WMF
SM 5 B810
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
ORIGINAL FEED DRIVE
1.9 ORIGINAL FEED DRIVE
[B]
[A]
[C]
[D]
B386R202.WMF
[E]
First remove the rear cover. Then follow the instructions below for each part
replacement:
DF Feed Clutch
1. DF feed clutch [A] ( x 1, x 1)
Pick-up Solenoid
1. Pick-up solenoid [B] ( x 3, x 1, x 1)
Transport Motor
1. Bracket [C] ( x 2)
2. Transport motor [E] ( x 2, x 1)
DF Feed Motor
1. Bracket [C] ( x 2)
2. DF feed motor [D] ( x 2, x 1)
B810 6 SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
REGISTRATION SENSOR
1.10 REGISTRATION SENSOR
Auto Reverse
Document
Feeder
B810
[B]
[A] B386R508.WMF
1. Front and rear covers

2. Transport guide plate [A]
3. Registration sensor [B]
SM 7 B810
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
STAMP SOLENOID AND ORIGINAL EXIT SENSOR
1.11 STAMP SOLENOID AND ORIGINAL EXIT SENSOR
[A] [B]
[C]
B386R509.WMF
[D]
B386R203.WMF
1. Rear cover ( x 1)
2. Upper cover and the exit tray
3. Open the exit guide plate [A]. Detach the unit by inserting a screwdriver into
one of the small openings [B] on either side of the guide plate holder and
pushing firmly.
4. Stamp solenoid [C] ( x 1)
5. Original exit sensor [D] ( x 1)
B810 8 SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Auto Reverse
Document
Feeder
B810
3 4 5 6 7 8 9
2
19 B386D201.WMF
18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10
1. Separation Roller 11. Reverse Roller

2. Paper Feed Belt 12. Junction Gate
3. Pick-up Roller 13. Exit Roller
4. Original Set Sensor 14. Original Exit Sensor
5. Original Trailing Edge Sensor 15. Stamp
6. Original Width Sensor Board 16. 2nd Transport Roller
7. Original Length Sensor 1 17. Original Exposure Guide
8. Original Length Sensor 2 18. Registration Sensor
9. Original Table 19. 1st Transport Roller
10. Reverse Table
SM 9 B810
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
1 2 3
17 4
5
16 6
15 7
8
14
13
9
12 10
11 B386D202.WMF
1. DF Feed Clutch 10. DF Feed Motor

2. Feed Cover Sensor 11. DF Transport Motor
3. Original Width Sensor Board 12. Original Exit Sensor
4. Original Length Sensor 1 13. Stamp Solenoid
5. DF Pick-up Solenoid 14. Original Trailing Edge Sensor
6. Original Length Sensor 2 15. Original Set Sensor
7. Junction Gate Solenoid 16. Original Reverse Sensor
8. DF Drive PCB 17. Registration Sensor
9. DF Position Sensor
B810 10 SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Auto Reverse
Document
Feeder
B810
Motors
DF Feed Drives the feed belt, separation, pick-up, and
M1 10
reverse table rollers.
M2 DF Transport Drives the transport and exit rollers 11
Sensors
S1 DF Position Detects whether the DF is lifted or not. 9
Registration Detects the leading edge of the original to turn
off the DF feed and transport motors, detects
S2 17
the original exposure timing, and checks for
original misfeeds.
Feed Cover Open Detects whether the feed-in cover is opened or
S3 2
Sensor not.
Original Width Detects the original width.
S4 3
Sensor Board
S5 Original Length - 1 Detects the original length. 4
S6 Original Length - 2 Detects the original length. 6
S7 Original Set Detects if an original is on the feed table. 15
Original Exit Detects the leading edge of the original to turn
on the junction gate solenoid and checks for
original misfeeds.
Detects the trailing edge of the original to turn
S8 12
off the transport and feed motor and junction
gate solenoid.
In single-sided mode, used to detect original
misfeeds.
Original Trailing Detects the trailing edge of the last original to
Edge stop copy paper feed and to turn off the
S9 14
transport motor, and checks for original
misfeeds.
Original Reverse Detects when the original is fed from the
S10 16
Sensor reverse area during duplex scanning.
Solenoids
DF Pick-up Controls the up-down movement of the original
SOL1 5
table.
SOL2 Stamp Energizes the stamper to mark the original. 13
SOL3 Junction Gate Opens and closes the junction gate. 7
Magnetic Clutches
DF Feed Transfers transport motor drive to the pick-up
MC1 1
roller and feed belt.
PCBs
DF Drive Interfaces the sensor signals with the copier,
PCB1 and transfers the magnetic clutch, solenoid and 8
motor drive signals from the copier.
SM 11 B810
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
DRIVE LAYOUT
2.4 DRIVE LAYOUT
4
3 5
2 6
1
10
9
8
B386D203.WMF
7
1. Separation Roller 6. DF Feed Motor

2. Original Feed Belt 7. Reverse Table Roller
3. Pick-up Roller 8. 2nd Transport Roller
4. DF Feed Clutch 9. Exit Roller
5. DF Transport Motor 10. 1st Transport Roller
DF Feed Motor: Drives the feed belt, separation, pick-up, and reverse table rollers
DF Transport Motor: Drives the transport and exit rollers
B810 12 SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
ORIGINAL SIZE DETECTION
2.5 ORIGINAL SIZE DETECTION
Auto Reverse
Document
Feeder
B810
[A]
[B]
[C]
B386D503.WMF
The original size detection mechanism consists of the original width sensor board
[A] and two original length sensors-1 [B] and -2 [C]. Based on the combined output
of the length sensors and the width sensor board, the machine can detect the size
of the original. This integrated detection mechanism is detailed in the table on the
next page.
Note that the width sensors terminal plate is attached to the original guide, so the
widths of the originals must all be the same.
SM 13 B810
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Original Original Original Width-3 Original Original

NA EU
Width-1 Width-2 P4 P3 P2 P1 Length-1 Length-2
A3 (297 x 420) P L L ON ON ON
B4 (257 x 364) P L H ON ON ON
A4 (Lengthwise)
P H L ON ON
(210 x 297)
A4 (297 x 210)
P L L ON
(Sideways)
B5 (182 x 257)
P H H ON ON
(Lengthwise)
B5 (257 x 182)
P L H ON
(Sideways)
A5 (148 x 210)
H H ON
(Lengthwise)
A5 (210 x 148)
P H L ON
(Sideways)
11" x 17" (DLT) P L L ON ON ON
11" x 15" P L L ON ON ON
10" x 14" P L H ON ON
8.5" x 14" (LG) P H L ON ON
8.5" x 13" (F4) P H L ON ON
8" x 13" (F) P P H L ON ON
8.5" x 11"
P H L ON ON
(Lengthwise)
8.5" x 11"
P L L ON
(Sideways)
10" x 8"
P L H ON ON
(Lengthwise)
5.5" x 8.5"
(Lengthwise) P H H ON
(HLT)
5.5" x 8.5"
P H L ON
(Sideways) (HLT)
Key
: No, P: Yes
ON: Paper present
NA: North America, EU: Europe
NOTE: 1) P1-P4 represent the four positions on the width sensor board. ON
indicates the presence of the terminal plate in a given position. Original
Width-1 and Original Width-2 are the outputs from the sensor board to
the DF main board. The state of these outputs (L or H) depends on the
position of the terminal plate on the sensor board (P1, P2, P3, or P4).
For example, if the terminal plate is at P4, both outputs are L.
2) A reading of L on either of the width sensor outputs indicates that the
terminal plate is connecting the GND pattern with the width sensor
output signal line.
3) The machine cannot detect more than one size of originals in the same
job.
B810 14 SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Auto Reverse
Document
Feeder
Original Width Sensor Board
B810
GND Pattern
Original Width 1
Original Width 2
Original Side P4 P3 P2 P1
Guide Position
A3/A4S B4/B5S A4L/A5S B5L/A5L
The signal is "L" when the terminal plate is connected to the GND pattern.
B386D501.WMF
SM 15 B810
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
MIXED ORIGINAL SIZE MODE
2.6 MIXED ORIGINAL SIZE MODE

This section explains what happens when the user selects mixed original size
mode.
Because this ADF is a sheet-through document feeder, the method for original
document width detection is the same as when the originals are the same size, but
the document length detection method is different. Therefore, the scanning speed
is slightly slower.
Document length detection

From when the registration sensor switches on until it switches off, the CPU counts
the transport motor pulses. The number of pulses determines the length of the
original.
Feed-in cycle
When the original size for the copy modes listed below cannot be determined, the
image cannot be correctly scaled (reduced or enlarged) or processed until the
originals length has been accurately detected. The length must be determined
before the image is scanned.
Auto Reduce/Enlarge
Centering
Erase Center/Border
Booklet
Image Repeat
The originals follow this path:

1. Length detection Scanning glass Inverter table
2. Inverter table Scanning glass Inverter table (restores the original order)
3. Inverter table Scanning glass (image scanned) Exit tray
Normal feed-in
In a copy mode other than those listed above, when the reduction/enlargement
ratio has been determined, the originals are scanned normally. In order to store the
scanned images, a large area of memory (the detected original width x 432 mm
length) is prepared. Next, only the portion of the image up to the detected original
length is read from memory and printed.
B810 16 SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PICK-UP AND SEPARATION
2.7 PICK-UP AND SEPARATION
Auto Reverse
Document
Feeder
B810
[A]
[B]
[C]
[D]
[E]
[B]
B386D504.WMF
[F]
[G]
B386D505.WMF
The original is set with the image facing up. The original pushes actuator [A] and
the original set sensor [E] is activated.
After pressing the start button, the pick-up solenoid [D] is activated and the lift plate
[C] lifts the original up until it comes in contact with the pick-up roller [B]. The pick-
up roller then feeds the top sheet of paper.
After being fed from the pick-up roller, the topmost sheet is separated from the
stack by the separation roller and sent to the first transport roller.
The mechanism is an FRR system, consisting of the original feed belt [F] and
separation roller [G].
SM 17 B810
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
ORIGINAL TRANSPORT AND EXIT
2.8 ORIGINAL TRANSPORT AND EXIT

2.8.1 SINGLE-SIDED ORIGINALS
[E]
[F]
[A]
[B]
[C] [D] B386D506.WMF
The DF feed motor feeds the separated original to the first transport roller [A] at
maximum speed. When the registration sensor [B] detects the leading edge, the
motor stops for a short while. Then the feed and transport motors turn on again,
and feed the original through scanning area at a lower speed (the scanning area
contains the original exposure guide [D] and DF exposure glass [C]). After
scanning, the original is fed out by the second transport roller [E] and exit roller [F].
B810 18 SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
2.8.2 DOUBLE-SIDED ORIGINALS
Auto Reverse
Document
Feeder
B810
[G] [F]
[A] [E]
[D]
[B] [C]
B386D204.WMF
[A] [E]
[D]
[F]
B386D205.WMF
When the registration sensor [B] detects the leading edge of the original, the DF
feed motor (which drives the feed roller) and transport motor (which drives the
transport roller) both switch off. After a brief interval, the transport motor alone
reactivates to drive the first [A] and second transport roller [G] and the exit roller
[F]. The front side of the original is then scanned.
When the original exit sensor [C] detects the leading edge of the original, the
junction gate solenoid is activated and the junction gate [D] opens. The original is
then transported towards the reverse table [H].
Soon after the trailing edge of the original passes the exit sensor [C], the junction
gate solenoid switches off and the junction gate [D] is closed. When the original
has been fed onto the reverse table, the DF feed motor switches on in reverse. The
original is then fed by the reverse roller [E] and then by the exit roller [F] and first
transport roller [A] to the scanning area (where the reverse side will be scanned).
SM 19 B810
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
[H]
B386D206.WMF
[I]
[J]
B386D207.WMF
The original is then sent to the reverse table [H] a second time to be turned over.
This is done so that the duplex copies will be properly stacked front side down in
the exit tray [J] in the correct order.
2.8.3 ORIGINAL TRAILING EDGE SENSOR

During one-to-one copying, copy paper is fed to the registration roller in advance
(while the original is still being scanned), to increase the copy speed. The trailing
edge sensor monitors the stack of originals in the feeder, and detects when the
trailing edge of the last page has been fed in. The main CPU then stops the copier
from feeding an unwanted extra sheet of copy paper.
B810 20 SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
STAMP
2.9 STAMP
Auto Reverse
Document
Feeder
B810
[C]
[A]
[B]
B386D507.WMF
This function is only for fax mode.

There is a stamp [A] between the 2nd transport roller [B] and the exit roller [C], and
its solenoid is controlled by the copier directly.
When the original reaches the stamp position, the DF feed motor stops. At 300
milliseconds after stopping the DF feed motor, the stamp solenoid turns on if the
page was sent successfully (immediate transmission) or stored successfully
(memory transmission). After stamping, the DF feed motor starts again to feed out
the document, and its speed is about 1.3 times the normal speed.
The stamping position on the original can be changed by adjusting SP6-010.
SM 21 B810
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

SM
B386D101.WMF
1000ms
LT SIDEWAYS STAMP MODE (DOUBLE-SIDED ORIGINAL MODE)
Original Feed Original Scan Start Stamp & Reverse Original Scan Start Stamp & Reverse Original Scan Start Stamp & Reverse Original Scan Start Stamp & Reverse
RXD
Feed Completion Original Size Feed Completion Original Size
Original Set Size Code Next Original Check Stamp Stop Position Original Stop Stamp Stop Position Exit Completion Original Not Set Stamp Stop Position Original Stop Stamp Stop Position Exit Completion
Next Original
Check
TXD
Feed motor turns if sub-scan Feed motor turns if sub-scan
is 238mm or more. is 238mm or more.
MAX
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Feed Motor READ
OFF
MAX
Transport READ
Motor
OFF
DF Feed ON
Clutch OFF
22
DF Pick-up ON
Solenoid OFF
Rreverse ON
Solenoid OFF
Stamp ON
Solenoid OFF
Original Set ON
Sensor OFF
2.10 TIMING CHART
JAM 3 JAM 4
ON
Exit Sensor
OFF
Reverse ON
Sensor OFF
JAM 5

Trailing Edge ON
Sensor OFF
JAM 1A, 1B JAM 2
Registration ON
Sensor OFF
TIMING CHART
JAM 8
ENABLE
FGATE
DISABLE
B810
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CONDITION OF JAM DETECTION
2.11 CONDITION OF JAM DETECTION
Auto Reverse
Document
Feeder
B810
JAM 1A: If the registration sensor does not turn on within 114 mm x 2 since the
feed motor started (twice the distance between the original set position
and the (registration sensor).
JAM 1B: Duplex mode only: If the registration sensor does not turn on within 161
mm x 1.5 since the feed motor started (1.5 times the distance between
the original reverse position and the registration sensor).
JAM 2: If the registration sensor does not turn off within 1260 mm x 1.1 since the
feed motor started (1.1 times the distance between the paper stop
position at registration and the maximum original length).
JAM 3: If the original exit sensor does not turn on within 92 mm x 1.5 since the
feed motor started (1.5 times the distance between registration sensor
and exit sensor)
JAM 4: If the original exit sensor does not turn off within original length + 120
mm since the transport motor started after the exit sensor turns on
JAM 5: Duplex mode only: If the original reverse sensor does not turn on within
161 mm x 1.4 since the feed motor started (1.4 times the distance
between the original reverse position and the registration sensor).
JAM 6: If the feeding original is removed.
JAM 7: If the cover is opened or the ADF is lifted while the ADF is in operation.
JAM 8: If an area outside the maximum scannable area is selected.
JAM 9: If scanning of the previous original is not completed when the registration
sensor detects the leading edge of the current original.
SM 23 B810
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
OVERALL ELECTRICAL CIRCUIT
2.12 OVERALL ELECTRICAL CIRCUIT

The DF CPU controls the transport motor, DF feed motor, DF feed clutch, junction
Gate solenoid, stamp solenoid, and pick-up solenoid. The DF CPU also monitors
all DF sensors and provides updated status information when prompted at regular
intervals by the mainframe, which may then take action based on this information.
The DFmainframe connection is checked automatically just after power is
supplied to the mainframe.
Main ADF Control

Interface
Frame CPU
DF Feed Motor
Driver
DF Transport
Registration Sensor Motor
Original Set Sensor
DF Position Sensor
Feed Cover Open Sensor DF Feed Clutch
Original Width Sensor Board
Original Length Sensor 1
Original Length Sensor 2 Junction Gate
Original Trailing Edge Sensor Solenoid
Original Exit Sensor Driver
Original Reverse Sensor
DF Pick-up
Solenoid
ADF Control Board Stamp Solenoid
B386D500.WMF
B810 24 SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
DIP SWITCHES
3. SERVICE TABLES
Auto Reverse
Document
Feeder
B810
3.1 DIP SWITCHES
SW100
Description
1 2 3 4
0 0 0 0 Normal operating mode (Default)
0 0 0 1 No function
0 0 1 0 Free run with two-sided original 100%
0 0 1 1 DF feed clutch operates
0 1 0 0 Free run with one-sided original 32.6%
0 1 0 1 DF pick-up solenoid operates
0 1 1 0 Motors rotate
0 1 1 1 No function
1 0 0 0 Free run with one-sided original 100%
1 0 0 1 Junction gate solenoid operates
1 0 1 0 Free run without two-sided original 100%
1 0 1 1 No function
1 1 0 0 Free run without one-sided original 100%
1 1 0 1 Stamp solenoid operates
1 1 1 0 Free run with two-sided original 32.6%
1 1 1 1 Free run without two-sided original 100%
SM 25 B810
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

A 3224c

Enviado por

Dados do documento

Direitos autorais

Formatos disponíveis

Compartilhar este documento

Compartilhar ou incorporar documento

Opções de compartilhamento

Você considera este documento útil?

Este conteúdo é inapropriado?

Direitos autorais:

Formatos disponíveis

A 3224c

Enviado por

Direitos autorais:

Formatos disponíveis

CPIA NO CONTROLADA

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

It is the reader's responsibility when discussing the information contained

NO PART OF THIS DOCUMENT MAY BE REPRODUCED IN ANY

All product names, domain names or product illustrations, including

2005 RICOH Corporation. All rights reserved.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Untrained and uncertified users utilizing

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Symbols and Abbreviations

Symbol What it means

Short Edge Feed (SEF) Long Edge Feed (LEF)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

1.12.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE ....................................................1-43

REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT

3. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT ........................................ 3-1

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

3.3.5 SCANNER LAMP .............................................................................3-5

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

3.10 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS..............................................................3-48

4. TROUBLESHOOTING ................................................................. 4-1

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

4.1.2 SC TABLE ........................................................................................4-2

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Main Machine Input Check (SP5-803) ..............................................5-101

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

White Level Correction........................................................................6-24

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

6.9 DEVELOPMENT .....................................................................................6-47

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

1000-SHEET FINISHER B408

PAPER TRAY UNIT B456

LARGE CAPACITY TRAY B457

500-SHEET FINISHER B458

1-BIN TRAY UNIT B480

INTERCHANGE UNIT B481

BRIDGE UNIT B482

BY-PASS TRAY UNIT B490

DUPLEX UNIT B509

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

SHIFT TRAY UNIT B510

FAX OPTION B750

AUTO REVERSE DOCUMENT FEEDER B810

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT

1-BIN TRAY UNIT B480

BRIDGE UNIT B482

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

1. Temperature Range: 10C to 32C (50F to 89.6F) (humidity to be 54% at

1.1.2 MACHINE LEVEL